SAMPLE BOOKLET

INDEX

Study Material (JEE Main & Advanced)

Physics/ Chemistry/ Mathematics

Physics Booklet-wise Contents (ii)

Chemistry Booklet-wise Contents (iii)

Mathematics Booklet-wise Contents (iv)

SAMPLE CHAPTER PHYSICS

CHAPTER 18: Current Electricity P-1-58

SAMPLE CHAPTER CHEMISTRY

CHAPTER 27: Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-1-88

SAMPLE CHAPTER MATHEMATICS

CHAPTER 16: Determinants M-1-54

(i)
 Physics
[Link]. Chapter Name 

Booklet-1 Booklet-6

1. Units and Measurements 17. Electric Charges and Fields

2. Motion in a Straight Line 18. Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance
3. Vectors 19. Current Electricity
4. Motion in a Plane
Booklet-7
Booklet-2 20. Moving Charges and Magnetism
5. Laws of Motion 21. Magnetism and Matter
6. Work, Energy and Power 22. Electromagnetic Induction
7. System of Particles and Rotational Motion 23. Alternating Current
8. Gravitation
Booklet-8
Booklet-3 24. Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
9. Mechanical Properties of Solids 25. Wave optics
10. Mechanical Properties of Fluids 26. Electromagnetic Waves
11. Thermal Properties of Matter
Booklet-9
12. Thermodynamics
27. Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter
Booklet-4 28. Atoms
13. Kinetic Theory 29. Nuclei

14. Oscillations 30. Semiconductor Electronics:

15. Waves Materials, Devices and Simple Circuits

31. Experimental Skills in Physics XII
16. Experimental Skills in Physics XI

Booklet-5 Booklet-10

Solutions XII
Solutions XI

(ii)
 Chemistry
[Link]. Chapter Name 

Booklet-1 Booklet-6

1. Some Basic Concept of Chemistry 16. The Solid State

2. Structure of Atom 17. Solutions
3. Classification of Elements and Periodicity 18. Electrochemistry
in Properties
19. Chemical Kinetics
4. Chemical Bonding and Molecular
Structure Booklet-7

Booklet-2 20. Surface Chemistry

21. General Priciples and Inversess of
5. States of Matter
Isolation of Elements
6. Thermodynamics
22. The p-Block Elements
7. Chemical Equilibrium
23. The d- and f-Block Elements
8. Ionic Equilibrium
Booklet-8
Booklet-3
24. Coordination Compounds
9. Redox Reactions
25. Haloalkanes and Haloarenes
10. Hydrogen
26. Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers
11. The s-Block Elements
27. Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids
12. The p-Block Elements
Booklet-9
Booklet-4
28. Amines
13. Organic Chemistry-Some Basic Principles
29. Biomolecules and Polymers
and Techniques
30. Chemistry in Everyday Life
14. Hydrocarbons
31. Practical Chemistry
15. Environmental Chemistry
Booklet-10
Booklet-5
Solutions XII
Solutions XI

(iii)
 Mathematics
[Link]. Chapter Name 

Booklet-1 Booklet-6

1. Sets 13. Relations & functions-2

2. Relations & functions-1 14. Inverse trigonometric functions
3. Trigonometric functions 15. Matrices

Booklet-2 Booklet-7

4. Complex numbers 16. Determinants

5. Permutations and combinations 17. Continuity & differentiability
6. Binomial theorem 18. Application of derivatives

Booklet-3 Booklet-8

7. Sequences & series 19. Integrals

8. Straight lines 20. Application of integrals
9. Conic sections 21. Differential equations

Booklet-4 Booklet-9

10. Limits & derivatives 22. Vector algebra

11. Statistics 23. Three dimensional geometry
12. Probability-1 24. Probability-2
25. Properties of triangle
Booklet-5

Solutions XI
Booklet-10

Solutions XII

(iv)
 18 Current Electricity

Trend Analysis – JEE Main & Advanced

ELECTRIC CURRENT, CURRENT DENSITY, DRIFT VELOCITY, MOBILITY,

Topic 18.1 OHM'S LAW, RESISTANCE, CONDUCTANCE AND RESISTIVITY

ELECTRIC CURRENT The conventional direction of current is the direction of flow

of positive charge or applied field. It is opposite to direction
The time rate of flow of charge through any cross-section is
called electric current. If Dq charge passes through a cross- of flow of negatively charged electrons.
I E I E
Dq
section in time Dt then, average current I av = + + - -
Dt + - -
+
Dq dq
Instantaneous current I = lim =
Dt ® 0 Dt dt
Electric current is measured in ampere (A). It is a scalar + – + –
fundamental physical quantity. If n electrons pass through a point in a conductor in time t
One ampere : The current through a conductor is said to be then current through the conductor is, I = q = ne
one ampere, if one coulomb of charge is flowing per second t t
through a cross-section of wire. As charge q = ± ne where n is an integer.
 P-2 Physics

This is called the law of quantisation of electric charge. experience repulsive force between them and conductor
Number of electrons flowing through a conductor in t allows movement of free electrons. Thus, free electrons are
I ´t evenly scattered throughout the volume of conductor. These
second is n =
e free electrons, transport electric charge so are called as
1 conduction electrons.
For 1 ampere of current, n = = 6.25 × 1018
1.6 ´ 10-19
electrons / second Behaviour of Conductors in Absence of Applied
Current density : It is defined as current flowing per unit Potential Difference
area held normal to direction of flow of current.
r ® ® (1) The free electrons present in a conductor gain energy
I nq
Current density J = = and current Ι = ò J . da from temperature of surrounding and move randomly
A At r
The direction of current density J is same as that of electric in a conductor.
r r
field E . J is a vector with S.I. unit amp/m2 and dimensions
[M0 L–2 T0 A]
If there are n particles per unit volume of a conductor, each
having a charge q and moving with velocity v then current (2) The speed gained by virtue of temperature is called as
through cross-sectional area A is I = Dq = nqvA thermal speed of an electron.
Dt
1 3
mv2rms = kT so thermal speed, of an electron,
Types of Electric Current 2 2
(a) Direct current : The current whose magnitude and
direction does not vary with time is called direct current 3kT
vrms = where m is mass of electron
(dc). The various sources of direct current m
are cells, dc dynamo etc.
At room temperature T = 300 K ; vrms = 105 m/sec.
It’s symbol is + –
(3) The average distance travelled by a free electron
(b) Alternating current : The current whose magnitude between two consecutive collisions is called as mean
continuously changes with time and periodically free path l.
changes its direction is called alternating current. It
(l ~ 10 Å)
has constant amplitude and has alternate positive and
negative halves. It is produced by ac dynamo. Total distance travelled
Mean free path =
It’s symbol is Number of collisions
The current (ac)-time graph
(4) The time taken by an electron between two successive
collisions is called as relaxation time t. (t ~ 10–14 s)
Time
Current

+
Total time taken
O T T Relaxation time t =
2 – Number of collisions
I = I0sin t
(5) The thermal speed can be written as
The current (dc) -time graph
l (mean free path)
vT =
t (relaxation time)
Current

(6) In absence of applied potential difference electrons have

I = Const
random [Link] average displacement and average
Time velocity is zero. There is no flow of current due to
thermal motion of free electrons in a conductor.
Electric Current in Conductors
Conductors are substances through which electric charges
Behaviour of Conductors in Presence of Applied
can flow easily. They are characterised by presence of a Potential Difference
large number of free electrons (1029 electrons per m3). The (1) When two ends of a conductor are joined to a battery
number density of free electrons in a conductor is same then one end is at higher potential and another at lower
throughout the conductor. This is because free electrons potential.
 Current Electricity P-3

This produces an electric field inside the conductor Relation Between Current and Drift Velocity
from point of higher to lower potential. Let n be the number density of free electrons and A be the
V area of cross-section of conductor.
i.e., E=
L Number of free electrons in conductor of length L = nAL
L Total charge on these free electrons, Dq = neAL
HP LP
Time taken by drifting electrons to cross the conductor Dt
E = L/vd
Dq v
\ Current I = = neAL d = neAv d or I = neAvd.
V Dt L
(2) The field exerts an electric force on free electrons The current flowing through a conductor is directly
causing acceleration of each electron. proportional to the drift velocity (I µ vd)
®
® ® ® ®
-e E The drift velocity depends on nature of metal, relaxation
F = m a = -e E so acceleration, a = time applied potential difference and length of conductor.
m
(3) The average velocity with which the free electrons are eE eV
vd = t= t
drifted towards the positive end of a conductor under m mL
the influence of an external electric field is called drift It (vd) is independent of radius or area of cross-section of a
velocity vd. conductor.
® ® ® ILLUSTRATION 1
Using v = u + a t we have,
The current in a wire varies with time according to the
® relation i = 4 + 2t2
® -e E
vd = t (vd ~ 10–4 m/sec) How many coulomb of charge pass a cross-section of
m wire in time interval t = 5s to t = 10s?
The direction of drift velocity for electrons in a metal dq
Sol. i = Þ dq = i dt Þ dq = (4 + 2 t2 ) dt
is opposite to that of applied electric field E. dt
10
(4) The current density
10 é t3 ù
r I æ eE ö æ ne² t ö On integrating q = ò (14 + 2t 2 )dt = ê14t + 2 ú
J = = nevd = ne ç ÷ t = ç E
è m ÷ø êë 3 úû
A è mø 5 5
= 603.33 C
so, J µ E or J = s E
ILLUSTRATION 2
ne 2 t r
The current density at a point is J = æç 2×104 2 ö÷ ˆj . Find
where s = is specific conductivity of conductor A
m
è m ø r
which depends on temperature and nature of material. the rate of charge flow through a cross-sectional area S
® ®
such that
r
J = s E is microscopic form of ohm’s law. (i) S = (2cm 2 )jˆ
r r
(5) The rise of temperature causes increase in vrms and (ii) S = (4cm 2 ) ˆi and (iii) S = (2iˆ + 3jˆ cm 2 )
hence a decrease in l. And relaxation time t causing a Sol. The rate of charge flow = current
decrease in drift velocity. r r
i = JdS
(6) Mobility of a charge carrier is defined as drift velocity (i) Current i = (2 ´ 104 A / m 2 ) ˆj.(2 ´ 10 -4 m 2 )ˆj = 2A
acquired per unit electric field.
[using ˆj.jˆ = 1]
vd et e ms s (ii) Current i = (2 ´ 104 A / m 2 ) ˆj.(4 cm 2 ) iˆ = 0
Mobility µ = = = =
E m m ne 2 ne [using ˆj.iˆ = 0]
The SI unit of mobility is m2 V–1 s–1 and dimensions 4 2 ˆ ´ 10 -4 m 2 = 6A
(iii) Current i = (2 ´ 10 A / m ) ˆj.(2iˆ + 3j)
are [M–1L0 T2 A] ILLUSTRATION 3
The mobility depends on applied potential difference, A typical wire for laboratory experiments is made of
length of conductor, number density of charge carriers, copper and has a radius 0.815 mm. Calculate the drift
current in conductor and area of cross-section of velocity of electrons in such a wire carrying a current of
conductor. 1A, assuming one free electron per atom.
 P-4 Physics

DQ etc. The resistance of such conductors is independent of

Sol. Equation I = = qnAvd relates the drift velocity to magnitude and polarity of applied potential difference. Here
Dt
the graph between I and V is a straight line passing through
the number density of charge carriers, which equals
the origin. The reciprocal of slope of straight line gives
the number density of copper atoms na. We can find
resistance,
na from the mass density of copper, its molecular mass,
and Avogadro’s number. V DV 1
Rsta = and, Rdyna = = = constant.
The drift velocity is related to the current and number I DI tanq

r I æ J ö
density of charge carriers : vd = nqA ç v = nq ÷ I
I
è ø Non-linear
If there is one free electron per atom, the number density DI
of free electrons equals the number density of atoms
q DV
n = na. O
O V V
The number density of atoms na is related to the mass
density rm, Avogadro’s number NA, and the molar mass The substances which do not obey ohm’s law are called non-
M. ohmic or non-linear conductors. The I–V curve is not a
For copper r = 8.93 g/cm3 and M = 63.5 g/mol. straight line. e.g., p-n jn diode, transistors, thermionic valves,
rectifiers [Link] is the limitation of Ohm’s law.
rm N A (8.93 g / cm3 ) (6.02 ´ 1023 atoms / mol)
na = = VERIFICATION OF OHM'S LAW USING
M 63.5 g / mol
VOLTMETER AND AMMETER
n a = 8.47 ´ 1022 atoms / cm3 = 8.47 ´ 1028 atoms / m3
If V is the potential difference between the two ends of a
The magnitude of the charge is e, and the area is A
conductor and I be the current flowing through it, then
\q=e
V µ I or V = IR
Area is related to the radius r of the wire as A = pr2
where R is the resistance of the conductor.
Substituting numerical values yields
+ – (K)
vd =
I
=
I – A +
nqA n a epr 2 Rh I
I
R

1C/s + –
Þ vd = V
28 -3 -19 2
(8.47 ´ 10 m ) (1.6 ´ 10 C) p (0.000815m) If we plot a graph of potential difference (V) along Y-axis
and current (I) along X-axis then we get a straight line passing
= 3.54 ´ 10 -5 m / s
through the origin. From the slope of the graph we can
OHM’S LAW calculate the resistance of the wire.
It states that if the physical state i.e. temperature, nature of
material and dimensions of a conductor remain unchanged Observations:
then the ratio of potential difference applied across its ends AC V2,V1
Slope = = =R
to current flowing through it remains constant. BC I 2 , I1
V
i.e., V µ I or V = I R, where R = is the resistance of
I Y
conductor.
A
eE æ ne 2 t ö æ ne2 t ö V V2
I = n e A vd = n e A t=ç ÷ AE = ç ÷ A
m è m ø è m ø L V
B
V1 C
V æ m ö L
so R= =ç , R is resistance of conductor..
I è ne 2 t ÷ø A
The substances which obey ohm’s law are called ohmic or
I1 I2 X
linear conductors e.g., silver, copper, mercury, carbon, mica I
 Current Electricity P-5

S. Voltmeter Ammeter V 3. Cross-sectional area of the conductor : The

R= (W )
No. reading (V) reading (A) I resistance of the conductor is inversely proportional to
1. 12 3 4 L
the cross-sectional area. i.e. R µ
2. A
3.
1 L L
4. R µ L and R µ so, R µ or R =r
A A A
RESISTANCE AND SPECIFIC RESISTANCE where l = length, A = area of cross-section of wire and r is
called resistivity or specific resistance.
Resistance The fractional change in resistance without change in
It is the property of a substance due to which it opposes the volume or mass are :
flow of current through it. It is a scalar quantity with SI unit (a) When change in length is small (£ 5%) fractional change
volt/ampere called ohm (W). Its dimensions are
in R is, DR = 2DL .
[ML2 T -3 A -2 ] R L

Factors Affecting the Resistance of a Conductor (b) When change in radius is small (£ 5%) fractional change
The resistance of a conductor depends on the following DR -4Dr
in R is, = .
factors : R r
1. Temperature : The temperature dependence of (c) When change in area is small (£ 5%) fractional change
resistance is given by R = R0 (1 + a Dq), where a is DR - 2 D A
in R is, = .
temperature coefficient of resistance and Dq is change R A
in temperature. The variation is graphically represented 4. Nature of the material of the wire : The resistance
as follows. is less for conductors and more for semiconductors
and insulators.

Conductance (G)
Resistance (R)

It is the reciprocal of resistance i.e., G = 1/R.

R0 Its SI unit is ohm–1 or mho or siemen (s) and its dimensions
are [M–1 L–2 T3 A2].
Temperature (Dq ) Resistivity or specific Resistance (r)
In terms of microscopic quantities, E = rJ
Resistivity is numerically equal to ratio of magnitude of
R - R0
The temperature coefficient of resistance a = electric field to current density.
R0 Dq
is defined as change in resistance per unit resistance at RA
Specific resistance, r = so, if L = 1 m,
0°C per degree rise of temperature. L
1 A = 1 m2 then r = R.
For maximum metals, a = per °C s o , Resistivity is numerically equal to resistance of substance
273
having unit area of cross-section and unit length.
æ Dq ö æ 273 + Dq ö T It is a scalar with SI unit ohm-meter (W-m) and dimensions
R = R 0 ç1 + = R0 ç = R0
è 273÷ø è 273 ÷ø 273 [ML3 T–3 A–2].
so, R µ T i.e., the resistance of pure metallic conductor The reciprocal of resistivity is called conductivity or specific
is proportional to its absolute temperature. conductance with SI unit mho/m and dimensions
2. Length of the conductor : The resistance of a [M–1 L–3 T3 A2]
conductor is directly proportional to its length. i.e., R
µL
 P-6 Physics

Sol. From formula Rt = R0 (1 + µDt)

1 ne2 t
Conductivity s = = = neµ R 300 = R 0 (1 + a ´ 27) = 1
r m
R t = R 0 (1+ µ D ´ t) = 2
The resistivity is independent of shape and size of
conductor and it depends on nature of material of body. 1 + 27 a 1
The resistivity is the property of material while resistance is \ =
1 + at 2
property of object.
or 2 + 54a = 1 + at
Temperature Dependence of Resistivity Þ 2 + 54(0.00125) = 1 + (0.00125)t
The temperature dependence of resistivity is given by relation \ t = 854ºC = 1127 K
r = r0 (1 + a Dq) where a is temperature coefficient of
ILLUSTRATION 5
resistivity and Dq is change in temperature. For metals a is
A copper wire is stretched to make 0.1% longer. What
positive so resistivity increases with temperature while for
is the percentage change in its resistance?
non-metals a is negative so resistivity decreases with
temperature. rl
Sol. The resistance R of a wire is given by R = , where
A
r = specific resistance
Metal Semiconductor Let d and m be the density and mass of the wire,
Resistivity Resistivity
respectively then A l d = m or A = m/ld

Temperature r l ´l d r l2 d æ r d ö 2
Temperature \ R= = =ç ÷´ l
m m èmø
Taking log, of both sides, we get
Superconductor
æ rd ö
loge R = log e ç ÷ + 2e loge l
TC = Critical è mø
Resistivity
TC temperature
dR 2 dl æ rd ö
Differentiating = çèQ = constant÷
Temperature R l m ø

Superconductors : Conductors possess some resistance at dR æ dl ö

´100 = 2ç ´100 ÷% = 2 ´ (0.1)
room temperature which increases with the rise in R è l ø
temperature and decreases with the decrease in temperature. \ Percentage change in resistance
If the temperature is decreased drastically, the resistance of = 2×(0.1) % = 0.2%
the conductor becomes very low and its conductivity rises
So the resistance increases by 0.2%.
very much. At a very low temperature, the resistance of the
ILLUSTRATION 6
conductor may vanish completely. When it happens, the
conductor is called a superconductor. For example, helium A wire has a resistance of 16.0 ohm. It is melted and
drawn to a wire half its initial length. What will be the
is a super conductor at 4.2 K (– 268.8°C). new resistance of the wire ?
ILLUSTRATION 4 l¢ 1
Sol. The factor by which the length is changed is n = =
The temperature coefficient of resistance of a wire is l 2
0.00125ºC–1. At 300 K its resistance is one ohm. At what The new resistance R' is given by
2
temperature the resistance of the wire will be 2 ohm? æ 1ö
R ¢ = R (n 2 ) = 16 W ç ÷ = 4W
è 2ø
 Current Electricity P-7

GROUPING OF RESISTORS & METHODS TO

Topic 18.2 FIND EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE

SERIES COMBINATION OF RESISTORS Resistances are said to be R1

in parallel, if potential I1
Resistances are said to be connected in series between two R2
I2
points if they provide only a single path between two points. across each resistance is A B
same and equal to applied I3 R3
R1 R2 R3
A I I I B potential. I
Current through each
V1 V2 V3 + –
resistance is different and + (V) –
+ – is inversely proportional to
+ (V) –
resistance of resistor.
Resistances are connected in series if same current flows i.e., I µ 1/R
through each resistance when some potential difference is
V V V
applied across the combination. so, I1 = , I2 = and I3 =
R1 R2 R3
Potential difference across each resistance is different and
is directly proportional to its resistance i.e., V µ R. The parallel combination obeys the law of conservation of
so, V1 = I R1 ; V2 = I R2 and V3 = I R3 charge.
The series combination of resistors obeys the law of æ 1 1 1 ö
so, I = I1 + I2 + I3 = V ç + +
conservation of energy. è R1 R 2 R 3 ÷ø
so, V = V1 + V2 + V3 = I (R1 + R2 + R3)
Reciprocal of equivalent resistance
And equivalent resistance, R s = V = R1 + R 2 + R 3 1 1 1 1 é V ù
I = + +
R p R1 R 2 R 3 êQ I = R ú
ë pû
Or, Rs = R1 + R2 + R3 + ......... + Rn
• The equivalent resistance is equal to sum of individual 1 1 1 1 1
or, = + + + .... +
R p R1 R2 R3 Rn
resistances.
• The equivalent resistance is greater than largest of • The reciprocal of equivalent resistance is equal to sum
individual resistance. of reciprocal of individual resistances.
• The resistances are connected in series (a) to increase • The equivalent resistance is smaller than smallest of
the resistance and (b) to divide large potential difference individual resistance.
across many resistances. • The resistances are connected in parallel to decrease
resistance.
• If n identical resistances each of resistance R are
• If n identical resistances each of resistance R are
connected in series then the equivalent resistance Rs =
connected in parallel then equivalent resistance Rp = R/n
nR
• This combination is used in household electrical
• This combination is used in resistance boxes and applicances.
sometimes in decorative bulbs. • In parallel combination if one resistance becomes open,
• In series combination, if one resistance get open the all others will work as usual.
current in whole circuit will become zero. • In case of two resistances in parallel
PARALLEL COMBINATION OF RESISTORS I1 R2
= and I1 + I2 = I
Resistances are said to be connected in parallel between two I2 R1
points, if it is possible to proceed from one point to another R2 I R1 I
so, I1 = and I2 =
along different paths. R1 + R2 R1 + R2
 P-8 Physics

RESISTANCES IN MIXED COMBINATION 8W

If resistances are arranged in series-parallel mixed grouping, 16W
we apply method of successive reduction to find equivalent 16W 20W
resistance. A B
9W
Star-Delta Conversions 6W
18W
The combination of resistances shown in fig. (a) is called a
star connection and that shown in fig. (b) is called a delta Sol. 8W, 16W, and 16W resistances are connected in parallel.
connection. These two arrangements are electrically Their equivalent resistance is given by R’
equivalent for the resistance measured between any pair of
1 1 1 1 2 +1+ 1 4
terminals. A star connection can be replaced by a delta, and = + + = = \ R’ = 4W.
R ' 8 16 16 16 16
a delta can be replaced by a star.
This is in series with 20W. So upper part of AB has a
resistance
1 4 + 20 = 24 W ...(1)
1
For lower part, 9W and 18W resistances are connected
in parallel. Their equivalent resistance R” is given by
1 1 1 2 +1 3
= + = = Þ R ¢¢ = 18 / 3 = 6W
R ¢¢ 9 18 18 18
This is in series with 6W. So the resistance of lower
2 3 2 3 part of AB is 6 + 6 = 12W ...(2)
(a)
(b) The upper and lower parts of AB are in parallel. Hence
the equivalent resistance between A and B is given by
If resistances R1, R2 and R3 are known and connected in 1 1 1 1+ 2 3
Star configuration (as in fig. (a))then it can be replaced by a = + = = Þ R = 24/3 = 8W
R 24 12 24 24
delta configuration with following resistances :
ILLUSTRATION 9
RR R R
R12 = R1 + R 2 + 1 2 ; R 23 = R 2 + R 3 + 2 3 ; Find equivalent resistance between a and b.
R3 R1

R1 R 3
R13 = R1 + R 3 +
R2
ILLUSTRATION 7
Determine the equivalent resistance of the arrangement
of resistances shown in fig between the points A and B.

Sol.

3
The equivalent resistance between a and b, R eq = r
2
If not able to reduce the given network in series and parallel through simple successive reduction follow the steps.
(1) Find same potential points in network and considering same potential point as a single point.
(2) Redraw the circuit you will find resistance in series and parallel combination.
(3) If not able to see same potential point try to observe if network contains balanced wheatstone bridge.
 Current Electricity P-9

Topic 18.3 KIRCHHOFF'S LAWS & THEIR APPLICATIONS AND GROUPING OF CELLS

KIRCHHOFF'S LAWS (iii) The change in potential in covering a resistance in the

direction of current is negative (–IR) while in opposite
1. Kirchhoff’s first law or current law or junction rule:
direction it is positive.
In any electrical network, I2
the algebraic sum of A I R B A I R B
currents meeting at a I1
junction is always zero i.e. VA – IR = VB VB + IR = VA
I3
SI=0 VB – VA = IR VA – VB = IR
I1 – I2 + I3 + I4 – I5 = 0 O The potential falls along direction of current. The potential
fall is taken as negative while potential rise is taken as
I5
or I 1 + I 3 + I 4 = I 2 + I5 positive.
I4
(iv) The emf of source is taken as positive when it is
(i) The sum of currents flowing towards a junction is equal
traversed from negative to positive terminal while it is
to sum of currents leaving the junction.
taken as negative when it is traversed from positive to
(ii) By convention the current directed towards the junction
negative irrespective of the direction of current.
is positive while those directed away from the junction
is taken as negative. A I B A I B
(iii) The first law is in accordance with law of conservation
of charge. VA – E = VB VB + E = VA
(iv) The charges do not accumulate at a junction. The total VB – VA = -E VA – VB = E
charge entering a junction is equal to total charge leaving (v) If there are n loops, there will be (n – 1) equations
the junction. according to loop rule.
2. Kirchhoff’s second law or voltage law or loop rule: (vi) The algebraic sum of products of currents and
The algebraic sum of all the potential drops and emf’s along resistances in a closed loop is equal to sum of emf’s
any closed path in a network is zero. i.e. S V = 0 applied in the circuit i.e. SE = SIR
(i) The second law is in accordance with law of
conservation of energy. Single-loop Circuits
(ii) According to second law the electric energy given to As an example of using Kirchhoff’s loop rule, consider the
the charge by a source of emf is lost in passing through circuit shown in fig. containing two batteries with internal
resistance. resistances r1 and r2 and three external resistors. We wish to
find the current in terms of the emfs.

a + – b
I +
R2
– Changes in potential
– c a b Drop IR1
r1 + b c Drop IR2
Battery c d Drop E2
1 + E
g + – d 2 d e Drop Ir2
+ Battery e f Drop IR3
– E1 r2 2 f g Increase E1
–

– +
f e
 P-10 Physics

Assume that I is clockwise, as indicated in figure, and apply potential difference between its two terminals, independent
Kirchholff’s loop rule as we traverse the circuit in the of the rate of flow of charge between them. The potential
assumed direction of the current, beginning at point a. The difference between the terminals of an ideal battery is equal
potential decreases and increases are given in the figure. in magnitude to the emf of the battery.
Note that we encounter a potential difference as we traverse We can consider a real battery consist of an ideal battery of
the source of emf between points c and d and a potential emf E plus a small resistance r, called the internal resistance
increase as we traverse the source of emf between f and g. of the battery.
Beginning at point a, we obtain from Kirchhoff’s loop rule. The internal resistance of cell depends on-
-IR1 - IR12 - E 2 - Ir2 - IR 3 + E1 - Ir1 = 0 (1) Distance between electrodes (r µ d) larger is the
You can use opposite sign convention also. separation between electrodes more is the length of
electrolyte through which ions have to move so more is
Solving for the current I, we obtain
internal resistance.
E1 - E 2 (2) Conductivity or nature of electrolyte (r µ 1/s).
I=
R1 + R 2 + R 3 + r1 + r2 (3) Concentration of electrolyte (r µ c).
If E2 is greater than E1, we get a negative value for the (4) Temperature of electrolyte (r µ 1/T).
current I, indicating that we have assumed the wrong (5) Nature and area of electrodes dipped in electrolyte
direction for I. (r µ 1/A).
Terminal Potential Difference :
Multi-loop Circuit
The potential difference between the two electrodes of a
To analyze circuits containing more than one loop, we need
cell in a closed circuit i.e. when current is being drawn from
to use both of Kirchhoff’s rules, with Kirchhoff’s junction
the cell is called terminal potential difference.
rule applied to points where the current splits into two or
more parts. (a) When cell is discharging :
The general methods for the analysis of multiloop When cell is discharging current inside the cell is from
circuits: cathode to anode.
1. Draw a sketch of the circuit. E
2. Choose a direction for the current in each branch of Current I = or E = IR + Ir = V + Ir
r+R
the circuit, and label the currents in the circuit diagram. or V = E – Ir
Add plus and minus signs to indicate the high and low E r
potential sides of each resistors, capacitor, or source
of emf. I I
3. Replace any combination of resistors in series or parallel R
with its equivalent resistance.
When current is drawn from the cell potential difference is
4. Apply the junction rule to each junction where the current less than emf of cell. Greater is the current drawn from the
divides. cell smaller is the terminal voltage. When a large current is
5. Apply the loop rule to each loop until you obtain as drawn from a cell its terminal voltage is reduced.
many equations as unknowns. (b) When cell is charging :
6. Solve the equations to obtain the values of the unknowns When cell is charging current inside the cell is from anode
7. Check your results by assigning a potential of zero to to cathode.
one point in the circuit and use the values of the currents V-E
found to determine the potentials at other points in the Current I = or V = E + Ir
r
circuit. E r

POTENTIAL DIFFERENCE AND EMF

I I
To maintain a steady current in a conductor, we need a + –
constant supply of electric energy. A device that supplies V
electrical energy is called a source of emf. The unit of emf During charging terminal potential difference is greater than
is the volt, the same as the unit of potential difference. An emf of cell.
ideal battery is a source of emf that maintains a constant
 Current Electricity P-11

(c) When cell is in open circuit : The combination can be replaced by a single cell of emf nE
E and internal resistance nr.
In open circuit R = ¥ \ I= =0
R+r nE
The current flowing through load, I =
So V = E R + nr
In open circuit terminal potential difference is equal to emf nE
(1) If nr << R then I = . If equivalent internal resistance
and is the maximum potential difference which a cell can R
provide. nr is less than external resistance R then current in
(d) When cell is short circuited : circuit is equal to n times circuit current due to single
In short circuit R = 0 cell.
E E (2) If nr >> R then I = E/r. If equivalent internal resistance
so I= = and V = IR = 0
R+r r nr is greater than external resistance R then current in
In short circuit current from cell is maximum and terminal circuit is equal to short circuited current obtained from
potential difference is zero.
one cell.
(e) Power transferred to load by cell :
(3) Maximum current can be drawn from series
E2R
P = I2R = combination of cells if external resistance is very large
(r + R)2 as compared to equivalent internal resistance.
dP
so, P = Pmax if = 0 and P = Pmax if r = R (4) If in series combination of n cells p cells are reversed
dR
than equivalent emf
E2 Eeq = (n – p) E – pE = (n – 2p)E and req = nr
Pmax =
4r
(n - 2p)E
so current I=
P nr + R
(5) If unidentical cells are connected in series then
r=R Eeq = E1 + E2 + ..... = S Ei and req = r1 + r2 + ..... = Sri.
R
so current I = SE i .
Power transferred by cell to load is maximum when r = R R + Sri

E 2 E2
and Pmax = = Parallel Grouping of Cells
4r 4R
The cells are said to be connected in parallel if positive
GROUPING OF CELLS terminals of all the cells are connected together at one point
and their negative terminals at another point. The external
Series Grouping of Cells resistor is connected between these two points.
The cells are said to be connected in series, if negative E r/m
terminal of first cell is connected to positive of second whose
negative terminal is connected to positive of third cell and
so on. The external resistance is connected between free
I
terminals of first and last cells. R
A B
Let m identical cells each of emf E and internal resistance
E r E r r
E r be connected in parallel.
I
The combination can be replaced by a single cell of emf E
R
and internal resistance r/m.
E
nE nr The current I =
R+r/m
Þ I
E
R (1) If r/m << R then I = . If equivalent internal resistance
R
Let n identical cells each of emf E and internal resistance r r/m is less than external resistance R then current in
be connected in series. circuit is equal to current produced by a single cell.
 P-12 Physics

mE divide the circuit in two equal parts and double the resistance
(2) If r/m >> R then I = . If equivalent internal
r of one part.
resistance r/m is greater than external resistance then Mixed Grouping of Cells
current in circuit is equal to m times the current Let there be n identical cells each of emf E and internal
produced by a short circuited cell. resistance r, in one row and m rows of cells in parallel.
Thus maximum current can be drawn from parallel E E E
combination of cells if external resistance is small as r r r
compared to net internal resistance of cells.
Dissimilar cells in parallel A B

Let two cells of emf E1 and E2 and internal resistances r1

and r2 be connected in parallel to an external resistance R. I
Applying loop rule to loop d l m n c d R
–IR –I1 r1 + E1 = 0 ......(i) nE nr/m
Applying loop rule to loop a l m n b a
–IR –I2 r2 + E2 = 0 ......(ii)
Þ I
I1 E1 r1 R
d c
Eeq req
The combination of cells can be replaced by a single
I2 E2 r2 nr
a b cell of emf nE and internal resistance .
Equivalent cell m
I nE E
The current I = =
R nr R r
R R+ +
m n m n m
where, n × m = p = total number of cells.
R r
Applying junction rule at junction l, I = I1 + I2. (1) The current in the circuit is maximum when + is
Multiply equation (i) by r2 and eqn. (ii) by r1 and put n m
minimum
I2 = I – I1 we get d æR r ö d æ mR r ö
–IR r2 – I1 r1r2 + E1 r2 = 0 so, çè + ÷ø = 0 or + ÷ =0
dm n m dm çè p mø
and –IR r1 – (I – I1) r2r1 + E2 r1 = 0
On adding these we get R r
or - =0
E1 r2 + E2 r1 = IR (r1 + r2) + Ir1 r2 p m2
R R r R r
é or = = or =
r1r2 ù p mn m 2 n m
= I(r1 + r2) ê R + r + r ú In mixed grouping of cells current in circuit is maximum
ë 1 2û
R r nE mE
if = and I max = =
E eq n m 2R 2r
(E1r2 + E 2 r1 ) / r1 + r2
or I = = (2) In mixed grouping of cells power transferred to the
r1r2 R + req
R+ load is maximum when external resistance R is equal
r1 + r2 to total internal resistance.
Two dissimilar cells in parallel are equivalent to a single cell nr R r
i.e., R = or = .
m n m
12 rr This shows power transfer is maximum when current
of internal resistance req = r + r and equivalent emf
1 2 is maximum.
E2R
E r + E 2 r1 r r éE E ù P= and
E eq = 12 = 12 ê 1 + 2ú æR rö
2
r1 + r2 r1 + r2 ë r1 r2 û çè + ÷ø
n m
Symmetric line method : n 2 E 2 m2 E 2 R
If a circuit is symmetric about a line then all points lying on Pmax = =
4R 4r 2
line of symmetry are at same potential. In this method we
 Current Electricity P-13

(3) In mixed grouping of cells current in circuit and power ILLUSTRATION 10

transferred to load become maximum under same Upon a six fold increase in the external resistance of a
condition. This is why it is preferred over series and circuit, the voltage across the terminals of the battery
parallel combination of cells.
has increased from 5 V to 10 V. Find the e.m.f. of battery.
ILLUSTRATION 9 Sol: V = E – Ir.
Find current through branch BD
E
V=E- ´r
A 1W B 2W (R + r)
C
E
5V E- ´r = 5 ...(i)
15V (R + r )
3W
æ R ö
or E ç ÷=5 ...(ii)
èR+rø
D
E
Sol : Let VD = 0V E- ´ r = 10 ...(iii)
( 6R + r )
\ VA = +5V and VC = + 15 V
Let the voltage of B = VB æ 6R ö
or E ç ÷ = 10 ...(iv)
Applying Kirchhoff’s junction law at B è 6R + r ø
Dividing eqn. (ii) by eqn. (iv), we get 2r = 3R
5 - VB 15 - VB 0 - VB E´ r
+ + = 0 Þ VB = 6.82 Volt Putting values in eqn. (iii), we get E - = 10
1 2 3 4r + r
Solving we get E = 12.5 V
6.82 - 0
Current through BD = = 2.27A (a) 4.5 ohm (b) 2 ohm
3

Topic 18.4 HEATING EFFECT OF CURRENT, ELECTRIC POWER

HEATING EFFECT OF CURRENT-JOULE'S V2

LAW OF HEATING Electric Power : P = VI =
R
= I2R, SI unit : watt
The potential difference applied across the two ends of The watt-hour meter placed on the premises of every
conductor sets up electric field. Under the effect of electric consumer records the electrical energy consumed.
field, electrons accelerate and as they move, they collide Series combination : If appliances or bulbs are connected
against the ions and atoms in the conductor, the energy of e– in series then,
transferred to the atoms and ions appears as heat. This is
P1 P2
the cause of heating. Total power consumed, Ptotal =
When a current I is made to flow through a conductor of P1 + P2
resistance R for time t, heat Q is produced such that, If n identical bulbs are connected in series then total power,
Q µ I2
µ R P1, V1 P2, V2
µ T
V2
i.e., Q = I2Rt = P × t = VIt = t
R
Heat produced in conductor does not depend upon the
direction of current.
SI unit of electric heat or energy is joule. ~
Practical unit : 1 kilowatt hour (kWh) A. C. source
1 kWh = 3.6 × 106 joule = 1 unit of electric energy consumed P
1 BTU (British thermal unit) = 1055 joule Ptotal = . In series combination of bulbs,
1 kWh = 1 B.O.T.U. (Board of Trade Unit) = 3412 BTU n
 P-14 Physics

1 per second equals heat lost per second due to radiation from
Brightness µ Power consumed by bulb µ V µ R µ the surface of wire.
Prated
In series combination, bulb of lesser wattage will shine more. æ rl ö
I2 ç = H ´ 2 prl ; I2 µ r3
For same current P = I2R è pr 2 ÷ø
i.e., P µ R ; R ­Þ P ­ H = heat lost per second per unit area due to radiation.
Parallel combination : Domestic appliances like-bulbs, fans, ILLUSTRATION 11
TV etc. are connected in parallel. What will happen when 40 W, 220 V lamp and 100 W,
Total power consumed, Ptotal = P1 + P2 220 V lamp are connected in series across 440V
If n identical bulbs are connected in parallel then, Ptotal = nP lamp?
Sol: Resistance of first lamp,
P1, V
R1 = 220 × 220 / 40 = 1210 W.
Resistance of second lamp,
R2 = 220 × 220 /100 = 484 W.
Total resistance in series = 1210 + 484 = 1694 W.
P2, V Current in the circuit when supply voltage is 440 V
440
will be, I = = 0.26 A
1694
Voltage drop across R1 = 0.26 × 1210 = 314.6 V
~ Voltage drop across R2 = 0.26 × 484 = 112.84V
A. C. source Therefore 40 W bulb will fuse because lamp can
tolerate only 220 V.
In parallel combination of bulbs,
ILLUSTRATION 12
1
Brightness µ Power consumed by bulb µ I µ A 1000 W immersion heater is placed in a pot containing
R 1 litre of water at 20ºC. How long will it take to heat the
Bulb of greater wattage will shine more water to boiling temperature, if 20% of the available
For same V more power will be consumed in smaller energy is lost to surroundings?
1 Sol: Mass of water, m = volume × density = 1000 × 1 = 1000
resistance, P µ g
R
Fuse-wire : Its working is based on heating effect of electric Heat required to heat the water,
current. H = mc (q2 – q1) = 1000 × 1 × (100 – 20) = 1000 × 80
The fuse wire for an electric circuit is chosen keeping in cals
view the value of safe current through the circuit. = 4200 × 80 J
The fuse wire should have high resistance per unit length Let t minutes be taken for heating the water.
and low melting point. However the melting point of the Electric energy spent in heater = Pt = 1000 t
material of fuse wire should be above the temperature that Useful heat produced = 800 t
will be reached on the passage of the current through the 4200 × 80 = 800 t
circuit. A fuse wire is made of alloys of lead (Pb) and tin 4200 ´ 80
(Sn). Length of fuse wire is immaterial. The temperature of Þ t= = 7 minutes
800
the wire increases to such a value at which, the heat produced

Topic 18.5 WHEATSTONE BRIDGE AND METER BRIDGE

WHEATSTONE BRIDGE This condition occurs when the potential difference from
point c to point a, equals the potential difference from point
Figure shows the fundamental diagram of wheatstone bridge.
d to point a; or by referring to the other battery terminal,
The bridge has four resistive arms, together with a source
when the voltage from other point c to point b equals the
of emf (a battery) and a galvanometer. The current through
voltage from point d to point b. Hence, the bridge is balanced
the galvanometer depends on the potential difference between
the point c and d. The bridge is said to be balanced when the when
potential difference across the galvanometer is 0 V so that I1R1 = I2R2 …(i)
there is no current through the galvanometer.
 Current Electricity P-15

If the galvanometer current is zero, the following conditions The galvanometer is connected with the help of jockey across
also exist: BD and the cell is connected across AC. After making
ε connections, the jockey is moved along the wire and the null
I1 = I 3 = …(ii) point is obtained.
R1 + R 3
The resistance can be found with the help of the following
ε relation :
and I 2 = I 4 = R + R …(iii) R sl1 R l1
2 4 = or =
a S s (100 - l1 ) S 100 - l1
I1 I2 l1
or R = S
R1 R2 100 - l1
c G d where σ is the resistance per unit length of the wire and l1
e
R4 Unknown
is the length of the wire from one end where null point is
R3
obtained. The bridge is most sensitive when null point is
I3 I4
Standard somewhere near the middle point of the wire. This is due to
arm b end resistances.
Combining eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii) and simplifying, we obtain ILLUSTRATION 13
R1 R2 In a metre - bridge when a resistance in the left gap is
= …(iv) 2W and unknown resistance in the right gap, the balance
R1 + R 3 R 2 + R 4
length is found to be 40 cm. On shunting the unknown
1 3 R R resistance with 2W, the balance length changes by:
Þ R1R4 = R2R3 or R = R …(v) Sol :
2 4 2W R
Equation (v) is the well known expression for balanced
wheatstone bridge. If three of the resistances have known
G
values, the fourth may be determined from equation (v).
Hence, if R4 is the unknown resistor, its resistance can be
l 100 – l
expressed in terms of remaining resistors
R1 l
Condition for Wheatstone Bridge is, =
R R 2 100 - l
R4 = R3 2 …(vi) 2 40
R1 In Ist case = Þ R = 3W
R 60
METRE BRIDGE on shunting with 2W resistance R ' = 2 ´ 3 = 1.2W
2+3
This is the simplest form of wheatstone bridge and is specially Applying condition of Wheatstone Bridge
useful for comparing resistances more accurately. The 2 l 200
= Þl= = 62.5cm
construction of the metre bridge is shown in the Figure. It 1.2 100 - l 3.2
consists of one metre resistance wire clamped between two Balance length changes by 62.5 – 40 = 22.5 cm
metallic strips bent at right angles and it has two points for ILLUSTRATION 14
connection. There are two gaps; in one of them a known
resistance and in second an unknown resistance whose value Resistances are connected in a meter bridge circuit as
is to be determined is connected. shown in the figur e. The balancing length l1 is 40 cm.
R S Now an unknown resistance x is connected in series with
B P and new balancing length is found to be 80 cm
G measured from the same end. Then the value of x will
A C be ______ W.
l1 100–l1

Metre scale

e K1
 P-16 Physics

Sol :Given, When unknown resistance x is connected in series with

Resistance in the left gap, P = 4 W P, then
From the balancing condition of meter bridge 4+x 80 80 4+x
= = Þ =4
P l1 40 cm 6 100 - 80 20 6
= =
Q 100 - l1 100 cm - 40 cm Þ 4 + x = 24 Þ x = 20 W
4 40 4 2
= Þ = Þ Q=6W
Q 60 Q 3

Points to Remember
1. The number of electrons crossing when 1A of current flows through a conductor is 6.25 × 10 18 per second.
2. According to ohm's law, V µ I or V = IR
where V is the potential difference in volt, I is the current in ampere, R is the resistance in ohm.
3. One way of writing Ohm’s law is J = sE, where j is current density, s conductivity and E electric field.
4. Ohm’s law cannot be applied to circuits which contain diodes, transistors, capacitors etc.
Ohm’s law and Kirchhoff’s loop theorem can be applied to AC voltages only for their instantaneous values. They
cannot be applied to rms values.
rl RA
5. Resistance, R = or r =
A l
where r is the resistivity of the material of the conductor in ohm-meter, l is the length in meter and A is the area of
cross-section of the wire in m2.
6. If length of a wire increases by n times, then resistance will increase by n2 times i.e., R1 = n2R.
1
7. If radius of a wire is reduced to times, then new resistance becomes n4 times i.e., R1 = n4R.
n
8. When a uniform wire conductance ‘c’ is stretched to n times the original length, its conductance becomes c/n2.
9. Two important properties of a metal to make a standard resistor are low temperature coefficient and low linear
expansivity.
10. Resistance is a property of object, resistivity is a property of material.
11. In series grouping RS = R1 + R2 + R3 + .....

1 1 1 1
In parallel grouping = + + .....
R P R1 R 2 R 3

where RS and RP are the total resistance of the various resistances R1, R2, R3, ..... connected in series and parallel
combination.
12. The number of possible combination of n conductors of equal resistance = 2 n–1.
13. The number of possible combination of n conductors of totally different resistance = 2n.
14. The cells are connected in series to get more voltage, in parallel to get more current and in mixed group to get more
power.
 Current Electricity P-17

ne me mne
15. Cells in series, I = Cells in parallel, I = Cells in mixed grouping, I =
R + nr mR + r mR + nr

where n = no. of cells in series in each row, m = no. of rows of cells in parallel.

16. According to Kirchhof's law, åi = 0 and å iR = å e

where i is the current in ampere; R is resistance in ohm, and e is the e.m.f. in volt.
17. If there is only one battery in the circuit, problems involving solution of current by Kirchoff’s law can be done
with one equation. For this the current is judiciously chosen for the convenience of division.

E1 l1 æl -l ö
18. = and r = ç 1 2 ÷ R where, E1, E2 = E.M.F.s of two cells,
E2 l 2 è l2 ø

19. The meter bridge cannot be used to measure very high or very low resistances.
20. When current I flows through a conductor of resistance R for time t, then heat generated in it is given by
according to joule's heating law.

V2 t
H = I 2 Rt joule or H =
R

V2
Electric power P = VI = I2 R =
R
21. A fuse wire should have low melting point and high resistivity.
22. In absence of radiation loss, the time in which a fuse will melt does not depends on its length but varies with radius
as t µ r4
23. 1 kwh (BOT) unit = 1000 watt × 1 hour = 3.6 × 106 J
 P-18 Physics

Topicwise Multiple Choice Questions (MCQs)

Topic - 18.1 : Electric Current, Current Density, 8. The electric field intensity E, current density J and specific
Drift Velocity, Mobility, Ohm’s Law, Resistance, resistance k are related to each other through the relation
Conductance and Resistivity (a) E = J/k (b) E = J k
(c) E = k/J (d) k = J E
1. When the current i is flowing through a conductor,
9. Nichrome or Manganin is widely used in wire bound
the drift velocity is v. If 2i current is flowed through
standard resistors because of their
the same metal but having double the area of cross-
(a) temperature independent resistivity
section, then the drift velocity will be
(b) very weak temperature dependent resistivity.
(a) v/4 (b) v/2 (c) v (d) 4v
(c) strong dependence of resistivity with temperature.
2. For which of the following dependence of drift velocity
(d) mechanical strength.
vd on electric field E, is Ohm’s law obeyed?
10. Two resistors A and B of same length and crossectional
(a) vd µ E2 (b) vd µ E1/2 area have resistances RA and RB respectively with RA
(c) vd = constant (d) vd µ E < RB. The resistivities of their materials are rA and rB.
3. When a potential difference V is applied across a Then
conductor at a temperature T, the drift velocity of (a) rA > rB (b) rA = rB
electrons is proportional to (c) rA < rB (d) None of these
(a) V (b) V 11. A current passes through a resistor. If K1 and K2
(c) V2 (d) None of these represent the average kinetic energy of the conduction
4. In the absence of an electric field, the average velocity electrons and the metal ions respectively then
of free electrons in a conductor at absolute temperature (a) K1 < K2 (b) K1 = K2
(T) is (c) K1 > K2 (d) None of these
(a) zero (b) independent of T 12. The current flowing through a wire depends on time
as I = (3t2 + 2t + 5) A. The charge flowing through
(c) proportional to T (d) proportional to T2
the cross-section of the wire in time from t = 0 to t =
5. The length of the wire is doubled. Its conductance will
2 sec, is
be
(a) 22 C (b) 20 C
[Area remains constant]
(c) 18 C (d) 5 C
(a) Unchanged
13. A metal wire is subjected to a constant potential
(b) Halved difference. When the temperature of the metal wire
(c) Quadrupled increases, the drift velocity of the electron in it
(d) 1/4 of the original value (a) increases, thermal velocity of the electron
6. If N, e, t and m are representing electron density, increases
charge, relaxation time and mass of an electron (b) decreases, thermal velocity of the electron
respectively, then the resistance of wire of length l increases
and cross-sectional area A is given by (c) increases, thermal velocity of the electron
ml 2m t A decreases
(a) (b)
Ne2 At Ne 2 l (d) decreases, thermal velocity of the electron
decreases
Ne 2 t A Ne2 A 14. The resistance of a straight conductor does not depend
(c) (d)
2ml 2mtl on its
7. The example of non-ohmic resistance is (a) length (b) temperature
(a) diode (b) copper wire (c) mass (d) shape or cross-section
(c) filament lamp (d) carbon resistor
 Current Electricity P-19

15. With increase in temperature the conductivity of 22. The graph shows the variation
(a) metals increases and of semiconductor decreases. of resistivity with temperature r
(b) semiconductors increases and metals decreases. T. The graph can be of
(c) in both metals and semiconductors increases.
(a) copper (b) chromium
(d) in both metal and semiconductor decreases. T
16. Two metal wires of same length, same area of cross– (c) germanium (d) silver
23. If a wire of resistance R is melted and recasted to half
section have conductivities of their material s1 and s2.
of its length, then the new resistance of the wire will
If they are connected in series, the effective
be
conductivity is (a) R / 4 (b) R / 2 (c) R (d) 2R
s1s2 2s1s 2 24. The resistance of a bulb filmanet is 100W at a
(a) s + s (b) s + s temperature of 100°C. If its temperature coefficient be
1 2 1 2
0.005 per °C, its resistance will become 200 W at a
s1s 2 2s1s 2 temperature of
(c) s - s (d) s - s (a) 300°C (b) 400°C (c) 500°C (d) 200°C
1 2 1 2
25. If the resistance of a conductor is 5 W at 50ºC and 7W
17. The electric resistance of a certain wire of iron is R. If at 100ºC, then the mean temperature coefficient of
its length and radius are both doubled, then resistance (of the material) is
(a) the resistance and the specific resistance, will both (a) 0.013/ºC (b) 0.045/ºC
remain unchanged (c) 0.006/ºC (d) 0.008/ºC
(b) the resistance will be doubled and the specific 26. A uniform wire of length l and radius r has a resistance
resistance will be halved r
of 100 W. It is recast into a wire of radius . The
(c) the resistance will be halved and the specific 2
resistance will remain unchanged resistance of new wire will be :
(d) the resistance will be halved and the specific (a) 1600 W (b) 400 W
resistance will be doubled (c) 200 W (d) 100 W
18. The resistance of a metal increases with increasing 27. The resistance of a wire at room temperature 30°C is
temperature because found to be 10 W. Now to increase the resistance by
(a) collisions between the electrons and positive 10%, the temperature of the wire must be [The
metal ions becomes more frequent temperature coefficient of resistance of the material of
(b) the number of conduction electrons decreases the wire is 0.002 per °C]
(c) the number of conduction electrons increases (a) 36°C (b) 83°C (c) 63°C (d) 33°C
(d) None of these 28. A wire of a certain material is stretched slowly by ten
19. When a current I is set up in a wire of radius r, the per cent. Its new resistance and specific resistance
drift velocity is vd. If the same current is set up through become respectively:
a wire of radius 2 r, the drift velocity will be (a) 1.2 times, 1.3 times (b) 1.21 times, same
(a) 4 vd (b) 2 vd (c) vd/2 (d) vd/4 (c) both remain the same (d) 1.1 times, 1.1 times
20. The amount of charge Q passed in time t through a 29. The resistance of a wire is 5 ohm at 50°C and 6 ohm
cross-section of a wire is Q = (5 t2 + 3 t + 1) coulomb at 100°C. The resistance of the wire at 0°C will be
The value of current at time t = 5 s is (a) 3 ohm (b) 2 ohm (c) 1 ohm (d) 4 ohm
(a) 9 A (b) 49 A 30. The length of a given cylindrical wire is increased by
(c) 53 A (d) None of these 100%. Due to the consequent decrease in diameter the
21. The relaxation time in conductors change in the resistance of the wire will be
(a) increases with the increases of temperature (a) 200% (b) 100% (c) 50% (d) 300%
(b) decreases with the increases of temperature 31. The resistance of a wire at 20°C is 20W and at 500°C
(c) it does not depends on temperature is 60 ohm. At which temperature its resistance will be
(d) None of these 25 ohm?
(a) 80°C (b) 70°C (c) 60°C (d) 50ºC
 P-20 Physics

32. The plot represent the flow (a) copper (b) nichrome
I
of current through a wire at 2 (c) silicon (d) mercury
three different time intervals. 1 37. If a negligibly small current is passed through a wire
The ratio of charges flowing 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 of length 15 m and of resistance 5W having uniform
through the 2 Time in seconds
T
cross-section of 6 × 10 –7 m2 , then coefficient of
wire corresponding to these resistivity of material, is
time intervals is (Fig.) (a) 1 × 10–7 W-m (b) 2 × 10–7 W-m
(a) 2 : 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 3 : 3 (c) 3 × 10–7 W-m (d) 4 × 10–7 W-m
(c) 1 : 1 : 1 (d) 2 : 3 : 4 38. A wire of a certain material is stretched slowly by ten
33. Suppose the drift velocity nd in a material varied with per cent. Its new resistance and specific resistance
become respectively:
the applied electric field E as nd µ E . Then V – I (a) 1.2 times, 1.3 times (b) 1.21 times, same
graph for a wire made of such a material is best given (c) both remain the same (d) 1.1 times, 1.6 times
by :
Topic - 18.2 : Grouping of Resistors & Methods to
V V Find Equivalent Resistance

(a) (b) 39. The ratio of resistances of two copper wires of the
same length and of same cross sectional area when
I I connected in series to that when connected in parallel
is
V V (a) 1: 1 (b) 1: 2 (c) 2 : 1 (d) 4 : 1
40. n equal resistors are first connected in series and then
(c) (d) connected in parallel. What is the ratio of the equivalent
I resistances in series to parallel connections?
I
(a) n (b) 1/n2 (c) n 2 (d) 1/ n
34. Express which of the following set ups can be used to 41. You are given two resistances R1 and R2. By using
verify Ohm’s law? them singly, in series and in parallel, you can obtain
four resistances of 1.5 W, 2 W, 6 W and 8 W. The
values of R1 and R2 are
(a) (b) (a) 1 W, 7 W (b) 1.5 W, 6.5 W
(c) 3 W, 5 W (d) 2 W, 6 W
42. When a wire of uniform cross–section a, length l
and resistance R is bent into a complete circle,
equivalent res istance between any two of
(c) (d)
diametrically opposite points will be
R
35. The electric resistance of a certain wire of iron is R. If (a) (b) 4R
4
its length and radius are both doubled, then
(a) the resistance and the specific resistance, will both R R
(c) (d)
remain unchanged 8 2
(b) the resistance will be doubled and the specific 43. The equivalent resistance between points A and B is
resistance will be halved
R R
(c) the resistance will be halved and the specific A B
resistance will remain unchanged R R
(d) the resistance will be halved and the specific
resistance will be doubled
36. The graph between resistivity and temperature for a
(a) 2R (b) (3/4) R
limited range of temperatures, is a straight line for a
(c) (4/3) R (d) (3/5) R
material like
 Current Electricity P-21

44. The current in the 1W resistor shown in the circuit is 51. The resistance between points A and C in the given
network is
4W

1W 6V
R

4W R
A C
2 R B R D
(a) A (b) 3 A (c) 6 A (d) 2 A
3
45. Four resistance of 100 W each are connected in the
form of square. Then, the effective resistance along R
the diagonal points is
(a) 200 W (b) 400 W R R
(c) 100 W (d) 150 W (a)
4
(b)
2
(c) 2R (d) R
46. Two resistors of resistance R1 and R2 having R1 > R2
52. A uniform metallic wire has a resistance of 18 W and
are connected in parallel. For equivalent resistance R,
is bent into an equilateral triangle. Then, the resistance
the correct statement is
between any two vertices of the triangle is:
(a) R > R1 +R2 (b) R1 < R < R2 (a) 4 W (b) 8 W (c) 12 W (d) 2 W
(c) R > R2 (d) R < R1 53. Two wires of the same material and equal length are
47. The total current supplied to the circuit by the battery joined in parallel combination. If one of them has half
is the thickness of the other and the thinner wire has a
2W
resistance of 8 ohms, the resistance of the combination
6V
6W 3W is equal to
1.5W 8 5 3 8
(a) ohm (b) ohm (c) ohm (d) ohm
5 8 8 3
(a) 4 A (b) 2 A (c) 1 A (d) 6 A 54. The effective resistance between points P and Q of
48. Twelve wires, each having equal resistance r, are joined the electrical circuit shown in the figure is
to form a cube. The equivalent resistance between the
diagonally opposite points is 2 Rr
(a) 2R 2R
(a) 5r/6 (b) 4r/9 (c) 3r/8 (d) 6r/7 R+r
49. Find the equivalent resistance between A and B. Each 8R( R + r ) Q
(b) P
resistor has same resistance R. r r
3R + r 2R 2R
C E (c) 2r + 4R
O 5R
A B (d) + 2r
2
D F 55. A 3 volt battery with negligible internal resistance is
connected in a circuit as shown in the figure. The
8 6 7 4
(a) R (b) R (c) R (d) R current I, in the circuit will be
5 5 5 5
(a) 1 A
50. The resistance of all the wires between any two
adjaccent dots is R. The equivalent resistance between (b) 1.5 A 3W
3W
3V
A and B as shown in Fig is (c) 2 A
A
7 7 (d) 1/3 A 3W
(a) R (b) R
3 6
56. In the circuit shown, the current through the 5 W
14 B resistor is
(c) R (d) none of these
8
 P-22 Physics
2V 2W
8 9
(a) Parallel
(a) A (b) A (b) Series
3 13 + – (c) Mixed grouping
2V 2W
(d) Depends upon the relative values of internal and
4 1
(c) A (d) A 5W external resistances.
13 3
62. A cell of internal resistance r is connected to an external
57. The value of current through the 5W resistor of the resistance R. The power dissipated will be maximum
given circuit is in R, if
1
(a) R = r (b) R < r
(a) A (c) R > r (d) R = r/2
25
63. If n cells each of emf e and internal resistance r are
2 connected in parallel, then the equivalent emf and
(b) A
25 equivalent internal resistance will be
r r
2 (a) e, (b) e, nr (c) ne, (d) ne, nr
(c) A n n
23
64. A primary cell has an e.m.f. of 6. volt, when short-
1 circuited it gives a current of 3 ampere. The internal
(d) A
23 resistance of the cells is
(a) 4.5 ohm (b) 2 ohm
Topic - 18.3 : Kirchhoff's Laws & Their (c) 0.5 ohm (d) 1/4.5 ohm
Applications and Grouping of Cells 65. A car battery has e.m.f. 12 volt and internal resistance 5 ×
58. Kirchhoff’s first and second laws for electrical circuits 10–2 ohm. If it draws 60 amp current, the terminal voltage
are consequences of of the battery will be
(a) conservation of electric charge and energy (a) 15 volt (b) 3 volt
respectively (c) 5 volt (d) 9 volt
(b) conservation of electric charge only 66. The potential difference across the terminals of a battery
is 50 V when 11A current is drawn and 60 V when 1A
(c) conservation of energy and electric charge
current is drawn. The e.m.f. and the internal resistance
respectively
of the battery are
(d) conservation of energy only
(a) 62V, 2W (b) 63V, 1W
59. Emf of a cell is (c) 61V, 1W (d) 64V, 2W
(a) the potential difference between the terminals of 67. By a cell a current of 0.9 A flows through 2 ohm resistor
a cell when no current is drawn from the cell. and 0.3 A through 7 ohm resistor. The internal resistance
(b) the force required to push the electrons in the of the cell is
circuit. (a) 0.5 W (b) 1.0 W (c) 1.2 W (d) 2.0 W
(c) the potential difference between the positive and 68. The current I in the circuit shown is
negative terminal of a cell when current is drawn
from it (a) 1.33 A
2V 2W
(d) none of these (b) Zero 2W
60. Two cells, each of e.m.f. E and internal resistance r 2W
are connected in parallel with an external resistance R. (c) 2.00 A 2V 2V
I
To get the maximum power aross the resistor R we
(d) 1.00 A
have
(a) R = r/2 (b) R = r 69. The internal resistance of a 2.5 V cell which gives a
(c) R = 2r (d) R = 0 current of 0.2 A through a resistance of 10 W is
61. To draw a maximum current from a combination of (a) 2.5 W (b) 0.8 W (c) 1.0 W (d) 0.2 W
cells, how should the cells be grouped?
 Current Electricity P-23

70. Two identical cells connected in series send 1.0A 77. A current of 30A is registered when the terminals of a
current through a 5 W resistor. When they are dry cell of emf 1.5V are connected through an ammeter.
connected in parallel, they send 0.8 A current through (Neglect the ammeter resistance). The amount of heat
the same resistor. What is the internal resistance of the produced in the battery in 20s is
cell? (a) 450 J (b) 900 J (c) 1000 J (d) 50 J
(a) 0.5 W (b) 1.0 W (c) 1.5 W (d) 2.5 W 78. In the circuit shown,
71. Current I1 in the following circuit is
30W R L
(a) 0.6A
I1
(b) – 0.4 A 40W 40V
S2
I3
I2
(c) 0.8 A
S1
(d) – 0.8 A 40W 80V
e
72. The n rows each containing m cells in series are joined
in parallel. Maximum current is taken from this the switch S1 is closed at time t = 0 and the switch S2
combination across an exernal resistance of 3W is kept open. At some later time (t0), the switch S1 is
resistance. If the total number of cells are 24 and internal opened and S2 is closed. the behaviour of the current I
resistance of each cells is 0.5W, then as a function of time ‘t’ is given by:
(a) m = 8, n = 3 (b) m = 6, n = 4
(c) m = 12, n = 2 (d) m = 2, n = 12 I
73. The emf of a cell of internal resistance 2 W is measured I
using a voltmeter of resistance 998 W. The error in
the emf measured is (a) (b)
(a) 0.4% (b) 4%
(c) 2% (d) 0.2% tO t tO t
74. In the given circuit the cells have zero internal
resistance. The currents (in Amperes) passing through I
resistance R1 and R2 respectively, are: I

R1 20 W R2 20 W (c) (d)
– + + – tO t tO t
10 V 10 V

(a) 1, 2 (b) 2, 2 (c) 0.5, 0 (d) 0, 1 79. A cell having an emf e and internal resistance r is
75. Under what condition will the strength of current in a connected across a variable external resistance R. As
wire of resistance R be the same for connection is the resistance R is increased, the plot of potential
series and in parallel of n identical cells each of the difference V across R is given by
internal resistance r? When
(a) R = n r (b) R = r/n e e

(c) R = r (d) None of these (a) V (b) V

76. A student measures the terminal potential difference 0 0
R R
(V) of a cell (of emf E and internal resistance r) as a
function of the current (I) flowing through it. The
V
slope and intercept, of the graph between V and I, e
respectively, are (c) (d)
V
(a) – r and E (b) r and – E 0 0
R R
(c) – E and r (d) E and – r
 P-24 Physics

80. A 4 m long wire of resistance 8 W is connected in (b) lesser than that of fan
series with a battery of e.m.f. 2 V and a resistor of 7 (c) greater than that of fan
W. The internal resistance of the battery is 1 W. What (d) zero
is the potential drop across the wire? 86. Three resistances R, 2R and 3R are connected in
(a) 1.00 V (b) 0.75 V (c) 0.50 V (d) 0.25 V parallel to a battery. Then
81. Consider the following statements (A) and (B) and (a) the potential drop across 3R is maximum
identify the correct answer. (b) the current through each resistance is same
(A) Two non-ideal batteries are connected in parallel. (c) the heat developed in 3R is maximum
The equivalent emf is smaller than either of the (d) the heat developed in R is maximum.
two emfs. 87. A 5–ampere fuse wire can withstand a maximum
(B) The equivalent internal resistance is smaller than power of 1 watt in the circuit. The resistance of the
either of the two internal resistances. fuse wire is
(a) (A) is incorrect but (B) is correct (a) 0.04 ohm (b) 0.2 ohm
(b) (A) and (B) both are correct (c) 5 ohm (d) 0.4 ohm
(c) (A) and (B) both are incorrect 88. A heater of 220 V heats a volume of water in 5 minutes.
(d) (A) is correct and (B) is incorrect The same heater when connected to 110 V heats the
82. Five cells each of emf E and internal resistance r send same volume of water in (minutes)
the same amount of current through an external (a) 5 (b) 2 0
resistance R whether the cells are connected in parallel (c) 10 (d) 2.5
89. The powers of two electric bulbs are 100 watt and 200
or in series. Then the ratio æç ö÷ is
R
è ør
watt. Both of them are joined with 220 volt. The ratio of
resistance of their filament will be
1 1
(a) 2 (b) (c) (d) 1 (a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 4
2 5
(c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 : 1
83. The four wires from a larger circuit intersect at junction 90. Forty electric bulbs are connected in series across a
A as shown. What is the magnitude and direction of 220 V supply. After one bulb is fused the remaining 39
the current between points A and B ? are connected again in series across the same supply.
(a) 2 A from A to B 4A The illumination will be
(b) 2A from B to A 5A
A B (a) more with 40 bulbs than with 39
(c) 3A from A to B (b) more with 39 bulbs than with 40
6A (c) equal in both the cases
(d) 2A from B to A
(d) None of these
84. Which of the following is the correct equation when 91. A battery of 10 V and internal resistance 0.5W is
kirchhoff’s loop rule is applied to the loop BCDEB in connected across a variable resistance R. The value of
clockwise direction? R for which the power delivered is maximum is equal
(a) –i3 R3 – i3 R4 – i2 R2 = 0 R3 R4
D to
C
(a) 0.25W (b) 0.5W
(b) –i3 R3 – i3 R4 + i2 R2 = 0 i3
R2
B
i2
E
(c) 1.0W (d) 2.0W
(c) –i3 R3 + i3 R4 + i2 R2 = 0 R1 i1 92. How much heat is developed in 210 watt electric bulb
A F
in 5 minutes? (Chemical equivalent of heat = 4.2 J/C)
(d) –i3 R3 + i3 R4 + i2 R2 = 0
(a) 30000 cal (b) 22500 cal
Topic - 18.4 : Heating Effect of Current, (c) 15000 cal (d) 7500 cal
Electric Power 93. A 100 watt bulb working on 200 volt has resistance R
85. An electric fan and a heater are marked as 100 W, 220 and a 200 watt bulb working on 100 volt has resistance
V and 1000 W, 220 V respectively. The resistance of S then R/S is
heater is (a) 1/8 (b) 1/4
(a) equal to that of fan (c) 8 (d) 4
 Current Electricity P-25

94. A 5ºC rise in temperature is observed in a conductor

Question Bank Level-1
by passing a current. When the current is doubled the
rise in temperature will be approximately
i
(a) 10ºC (b) 16ºC i
(c) 20ºC (d) 12ºC
95. An electric tea kettle has two heating coils. When first (III) (IV)
coil of resistance R1 is switched on, the kettle begins
(a) III < II < IV < I (b) II < III < IV < I
to boil tea in 6 minutes. When second coil of resistance
R2 is switched on, the boiling begins in 8 minutes. The (c) I < IV < III < II (d) I < III < II < IV
value of R1/R2 is 101. A current of 2 mA was passed through an unknown
(a) 7/3 (b) 3/7 resistor which dissipated a power of 4.4 W. Dissipated
(c) 3/4 (d) 4/3 power when an ideal power supply of 11 V is connected
96. What is the ratio of heat generated in R and 2R across it is:
I (a) 11 × 10–5 W (b) 11 × 10–3 W
(a) 2 : 1
(c) 11 × 10–4 W (d) 11 × 105 W
(b) 1 : 2 E 102. It takes 12 minutes to boil 1 litre of water in an electric
2R R kettle. Due to some defect it becomes necessary to
(c) 4 : 1 remove 20% turns of heating coil of the kettle. After
(d) 1 : 4 repair, how much time will it take to boil 1 litre of
97. An electric lamp is marked 60 W, 220 V. The cost of water ?
kilo watt hour of electricity is ` 1.25. The cost of using (a) 9.6 minute (b) 14.4 minute
this lamp on 220 V for 8 hours is (c) 16.8 minute (d) 18.2 minute
(a) ` 0.25 (b) ` 0.60 103. The maximum power drawn out of the cell from a
(c) ` 1.20 (d) ` 4.00 source is given by (where r is internal resistance)
98. Two resistors R and 2R are connected in series in an (a) E2/2r (b) E2/4r (c) E2/r (d) E2/3r
electric circuit, for the same time interval the thermal
104. Two heater wires of equal length are first connected in
energy produced in R and 2R are in the ratio of
series and then in parallel. The ratio of heat produced
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 4
in the two cases is
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 2
(a) 1 : 4 (b) 4 : 1 (c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 : 1
99. The total power dissipated in watts in the circuit shown
105. Two equal resistances when connected in series to a
here is
6W battery, consume electric power of 60 W. If these
(a) 40 W (b) 54 W resistance are now connected in parallel combination
3W

(c) 4 W (d) 16 W to the same battery, the electric power consumed will
4W 18 V
be :
100. The three resistance of equal value are arranged in the (a) 60 W (b) 240 W (c) 120 W (d) 30 W
different combinations shown below. Arrange them in 105. A wire when connected to 220 V mains supply has
increasing order of power dissipation. power dissipation P1. Now the wire is cut into two
equal pieces which are connected in parallel to the same
i supply. Power dissipation in this case is P2. Then P2 :
i P1 is
(a) 1 (b) 4 (c) 2 (d) 3

(I) (II)
 P-26 Physics

107. The resistor of resistance ‘R’ is connected to 25 V 114. In meter bridge or Wheatstone bridge for measurement
supply and heat produced in it is 25 J/sec. The value of resistance, the known and the unknown resistance
of R is are interchanged. The error so removed is
(a) 225W (b) 1W (a) end correction
(c) 25W (d) 50W (b) index error
108. A fuse wire with a radius of 1 mm blows at 1.5 A. If (c) due to temperature effect
the fuse wire of the same material should blow at 3.0 (d) random error
A, the radius of the wire must be 115. In a sensitive meter bridge apparatus the bridge wire
(a) 41/3 mm (b) 2 mm should possess
(c) 0.5 mm (d) 8.0 mm (a) high resistivity and low temperature coefficient.
109. Three resistors of 4 W, 6 W and 12 W are connected (b) low resistivity and high temperature coefficient.
in parallel and the combination is connected in series (c) low resistivity and low temperature coefficient.
with a 1.5 V battery of 1 W internal resistance. The (d) high resistivity and high temperature coefficient.
rate of Joule heating in the 4 W resistor is 116. Five equal resistances each of resistance R are
(a) 0.55 W (b) 0.33 W connected as shown in the figure. A battery of V volts
(c) 0.25 W (d) 0.86 W is connected between A and B. The current flowing in
110. A 100-W bulb and a 25-W bulb are designed for the FCE will be
same voltage. They have filaments of the same length
C
and material. The ratio of the diameter of the 100-W
bulb to that of the 25-W bulb is
R
F R
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 2 :1 (d) 1 : 2 R
A
R B
111. Two electric bulbs rated P1 watt V volts and P2 watt V D E
volts are connected in parallel and V volts are applied R

to it. The total power will be 2V 3V

(a) (b)
(a) ( P1 + P2 ) watt (b) ( )
P1 P2 watt R R

V V
æ P1P2 ö æ P1 + P2 ö (c) (d)
R 2R
(c) ç P + P ÷ watt (d) ç ÷ watt
è 1 2ø è P1P2 ø 117. In a meter bridge experiment null point is obtained at
20 cm. from one end of the wire when resistance X is
Topic - 18.5 : Wheatstone Bridge and balanced against another resistance Y. If X < Y, then
Meter Bridge where will be the new position of the null point from
112. Why is the Wheatstone bridge better than the other the same end, if one decides to balance a resistance of
methods of measuring resistances? 4 X against Y
(a) It does not involve Ohm’s law (a) 40 cm (b) 80 cm
(b) It does not follow Kirchoff’s law
(c) 50 cm (d) 70 cm
(c) It has four resistor arms
118. In wheatstones network P = 2W, Q = 2W, R = 2W and
(d) It uses null deflection method
S = 3W. the resistance with which S is to shunted in
113. If in the experiment of Wheatstone’s bridge, the
order that the bridge may be balanced is
positions of cells and galvanometer are interchanged,
then balance point will (a) 2W (b) 6W (c) 1W (d) 4W
(a) change 119. The resistances in the four arms of a Wheatstone
(b) remain unchanged network in cyclic order are 5 W, 2 W, 6 W and 15 W.
(c) depend on the internal resistance of cell and If a current of 2.8 A enters the junction of 5 W and 15
resistance of galvanometer W, then the current through 2 W resistor is
(d) None of these (a) 1.5 A (b) 2.8 A
(c) 0.7 A (d) 2.1 A
 Current Electricity P-27

120. The actual value of resistance R, shown in the figure (a) 401.5 ohm (b) 404.5 ohm
is 30 W. This is measured in an experiment as shown (c) 403.5 ohm (d) 402.5 ohm
V 123. In the network shown, each
using the standard formula R = , where V and I are resistance is equal to R. The
I
equivalent resistance between
the reading of the voltmeter and ammeter, respectively.
adjacent corners A and D is
If the measured value of R is 5% less, then the internal
resistance of the voltmeter is:
2
V (a) R (b) R
3
A 3 8
R (c) R (d) R
7 15
124. In the given figure: V1 = V, V2 = aV, R1 = b R, R2 = gR,
where a, b, and g are positive real numbers. The value
(a) 600 W (b) 570 W
of current I is
(c) 35 W (d) 350 W
121. The resistance of the meter bridge AB in given figure
is 4 W. With a cell of emf e = 0.5 V and rheostat
resistance Rh = 2 W the null point is obtained at some
point J. When the cell is replaced by another one of
emf e =e2 the same null point J is found for Rh = 6 W.
The emf e2 is,:
e

( a - 1) g V ( a - 1) V
(a) 4b (b + g ) R (b)
4b R
A B
J
( a - 1) b V ( a - 1)(b + g ) V
(c) 2g ( b + g ) R (d)
2bg R
125. The resistance per centimeter of a meter bridge wire
6V Rh
is r, with XW resistance in left gap. Balancing length
(a) 0.4 V (b) 0.3 V (c) 0.6 V (d) 0.5 V from left end is at 40 cm with 25 W resistance in right
122. In a Wheatstone bridge (see fig.), Resistances P and Q gap. Now the wire is replaced by another wire of 2r
are approximately equal. When R = 400 W, the bridge resistance per centimeter. The new balancing length
is balanced. On interchanging P and Q, the value of R, for same settings will be at
for balance, is 405W. The value of X is close to : (a) 20 cm (b) 10 cm
B (c) 80 cm (d) 40 cm
P Q
G
A K2 C

R X

K1
 P-28 Physics

Question Bank Level-1

1. Each of the six ideal batteries of emf 20 V is connected 6. Specific resistance of Magnin is 50 × 10 –6 Wm.
to an external resistance of 4W as shown in the figure. Resistance of 50 cm long Magnin wire is; if
The current through the resistance is A = 25 × 10–2 m2
(a) 5 × 10–4 W (b) 10 –5 W
(a) 6 A
(c) 2.5 × 10–5 W (d) 10–4 W
7. In the experimental set up of metre bridge shown in
(b) 3 A the figure, the null point is obtained at a distance of 40
cm from A. If a 10 W resistor is connected in series
(c) 4 A with R1, the null point shifts by 10 cm. The resistance
that should be connected in parallel with (R1 + 10) W
such that the null point shifts back to its initial position
(d) 5 A
is :
2. A battery of the emf 18 V and internal resistance of R1 R2
3W and another battery of emf 10 V and internal
resistance of 1 W are connected as shown in figure.
Then, the voltmeter reading is G
(a) 10V
A B
(b) 12V
(c) 16V
(d) 8V
(a) 20 W (b) 40 W
3. A lamp is rated at 240V, 60W. When in use the
(c) 60 W (d) 30 W
resistance of the filament of the lamp is 20 times that
8. The voltage V and current I graphs for
of cold filament. The resistance of the lamp when not
in use is a conductor at two different
(a) 54 W (b) 60 W (c) 50 W (d) 48 W temperatures T1 and T2 are shown in V
T1
the figure. The relation between T1 and
4. In the circuit given below, if the bulb is to glow with T2

maximum intensity, the value of ‘R’ is T2 is

O I
(Neglect internal resistance of the cell) (a) T1 > T2 (b) T1 < T2
1
(c) T1 = T2 (d) T1 =
(a) 1.25 W T2
9. Calculate mean free path in Cu at room temperature
(b) 4.5 W 300 K, if number density of free electrons is 8.5 ×
1028 /m³ and resistivity r = 1.7 × 10–8 mho-m.
(c) 6 W Given k = 1.38 × 10–23 J/K.
(a) 25Å (b) 2.5 Å
(c) 0.25 Å (d) 0.025 Å
(d) 8.5 W 10. At what temperature will the resistance of a copper
5. At room temperature, copper has free electron density wire becomes three times its value at 0°C?
of 8.4 × 1028 per m3. The copper conductor has a (Temperature coefficient of resistance of copper is 4
cross-section of 10–6 m2 and carries a current of 5.4 × 10–3/°C)
A. The electron drift velocity in copper is (a) 600°C (b) 500°C
(a) 400 m/s (b) 0.4 m/s (c) 450°C (d) 400°C
(c) 0.4 mm/s (d) 72 m/s
 Current Electricity P-29

11. Two electric bulbs, rated at (25 W, 220 V) and (100 W, 17. An electric current passes through a circuit containing
220 V), are connected in series across a 220 V voltage two wires of the same material connected in parallel.
source. If the 25 W and 100 W bulbs draw powers P1 If the lengths of the wires are in the ratio of 4/3 and
and P2 respectively, then: radius of the wires are in the ratio of 2/3, then the ratio
(a) P1=16 W, P2=4 W of the currents passing through the wires will be
(b) P1=16 W, P2=9 W (a) 3 (b) 1/3 (c) 3/9 (d) 4/9
(c) P1=9 W, P2=16 W 18. In a meter bridge, the wire of length 1 m has a non-
(d) P1=4 W, P2=16 W dR
12. In the network shown below, the ring has zero uniform cross-section such that, the variation of
dl
resistance. The equivalent resistance between the point
A and B is dR 1
its resistance R with length l is µ . Two equal
(a) 2R 3R dl l
3R A
(b) 4R B
R
resistances are connected as shown in the figure. The
3R galvanometer has zero deflection when the jockey is at
(c) 7R
point P. What is the length AP?
(d) 10R
13. In the figure shown, a circuit contains two identical (a) 0.2 m R' R'
resistors with resistance R = 5 W and an inductance
with L = 2 mH. An ideal battery of 15 V is connected (b) 0.3 m
in the circuit. What will be the current through the G
(c) 0.25 m
battery long after the switch is closed? P
A
(d) 0.35 m
l 1 l
S 19. An electrical power line, having a total resistance of 2
L W, delivers 1 kW at 220 V. The efficiency of the
transmission line is approximately :
R (a) 72% (b) 91% (c) 85% (d) 96%
20. There are n similar conductors each of resistance R.
The resultant resistance comes out to be x when
R
connected in parallel. If they are connected in series,
the resistance comes out to be
(a) x/n2 (b) n2x (c) x/n (d) nx
(a) 5.5 A (b) 7.5 A (c) 3 A (d) 6 A 21. Taking the internal resistance of 2W

14. In an ideal metre-bridge, the balancing length from the the battery as negligible, the A B

left end when standard resistance of 1 W is in right steady state current in the 2 W 3W

gap is found to be 20 cm. The value of unknown resistor shown in the figure will 0.2 µF
6W
resistance is be
(a) 0.25W (b) 0.4W (c) 0.5W (d) 4W (a) 1.8 A (b) 2.9 A 6V 2.8 W

15. When the current i is flowing through a conductor, (c) 0.9 A (d) 2.8 A
the drift velocity is u. If 2i current is flowed through 22. In the given circuit diagram, the currents, I1 = – 0.3 A, I4
the same metal but having double the area of cross- = 0.8 A and I5 = 0.4 A, are flowing as shown. The
section, then the drift velocity will be currents I2, I3 and I6, respectively, are :
(a) u/4 (b) u/2 (c) u (d) 4u P I6 Q
16. An electrical cable of copper has just one wire of radius I3
9 mm. Its resistance is 5 ohm. This single copper wire
of the cable is replaced by 6 different well insulated
copper wires of same length in parallel, each of radius I2 I1
I5
3 mm. The total resistance of the cable will now be S I4 R
equal to
(a) 7.5 ohm (b) 45 ohm (a) 1.1 A, – 0.4 A, 0.4 A (b) 1.1 A, 0.4 A, 0.4 A
(c) 90 ohm (d) 270 ohm (c) 0.4 A, 1.1 A, 0.4 A (d) –0.4 A, 0.4 A, 1.1 A
 P-30 Physics

23. The equivalent resistance of the arrangement of 29. In the figure shown, what is the current (in Ampere)
resistances shown in adjoining figure between the drawn from the battery? You are given :
points A and B is . 8W R1 = 15 W, R2 = 10 W, R3 = 20 W, R4 = 5 W, R5 = 25 W,
(a) 6 ohm 16W 20W R6 = 30 W, E = 15 V
16W
(b) 8 ohm
A B
(c) 16 ohm 9W
6W
C
(d) 24 ohm 18W

24. For the circuit shown, with R1 = 1.0 W, R2 = 2.0 W, E1 =

2 V and E2 = E3 = 4 V, the potential difference between
the points ‘a’ and ‘b’ is approximately (in V) :
R1 a R1

E3 (a) 13/24 (b) 7/18 (c) 9/32 (d) 20/3

R2
E1 R1 30. A (100 W, 200 V) bulb is connected to a 160V power
E2
supply. The power consumption would be
R1 b (a) 125 W (b) 100 W (c) 80 W (d) 64 W
(a) 2.7 (b) 2.3 (c) 3.7 (d) 3.3 31. If voltage across a bulb rated 220 Volt-100 Watt drops
25. Five cells each of emf E and internal resistance r send by 3.5% of its rated value, the percentage of the rated
value by which the power would decrease is :
the same amount of current through an external
(a) 20% (b) 2.5% (c) 7% (d) 10%
resistance R whether the cells are connected in parallel
32. In the given circuit, an ideal voltmeter connected
or in series. Then the ratio æç ö÷ is
R
across the 10 W resistance reads 2V. The internal
è ø r resistance r, of each cell is :
(a) 2 (b) 1/2 (c) 1/5 (d) 1
26. A current of 2A flows through a 2W resistor when
connected across a battery. The same battery supplies
a current of 0.5 A when connected across a 9W resistor.
The internal resistance of the battery is
(a) 0.5 W (b) 1/3 W (c) 1/4 W (d) 1 W
27. A cell of internal resistance r drives current through
an external resistance R. The power delivered by the
cell to the external resistance will be maximum when : (a) 1 W (b) 0.5 W (c) 1.5 W (d) 0 W
(a) R = 0.001 r (b) R = 1000 r 33. A heater is operated with a power of 1000 W in a 100
(c) R = 2r (d) R = r V line. It is connected in combination with a resistance
of 10W and a resistance R to a 100 V line as shown in
28. Two identical capacitors
figure. What should be the value of R so that the heater
having plate separation
d0 are connected parallel
u0
operates with a power of 62.5 W ?
1
A 10W B
to each other across A B (a) 10W (b) 62.5W Heater C
points A and B as shown
in figure. A 2 R
u0
1
charge Q is imparted to the system by connecting a (c) W (d) 5W
5 100 V
battery across A and B and battery is removed. Now
34. An electric heating element in vacuum is surrounded
first plate of first capacitor and second plate of second
by a cavity at constant temperature of 227ºC; it
capacitor starts moving with constant velocity u0
consumes 60W of power to maintain a temperature of
towards left. Find the magnitude of current flowing in
727ºC. What is the power consumed by the element to
the loop during the process. maintain a temperature of 1227º C?
Q Q 2Q Q (a) 101 W (b) 304 W (c) 90 W (d) 320 W
(a) 2d u 0 (b) d u 0 (c) d u 0 (d) 3d u 0
0 0 0 0
 Current Electricity P-31

35. A battery is charged at a potential of 15V for 8 hours 38. Two identical batteries each of e.m.f 2V and internal
when the current flowing is 10A. The battery on resistance 1W are available to produce heat in an
discharge supplies a current of 5A for 15 hours. The external resistance by passing a current through it. The
mean terminal voltage during discharge is 14V. The maximum power that can be developed across R using
“watt-hour” efficiency of the battery is batteries is
(a) 87.5% (b) 82.5% (c) 80% (d) 90%
(a) 3.2 W (b) 2.0 W
36. An electric bulb rated 220 V, 100 W is connected in
series with another bulb rated 220 V, 60 W. If the voltage 8
(c) 1.28 W (d) W
across the combination is 220 V, the power 9
consumption by the 100 W bulb will be about 39. A current of 3 amp flows
(a) 25 W (b) 14 W (c) 60 W (d) 100 W through the 2W resistor shown 2W

37. In a meter bridge experiment, the circuit diagram and in the circuit. The power
4W
the corresponding observation table are shown in dissipated in the 5-W resistor
figure. is:
1W 5W
(a) 4 watt (b) 2 watt
(c) 1 watt (d) 5 watt
40. The figure shows a meter-bridge circuit, X = 12W and
R = 18W. The jockey J is at the null point. If R
is made 8W, through the jockey J have to be moved by
4 × A cm to obtain null point again then find the value
of A.
+ –
(a) 2
[Link]. R W l (cm) X R
1. 1000 60 (b) 5
2. 100 13
3. 10 1.5 (c) 8 J
A B

4. 1 1.0 (d) 6
Which of the reading is inconsistent ?
(a) 3 (b) 2 (c) 4 (d) 1

Chapter Test 1
1. The resistance in following circuit are R1 = R2 = R3 = V = i(2i + 1), where ‘i’ is the current in ampere through
6.0W. The emf of the battery is 12 V. When switch S the filament of the bulb. The emf of the battery (Vb)
is closed, the potential across resistance R1 is changed so that the bridge becomes balanced is
by an amount.

(a) –2V (b) +2V (c) –4V (d) +4V (a) 10 V (b) 15 V (c) 20 V (d) 25 V
2. The potential difference V across the filament of the 3. Which of the adjoining graphs represents ohmic
bulb shown in the given Wehatstone bridge varies as resistance
 P-32 Physics

(a) RC = RD V
C D
V V (b) RB > RA B
A
(a) (b) (c) RC > RB
(d) None of these i
I I
10. Match the physical quantities in Column-I and their
mathematical expressions in Column-II.
V V Column-I Column-II
(c) (d) ne 2 t
(A) Current (1)
I I
m
4. Consider the following statements (A) and (B) and 1 æ dr ö
identify the correct answer. (B) Conductivity (2) ç ÷
r è dT ø
(A) When a current is established in a wire, the free r uuur
electrons drift in the direction opposite to the (C) Current density (3) j × DS
current and so the number of free electrons in the r
(D) Temperature coefficient (4) nq vd
wire continuously decrease. of resistivity
(B) Charge is a conserved quantity. (a) (A) ® (2) ; (B) ® (1) ; (C) ® (3) ; (D) ® (4)
(a) (A) is incorrect but (B) is correct (b) (A) ® (2) ; (B) ® (2) ; (C) ® (4) ; (D) ® (3)
(b) (A) and (B) both are correct (c) (A) ® (3) ; (B) ® (1) ; (C) ® (4) ; (D) ® (2)
(c) (A) and (B) both are incorrect (d) (A) ® (2) ; (B) ® (1) ; (C) ® (4) ; (D) ® (3)
(d) (A) is correct and (B) is incorrect 11. Two wires have lengths, diameters and specific
5. At room temperature, copper has free electron density resistances all in the ratio of 1 : 2. The resistance of
of 8.4 × 1028 per m3. The copper conductor has a the first wire is 10 ohm. Resistance of the second wire
cross-section of 10–6 m2 and carries a current of 5.4 in ohm will be
A. The electron drift velocity in copper is (a) 5 (b) 10 (c) 20 (d) infinite
(a) 400 m/s (b) 0.4 m/s 12. Two different conductors have same resistance at 0°C.
(c) 0.4 mm/s (d) 72 m/s It is found that the resistance of the first conductor at
6. A current through a wire depends on time as t1°C is equal to the resistance of the second conductor
i = a0t + bt2 where a0 = 20 A/s and b = 8 As–2. Find at t2°C. The ratio of the temperature coefficients of
the charge crossed through a section of the wire in 15
s. a1
resistance of the conductors, is
(a) 2250 C (b) 11250 C a2
(c) 2100 C (d) 260 C t1 t 2 - t1
7. A conductor carries a current of 50 m A. If the area of (a) t2 (b) t2
cross-section of the conductor is 50 mm2, then value
of the current density in Am–2 is t 2 - t1 t2
(c) t1 (d) t
(a) 0.5 (b) 1 (c) 10–3 (d) 10–6 1
8. A steady current flows in a metallic conductor of non- 13. On increasing the temperature of a conductor, its
uniform cross-section. The quantity/quantities remain resistance increases because the
constant along the length of the conductor is/are (a) relaxation time increases
(a) current, electric field and drift speed (b) mass of electron increases
(b) drift speed only (c) electron density decreases
(c) current and drift speed (d) relaxation time decreases
(d) current only 14. The resistivity of the material of a wire is 5 × 10–6 W
9. Variation of current passing through a conductor as m and its area of cross section is 5 × 10–6 m2. If 0.2 A
the voltage applied across its ends is varied as shown current is flowing through the wire, then the potential
in the adjoining diagram. If the resistance (R) is drop per metre length of the wire is
determined at the points A, B, C and D, we will find (a) 0.1 Vm–1 (b) 0.5 Vm–1
that (c) 0.25 Vm –1 (d) 0.2 Vm–1
 Current Electricity P-33

15. In the circuit shown in figure the current through 19. You are given two resistances R1 and R2. By using
3W 2W 2W
them singly, in series and in parallel, you can obtain
four resistances of 1.5 W, 2 W, 6 W and 8 W. The values
of R1 and R2 are
9V 8W 8W 4W (a) 1 W, 7 W (b) 1.5 W, 6.5 W
(c) 3 W, 5 W (d) 2 W, 6 W
2W 2W 2W
20. A current of 5 A passes through a copper conductor
(resistivity = 1.7×10–8 Wm) of radius of cross-section
(a) the 3 W resistor is 0.50 A.
5 mm. Find the mobility of the charges if their drift
(b) the 3 W resistor is 0.25 A. velocity is 1.1×10 – 3 m/s.
(c) the 4 W resistor is 0.50 A
(a) 1.8m2/Vs (b) 1.5 m2/Vs
(d) the 4 W resistor is 0.25 A.
16. In the circuit shown in the figure, find the current in (c) 1.3 m2/Vs (d) 1.0 m2/Vs
45 W. Numeric Answer Questions

45W
21. In the circuit shown in Fig, the
180V 90W current in 4 W resistance is 1.2 i1 4W
90W 2W i
A. What is the potential A 8W
B
C
difference (in volt) between B i2
100W 100W and C?
50W 50W
22. A current of 30A is registered when the terminals of a
100W 50W dry cell of emf 1.5V are connected through an ammeter.
(a) 4 A (b) 2.5A (Neglect the ammeter resistance). The amount of heat
(c) 2 A (d) None of these produced (in joule) in the battery in 20s is
17. What will be the equivalent resistance of circuit shown 23. A 100 watt bulb working on 200 volt has resistance R
in figure between two points A and D and a 200 watt bulb working on 100 volt has resistance
10 W 10 W 10 W
A 8
B S. If the R/S is . Find the value of x.
x 6W
10 W 10 W 24. The total power
dissipated in watts in the 3W

D
circuit shown here is
C 4W 18 V
10 W 10 W 10 W 25. In an ideal metre-bridge, the balancing length from the
(a) 10W (b) 20W (c) 30W (d) 40W left end when standard resistance of 1 W is in right gap
18. The ratio of resistances of two copper wires of the is found to be 20 cm. The value of unknown resistance
same length and of same cross sectional area when (in W) is
connected in series to that when connected in parallel is
(a) 1: 1 (b) 1: 2 (c) 2 : 1 (d) 4 : 1

Question Bank Level-2

1. In the circuit, the cells are having negligible resistances. 2. When a resistance R1 is connected across a cell, the
If the galvanometer shows null defection then the value current is I1 and if the resistance R1 is replaced by R2,
of ‘V’ is the current is I2. Then the internal resistance of the
cell is
I1R1 + I2R 2 I1R 2 - I2R1
(a) I1 + I2 (b) I1 - I2

I1R 2 - I2R1 I2R 2 - I1R1

(c) I1 - I2 (d) I1 - I2
(a) 12 V (b) 6 V (c) 4 V (d) 2 V
 P-34 Physics

3. A cell of emf E is connected across a resistance R. 8. A cylindrical solid of length L and radius a is having
The potential difference between the terminals of the varying resistivity given by r = r0x, where r0 is a
cell is found to be V volt. Then the internal resistance positive constant and x is measured from left end of
of the cell must be solid. The cell shown in the figure is having emf V
(E - V) and negligible internal resistance. The magnitude of
(a) (E – V) R (b) R
V electric field as a function of x is best described by
2 (E - V ) R 2 (E - V) V r = r 0x
(c) (d) 2V 2V
E R (a) x (b) x
4. A heater boils a certain quantity of water in time t1 L2 r0 L2 x
Another heater boils the same quantity of water in time
t 2. If both heaters are connected in parallel, the V V
(c) x (d) None of these
combination will boil the same quantity of water in L2
time
1 9. In the electric network
(a) (t1 + t 2 ) (b) (t1 + t 2 ) shown, when no current
2
2W
t1t 2 flows through the 4W F E D
(c) t + t (d) t1t 2 resistor in the arm EB, the 2V
1 2 4W
5. In a Wheatstone's bridge, three resistances P, Q and R potential difference 2W
4V
R

connected in the three arms and the fourth arm is between the points A and
formed by two resistances S1 and S 2 connected in D will be : A
9V B 3V C

parallel. The condition for the bridge to be balanced

will be (a) 6 V (b) 3 V (c) 5 V (d) 4 V
10. In the given circuit diagram the
P 2R P R ( S1 + S 2 ) 6V
(a) Q = S + S
I
(b) = current through the battery and
1 2 Q S1 S2 1W
the charge on the capacitor
P R ( S1 + S2 ) P R
(c) = (d) Q = S + S respectively in steady state are
2W
Q 2S1S2 1 2
(a) 1 A and 3 µC
6. Figure shows two squares, X and Y, Cut from a sheet
of metal of uniform thickness t. X and Y have sides of (b) 17 A and 0 µC 3W

length L and 2 L, respectively. 6 12

2L (c) A and µC
7 7 0.5 µF 4W
L t
L t 2L
X Y (d) 11A and 3 µC
(a) 11. Each of the resistors shown in Fig. has resistance R.
(b)
Find the equivalent resistance between A and B.
The resistance Rx and Ry of the squares are measured
between the opposite faces shaded in Fig. What is the 7R 5R
value of Rx/Ry? (a) (b) a b
4 4
(a) 1/4 (b) 1/2 (c) 1 (d) 2 e f
g h
A B
7. Two different conductors have same resistance at 0°C. 9R 11R
(c) (d) c
It is found that the resistance of the first conductor at 4 4 d

t1°C is equal to the resistance of the second conductor 12. The current through the
at t2°C. The ratio of the temperature coefficients of
8W resistor (shown) is
resistance of
2.0 W 6.0 W
a (a) 4A
the conductors, 1 is 2.0 W 2.0 W
a2 2.0 W
(b) 2 A 8.0 W 7.0 W 6.0 V
t1 t 2 - t1 t 2 - t1 t2
(a) t (b) t2 (c) t1
(d) t 4.0 W
2 1 (c) zero 10 W 6.0 V
12 W 5.0 W 15 W
12 V 12 V
(d) 2.5 A
 Current Electricity P-35

13. Calculate equivalent resistance between A and B. (a) VA ¹ VB = VC (b) VA = VB ¹ VC

F
I - I 1 - I2
(c) VA ¹ VB ¹ VC (d) VA = VB = VC
C E
I2
R 18. A 12 cm wire is given a shape
b of a right angled triangle ABC A

I-
I1 -
R
I1

R
having sides 3 cm, 4 cm and 5
I-

I2+
R R
a c
cm as shown in the figure. 3 cm 5 cm

I3
R I3 R
I I
A I1 D B The resistance between two
I 1 + I2 - I 3
ends (AB, BC, CA) of the B C
respective sides are measured 4 cm
(a) 4/7 R (b) 8/7 R
(c) 2/7 R (d) 1/7 R one by one by a multi-meter.
14. Find the equivalennt resistance between A and E The resistances will be in the ratio of
(resistance of each resistor is R.) (a) 3 : 4 : 5 (b) 9 : 16 : 25
7 7 B I (c) 27 : 32 : 35 (d) 21 : 24 : 25
(a) R (b) R F 19. A ring is made of a wire having a resistance R0 = 12
12 13
A E
G
C W. Find the points A and B as shown in the figure, at
7 8 H which a current carrying conductor should be
(c) R (d) R D J connected so that the resistance R of the sub-circuit
15 13 8
between these points is equal to W.
15. In the circuit shown in the figure, find the current in 3
45 W. l1

l1 5 l1 1
(a) = (b) = A B
180V 90W 45W l2 8 l2 3
90W
l1 3 l1 1
(c) = (d) = l2
100W
l2 8 l2 2
100W 50W
50W
20. Figure shows a balanced Wheatstone bridge. Now, it
50W
is distrubed by changing P to 11 W. Which of the
100W
following steps will not bring the bridge to balance
(a) 4 A (b) 2.5A again?
(c) 2 A (d) None of these Q = 100 W
P = 10 W
16. A hank of uninsulated wire consisting of seven and a
half turns is stretched between two nails hammered
R = 20 W S = 200 W
into a board to which the ends of the wire are fixed.
The resistance of the circuit between the nails is
determined with the help of electrical measuring
instruments. Determine the proportion in which the
resistance will change if the wire is unwound so that (a) increasing R by 2 W
the ends remain to be fixed to the nails. (b) increasing S by 20 W
(a) 225 (b) 15 (c) increasing Q by 10 W
(c) 240 (d) 250 (d) making product RQ = 2200 (W)2
17. A, B and C are voltmeters of resistance R, 1.5 R and 21. What will be the change in the resistance of a circuit
3R respectively as shown in the figure. When some consisting of five identical conductors if two similar
potential difference is applied between X and Y, the conductors are added as shown by the dashed line in
voltmeter readings are VA, VB and VC respectively. Then figure.
(a) becomes 1/5 times
B (b) becomes 3/5 times
A (c) becomes 2/5 times
X Y
C (d) becomes 1/2 times
 P-36 Physics

22. The equivalent resistance between A and B is : 27. For the shown circuit the effective resistance between
33 the points A and B will be 2R
(a) W
21
(a) 2 R R R
66 R/2 R/2
(b) W
45 (b) 4 R 2R 2R

8 R R
(c) 7 W (c) R A B
4R
R R R R
(d) None of these (d) R/2
2R
23. A wire of resistance 12 ohms
28. Determine the resistance RAB between points A and
per meter is bent to form a
B of the frame formed by nine identical wires of
complete circle of radius 10 cm.
resistance R each (figure).
The resistance between its two A B
R R B
diametrically opposite points, A 2 9
(a) R (b) R
and B as shown in the figure, 11 11 R R R R R
is 15 1
(c) R (d) R
(a) 3W (b) 6 p W 11 11 A R R
(c) 6W (d) 0. 6 p W 29. The diagram below shows a junction with currents
1W 1W 1W labeled I1 to I6. Which of the following statements is
24. A1 correct?
A2 A3 (a) I1 + I3 = I6 + I4 I 3
B V 4W ¥
9V 4W 4W (b) I1 + I2 = I6 + I4
0.5W I6 I4
(c) I4 + I3 = I6
1W 1W 1W
(d) I2 = I6 + I4 I1 I5 I2
A 9 V battery with internal resistance of 0.5 W is
connected across an infinite network as shown in the 30. Five identical resistors (coils for hot plates) are
figure. All ammeters A1, A2, A3 and voltmeter V are connected as shown in the diagram. What will be
ideal. the change in the voltage across the right upper spiral
Choose correct statement. upon closing the key K?
(a) Reading of A1 is 2 A (b) Reading of A1 is 18 A (a) Increases
(b) Decreases K
(c) Reading of V is 9 V (d) Reading of V is 7 V
25. All wires have same resistance and equivalent resistance (c) No change
between A and B is R0. Now keys are closed, then the (d) Nothing can be said ~
equivalent resistance will become 31. Point a in figure is maintained at a constant
K1
potential of 300 V above ground. The
7 R0 a
(a) B reading of a voltmeter of the proper range,
3
7 R0
and of resistance 3 × 10 4 W , when
(b) 9 connected between point b and ground is 100 kW
A
(c) 7 R0 nearly :
b
R0
(d) 3
K2
(a) 10 V 200 kW
26. Find equivalent resistance between A & B in the
following circuit (b) 42 V
(c) 50 V
A R R R R R B (d) 62 V
R 32. In the part of a circuit shown in Fig, the potential
3R 2R difference (VG – VH) between points G and H will be
(a) (b) 3
(c) 2 R (d) 3 R
2
 Current Electricity P-37

(a) 0 V G 2A
1
1A
K
(b) 15 V 4W 2W 5V Rx

(c) 7 V 3V 1W 2 E1
3A
H
(d) 3 V
A
33. In the circuit shown the ammeter A reads a current
of i 1 amp. If key K1 is opened and K2 is closed (a) 2E1/I (b) E1/2I
ammeter reads i2, then (c) 3E1/I (d) E1/I
37. In the figure ammeter A1 reads a current of 10mA,
(a) i1 > i2 while the voltmeter reads a potential difference of 3V.
E R A What does ammeter A2 in mA read ? The ammeters
(b) i1 < i2 are identical, the internal resistance of the battery is
R R
(c) i1 = i2 negligible.
K1 R R K2 (Consider all ammeters and voltmeters as non-ideal.)
(d) depend on the value of R
34. As shown in circuit diagram an ideal voltmeter and an (a) 6.67 mA
100 A1
ideal ammeter reading are zero. Sum of potential drop
across box and 5W resistances will be (given that there (b) 3.12 mA 4V
A2
are no fault in voltmeter and ammeter) (c) 1.12 mA
100 V
Box
(d) 5.14 mA
12 Volt 7W V
38. For maximum power from battery the internal
5W resistance of battery r is
A
(a) 7 volt (b) 5 volt R R
(c) 12 volt (d) Data insufficient R
35. The equivalent resistance between points A and B with
R R
switch S open and closed are respectively R R

12 W
D e R R
B r
S
6W 6W
8W 4R R 10 R
(a) 10 R (b) (c) (d)
A
9 8 9
C 39. Figure shows three similar lamps L1, L2 and L3
12 W
connected across a power supply. If the lamp L3 fuses,
(a) 4 W, 8 W (b) 8 W, 4 W how will the light emitted by L1 and L2 change?
(c) 6 W, 9 W (d) 9 W, 6 W
36. The key K in circuit diagram shown in figure can be
either in position 1 or 2. The circuit includes two d.c. L1
sources, two resistors, and an ammeter. The emf of L2 L3
one sources is E1 and of the other is unknown. The
internal resistance of the sources should be taken as
zero. The resistance of the resistors is also unknown. (a) no change
One of the resistors has a varying resistance chosen in (b) brilliance of L1 decreases and that of L2 increases
such a way that the current through the ammeter is (c) brilliance of both L1 and L2 decreases
the same for both positions of the key. The current is (d) brilliance of both L1 and L2 decreases
measured and is found to be equal to I. Determine the
resistance denoted by Rx in the diagram.
 P-38 Physics

40. A battery of internal resistance 4W is connected to the

1W 1W
network of resistances as shown. In order that the 1W 1W 1W 1W
maximum power can be delivered to the network, the 1W
3V 1W 3V
1W
value of R in W should be 1W
1W 1W 1W 1W 1W

R R (I) (II) 1W 3V

E R 6R R (III)

4W 4R
(a) P1 > P2 > P3 (b) P1 > P3 > P2
R
(c) P2 > P1 > P3 (d) P3 > P2 > P1
44. Which of the four resistances P, Q, R and S generate
4 8 the greatest amount of heat when a current flows from
(a) (b) 2 (c) (d) 18 A to B?
9 3
41. A 100 W bulb B1, and two 60 W bulb B2 and B3, are
connected to a 250 V source, as shown in figure. Now P = 2W Q = 4W
W1, W2 and W3 are the output powers of the bulbs B1,
B2 and B3, respectively. Then
(a) W1 > W2 = W3 A B
B1 B2

R = 1W S = 2W
(b) W1 > W2 > W3 B3 (a) Q (b) S (c) P (d) R
45. Four bulbs B1, B2, B3 and B4 of 100 W each are
(c) W1 < W2 = W3 connected to 220 V main as shown in the figure.
250V

(d) W1 < W2 < W3

220 V B1 B2 B3 B4
42. In the diagrams, all light bulbs are identical, all cells are
ideal and identical. In which circuit (a, b, c, d) will the
bulbs be dimmest ? Ammeter
The reading in an ideal ammeter will be:
(a) 0.45 A (b) 0.90 A (c) 1.35 A (d) 1.80 A
(a)
46. In the circuit shown, for what value of R, will the ideal
battery transfer energy at the rate of 60 W ?
12W
(a) 12.5
7W 4W
(b) (b) 15.5 R

(c) 17.5
(d) 19.5 24 V
(c)
47. The circuit shown in figure is made of a homogeneous
wire of constant cross section. Find the ratio Q12/Q34
of the amounts of heat liberated per unit time in
conductors 1-2 and 3-4. 3 4
(d) (a) 11 + 2 2

43. The figure shows three circuits I, II and III which (b) 8 + 6 2
are connected to a 3V battery. If the powers dissipated
by the configurations I, II and III are P1, P2 and P3 (c) 11 + 5 2
respectively, then :
(d) 11 + 6 2 1 2
 Current Electricity P-39

48. The current in the circuit shown is constant when the (a) 125 V, 3 A (b) 100 V, 4A
switch is closed. The energy dissipated in the internal (c) 120 V, 4A (d) 120 V, 3A
resistance r of the battery is 15J when a charge of 40C 50. A resistance coil, wired to an external battery is placed
passes through it. For the same amount of charge, 45J inside a thermally insulated cylinder fitted with a
of energy is transferred in the resistor R. Which of the frictionless piston and containing an ideal gas. A current
following gives the emf of the battery? I = 240 mA flows through the coil which has resistance
R= 490 W. At what constant speed v must the piston
r
of mass m = 12 kg move upward in order that the
temperature of the gas remains unchanged? [Assume
that 40% energy is utilised to do work by the gas, and
neglect the work done by atmospheric pressure].

v
R
(a) 0.141 m/s m
15 30 45 60
(a) V (b) V (c) V (d) V Gas
40 40 40 40
(b) 1.41 m/s R g
49. In fig. the voltmeter and ammeter shown are ideal.
Then voltmeter and ammeter readings, respectively,
are (c) 0.24 m/s
V
100 W (d) 2.4 m/s
5W 20 W 25 W
200 V A
5W

Chapter Test 2
1. Two square shaped metal plates of A and B of same
thickness (t) and of same material are connected as
shown in the figure. The side of B is twice that of A.
If the resistance of A and B are RA and RB respectively
RA
then R is
B

é R 4 ro2 R 2 2ro R 3 ù
(a) pb ê + + ú
êë 12 6 9 úû

é R 4 ro2 R 2 ro R 3 ù
(b) pb ê + + ú
êë 6 12 9 úû

é R 4 ro2 R 2 ro R 3 ù
1 (c) pb ê + + ú
(a) (b) 2 (c) 1 (d) 4 êë 12 12 9 úû
2
2. Current density in a cylindrical wire of radius R varies é R 4 ro2 R 2 ro R 3 ù
(d) pb ê + + ú
with radial distance as b(r + ro)2. The current through êë 8 6 12 úû
the section of the wire shown in the figure is
 P-40 Physics

3. For the circuit A and B as shown in the figure, identify (b) i1 = 0, i2 = 0, i3 = 0

the correct option. 2V 4V
(c) i1 = 0, i2 = , i3 =
R R
2V 2V
(d) i1 = 0, i2 = , i3 =
R R
7. The resistance of the series combination of two
resistances is S. when they are joined in parallel the
total resistance is P. If S = nP then the minimum
possible value of n is
(a) Circuit A is for accurate measurement of high (a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 1
resistance and B is for low resistance. 8. To get maximum current in a resistance of 3 ohms,
(b) Circuit A is for accurate measurement of low one can use n rows of m cells (connected in series)
resistance and B is for high resistance. connected in parallel. If the total number of cells is 24
(c) Both circuits can accurately measured high and the internal resistance of a cell is 0.5 ohms then
resistance only. (a) m = 12, n = 2 (b) m = 8, n = 3
(c) m = 2, n = 12 (d) m = 6, n = 4
(d) Both circuits can accurately measured low
9. A uniform metallic wire has a resistance of 18 W and
resistance only.
is bent into an equilateral triangle. Then, the resistance
4. The equivalent resistance between A and B is 6 W. The
between any two vertices of the triangle is:
value of R1 is
(a) 4 W (b) 8 W (c) 12 W (d) 2 W
10. Five conductors are meeting at a point x as shown in
the figure. What is the value of current in fifth
conductor.
(a) 3 A away from x
4A
(b) 1 A away from x x 3A
5A
(c) 4 A away from x
(a) 20 W (b) 10 W 5A
(c) 5 W (d) 25 W (d) 1 A towards x
11. Five identical cells each of internal resistance 1W and
5. In the given part of a circuit, the potential at point B is
emf 5V are connected in series and in parallel with an
zero. Then the potentials at A and C respectively are
external resistance ‘R’. For what value of ‘R’, current
in series and parallel combination will remain the same?
(a) 1 W (b) 25 W (c) 5 W (d) 10 W
12. In a building there are 15 bulbs of 45 W, 15 bulbs of
(a) –1.5 V, +2 V (b) +1.5 V, +2 V 100 W, 15 small fans of 10 W and 2 heaters of 1 kW.
(c) +1.5 V, + 0.5 V (d) +1.5 V, – 0.5 V The voltage of electric main is 220 V. The minimum
6. Find the current in the three resistors as shown in the fuse capacity (rated value) of the building will be:
following figure? (a) 10 A (b) 25 A (c) 15 A (d) 20 A
13. A current source drives a current in a coil of resistance
R1 for a time t. The same source drives current in
another coil of resistance R2 for same time. If heat
generated is same, find internal resistance of source.
R1R 2
(a) (b) R1 + R 2
R1 + R 2
(c) zero (d) R 1R 2
14. An electric bulb rated 220 V, 100 W is connected in
series with another bulb rated 220 V, 60 W. If the voltage
4V 2V
across the combination is 220 V, the power
(a) i1 = 0, i2 = , i3 = consumption by the 100 W bulb will be about
R R
(a) 25 W (b) 14 W (c) 60 W (d) 100 W
 Current Electricity P-41

15. Consider the following statements (A) and (B) and

identify the correct answer. (D) Determination of (4) r = R æ l1 - 1ö
çl ÷
(A) The coil of a heater is cut into two equal halves è 2 ø
and only one of them is used into heater. The heater unknown resistance
will now require half the time to produce the same by meter bridge
amount of heat. (a) (A) ® (4); (B) ® (2); C ® (3); (D) ® (1)
(B) The heat produced is directly proportional to (b) (A) ® (1); (B) ® (3); C ® (4); (D) ® (2)
square of current. (c) (A) ® (3); (B) ® (4); C ® (2); (D) ® (1)
(a) (A) is incorrect but (B) is correct (d) (A) ® (4); (B) ® (3); C ® (2); (D) ® (1)
(b) (A) and (B) both are correct 20. In the circuit shown P ¹ R , the reading of the
(c) (A) and (B) both are incorrect
galvanometer is same with switch S open or closed.
(d) (A) is correct and (B) is incorrect
Then
16. If the length of the filament of a heater is reduced by
10%, the power of the heater will (a) IR = IG
P Q
(a) increase by about 9%
(b) increase by about 11% (b) IP = IG S
(c) increase by about 19% R G
(c) IQ = IG
(d) decrease by about 10% V
17. Two cities are 150 km apart. Electric power is sent (d) IQ = IR
from one city to another city through copper wires.
The fall of potential per km is 8 volt and the average 21. Resistance of 12 W and X W are connected in parallel
resistance per km is 0.5 W. The power loss in the wires in the left gap and resistances of 9 W and 7 W are
is : connected in series in the right gap of the meter bridge.
(a) 19.2 W (b) 19.2 kW(c) 19.2 J (d) 12.2 kW If the balancing length is 36 cm, then the value of
18. The figure shows a meter-bridge circuit, X = 12W and resistance X is
R = 18W. The jockey J is at the null point. If R is (a) 72 W (b) 54 W (c) 36 W (d) 64 W
made 8W, through the jockey J have to be moved by 4 Numeric Answer Questions
× A cm to obtain null point again then find the value of
22. A rectangular parallelopiped is measured as
A. 1 cm × 1 cm × 100 cm. If its specific resistance is
+ – 3 × 10–7 Wm, then the resistance between its two
opposite rectangular faces will be______×–7 W.
X R 23. 10 resistors each of resistance 10W can be connected
in such as to get maximum and minimum equivalent
resistance. The ratio of maximum and minimum
equivalent resistance will be _____ .
A J B 24. A potential V0 is applied across a uniform wire of
resistance R. The power dissipation is P1. The wire is
(a) 2 (b) 5 (c) 8 (d) 6 then cut into two equal halves and a potential of V0 is
applied across the length of each half. The total power
19. Match the entries of Column-I with their correct
dissipation across two wires is P2. The ratio P2 : P1 is
mathematical expressions in Column-II
Column-I Column-II x :1. The value of x is ________.
25. If the potential difference between B and D is zero,
(A) Balanced condition (1) R1 = R3
R2 R4 1
the value of x is W. The value of n is ..........
of wheatstone bridge n
R l1
(B) Comparison of emf of (2) = B
xW
S 100 - l1 6W

two cells. 3W 1W

(C) Determination of (3) E1 = l1 1W

2W
xW
E 2 l2 D
internal resistance of
a cell
 P-42 Physics

Past Years JEE Main Questions

1. The resistances of the platinum wire of a platinum 7. In a metre - bridge when a resistance in the left gap is 2W
resistance thermometer at the ice point and steam point are and unknown resistance in the right gap, the balance
8 W and 10 W respectively. After inserting in a hot bath of length is found to be 40 cm. On shunting the unknown
temperature 400°C, the resistance of platinum wire is : resistance with 2W, the balance length changes by:
[2024] [2024]
(a) 2 W (b) 16 W (c) 8 W (d) 10 W (a) 62.5 cm (b) 22.5 cm (c) 20 cm (d) 65 cm
2. An electric toaster has resistance of 60 W at room 8. The resistance per centimeter of a meter bridge wire is r,
temperature (27 °C). The toaster is connected to a 220 V with XW resistance in left gap. Balancing length from left
supply. If the current flowing through it reaches 2.75 A, end is at 40 cm with 25 W resistance in right gap. Now the
the temperature attained by toaster is around : wire is replaced by another wire of 2r resistance per
(if a = 2 × 10–4/°C) [2024] centimeter. The new balancing length for same settings
(a) 694 ° C (b) 1235° C (c) 1694 °C (d) 1667 °C will be at [2024]
3. In the given figure R1 = 10W, R2 = 8W, R3 = 4W and R4 = 8W. (a) 20 cm (b) 10 cm (c) 80 cm (d) 40 cm
Battery is ideal with emf 12V. Equivalent resistant of the 9. Given below are two statements:
circuit and current supplied by battery are respectively. Statement I : The equivalent resistance of resistors in a
[2024] series combination is smaller than least resistance used in
R1 the combination.
Statement II : The resistivity of the material is independent
of temperature.
+ R4 In the light of the above statements, choose the correct
12 V R2 R3
– answer from the options given below: [2023]
(a) Statement I is false but Statement II is true
(b) Both Statement I and Statement II are false
(a) 12 W and 11.4 A (b) 10.5 W and 1.14 A (c) Statement I is true but Statement II is false
(c) 10.5 W and 1 A (d) 12 W and 1 A
(d) Both Statement I and Statement II are true
4. Two cells are connected in opposition as shown. Cell E 1
10. A wire of resistance 160 W is melted and drawn in wire of
is of 8V emf and 2W internal resistance; the cell E2 is of 2V
one-fourth of its length. The new resistance of the wire
emf and 4W internal resistance. The terminal potential
will be [2023]
difference of cell E2 is _______ V. [2024]
(a) 10 W (b) 640 W (c) 40 W (d) 16 W
E1 E2
A B C 11. In a metallic conductor, under the effect of applied electric
field, the free electrons of the conductor [2023]
(a) drift from higher potential to lower potential
(b) move in the curved paths from lower potential to
higher potential
5. The number of electrons flowing per second in the filament (c) move with the uniform velocity throughout from
of a 110 W bulb operating at 220 V is : lower potential to higher potential
(Given e = 1.6 × 10–19 C) [2024] (d) move in the straight line paths in the same direction
(a) 31.25 × 1017 (b) 6.25 × 1018
12. The equivalent resistance of the circuit shown below
(c) 6.25 × 1017 (d) 1.25 × 1019
between points a and b is : [2023]
6. The ratio of heat dissipated per second through the
resistance 5 W and 10 W in the circuit given below is :
[2024]
20W 4W 4W 4W
(a) 1 : 2 5W
4W 4W
(b) 2 : 1
10W
(c) 4 : 1 a b
(d) 1 : 1 16W
10 V (a) 24W (b) 3.2W (c) 20W (d) 16W
 Current Electricity P-43

13. A cell of emf 90 V is connected across series combination r1r2

of two resistors each of 100 W resistance. A voltmeter of (a) r1 – r2 (b)
r1 + r2
resistance 400 W is used to measure the potential difference
across each resistor. The reading of the voltmeter will be: r1 + r2
(c) (d) r2 – r1
[2023] 2
(a) 40 V (b) 45 V (c) 80 V (d) 90 V 22. The combination of two identical cells, whether connected
14. In the given circuit, the terminal potential difference of in series or parallel combination provides the same current
the cell is : [2023] through an external resistance of 2W . The value of internal
resistance of each cell is : [2022]
3V (a) 2W (b) 4W (c) 6W (d) 8W
4W 4W 23. Two cells of same emf but different internal resis-
1W
tances r1 and r2 are connected in series with a resis-
(a) 2 V (b) 4 V (c) 1.5 V (d) 3 V tance R. The value of resistance R, for which the
15. In the circuit shown, the energy stored in the capacitor is potential difference across second cell is zero, is
n mJ. The value of n is ______. [2023] [2022]
(a) r2 – r1 (b) r1 – r2
3W 4W
(c) r1 (d) r2
6 mF 24. Given below are two statements: One is labelled as
Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R.
12V Assertion A: Alloys such as constantan and manganin
9W 2W
are used in making standard resistance coils.
Reason R: Constantan and manganin have very small
value of temperature coefficient of resistance.
In the light of the above statements, choose the correct
16. Figure shows a part of an electric circuit. The potentials answer from the options given below. [2022]
at points a, b and c are 30 V, 12 V and 2V respectively. The (a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation
current through the 20W resistor will be. [2023] of A.
b (b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct
a 20W explanation of A.
10W (c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false but R is true.
30W c 25. Current measured by the ammeter A in the reported
(a) 0.4 A (b) 0.2A
circuit when no current flows through 10 W resistance
(c) 0.6 A (d) 1.0 A
will be _________ A. [2022]
17. Two identical heater filaments are connected first in parallel
and then in series. At the same applied voltage, the ratio of
heat produced in same time for parallel to series will be:
[2023]
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 1 : 2 (d) 1 : 4
18. Ratio of thermal energy released in two resistor R and 3R
connected in parallel in an electric circuit is : [2023]
(a) 3 : 1 (b) 1 : 1 (c) 1 : 3 (d) 1 : 27
19. A wire of resistance R1 is drawn out so that its length is
increased by twice of its original length. The ratio of new
resistance to original resistance is: [2022] 26. A conducting wire of length ‘l ’, area of cross-section A
(a) 9 : 1 (b) 1 : 9 (c) 4 : 1 (d) 3 : 1 and electric resistivity r is connected between the
20. Two metallic wires of identical dimensions are connected is terminals of a battery. A potential difference V is developed
series. If s1 and s 2 are the conductivities of the these between its ends, causing an electric current.
If the length of the wire of the same material is doubled
wires respectively, the effective conductivity of the and the area of cross-section is halved, the resultant
combination is : [2022] current would be: [2021]
s1s 2 2s1s2 s1 + s 2 s1 + s 2
(a) s + s (b) s + s (c) 2s s (d) VA 3 VA 1 rl 1 VA
1 2 1 2 1 2 s1s 2 (a) 4 (b) (c) (d)
rl 4 rl 4 VA 4 rl
21. Two sources of equal emfs are connected in series. This
combination is connected to an external resistance R. The 27. A current through a wire depends on time as i = a0t + bt2
internal resistances of the two sources are r1 and r2 (r1 > r2). where a0 = 20 A/s and b = 8 As–2. Find the charge crossed
If the potential difference across the source of internal through a section of the wire in 15 s. [2021]
resistance r1 is zero then the value of R will be [2022] (a) 2250 C (b) 11250 C (c) 2100 C (d) 260 C
 P-44 Physics

28. The equivalent resistance of the given circuit between the

terminals A and B is : [2021] 35.

In the figure shown, the current in the 10 V battery is close

9 to : [2020]
(a) 0 W (b) 3 W (c) W (d) 1 W
2 (a) 0.71 A from positive to negative terminal
29. If you are provided a set of resistances 2W, 4W, 6W and
8W. Connect these resistances so as to obtain an (b) 0.42 A from positive to negative terminal
(c) 0.21 A from positive to negative terminal
46
equivalent resistance of W. [2021] (d) 0.36 A from negative to positive terminal
3
36. In the circuit, given in the figure currents in different branches
(a) 4W and 6W are in parallel with 2W and 8W in series
(b) 6W and 8W are in parallel with 2W and 4W in series and value of one resistor are shown. Then potential at point
(c) 2W and 6W are in parallel with 4W and 8W in series B with respect to the point A is : [2020]
(d) 2W and 4W are in parallel with 6W and 8W in series (a) + 2 V
30. Due to cold weather a 1 m water pipe of cross–sectional
area 1 cm2 is filled with ice at –10°C. Resistive heating is (b) – 2 V
used to melt the ice. Current of 0.5 A is passed through 4 (c) – 1 V
kW resistance. Assuming that all the heat produced is used
for melting, what is the minimum time required ? (d) + 1 V
(Given latent heat of fusion for water/ice = 3.33 × 105 J kg–1, 37. An electrical power line, having a total resistance of 2 W,
specific heat of ice = 2 × 103 J kg–1 and density of ice = delivers 1 kW at 220 V. The efficiency of the transmission
103 kg / m3 [2021]
line is approximately : [2020]
(a) 0.353 s (b) 35.3 s (c) 3.53 s (d) 70.6 s
31. An electric appliance supplies 6000 J/min heat to the (a) 72% (b) 91% (c) 85% (d) 96%
system. If the system delivers a power of 90W. How long 38. Four resistances of 15 W, 12 W, 4 W and 10 W respectively
it would take to increase the internal energy by 2.5 × 10 3 J ? in cyclic order to form Wheatstone’s network. The
[2021] resistance that is to be connected in parallel with the
(a) 2.5 × 102 s (b) 4.1 × 101s resistance of 10 W to balance the network is _____ W.
(c) 2.4 × 103 s (d) 2.5 × 101s [2020]
32. Consider a 72 cm long wire AB as shown in the figure. The 39. A current of 5 A passes through a copper conductor
galvanometer jockey is placed at P on AB at a distance x
(resistivity) = 1.7×10 – 8Wm) of radius of cross-section 5
cm from A. The galvanometer shows zero deflection.
mm. Find the mobility of the charges if their drift velocity
12W: 6W:
C
is 1.1×10 – 3 m/s. [2019]
G
(a) 1.8m2/Vs (b) 1.5 m2/Vs (c) 1.3 m2/Vs (d) 1.0m2/Vs
40. Drift speed of electrons, when 1.5 A of current flows in a
x
A B copper wire of cross section 5 mm2, is v. If the electron
P
density in copper is 9 × 1028/m3 the value of v in mm/s
The value of x, to the nearest integer, is ________. close to (Take charge of electron to be = 1.6 × 10–19C)
[2021] [2019]
33. Consider four conducting materials copper, tungsten, (a) 0.02 (b) 3 (c) 2 (d) 0.2
mercury and aluminium with resistivity rC, rT, rM and rA 41. For the circuit shown, with R1 = 1.0 W, R2 = 2.0 W, E1 = 2 V
respectively. Then : [2020] and E2 = E3 = 4 V, the potential difference between the
(a) rC > r A > rT (b) r M > r A > rC points ‘a’ and ‘b’ is approximately (in V) : [2019]
(c) r A > rT > rC (d) r A > rM > rC
34. In the given circuit diagram, a wire is joining points B and
D. The current in this wire is: [2020]
(a) 0.4A
(b) 2A
(c) 4A (a) 2.7 (b) 2.3 (c) 3.7 (d) 3.3
(d) zero
 Current Electricity P-45

Past Years JEE Advanced Questions

Integer type (Q. No. 1 & 2) Which of the following statement(s) is(are) correct?
1. In order to measure the internal resistance r1 of a cell (a) The magnitude of current flowing through R1 is
of emf E, a meter bridge of wire resistance R0 = 50 7.2 A.
W, a resistance R0/2, another cell of emf E/2 (internal (b) The magnitude of current flowing through R2 is
1.2 A.
resistance r) and a galvanometer G are used in a circuit, (c) The magnitude of current flowing through R3 is
as shown in the figure. If the null point is found at 4.8 A.
l = 72 cm, then the value of r1 =_____ W. [2021] (d) The magnitude of current flowing through R5 is
2.4 A.
E r1 R0/2 4. In Circuit-1 and Circuit-2 shown in the figures, R1 = 1
W, R2 = 2 W and R3 = 3W.
P1 and P2 are the power dissipations in Circuit-1 and
G Circuit-2 when the switches S1 and S2 are in open
E/2 conditions, respectively.
Q1 and Q2 are the power dissipations in Circuit-1 and
l Circuit-2 when the switches S1 and S2 are in closed
conditions, respectively. [2022]
2. Two resistances R1 = X W and R2 = 1 W are connected R1
to a wire AB of uniform resistivity, as shown in the
figure. The radius of the wire varies linearly along its R1 R2 R3 R2
axis from 0.2 mm at A to 1 mm at B. A galvanometer
R3
(G) connected to the center of the wire, 50 cm from
each end along its axis, shows zero deflection when A S1 R1/2
and B are connected to a battery. The value of X is A S2
B 2R3
_____. [2022]
A B
Circuit-1
Circuit-2
R1 Which of the following statement(s) is(are) correct?
R2
G (a) When a voltage source of 6 V is connected across
A and B in both circuits, P1 < P2 .
A B
(b) When a constant current source of 2 Amp is
connected across A and B in both circuits, P1 >
P2 .
One or More than One Option Correct (Q. No. 3, & 4)
(c) When a voltage source of 6 V is connected across
3. The figure shows a circuit having eight resistances of A and B in Circuit-1, Q1 > P1 .
1 W each, labelled R1 to R8, and two ideal batteries (d) When a constant current source of 2 Amp is
with voltages e1 = 12 V and e2 = 6 V. [2022] connected across A and B in both circuits, Q2 <
Q1 .
R6 5. In a circuit shown in the figure, the capacitor C is
R2 R7
initially uncharged and the key K is open. In this
condition, a current of 1 A flows through the 1 W
e2 R3 e1 R1 resistor. The key is closed at time t = t0. Which of the
R4
following statement(s) is (are) correct? [Adv. 2023]
R5 R8 [Given: e–1 = 0.36]
 P-46 Physics
15 V R
(a) The value of the resistance R is 3 W.
5V 1W
(b) For t < t0, the value of current I1 is 2 A.
(c) At t = t0 + 7.2 ms, the current in the capacitor is
I1 3W 0.6 A.
(d) For t ® ¥, the charge on the capacitor is 12 mC.
K C = 2m F
3W

JEE Advanced Level Questions

One Option Correct R1 kR1
A C
1. Ends of two wires A and B having resistivity rA = 3 ×
10–5 Wm and rB = 6 × 10–5 Wm of same cross section
area are joined together to form a single wire. If the R2 kR2
resistance of the joined wire does not change with
temperature, then find the ratio of their lengths, given
that temperature coefficient of resistivity of wire A and
B D
B is aA = 4 × 10–5/°C and aB = –6 × 10–6/°C. Assume
that mechanical dimensions do not change with
temperature. R1 - R2 + R12 + R22 + 6 R1R2
(a)
3 10 3 1 2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
7 3 10 2 R1 + R2 + R12 + R22 + 6 R1R2
2. In a certain particle accelerator, electrons emerge in (b)
2
pulses at the rate of 250 pulses per second. Each pulse
is of duration of 200ns and the electrons in the pulse R1 - R2 - R12 + R22 + 6 R1 R2
(c)
constitute a current of 250mA. The number of electrons 2
delivered by the accelerator per pulse is (d) None of these
(a) 8.00 × 1010 (b) 5.00 × 108 5. A hank of uninsulated wire consisting of seven and a
(c) 3.13 × 1011 (d) 9.60 × 1010 half turns is stretched between two nails hammered
3. Six identical resistors are connected as shown in the into a board to which the ends of the wire are fixed.
figure. The resistance of the circuit between the nails is
The equivalent resistance will be determined with the help of electrical measuring
R
P Q instruments. Determine the proportion in which the
(a) maximum between P and R resistance will change if the wire is unwound so that
R R the ends remain to be fixed to the nails.
R
(b) maximum between Q and R R R
(a) 225 (b) 15
(c) maximum between P and Q (c) 240 (d) 250
R 6. A, B and C are voltmeters of resistance R, 1.5 R and
(d) All are equal 3R respectively as shown in the figure. When some
4. The circuit diagram shown in figure consists of a very potential difference is applied between X and Y, the
large (infinite) number of elements. The resistances of voltmeter readings are VA, VB and VC respectively. Then
the resistors in each subsequent element differ by a
B
factor of k from the resistances of the resistors in the
A
previous elements. Determine the resistance R AB X Y
between points A and B if the resistances of the first C

element are R1 and R2. (k = 1/2)

 Current Electricity P-47

(a) VA ¹ VB = VC (a) 0.10 m e0 = 6 V 8W

(b) VA = VB ¹ VC
(c) VA ¹ VB ¹ VC (b) 0.25 m A B
r2
(d) VA = VB = VC e2

7. A 12 cm wire is given a shape (c) 0.50 m G

X Y
of a right angled triangle ABC A
(d) 0.75 m e1 r1
having sides 3 cm, 4 cm and 5 11. A given resistor cannot carry current exceeding 20 A,
cm as shown in the figure. 3 cm 5 cm without exceeding its maximum power dissipation
The resistance between two ratings. By forced air cooling suppose that we increase
ends (AB, BC, CA) of the B C the rate at which heat can be carried by a factor of 2.
4 cm Now the maximum current that the resistor can carry
respective sides are measured
one by one by a multi-meter. is
The resistances will be in the ratio of (a) 10 A (b) 20 2 A
(a) 3 : 4 : 5 (b) 9 : 16 : 25
(c) 27 : 32 : 35 (d) 21 : 24 : 25 (c) 30 2 A (d) 40 A
8. Consider the following statements regarding the 12. Two cities are 150 km apart. Electric power is sent
network shown in the figure : from one city to another city through copper wires.
The fall of potential per km is 8 volt and the average
resistance per km is 0.5 W. The power loss in the wires
is :
(a) 19.2 W (b) 19.2 kW
(c) 19.2 J (d) 12.2 kW
1. The equivalent resistance of the network between
13. Forty electric bulbs are connected in series across a
4R
points A and B is 3 . 220 V supply. After one bulb is fused the remaining 39
are connected again in series across the same supply.
2. The current in resistor 3 R is zero. The illumination will be
3. The potential difference across R is equal to the (a) more with 40 bulbs than with 39
potential difference across 2R. (b) more with 39 bulbs than with 40
Which of the above statement (s) is/are correct ? (c) equal in both the cases
(a) 1 alone (b) 2 alone (d) in the ratio 402 : 392
(c) 2 and 3 (d) 1, 2 and 3 14. A copper wire and an iron wire, each having an area of
9. Point a in figure is maintained at a constant a cross-section A and lengths L1 and L2 are joined end
potential of 300 V above ground. The to end. The copper end is maintained at a potential V1
reading of a voltmeter of the proper range, and the iron end at a lower potential V2. If s1 and s2
and of resistance 3 × 10 4 W , when 100 kW
are the conductivities of copper and iron respectively,
connected between point b and ground is then the potential of the junction will be
b
nearly : s1V1 s 2V2
(a) 10 V +
200 kW s1V1 + s 2V2 L1 L2
(b) 42 V (a) (b)
(s1 / L1 ) + (s 2 / L2 ) (s1 / L1 ) + (s 2 / L2 )
(c) 50 V
(d) 62 V (s1 / L1 ) + (s 2 / L2 ) s1V1 - s 2V2
(c) (d)
s1V1 + s 2V2 (s1 / L1 ) - (s 2 / L2 )
10. A battery of emf E0 = 6 V is connected across a 2 m
long uniform wire having resistance 4W/m. The cells 15. Two rods are joined end to end, as shown. Both have
a cross-sectional area of 0.01 cm2. Each is 1 meter
of small emf e1 = 2 V and e2 = 3 V having internal
long. One rod is of copper with a resistivity of 1.7 ×
resistance 2 W & 1 W respectively are connected as
10 –6 ohm-centimeter, the other is of iron with a
shown in the figure. The null point will be obtained at
resistivity of 10–5 ohm-centimeter.
 P-48 Physics

How much voltage is required to produce a current of are identical, the internal resistance of the battery is
1 ampere in the rods? V negligible.
(Consider all ammeters and voltmeters as non-ideal.)
(a) 0.117 V
(b) 0.00145 V (a) 6.67 mA
100 A1
(c) 0.0145 V
(b) 3.12 mA 4V
(d) 1.7 × 10–6 V Cu Fe A2

16. A resistance of 2W is connected across one gap of a (c) 1.12 mA 100 V

metre-bridge (the length of the wire is 100 cm) and an
unknown resistance, greater than 2W, is connected (d) 5.14 mA
across the other gap. When these resistances are
interchanged, the balance point shifts by 20 cm. 21. The current in the circuit shown is constant when the
Neglecting any corrections, the unknown resistance is switch is closed. The energy dissipated in the internal
(a) 3W (b) 4W (c) 5W (d) 6W resistance r of the battery is 15J when a charge of 40C
17. The effective resistance between the terminals A and passes through it. For the same amount of charge, 45J
B is. of energy is transferred in the resistor R. Which of the
following gives the emf of the battery?
W

(a) 5 W r
10

10
W

5W
(b) 10 W
W
10

5W 10 W
A
(c) 15 W
B
5W
(d) 20 W
R
18. The incorrect option in the given circuit if the reading
15 30 45 60
of ammeter is zero is (a) V (b) V (c) V (d) V
40 40 40 40
e( R + r ) e1 r
(a) The value of e1 will be 22. A concealed circuit (black box) consisting of resistors
R
has four terminals (figure). If a voltage is applied
e1 R
(b) Current in R is between clamps 1 and 2 when clamps 3 and 4 are
r+R disconnected, the power liberated is N1 = 40W, and
(c) Value of e1 will be e 2R
A when the clamps 3 and 4 are connected, the power
e
(d) Potential across 2R is zero. liberated is N2 = 80W. If the same source is connected
19. In the given circuit, the switch S is closed at time t = to the clamps 3 and 4, the power liberated in the circuit
0. The charge Q on the capacitor at any instant t is when the clamps 1 and 2 are disconnected is N3 =
given by 20W. The power N4 consumed in the circuit when the
Q(t) = Q(1 – e–at). Find the value a in terms of given clamps 1 and 2 are connected and the same voltage is
parameters as shown in the circuit. applied between the clamps 3 and 4 is
R1 + R 2 R1 1 3
(a) CR1R 2 2 4
S
R1 + 2R 2 C (a) 40W (b) 20W (c) 10W (d) 60W
R2
(b) 2CR R +
1 2 V
–
R1R 2 One or More Than One Option Correct
(c)
C(R1R 2 )
Directions : Each of these questions has 4 choices (a),
2R1R 2 (b), (c) and (d) for its answer out of which one or more
(d) C(R + 2R )
1 2 than one is correct.
20. In the figure ammeter A1 reads a current of 10mA, 23. Which of the following statements is/are correct?
while the voltmeter reads a potential difference of 3V. (a) Drift speed vd is the average speed between two
What does ammeter A2 in mA read ? The ammeters successive collisions.
 Current Electricity P-49

(b) If Dl is the average distance moved between two (c) Current I depends sensitively on R’
collision and Dt is the corresponding time, then
V
Dl (d) I ³ always
vd = lim . . r+R
Dt ® 0 Dt 27. In the circuit shown in Fig. the cell is ideal with emf 9
(c) When a current is established in a wire, the free V. If the resistance of the coil of galvanometer is 1 W,
electrons drift in the direction opposite to the cur- then
rent and so the number of free electrons in the
C
wire continuously decrease.
(d) Charge is a conserved quantity. R1 = 4 W R2 = 5 W
24. Temperature dependence of resistivity r(T) of
semiconductors, insulators and metals is significantly A
G
B
based on the following factors
(a) number of charge carriers can change with temperature C1 = 10 µF C2 = 8 µF
T D
(b) time interval between two successive collisions can
depend on T
(c) length of material can be a function of T (a) no current flows in the galvanometer
(d) mass of carriers is a function of T (b) charge flowing through 8 µF is 40 µC
25. A charged particle having a positive charge q approaches (c) potential difference across 10 µF is 5 V
a grounded metallic sphere of radius R with a constant (d) potential difference across 10 µF is 4 V
speed v as shown in the figure. Now choose the correct 28. Which of the following statements is/are correct?
alternative (s). (a) Kirchoff¢s junction rule follows from conserva-
tion of charge.
(b) Kirchoff¢s loop rule follows from conservation of
q momentum.
R
v (c) Two non-ideal batteries are connected in series.
The equivalent emf is larger than either of the two.
(d) The equivalent emf of the batteries will be aver-
age of the two.
29. Which of the following is/are correct?
(a) As the charge draws nearer to the surface of the (a) If a constant potential difference is applied across
sphere, a current flows into the ground. a bulb, the current slightly decreases as time passes
(b) As the charge draws nearer to the surface of the and then becomes constant.
sphere, a current flows out of the ground into the (b) The resistance of the metal increases with tempera-
sphere. ture.
(c) As the charged particle draws nearer, the (c) Three pin connections reduce heating of connect-
magnitude of current flowing in the connector ing cables.
joining the shell to the ground increases. (d) In each electrical circuit, the thermal power gen-
(d) As the charged particle draws nearer, the erated is equal to the rate of work done by bat-
magnitude of current flowing in the connector tery.
joining the sphere to the ground decreases. 30. An element with emf e and internal resistance r as
26. Consider a simple circuit shown in figure stands for a connected across an external resistance R. The
variable resistance R'. R' can vary from R0 to infinity, maximum power in external circuit is 9 W. The current
r is internal resistance of the battery (r << R << R0). flowing through the circuit in these conditions is 3A.
Then which of the following is /are correct?
R' (a) e = 6 V (b) r = R
(c) r = 1 W (d) r = 3 W
A B 31. In the circuit shown, the current in
I 10V 2W 2W

V r 1W
8W
(a) Potential drop across AB is nearly constant as R’ is 10V

varied
4W
(b) Current through R’is nearly a constant as R’ is
varied
 P-50 Physics

(a) 4 W resistance is 2.5 A 37. Figure shows a balanced Wheatstone bridge.

(b) 4 W resistance is 0 A R=5W D Q = 50 W
(c) 8 W resistance is 2.5 A A C
(d) 8 W resistance is 0 A
32. Mark the statements is/are S = 10 W P = 100 W
(a) A stream of positively charged particle produces B
an electric field E at a certain distance from it.
(b) A current currying conductor produces an elec- G
tric field 2E at the same distance. (a) If P is slightly increased, the current in the
(c) Electric field outside the conducting wire which galvanometer flows from C to A.
carries a constant current is zero. (b) If P is slightly increased, the current in the
(d) Net charge on conducting wire is zero. galvonometer flows from A to C.
33. Two electric bulb rated 25 W, 220 V and 100 W, 220 (c) If Q is slightly increased, the current in the
V are connected in series across a 220 V voltage galvanometer flows from C to A.
(d) If Q is slightly increased, the current in the
source. The 25 W and 100 W bulbs now draw P1 and
galvonometer flows from A to C.
P2 powers, respectively.
38. In fig, voltmeter is not ideal. If the voltmeter is removed
(a) P1 = 16 W (b) P1 = 4 W from R1 and then put across R2, what will be the effect
(c) P2 = 16 W (d) P2 = 4 W on current I? Given R1 > R2.
34. A voltmeter and an ammeter are connected in series to V
an ideal cell of emf E. The voltmeter reading is V, and
the ammeter reading is I. Then
R1 R2
(a) V < E
(b) the voltmeter resistance is V/I I
(c) the potential difference across the ammeter is E – V
E
(d) voltmeter resistance + ammeter resistance = E/I (a) decreases
35. The correct statements is/are (b) remains same
(a) A larger dry cell has higher emf. (c) increases
(b) The emf of a dry cell is independent of its size. (d) I would have been same if volmeters were ideal
(c) In a simple battery circuit, the point of the lowest 39. For the circuit shown in the figure
potential is negative terminal of the battery.
(d) When two conducting wires of different resistivity
2kW R1
having same cross section area are joined in series, I
the electric field in them would be equal when they
carry current.
6kW R2 RL
36. Two conducting spheres of radii r and 2r are placed at 24 V 1.5kW

very large separation. Each spheres possesses charge

Q. These spheres are connected with a conducting
wire of resistance R. Then, which of the following is (a) the current I through the battery is 7.5 mA
true ? (b) the potential difference across RL is 18 V
Q (c) ratio of powers dissipated in R1 and R2 is 3
(a) Initial current is 8pe rR (d) if R1 and R2 are interchanged, magnitude of the
0
power dissipated in RL will decrease by a factor
Q
(b) Initial current is 4pe rR of 9
0 40. In the circuit shown; i1
(c) Current reduces to half the initial current after time (a) i1 = 2 A i 3
12p Î0 rR ln 2 (b) i2 = 9 A 10 W 20 W 30 W
i
(d) Current reduces to half the initial current after time i2
8p Î0 rR ln 2
(c) i3 = 5 A
3 (d) i = 11 A 60V
 Current Electricity P-51

41. In a meter bridge, the point D is a neutral point (figure). 45. Choose the correct options for the circuit shown.
R S E K
B

A l1 G C C1
100 – l1
D
R1 R2 C2
A B

R3
(a) The meter bridge can have no other neutral. A point
for this set of resistances. (a) The current through the battery in the circuit
immediately after the key K is closed is E/R1
(b) When the jockey contacts a point on meter wire
(b) The current through the battery in the circuit a
left of D, current flows to B from the wire.
long time interval after the key K is closed is E/
(c) When the jockey contacts a point on the meter wire
(R1 + R3)
to the right of D, current flows from B to the wire
(c) The current through the battery in the circuit
through galvanometer.
immediately after the key K is closed is E/R3
(d) When R is increased, the neutral point shifts to
(d) The current through the battery in the circuit a
left. long time interval after the key K is closed is E/
42. The adjacent figure shows (R1 + R2)
a resistance network with 46. The potential difference between points A and B in the
A
value of each resistance circuit shown in Fig. is 16 V. Then
mentioned. Choose the
correct options R
R R 4W 9 V 1W D3 V 3W
A B
(a) RCD = R/2 R B R
C D
(b) RAD = (9/5) R R/2
R/2 R/2 2W
(c) RAC = (5/9) R E (a) the current through the 2W resistance is 3.5 A
(d) RAD = (5/9) R (b) the current through the 4W resistance i s 2.5 A
43. Choose the correct options for the circuit shown. (c) the current through 3W resistance is 1.5 A
R
Earth (d) the potential difference between the terminals of
the 9 V battery is 7V
3R R
P 47. Study the following circuit diagram in Fig. and mark
3V
4V the correct options.
Earth V = 18.0 V
(a) Potential of the point P is 7V.
(b) Current in the 3R resistance is 7/R.
(c) Current in the 3R resistance is 7/3R.
6. 00 W 6.00 µF
(d) Potential of the point P is 3V.
44. Choose the correct options if a current source E2 is a b
S
short-circuited. The parameters of the elements of the
circuit should be assumed to be specified. 3.00 W 3.00 µF

E1 E2
(a) The potential of point a with respect to point b in
the figure when switch S is open is 6 V
R (b) The points a and b are the same potential, when S
is opened.
(a) Current may increase (c) The charged flowing through switch S when it is
(b) Current may decrease closed is 54 µC
(c) Current must increase (d) The final potential of b with respect to ground
(d) Current must decrease when switch S is closed is 8V.
 P-52 Physics

48. The capacitor C is initially without charge. X is now (a) R1 = 5R/3 (b) R2 = 4R/3
joined to Y for a long time, during which H1 heat us (c) R1 = 4R/3 (d) R2 = 5R/3
produced in the resistance R. X is now joined to Z for 53. Consider 12 resistors arranged symmetrically in shape
a long time, during which H2 heat is produced in R of bipyramid ABCDEF. The resistance of each resistor
(see fig). is R.
(a) H1 = H2 E C
C R
1 Y R
(b) H1 = H 2 B
2 E D
Z X F
(c) H1 = 2H2
A
(d) The maximum energys
stored in C at any time is H1. (a) The effective resistance between E and F is R/2
(b) The effective resistance between A and C is R/2
49. Consider a conductor of variable cross section in which
current is flowing from cross section 1 to 2. The (c) The effective resistance between A and D is R/2
(d) If a battery is connected between D and F then
1 the potential of points A and C will be same
2
54. The network shown in the figure is part of some
(a) current passing through both the cross sections bigger circuit. Charge on capacitor (C = 1 F) at
is the same any time t is q = 3(1 – e–t ) in coulombs. If at t =
(b) current through 1 is less than that through 2 0 the potentials of points A and B is 20 V, then at
(c) drift velocity of electrons at 1 is less that at 2 t = 0 choose the following
(d) drift velocity is same at both the cross-sections
50. Two bulbs consume same energy when opreated at 200 20V A
V and 300 V, respectively. When these bulbs are i +q
C = 1F
connected and series across a dc source of 500 V, then –q
(a) ratio of potential difference across them is 3/2 1W
1W R
(b) ratio of potential difference across them is 4/9 B
(c) ratio of power produced in them is 4/9 20V 2V P
(d) ratio of power produced in them is 2/3 Earth
51. For the circuit shown in figure. (a) current in branch AP is 3 A
5 B 8
(b) current through R is 7 A
(c) value of R is 2 W
25V
10 2
(d) value of R is 1 W
4
55. In the circuit shown in fig. mark the correct options.
A 15 2 R1 = 6.0 W R 2 = 4.0 W
(a) potential difference between points B and A is 20V f e
(b) potential difference between points B and A is 10V
(c) the current in the 4W resistor is 0.25 A g d
(d) the current in the 4W resistor is 0.5 A 17 W W
52. The diagram shows a modified meter bridge, which is 2.0 W
used for measuring two unknown resistance at the same
time. When only the first galvanometer is used, for 12 V
obtaining the balance point, it is found at point C. Now h c
the first galvanometer is removed and the second 1.0 W 1.0 W 6. 0V
a b
galvanometer is used, which gives balance point at D. 12 V
Using the details given in the diagram, find out the value
(a) Potential drop across R1 is 3.2 V
of R1 and R2.
R R1 R2 (b) Potential drop across R2 is 5.4 V
(c) Potential drop across R1 is 7.2 V
G G
(d) Potential drop across R2 is 4.8 V

A B
C D

AB = L, AC = L/4 and AD = 2L/3

 Current Electricity P-53

Match the Columns

Directions : Each question contains statements given in two columns which have to be matched. Statements (A,
B, C, D) in column I have to be matched with statements (p, q, r, s, t) in column II.
56. A capacitor of capacitance 0.1 µF is connected to a battery of emf 8 V (as shown in Fig) under the steady - state
condition.
Column I Column II
R1 = 10 W N A
(A) Charge on the capacitor (p) 0.4 mC M

20 W
(B) Current in AC branch (q) 0.2 A 8V 20 W 10 W
0.1 µF
(C) Current in AB branch (r) 0.1 A C
B 10 W

(D) Current in R connected between M and N (s) 0.4 A

57. A network consisting of three resistors, three batteries, and a capacitor is shown in fig. In steady state
Column I Column II
A B C
(A) Current in branch EB is (p) 10 mC
3W
5W 10 V 4W
(B) Current in branch CB is (q) 0.5 A 5 µF
8V
(C) Current in branch EB is (r) 1.5 A F E D
12 V
(D) Charge on capacitor is (s) 5 mC
58. In the circuit shown in fig. the battery, ammeter and voltmeter are ideal and the switch S is initially closed as shown.
When S is opened, match the parameters of column I with the effects in column II
R R
Column I Column II

(A) Equivalent resistance across the battery (p) Remains same

V
(B) Power dissipated by left resistance R (q) Increases S

(C) Voltmeter reading (r) Decreases E

A
(D) Ammeter reading (s) Becomes zero
59. In the left side (Column I) there are four different conditions and in the right side (Column II), there are ratios of heat
produced in each resistance of each condition :
Column I Column II
(A) Two wires of same resistance are connected (p) 1:2
in series and same current is passed through them
(B) Two wires of resistance R and 2R ohm are (q) 4:1
connected in series and same potential
difference is applied across them
(C) Two wires of same resistance are connected (r) 1:1
in parallel and same current is flowing
through them
(D) Two wires of resistances in the ratio 1 : 2 are (s) 2:1
connected in parallel and current i is across them
 P-54 Physics

60. A cell of [Link] and internal resistance r is connected across a variable load resistance R. Match the statements given
in column I to conductions gives in column II.
Column I Column II
E2
(A) Thermal power generated in the load resistance is less than (p) R = r
4r
E
(B) Potential difference across load is more than (q) R = 0
2
2 R
E
(C) Thermal power generated in the cell is (r) r =
r 4
3R
(D) Work done by battery is positive (s) r=
2
R
(t) r=
2
61. In fig, the resistance R is variable and r is the internal resistance of the battry of emf E.
Column I Column II R
(A) Terminal potential difference across the cell to be maximum (p) R > r
(B) Power transferred to R is less than the maximum possible (q) R < r
(C) Power dissipated in the cell is maximum (r) R = ¥
(D) Faster drift of ions in the elecolyte in the cell will be for (s) R = 0 r
E
62. In the circuit shown in the figure the electromotive force of the battery is 9V and its internal resistance is 15W. The two
identical voltmeters and the ammeter can all be considered ideal (i.e. voltmeter is of very large resistance and ammeter is of
negligible resistance)
V V
Column I Column II
K
(A) Voltmeter (Left) reading (in volts) when K is open (p) 4.5 10 20
(B) Voltmeter (right) reading (in volts) when K is closed (q) 3
(C) Ammeter reading (in amperes) when K is closed (r) 4
9V 15
(s) 0.2 A
63. Column I Column II
(A) With increase in temperature (p) Drift velocity increases
(B) With increase in length (q) Resistance increases
(C) With increase in area of cross-section (r) Resistance decreases
(D) With increase in volume (s) Number of conduction electrons increases
64. Consider a network of resistances each of value of R as shown in figure.
Column I Column II B
(A) Equivalent of net work between A and C is (p) same R R
(B) Equivalent resistance between A an B (q) 5/8 R
A C
(C) Potential of B and D when voltage source is applied across (r) R R
A and C is R R
(D) Potential of B and D when voltage source is applied across (s) 2 R
D
A and B is (t) different
65. For the circuit shown in Fig, foue cells are arranged. In Column I, the cell number is given, while in Column II, some
statements related to cells are given. Match the entries of Column I with the entries of column II. Cell I
Column I Column II 10 W

(A) Cell I (p) Chemical energy of cell is decreasing

Cell II 2 V, 2 W
(B) Cell II (q) Chemical energy of cell is increasing
(C) Cell III (r) Work done by cell is positive Cell III
1 V, 1 W 3 V, 3 W
(D) Cell IV (s) Thermal energy developed in cell is positive
2 V, 2 W
 Current Electricity P-55

66. Column I gives some electrical circuits in steady state. Column II gives some statements regarding the circuits.
Match the two columns appropriately.
Column I Column II
(A) (p) Reading of voltmeter is 2 V
V R¢
5W 2.5V
Y

A 20W
2µF
X
(B) C = 2µF (q) Reading of ammeter is 0.1 A
X A Y

R¢
V

2V
(C) C = 2µF
A
(r) Current through R¢ is zero
X V
R¢

3V 1V 10W

2V 0V 0V 2V
(D) 20W (s) Charge on capacitor is 2µC
20W 2V
2V
2V
V 20W

2V 2µF
20W
2V
X 20W
A Y
2V
20W 2V
20W

(t) Point marked Y is at lower potential relative to point

marked X

Passage Based Questions 67. The current through battery just after closing the
Directions : This section contains groups of multiple switch is
choice questions based on a paragraph. Each question (a) 6.75 A (b) 8.75 A (c) 2 A (d) 4 A
has 4 choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) for its answer, out of 68. The time after which the charge on capacitor becomes
which only one is correct. 63.2% of maximum charge is
Passage 1 (a) 20 ms (b) 30 ms (c) 10 ms (d) 15 ms
In the circuit shown at t < 0 the switch S is open and 69. Maximum charge on plates of capacitor is
capacitor is uncharged. The switch S is closed at t = 0. (a) 45 mC (b) 120 mC
Then (c) 30 mC (d) 90 mC
B Passage 2
3W 6W A 12-volt battery is connected to two light bulbs, as drawn
A C in figure 1 light bulb 1 has resistance 3 ohms, while light
5µF
4W 4W bulb 2 has resistance 6 ohms. The battery has essentially no
S internal resistance, and all the wires are essentially
D
resistanceless, too.

36 volts
 P-56 Physics

When a light bulb is unscrewed, no 75. At which point D of the wire AB, the potential is equal
current flows through that branch of to the potential at C ?
the circuit. For instance , if light bulb 2
(a) AD = 60 cm. (b) AD = 50 cm.
is unscrewed, current flows only
(c) AD = 40 cm. (d) None of these
around the lower loop of the circuit, bulb 2
76. If the points C and D are connected by a wire, what
which consists of the battery and light
bulb 1. The more current flows through will be the current through it ?
a light bulb, their equivalent resistance (a) zero (b) 1A (c) 2A (d) 3A
bulb 1
is Req = R1 + R2. By contrast, when Numeric/Integer Type Questions
two reisistors are wired in parallel, their
+ – 77. Nine wires each of resistance r = 5W are connected to
net resisance is given by
1 1 1
make a prism as shown in fig. Find the equivalent
= + 12V resistance of the arrangement across AB (in W).
R eq R1 R 2
70. When bulb 1 is screwed in, but bulb 2 is unscrewed, A E
the power generated in bulb 1 is
(a) 4 watt (b) 12 watt D
(c) 36 watt (d) 48 watt
B F
71. Which of the following statement is false?
(a) Some of the energy produced by the light bulb
C
takes the form of heat.
(b) The battery is the source of all the electrons 78. The area of cross-section, length and density of a piece
flowing around the circuit. of metal of atomic weight 60 are 10–6 m2, 1 m, and
(c) The current entering the light bulb equals the 5 × 103 kgm–3, respectively. If every atom contributes
current leaving the light bulb. one free electron, find the drift velocity (in mms–1) of
(d) The potential in the wire to the left of the light bulb electrons in the metal when a current of 16 A passes
differs from the potential in the wire to the right of through it. Avogadro's number is NA = 6 × 1023/mol
that bulb. and charge on an electron is e = 1.6 × 10–19 C.
72. Bulb 2 is now screwed in as a result, bulb 1 79. Find the reading of the ammeters A 1 (in ampere
(a) turns off connected as shown in the network.)
(b) becomes dimmer
(c) stays about the same brightness A1
(d) becomes brighter 12 W 40 W 60 W
73. With both light bulbs screwed in, the current through
the battery is 24 V
A2
(a) 1.2 ampere (b) 2 ampere
(c) 4 ampere (d) 6 ampere
80. The current through a wire depends on time as
Passage 3 i = (20 + 4t). Find the value of x if 100 xc be the
A 6V battery of negligible internal resistance is connected charge crossed through a section of the wire in 10
across a uniform wire AB of length 100cm. The positive second.
terminal of another battery of emf 4V and internal resistance 81. In the circuit shown in figure, find the value of
1W is joined to the point A as shown in figure. Take the unknown resistor R.
potential at B to be zero.
6V 5A
8A R
– 3A
A B
D 20 W 40V 10 W
C
+
4V 1
–
+ 100V
74. What are the potentials at points A and C
(a) 6V, 2V (b) 8V, 4V 82. Compute the value of battery current in the circuit
(c) 6V, 4V (d) 8V, 3V shown in figure. All the resistances are in ohm.
 Current Electricity P-57

6W 87. If the switches S1, S2 and S3 in fig are arranged such

that the current through the battery is minimum, find
i 4W the voltage across points A and B (in V).
+ 88. Two wires of the same length but of different square
4W 12V cross-sections are made from the same material. The
–
sides of the cross sections of the first and second wires
8W
2W are d1 = 1 mm and d2 = 4 mm. The current required to
fuse the wire is I1 = 10A. Determine the current I2 (in
83. A heating coil is rated 100 W, 220 V. The coil is cut in ampere) required to fuse the second wire, assuming
half and two piece are joined in parallel to the same that the amount of heat dissipated to the ambient per
source. Now what is the energy (in × 102 J) liberated second obeys the law Q = kS (T – Tam), where S is the
per second? cross-sectional area of the wire, T is its temperature,
84. Three identical resistors are connected in series. When Tam is the temperature of the ambient away from the
a certain potential difference is applied across the wire, and k is the proportionality factor which is the
combination, the total power dissipated is 27 W. How same for the two wires.
many times the power would be dissipated if the three 89. A wire of length L and 3 identical cells of negligible
resistors were connected in parallel across the same internal resistances are connected in series. Due to the
potential difference? current, the temperature of the wire is raised by DT in
85. Two circuit rings of identical radii and resistance of a time t. A number N of similar cells is now connected
36 W each are placed in such a way that they cross in series with a wire of the same material and cross-
each other's center C 1 and C 2 as shown in Fig. section but of length 2L. The temperature of the wire
Conducting joints are made at intersection point A and is raised by the same amount DT in the same time t.
B of the rings. An ideal cell of emf 20 V is connected the value of N is
across A and B. Find the power delivered by the cell 6W 3W
(in × 102 W).
6W A
A
S2

C1 C2 S1 1W 1W 1W
9W
24 V S3
B B
86. In the circuit shown, each resistance is 2W. The 90. In an electric circuit, a cell of certain emf provides a
potential V1 is as indicated in the circuit. What is the potential difference of 1.25 V across a load resistance
magnitude of V1 in volt? of 5 W. However, it provides a potential difference of
1 V across a load resistance of 2 W. The emf of the
x
cell is given by V . Then the value of x is ________.
10

5V 12 V
V1
P-58 Physics

ANSWER KEYS
Topicwise Multiple Choice Questions (MCQs)
1 (c) 14 (c) 27 (b) 40 (c) 53 (a) 66 (c) 79 (b) 92 (c) 105 (b) 118 (b)
2 (d) 15 (a) 28 (b) 41 (d) 54 (a) 67 (a) 80 (a) 93 (c) 106 (b) 119 (d)
3 (b) 16 (b) 29 (d) 42 (a) 55 (b) 68 (a) 81 (a) 94 (c) 107 (c) 120 (b)
4 (a) 17 (c) 30 (d) 43 (d) 56 (d) 69 (a) 82 (d) 95 (c) 108 (a) 121 (b)
5 (b) 18 (a) 31 (a) 44 (d) 57 (d) 70 (d) 83 (c) 96 (a) 109 (c) 122 (d)
6 (a) 19 (d) 32 (c) 45 (c) 58 (a) 71 (b) 84 (b) 97 (b) 110 (b) 123 (d)
7 (a) 20 (c) 33 (c) 46 (d) 59 (a) 72 (c) 85 (b) 98 (d) 111 (a) 124 (a)
8 (b) 21 (b) 34 (a) 47 (a) 60 (a) 73 (d) 86 (d) 99 (b) 112 (d) 125 (d)
9 (b) 22 (c) 35 (c) 48 (a) 61 (d) 74 (c) 87 (a) 100 (a) 113 (b)
10 (c) 23 (a) 36 (b) 49 (d) 62 (a) 75 (c) 88 (b) 101 (a) 114 (a)
11 (c) 24 (b) 37 (b) 50 (b) 63 (a) 76 (a) 89 (d) 102 (a) 115 (a)
12 (a) 25 (a) 38 (b) 51 (d) 64 (b) 77 (b) 90 (b) 103 (b) 116 (d)
13 (b) 26 (a) 39 (d) 52 (a) 65 (d) 78 (b) 91 (b) 104 (a) 117 (c)
Question Bank Level - 1
1 (None) 5 (c) 9 (a) 13 (d) 17 (b) 21 (c) 25 (d) 29 (c) 33 (d) 37 (c)
2 (b) 6 (d) 10 (b) 14 (a) 18 (c) 22 (b) 26 (b) 30 (d) 34 (d) 38 (b)
3 (d) 7 (c) 11 (a) 15 (c) 19 (b) 23 (b) 27 (d) 31 (c) 35 (a) 39 (d)
4 (a) 8 (a) 12 (a) 16 (a) 20 (b) 24 (d) 28 (a) 32 (b) 36 (b) 40 (b)
Chapter Test - 1
1 (a) 4 (a) 7 (b) 10 (c) 13 (d) 16 (c) 19 (d) 22 (900) 25 (0.25)
2 (d) 5 (c) 8 (d) 11 (b) 14 (d) 17 (c) 20 (d) 23 (1)
3 (a) 6 (b) 9 (d) 12 (d) 15 (d) 18 (d) 21 (3.6) 24 (54)
Question Bank Level - 2
1 (d) 6 (c) 11 (d) 16 (a) 21 (b) 26 (b) 31 (d) 36 (d) 41 (d) 46 (d)
2 (d) 7 (d) 12 (c) 17 (d) 22 (b) 27 (c) 32 (c) 37 (a) 42 (c) 47 (d)
3 (b) 8 (a) 13 (b) 18 (c) 23 (a) 28 (c) 33 (c) 38 (b) 43 (c) 48 (d)
4 (c) 9 (c) 14 (a) 19 (d) 24 (a) 29 (b) 34 (c) 39 (b) 44 (b) 49 (b)
5 (b) 10 (d) 15 (c) 20 (b) 25 (b) 30 (c) 35 (b) 40 (b) 45 (c) 50 (a)
Chapter Test - 2
1 (c) 4 (b) 7 (c) 10 (b) 13 (d) 16 (b) 19 (b) 22 (3) 25 (2)
2 (a) 5 (d) 8 (a) 11 (a) 14 (b) 17 (b) 20 (a) 23 (100)
3 (b) 6 (b) 9 (a) 12 (d) 15 (b) 18 (b) 21 (c) 24 (16)
Past Years JEE Main Questions
1 (b) 6 (b) 11 (b) 16 (a) 21 (a) 26 (d) 31 (a) 36 (d) 41 (d)
2 (c) 7 (a) 12 (b) 17 (a) 22 (a) 27 (b) 32 (48) 37 (d)
3 (d) 8 (d) 13 (a) 18 (a) 23 (a) 28 (d) 33 (b) 38 (10)
4 (6) 9 (b) 14 (a) 19 (a) 24 (a) 29 (d) 34 (b) 39 (d)
5 (a) 10 (a) 15 (75) 20 (b) 25 (10) 30 (b) 35 (c) 40 (a)
Past Years JEE Advanced Questions
1 (3) 2 (5) 3 (a,b,c,d) 4 (c, d) 5 (a, b, c, d)
JEE Advanced Level Questions
1 (c) 15 (a) 29 (a, b) 43 (a, c) 56 (A) - (p); (B) - (r); (C) - (q); (D) - (s) 67 (b) 81 (4)
2 (c) 16 (a) 30 (a, b, c) 44 (a, b) 57 (A) - (r); (B) - (q); (C) - (q); (D) - (p) 68 (a) 82 (6)
3 (c) 17 (a) 31 (a, d) 45 (a, b) 58 (A) - (q); (B) - (r); (C) - (r); (D) - (r) 69 (c) 83 (4)
4 (a) 18 (c) 32 (a, c, d) 46 (a, c, d) 59 (A) - (r); (B) - (s); (C) - (r); (D) - (q) 70 (d) 84 (9)
5 (a) 19 (a) 33 (a, d) 47 (a, c) 60 (A) - (r, s, t); (B) - (r, t); (C) - (q); (D) - (p, q, r, s) 71 (b) 85 (1)
6 (d) 20 (a) 34 (a, b, c, d) 48 (a, d) 61 (A) - (r), (B) - (p, q, r, s), (C) - (s), (D) - (s) 72 (c) 86 (9)
7 (c) 21 (d) 35 (b, c) 49 (a, c) 62 (A) - (q); (B) - (r); (C) - (s) 73 (d) 87 (1)
8 (d) 22 (a) 36 (a, d) 50 (b, c) 63 (A) - (q, s); (B) - (q, s); (C) - (r, s); (D) - (s) 74 (a) 88 (80)
9 (d) 23 (a, d) 37 (b, c) 51 (a, c) 64 (A) - (r); (B) - (q); (C) - (p); (D) - (t) 75 (d) 89 (b)
10 (d) 24 (a, b) 38 (a, d) 52 (a, b) 65 (A) - (q, s); (B) - (p, r); (C) - (p, r, s); (D) - (q, s) 76 (a) 90 (15)
11 (b) 25 (a, c) 39 (a, d) 53 (a, b, c, d) 66 (A) - (p, q, r, t); (B) - (p, r, t); (C) - (p, q, r, s); (D) - (q, t) 77 (3)
12 (b) 26 (a, d) 40 (b,d) 54 (a, b, c) 78 (2)
13 (b) 27 (a, b, d) 41 (a, c) 55 (c, d) 79 (2)
14 (b) 28 (a, c) 42 (a, c, d) 80 (4)
 27 Aldehydes, Ketones and
Carboxylic Acids
Trend Analysis – JEE Main & Advanced

NATURE, ISOMERISM, PREPARATION, PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL

Topic 27.1 PROPERTIES OF ALDEHYDES AND KETONES
CARBONYL GROUP The carbonyl compounds in which carbonyl group is bonded
to oxygen (alternatively replacement of the hydrogen of an
A divalent group in which a double bond ( = ) is present
aldehyde with an OH group) are known as carboxylic acids,
between carbon and oxygen atoms, is called a "carbonyl
and their derivatives (e.g. esters, anhydrides) while in
group" [C = O], which is one of the most important functional compounds where carbon is attached to nitrogen and to
groups in organic chemistry. halogens are called amides and acyl halides respectively.
When oxygen of the carbonyl group is attached to a primary R — C— H
carbon atom (alternatively a carbonyl carbon that bears a ôô
O
hydrogen and an alkyl group), the compound is known as (Aldehyde)
an aldehyde and if it is attached to a secondary carbon
R — C— R ¢ (where R is hydrocarbon radical)
(alternatively a carbonyl carbon that bears two alkyl groups), ôô
the compound is known as a ketone . An aldehyde is produced O
by the oxidation of a primary alcohol, and a ketone is formed (Ketone)

by the oxidation of a secondary alcohol.

 C-2 Chemistry

O O O O O O
C C C C C C

R OH R X R O R' R OR' R NH2

Carboxylic acid Acyl halide; X=(Halogen) Acid anhydride Ester Amide
If the radicals R & R' attached to the ketonic group are identical (R = R'), then ketones are called simple or sym or
symmetrical ketones and if non identical (R ¹ R'), they are called mixed or unsym or unsymmetrical ketones.

Structure of Carbonyl Group Other important difference in carbon-oxygen and carbon-

Like the carbon-carbon double bond of alkenes, the carbon- carbon double bonds lies in the fact that the carbonyl group
oxygen double bond of the carbonyl group is composed of undergoes nucleophilic addition reactions, while olefinic
one s and one p bond. In the carbonyl group, carbon atom bond undergoes electrophilic addition reactions.
is in a state of sp 2 hybridisation. The C—O s-bond is
produced by overlap of an sp 2-orbital of carbon with a PREPARATION OF ALDEHYDES AND
p-orbital of oxygen. On the other hand, the C—O p-bond is KETONES
formed by the sideways overlap of p-orbitals of carbon and 1. By Oxidation of Alcohols (by K2Cr2O7 / H2SO4)
oxygen. The remaining two sp 2-orbitals of carbon form
s-bonds with the s-orbital of hydrogen or sp2-orbitals of (i) Oxidation of primary alcohols gives aldehydes and
carbon of the alkyl group. Now since the three s-bonds of oxidation of secondary alcohols gives ketones.
the carbonyl carbon utilize sp2-orbitals, they lie in one plane [O]
RCH2OH ¾¾¾¾¾¾
® RCHO (Aldehyde)
and are 120° apart (similarity with C = C). K 2Cr2 O7 /H2SO4 (dil.)

Pi bond formed by p-orbitals [O]

R – CH – R ¾¾¾¾¾® R – C – R (Ketone)
| K 2 Cr2 O7 /H 2SO 4 ||
OH O
R
C O Lone pairs of electron (K2Cr2O7 / H2SO4) is a strong oxidising agent.
R Aldehydes are quite susceptible to further oxidation to
acids.
[O] [O]
However, it is important to note that the carbon-oxygen RCH2OH ¾¾¾ ® R–CHO ¾¾¾ ® R–COOH
double bond is different from carbon-carbon double bond. Thus oxidation of primary alcohols is made at the
Due to greater electronegativity of oxygen atom, the p temperature much above the B.P. of aldehyde and thus
electron cloud is attracted towards oxygen. Consequently, aldehydes are vapourised out and prevented from being
oxygen attains a partial negative charge and carbon a partial oxidised.
positive charge. This polar nature of the carbonyl group (ii) Oppenauer Oxidation : This reaction involves in the
causes intermolecular attraction in aldehydes or ketones and oxidation of alcohols to ketones in the presence of
hence accounts for their higher boiling points than that of
aluminium isopropoxide in benzene or toluene solution.
hydrocarbons and ethers of comparable molecular weight.
A large excess of ketone is generally used to proceed
Moreover, polar nature of the carbonyl group also explains
the reaction in the desired direction, as it acts as a
the dipole moment in aldehyde and ketones. However, the
dehydrogenating agent.
high values of dipole moments (2.3 – 2.8 D) of aldehydes
and ketones can’t be accounted for only by inductive effect R CH3
Al(i - Pr O)
; this can be accounted for if carbonyl group is a resonance CHOH + C = O ¾¾¾¾¾
3
®
hybrid of the two structures. R' CH3
2° Alcohol Acetone

R CH3
C=O + CH – OH
R' CH3

Ketone 2° Alcohol
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-3

Mechanism:
O i- Pr
Al (O i-Pr) 2 Al (O i-Pr) 2
+O
:

OH Al (O i- Pr)2 O OH
H –
O i-Pr
+
R R¢ R R¢ R R¢

Pr - i O O i-Pr
Al (O i-Pr) 2
O i-Pr Al
O O
Al O O
O i-Pr
R R¢ O R H
R R¢
O
H R¢
T.S.

O Al (O i-Pr)2
H2O OH
+ O
R R¢

(iii) By N-Bromo succinimide (NBS) : 2. By Catalytic Dehydrogenation of Alcohols

CH2 – CO This method is suitable for volatile alcohols and is of
RCH2OH + | NBr ¾¾® industrial application. In this method alcohol vapours
CH2 – CO are passed over heavy metal catalysts (Ag or Cu).
1° Alcohol N-Bromosuccinimide Primary and secondary alcohols give aldehydes and
CH2 – CO ketones, respectively
RCHO + | NH + HBr
Cu or ZnO / 300° C
R–CH2–OH ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
CH2 – CO ® R–CH = O + H2
Cu or ZnO
Aldehyde Succinimide C6H5 – CH2 – OH ¾¾¾¾¾
300° C
® C6H5–CHO
OH CH2 – CO R
| NBr ¾¾® Cu or ZnO
+ | CHOH C=O
R – CH – R CH2 – CO R 300°C

2° Alcohol N-Bromosuccinimide
3. From Hydrocarbons
R CH2 – CO
NH + HBr (i) By ozonolysis of alkenes : Ozonolysis of alkenes
C=O + |
R CH2 – CO followed by reaction with zinc dust and water gives
aldehydes, ketones or a mixture of both depending on
Ketone Succinimide the substitution pattern of the alkene.
(iv) Mild Oxidising Agent : Only 1° alcohol will get O
oxidised with CrO 3 / Pyridine (Collin's reagent), H O
2 ®
C=C + O3 C C ¾¾¾
controlled oxidation.
Alkene Ozone
RCH2OH + [O] ¾¾® RCHO + H2O
O O
By this reaction, good yield of aldehydes is possible.
Ketones can not be prepared by this method.
2 C=O + H2O2
 C-4 Chemistry

To prevent further oxidation of carbonyl compounds R BH. THF

CH 3C ºº CH ¾¾¾¾¾
2 ® (CH3CH = CH)BR2
by H2O2, zinc is added in the reaction to destroy H2O2
H O /OH - ˆˆ† CH3CH2 CHO
¾¾¾¾¾
2 2 ® CH3CH = CHOH ‡ˆˆ
Zn + H2O2 ® ZnO + H2O
O (iv) By Wacker’s process : Reagent : Acidified aqueous
Zn H 2O solution of PdCl2 and CuCl2
R–CH=CH2 + O3 ¾¾¾¾ ® R–CH=O + H C H

H
CH = CH 2 ô
PdCl2 + H2O, CuCl2
+ O3 ¾¾¾¾
Zn / H 2O
® CH2=CH2 ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
® CH3 — C = O
PdCl + H O, CuCl
CHO CH3–CH=CH2 ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
2 2 2 ® CH — C— CH
3 3
ôô
+ HCHO O
4. From Grignard Reagent
Benzaldehyde
(ii) By hydration of alkynes : Ketones are obtained from acetic and higher esters -
Catalytic acidic hydration : Acetaldehyde is formed R
on passing acetylene in 40% aqueous solution of H2SO4
at 60°C in the presence of 1% HgSO 4. The reaction is R – MgX + R ¢ - C - OR ¢¢ ––® R' – C – OR"
ôô
called "Kucherov reaction". O OMgX
é H - C = CH ù
dil. H 2SO 4 / HgSO 4 ê | ú
HC º CH + HOH ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾® ê
|
ú O
60 °C H OH ú ô
êë H2O
û ¾¾¾
® R ¢ — C = O + R ¢¢ — OH
unstable 5. Oxidation of Nitroalkanes (Nef Reaction)
H Primary nitroalkanes ¾¾® Aldehyde
Tautomerism ô
¾¾¾¾¾® CH3 — C = O Secondary nitroalkanes ¾¾® Ketone
Nitroalkanes are used in this reaction. The a-hydrogen
é ù
dil. H 2SO 4 / HgSO 4
R–C º CH + HOH ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾® ê R -C| = CH 2 ú in nitroalkanes shows acidic character.
° ê ú - H 2O
CH3NO2 + NaOH ¾¾¾ – +
60 C
êë OH úû ¾® [CH2=NO2] Na
Conc. H SO
2 4 ® HCHO
Tautomerism
¾¾¾¾¾¾
¾¾¾¾¾® R — C— CH3 Conc. H 2SO4
ôô RCH2NO2 + NaOH ¾¾¾¾¾¾ ® RCHO
O O
(iii) Hydroboration of alkanes : Hydroboration of terminal ôô
Conc. H2SO4
alkanes followed by oxidation of the intermediate R – CH– NO 2 + NaOH ¾¾¾¾¾¾
® R — C— R
ô
(vinylboranes) with alkaline hydrogen peroxide gives R
aldehydes.
6. By Hydrolysis of Oximes
BH .THF
CH3C ºº CH ¾¾¾¾¾
3 ®[CH3CH = CH]3B CH3– CH=NOH + H2O ¾¾® CH3CHO + NH2OH
- Acetaldoxime
H2O2 /OH
¾¾¾¾¾ ˆˆ† CH3 CH2 CHO
® CH3CH = CHOH ‡ˆˆ CH3
Propanal |
Similar reaction with non-terminal alkynes gives CH3 - C = N - OH + H O ¾¾®
2
ketones CH3
|
CH3C ºº CCH3 ¾¾¾¾¾
3 BH .THF
®[CH3CH = C ]3 B CH3 - C = O + NH2– OH
ô
CH3 Acetone oxime

H O
C6H5
¾¾¾®
2 2
-
CH3CH = COH ¾¾
® CH3CH 2 COCH3 C = N – OH + H2O ¾¾®
OH ô Butanone-2 H
CH3
Benzaldoxime
To get good yield of vinylboranes and hence aldehydes,
sterically hindered alkylboranes should be used instead C6H5– CHO + NH2– OH
of borane itself. Benzaldehyde
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-5

Note :
(a) Formaldehyde can't be prepared by this method
(b) Only ethyne gives acetaldehyde while other alkynes give ketones.

Swern oxidation:
This method is broadly useful for the synthesis of both aldehydes or ketones from primary or secondary alcohols
respectively.
H

OH (i) DMSO, (COCl)2, low temp.

(ii) Et3N
1° alcohol

OH O
(i) DMSO, (COCl)2, low temp.
(ii) Et3N

2° alcohol
Mechanism:
O O O Cl
–
Step I: ¾¾® + Cl + CO2 + CO
S + C –– C S
Cl Cl
DMSO (COCl)2 Chlorodimethyl sulfonium salt
H
Step II: O –HCl O +
+ S
H S
Cl H

–BH O
Step III: O +
O + S
+ S
S H
H –
CH2 Dimethyl
Sulfide
H
B

PREPARATION OF ALDEHYDES ONLY

1. Rosenmund's reaction Note :
(a) Formaldehyde can not be prepared by this method because
Aldehydes can be obtained from acid chlorides (RCOCl) the corresponding acid chloride (HCOCl) is unstable.
by catalytic hydrogenation (reduction) in the presence (b) In the above reaction BaSO4 acts as a poison for catalyst and
of palladium catalyst suspended in barium sulphate. decreases the catalytic efficiency of Pd due to which further
reduction of aldehyde to alcohol is prevented.
O O
ôô Pd / BaSO 4 ôô 2. By the reduction of alkyl cyanides (Stephen's
R — C— Cl + H2 ¾¾¾¾¾ ® R — C— H + HCl reaction) :
C6H5 — C— Cl + H2 ¾¾¾¾¾
Pd/BaSO
4 ® C H CHO + HCl Alkyl cyanides (nitriles) are reduced by SnCl2 and HCl.
6 5
ôô 2 SnCl / HCl
O R – C º N + 2H ¾¾¾¾¾
® R – CH = [Link]
H O
¾¾¾
2 ® RCHO + NH Cl
4
 C-6 Chemistry

SnCl2 / HCl CH3

C6H5 – C º N ¾¾¾¾¾ ® C6H5–CH=[Link] 273-283K
+ CrO3 + (CH3CO)2O
H3O+
¾¾¾® C6H5CHO + NH4Cl
3. From hydrocarbons : CH(OCOCH3)2 CHO
H3 O+
Aromatic aldehydes (benzaldehyde and its derivatives) D
are prepared from aromatic hydrocarbons by the Benzaldehyde
following methods:
(ii) By the side chain chlorination followed by
(i) By the oxidation of methylbenzene : Strong oxidising
hydrolysis : Side chain chlorination of toluene gives
agents oxidise toluene and its derivatives to benzoic
benzal chloride, which on hydrolysis gives
acids. However, it is possible to stop the oxidation at
benzaldehyde. This is a commercial method for
the aldehyde stage with suitable reagents that convert
preparing benzaldehyde.
the methyl group to an intermediate that is difficult to
oxidise further. The following methods are used for CH3
Cl2/hv
this purpose.
(a) Use of chromyl chloride (CrO2Cl2): Chromyl
chloride oxidises methyl group of toluene to a Toluene
chromium complex, which on hydrolysis gives CHCl2 CHO
corresponding benzaldehyde. Cl /hv H2O
373K
CH3 CH(OCrOHCl2)2
CS2 Benzaldehyde
+ CrO2Cl2
(iii) By Gatterman – Koch reaction : When benzene or
Toluene Chromium comlpex
its derivative is treated with carbon monoxide and
CH(OCrOHCl ) CHO hydrogen chloride in the presence of anhydrous
H 3O +
+ CrO Cl aluminium chloride or cuprous chloride, it gives
benzaldehyde or substituted benzaldehyde. This is an
Toluene Benzaldehyde electrophilic substitution reaction and an extension of
This reaction is called Etard reaction. Friedel-Crafts method of acylation.
(b) Use of chromic oxide (CrO 3 ): Toluene or CHO
substituted toluene is converted to benzylidene CO,HCl
Anhyd. AlCl3/CuCl
diacetate on treating with chromic oxide in acetic
anhydride. The benzylidene diacetate can be Benzene Benzaldehyde
hydrolysed to corresponding benzaldehyde with
aqueous acid.

(iv) Aldehyde from Esters: DIBAL-H is used to synthesize aldehyde from esters.
O O
ôô (i) DIBAL -H, hexane, - 78°C ôô
R — C — OR ¢ ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
® R — C— H
(ii) H2O
Mechanism:
Al(i-Bu)2 –
+ Al(i-Bu)2 O Al(i-Bu)2 O
O
O H
H2O
R—C H R—C—H R—C—H
C
OR¢
R OR OR¢

Transfer of a hydride ion

For example: O O
O
(i) DIBAL-H, hexane –78°C
HO H
(ii) H2O
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-7

PREPARATION OF KETONES ONLY (iii) From dialkylcadmium :

(i) By the alkaline hydrolysis of acetoacetic ester or O
ôô
its alkyl derivatives : R — Cd — R + Cl — C— R ¢ ¾¾
®
O R O O
ôô ô ôô ôô
CH 3 — C— CH— C— OC 2 H 5 + H 2 O ¾¾¾¾ [Link]
® R — C— R ¢ + R — Cd — Cl
or Alkali
Dialkyl cadmium can be obtained by reaction of
O cadmium chloride with Grginard reagent.
ôô
CH3 — C— CH2R + CO 2 + C 2 H5OH 2R–Mg–Cl + Cd Cl2 ¾¾® R–Cd–R + 2MgCl2
This method is very important for the synthesis of
(ii) By Oppenauer oxidation : ketones.
(iv) From nitriles : Treating a nitrile with Grignard reagent
OH O
ô
followed by hydrolysis yields a ketone.
ôô
[ (CH3 )3 CO ]3 Al
R – CH– R ¢ + CH3 — C— CH 3 ¾¾¾¾¾¾® ether
CH3 - CH 2 - C º N + C 6 H5 MgBr ¾¾¾
®
O OH
ôô ô
R — C— R ¢ + CH3 — CH— CH3 NMgBr O
CH 3CH 2 - C H O+
C2 H 5 C
The reverse of this reaction is called Meerwein ¾¾¾®
3
C6H5 C6H5
Ponndorf Verley reduction.
Propiophenone
(1-Phenylpropanone)

(v) Ketones from organolithium compounds

(i) ether
CH3C ºº N + CH3CH2 CH2 Li ¾¾¾¾¾ ® CH COCH CH CH
(ii) H O+ 3 2 2 3 3

Even through a nitrile has a triple bond, addition of the Grignard or lithium reagent takes place only once because
addition of second molecule of the reagent would place a double negative charge on the nitrogen.
R¢

R¢Li – + R¢RLiLi 2– +
RC N RR——CC==NNLiLi R — C — N Li

R¢R¢ R¢

Alternatively, organolithium reagents react with carboxylic acids in the following way to form ketones.

O O é OH ù O-Li+ O
ôô ôô ê ô ú -H O
ô ôô
H 3O +
R ¢ Li ® R - C- R¢
® R - C - O- Li + ¾¾¾¾
® ê R - C - OH ú ¾¾¾
2 ¾
R - C- OH ¾¾¾® R - C- O- Li + ¾¾¾
LiOH
ô ê ô ú
R¢ ëê R¢ ûú

é OH O-Li+
ù O
H 3O ê ô ô ú - H 2O
ôô +
® R - C - O -Li + ¾¾¾¾
Or RCOOH + 2R ¢Li ¾¾ ® ê R - C - OH ú ¾¾¾ ¾® R - C- R¢
ô ê ô ú
R¢ ëê R¢ ûú
 C-8 Chemistry

(vi) Ketones from lithium dialkylcuprates, also known as Gilman reagent (Organocopper compounds).
ether
R 2 CuLi + R ¢COCl ¾¾¾¾
® R¢COR + RCu + LiCl
-78°C
Lithium
dialkylcuprate

ether
(CH3)2CuLi + COCl ¾–¾ ¾®
78°C COCH3 + CH3Cu + LiCl

Cyclohexyl methyl ketone

Li CuI 2(CH 3 ) 2 CHCOCl

n-C4H9Br ¾® n-C4H9Li ¾® ( n-C 4 H 9 ) 2 CuLi ¾¾¾¾¾¾® 2 n-C 4 H 9 COCH(CH 3 ) 2
Lithium di-n -butylcuprate 2 - Methyl-3-heptanone

(vii) From benzene or substituted benzenes : When benzene or substituted benzene is treated with acid chloride in the
presence of anhydrous aluminium chloride, it affords the corresponding ketone. This reaction is known as Friedel-
Crafts acylation reaction.
O
O C
ôô
+ R - C - Cl ¾¾¾¾¾¾ Anhyd. AlCl3 R
®

PROPERTIES OF ALDEHYDES AND KETONES (v) Reactivity : Reactivity depends on the nature of alkyl
group attached to it. Smaller the alkyl group, the more
Physical Properties
reactive is the compound.
(i) Physical state : Formaldehyde (methanal) is a gas. All Reactivity µ Magnitude of +ve charge on carbon
other aldehydes and ketones upto C11 are colourless atom of the carbonyl group.
volatile liquids. Higher members are solids at room (vi) 40% aqueous solution of HCHO is called formalin. It
temperature. is used as a disinfectant and antiseptic. It is also used
(ii) Odour : Lower aldehydes have an unpleasant odour. for preserving biological specimen.
Higher aldehydes and ketones have a pleasant odour. (vii) HCHO + Lactose = Formamint used for throat infection.
(iii) Solubility : Lower carbonyl compounds are soluble Chemical Properties
in water due to the formation of hydrogen bonds
The carbonyl group, C = O governs the chemistry of aldehydes
between the solute and water molecules but solubility
and ketones in two ways : (a) by providing a site for
decreases with increase in molecular weight due to the
nucleophilic addition, and (b) by increasing the acidity of
hydrohobic nature of the bigger alkyl groups in the
the hydrogen atoms attached to the alpha carbon. Both of
higher members.
these effects is due to the ability of oxygen to accommodate
(iv) Boiling point : Boiling point and Melting point µ a negative charge.
1
Molecular weight µ (i) Addition of Water (gem-diol Formation) : Aldehydes
Branching
and ketones react with water in presence of acid or
Boiling points of carbonyl compounds are less than the base in a rapidly reversible equilibrium.
corresponding alcohols of comparable molecular weight
O OH
but are higher than corresponding alkanes. The relative
boiling points of the carbonyl compounds with the same R — C — R¢ + H2O R — C — R¢
number of carbon atoms follow the order,
OH
Amides > Carboxylic acids >> Esters » Acyl
Like the general nucleophilic additions, hydrate
chlorides » Ketones » Aldehydes
formation follows the following order :

% of hydrate formed HCHO > CH3CHO > (CH3)3CCHO > CH3COCH3

99.96 50 19 0.14
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-9

(ii) Addition of Alcohols (Acetal Formation) : Anhydrous alcohols add to the carbonyl group of aldehydes in the
presence of anhydrous hydrogen chloride to form acetals via hemiacetals.

R dry HCl R OH R ¢OH, H + R OR¢

C ¾¾¾¾
O + R¢OH ¬¾¾¾®
¾ C ¾¾¾¾¾
®
¬¾¾¾¾
¾ C
H H OR¢ H OR¢
Hemiacetal Acetal (an ether)
(an alcohol, as well as an ether) (stable to alkalies)

(i) With a few exceptions, open-chain hemiacetals are too unstable to be isolated. However, cyclic hemiacetals with
five- or six-membered rings are usually much more stable.
(ii) All steps in the formation of an acetal from an aldehyde are reversible.
(iii) Acetal formation is not favoured when ketones are treated with simple alcohols and gaseous HCl (remember
that the usuage of hemiketals and ketals have been replaced by hemiacetals and acetals respectively). However,
cyclic acetal formation is favoured when a ketone is treated with an excess of a 1, 2-diol and a trace of acid.
R¢ HOCH2 R¢ O CH2 R¢ CH2OH
H+ H O/H +
C O+ ¾¾¾
® C ¾¾¾¾
2 ® C O+
H HOCH2 R O CH2 R CH2OH
(excess) Cyclic acetal

Mechanism:

H — B+
H — B+
+ OH OH
O O—H
+ CH3OH R—C—H
R R H
R H H
+OCH3 OCH3
Hemiacetal
H
B

B
H

OCH3 + OCH +
OH2
+ 3
–H – B CH3OH –H2O
R—C—H R H R—C—H
R H
OCH3 OCH3 OCH3 OCH3
+
acetal

Here, H – B+ = represents any species in solution that is capable of donating proton.

: B = represents any species that is capable of removing proton.
(iii) Addition of Hydrogen Cyanide : Hydrogen cyanide adds to the carbonyl groups of aldehydes and most ketones to
form cyanohydrins. Ketones in which carbonyl group is highly hindered do not undergo this reaction.
OH
C = O + HCN ¾¾¾® C
CN
O OH
NaCN,H O
CH3 C CH3 ¾¾¾¾¾
2 ® CH3 C CH3
Acetone then H 2SO 4
CN
Acetone cyanohdrin
 C-10 Chemistry

Cyanohydrins are useful intermediates in organic synthesis. A cyano group may be hydrolysed to an a-hydroxy
carboxylic acid or to an a, b-unsaturated acid (depending upon the condition used) or may be reduced to a primary
amine.

CH3 CH3 CH3

–
CN , H+ HCl, H2O
CH3CH2 — C O CH3CH2 — C — CN CH3CH2 — C — COOH
heat
2-Butanone
OH OH

conc. H2SO4 2-Hydroxy-2-methylbutanoic acid

heat

CH3 CH3

CH3CH2 — C — COOH CH3CH2 C — COOH

2-Methyl-2-butenoic acid
OH

(iv) Addition of Sodium Bisulphite : Aldehydes, methyl ketones and cyclic ketones (not aromatic) react with sodium
bisulphite in presence of ethanol to give solid adduct.

H R SO3– Na+
R Na+O– O –
O C
C O ¾¾® S ¾¾®
OH + H H OH
H O R
S — O–Na+ Sodium bisulphite (adduct)
(solid)
O

Note :
(i) A C—S bond is formed rather than C—O because S has more nucleophilic site than O.
(ii) Sulphite ion, SO32– is a large ion and hence reacts only if C = O is not sterically hindered ; as in the case for RCHO, RCOCH3, and cyclic
ketones.

The solid adduct is filtered from the ethanolic solution (v) Addition of derivatives of ammonia : Certain
and then decomposed by acid or base to regenerate compounds related to ammonia (such as
the carbonyl compound. Hence this reaction is used hydroxylamine, NH 2 OH ; phenylhydrazine,
for the purification and separation of carbonyl H2NNHC6H5 ; and semicarbazide H2NNH CONH2, etc.)
compounds. react with carbonyl compounds to form compounds,
R
–
SO3 Na
+
having carbon-nitrogen double bond, known as imines.
H + (or OH - ) The reaction is acid catalyzed and involves two stages
C ¾¾¾¾¾®
: addition of the ammonia derivative to form
H OH carbinolamine followed by dehydration to yield imine
R which is a mixture of E- and Z-isomers
2–
® C = O + SO2 (or SO3 ) H+ -H O
C = O + H2NG ¾¾¾
® C NHG ¾¾¾
2 ¾
®
H (addition) (elimination)
(Extracted with ether)
Separation of RCHO from unreacted RCH2OH. OH
NaHSO3 -H O
RCH2 OH ® RCHO ¾¾¾¾ ® RCH(OH)SO3 Na ¯ ¾¾¾
® RCHO C NHG ¾¾¾
2 ¾
® C= NG
C2 H5OH (elimination)
Imine

(vi) Addition of Organometallic Compounds :

H+ Organometallic compounds, such as Grignard reagents,
RCH2 OH ® RCHO ¾¾¾¾® RCH(OH)SO3 Na ¯ ¾¾¾
® RCHO
C H OH
alkyllithiums and organozinc compounds provide
Separated from
unreacted RCH2OH nucleophile which add on carbonyl group to form
alcohols.
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-11

R OH
d– d+ + O
R:H – + H3O C2H5MgBr
C O ¾¾¾¾® C OM ¾¾¾¾® ¾¾¾¾¾® C2H5 — CH
H
2° alcohol
OH
R R O
C2H5MgBr
– + ¾¾¾¾¾®
C OM ¾¾¾¾® C O—H
C2H5
3° alcohol
Mechanism:
Note :
O
Grignard reagents (M = MgX) or alkyllithium (M = Li) d- d+
react with formaldehyde, other aldehydes and ketones H H C2H5MgBr ¾¾¾® CH –
to form 1°, 2° and 3° alcohols respectively.

For example Þ –+ H3O+

¾¾¾® C2H5 – CH2OMgBr ¾¾¾® C2H5 – CH2OH
O
C2H5MgBr (vii) Addition of organozinc compounds (The
¾¾¾¾¾® C2H5CH2OH
H H Reformatsky reaction). Reformatsky reaction
1° alcohol
involves the reaction of an aldehyde or ketone with an
a-bromoester in the presence of zinc metal to form
b-hydroxy ester.

OZnBr OH
+ b a
Zn H O
C = O + BrCH2COOR ¾¾¾¾ ®
benzene
C CH2COOR ¾¾¾
3 ¾
® C CH2COOR
a-Bromoester
b-Hydroxy ester

OH
(i) Zn b a
CH3CH2CH2CHO + BrCH2COOC2H5 ¾¾¾¾¾ +
® CH3CH2CH2CHCH2COOC2H5
(ii) H3O b-Hydroxy ester

OH O
ô H3O + ||
CH3CH2 CH2 CHCH2 COOC2 H5 ¾¾¾
Heat
¾
® CH3CH2CH2CH = CH— C —OC2H5 + H2O

(viii)Cannizzaro Reaction : Aldehydes containing no a- conc. NaOH

C6H5CHO + HCHO ¾¾¾¾¾®
hydrogen atom, when treated with concentrated alkali,
Benzaldehyde Formaldehyde
(aqueous or alcoholic), undergo self oxidation-reduction (no. a-H atom in both compounds)
(also known as disproportionation) to yield a mixture C6H5CH2OH + HCOONa
of an alcohol and a salt of a carboxylic acid. This Benzyl alcohol Sod. formate
reaction, known as Cannizzaro reaction, is carried Mechanism : The reaction involves two successive
out at room temperature ; remember that under these nucleophilic addition, of course at different carbonyl
conditions, aldehydes having a-hydrogen atom undergo groups.
aldol condensation.
2HCHO 50% NaOH H H
¾¾¾¾® CH3OH + HCOONa
methanol Sodium formate
(no. a-H atom)
Methanol
Step 1. Ar C
– ¾¾
O + OH ¬¾® Ar
¾ C O–
Cannizzaro reaction between different aldehyde OH
molecules is known as crossed Cannizzaro reaction. I
 C-12 Chemistry

H H reaction, known as Wittig reaction, has proved to be a

Step 2. Ar — C O + Ar — C — O:
– hydride
¾¾¾¾® valuable method for synthesizing alkenes.
transfer
OH R R
(Second molecule) + –
C = O + (C6H5)3P = C or (C6H5)3P — C ¾®
R¢ R¢
Phosphorus ylide
H H
hydride –
Ar — C O + Ar — C — ¾¾¾¾® Ar — C — O + Ar — C O
transfer R R
H H C=C + O = P(C6H5)3
(Second molecule) + +
H –H R¢ R¢
– Alkene Triphenylphosphine oxide
ArCH2OH ArCOO
Intramolecular or internal cannizzaro reaction :
Mechanism. The ylide acting as a nucleophile attacks
O the carbonyl carbon of the aldehyde or ketone to form
CHO CH2OH an unstable intermediate betaine followed by
conc. NaOH
¾¾¾¾¾® ; C — CHO
oxaphosphetane which then spontaneously loses
CHO COONa
triphenylphosphine oxide to form an alkene. The driving
OH
force for the Wittig reaction is the formation of the
very strong P—O bond (DH° = 540 kJ mol–1).
conc. NaOH
¾¾¾¾¾® CH—COONa
R
R R¢
–
Remember that keto group can only be reduced, not C :C —C—C—R¢
oxidised, in internal Cannizzaro reaction. + – +
O: P (C6H5)3 :O : P(C6H5)3
Although aldehydes having a-hydrogen atom do not
:

:
Betaine
undego Cannizzaro reaction, they along with all their
aldehydes can be made to undergo such reactions in
presence of aluminium ethoxide. The reaction is now R
R
known as Tischenko reaction and here esters are —C—C—R¢ ¾® C=C + :O = P(C6H5)3
isolated instead of alcohol and carboxylic acids.

:
R¢
:O —P(C6H5)3
Al(OC H )
2RCHO ¾¾¾¾¾¾
2 53 ®
:

[RCH2OH + Oxaphosphetane Alkene Triphenylphosphine oxide

RCOOH] ––® RCOOCH2R
Ester (x) Aldol condensation : Two molecules of an aldehyde
(ix) Addition of Ylides (the wittig reaction) : An ylide is or a ketone, containing at least one a-hydrogen atom,
a neutral molecule having a negative carbon adjacent when treated with dilute base (like NaOH, Ba(OH)2,
to a positive hetero atom (e.g. P or S), each atom has K2CO3, etc.) at room temperature (or below) combine
an octet of electrons and directly bonded to each other. to form a b-hydroxyaldehydes or b-hydroxyketones.
Aldehydes and ketones react with phosphorus ylides This reaction is called addition reaction. When the
to yield alkenes and triphenylphosphine oxide. The product of an aldol addition is dehydrated the overall
reaction is called an aldol condensation.
H H
–
(a) CH3 —C = O + [Link]
OH
CH3 — C—CH2CHO

OH
3-Hydroxybutanal

CH3 CH3 O HO – CH3 O

or +
– H 3O
(b) OH
CH3 — C = O + [Link].CH3 CH3 — C — CH2 — C — CH3 ¾¾¾®
D CH3 — C = CH2— C — CH3

OH a,b-unsaturated ketone
4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-13

Mechanism :
Base Catalysed reaction Þ
O
–
O O O O O O OH
OH – H H H
H H2O – H H H
CH2 H CH3 H CH3
H
b–hydroxyaldehyde

O–
C
H2C H
O OH
–
O OH O OH H — OH
E 1CB
H CH3 ¾¾¾®
D
H H – CH3 H CH3
–
OH
O
¾¾¾® + H 2O
H CH3
Acid catalysed reaction :
+
O +
OH O—H OH O O
H H3O+
+ ¾¾¾®
D
H3C H H H H H
H aldol

enol form of acetaldehyde

(a) Crossed aldol condensation : An aldol condensation between two different carbonyl compounds each having at
least one a-hydrogen atom (crossed aldol condensation) gives a mixture of the four possible products, hence it is
not always feasible in the laboratory. For example, reaction of acetaldehyde and propanal in presence of dilute NaOH
gives a mixture of four products.
OH OHCH3
–
OH
CH3CHO + CH3CH2CHO CH3CHCH2CHO + CH3CH2CHCHCHO
Ethanal Propanal 3-Hydroxybutanal 3-Hydroxy-2-methylpentanal
OH
–
(from 2 molecules of ethanal) (from 2 molecules of propanal)

OH CH3 OH

CH3CHCHCHO + CH3CH2CHCH2CHO
3-Hydroxy-2-methylbutanal 3-Hydroxy pentanal
(from 1 molecules of ethanal and 1 molecule of propanal)

(Ethanal as a carbonyl group (Propanal as a carbonyl group

and propanal as a nucleophile) and ethanal as a nucleophile)
 C-14 Chemistry

(b) Intramolecular aldol condensation (Cyclization via aldol condensation) : A dialdehyde, a keto aldehyde, or a
diketone undergoes aldol condensation to form five and six-membered (sometimes even longer) cyclic compounds,
e.g.

O
O
–
OH
OHC ¾¾¾®

1–Cyclopentenyl methyl ketone

In the above keto aldehyde, three different enolates are possible, however it is the enolate from the ketone side of the
molecule that adds to the aldehyde group leading to the product. The reason being greater reactivity of aldehydes
toward nucleophilic addition than the ketones due to electronic as well as steric factors. The intramolecular aldol
addition of a 1,6–diketone can potentially lead to either a 7 or 5 membered ring product the one with the 5 membered
ring is the only product of the reaction.
–
O OH
O O
–
OH – H2O
¾¾¾® O

:
H2O OH – O
O O

O – O OH
O
OH –
O H2O
–
OH –
:

H2O

(c) Other reactions related to aldol condensation :

(i) Claisen-Schmidt reaction : A crossed aldol condensation in which an aromatic aldehyde reacts with an enolizable
aldehyde or ketone to form a, b-unsaturated carbonyl compound is known as Claisen-Schmidt reaction.

RO
OH –
C6H5CHO + RCH2COR¢ C6H5CH = CCR¢ + H2O
(R¢= H or alkyl) a, b-Unsaturated carbonyl compound

O O
–
OH
C6H5CHO + (CH3)3CCCH3 C6H5CH = CHCC(CH3)3
4, 4-Dimethyl-1-phenyl-1-penten-3-one

(ii) Knoevenagel reaction : Condensation between an aldehyde or ketone with compound containing active methylene
group in the presence of ammonia, amines, pyridine, piperidine etc. to form a, b-unsaturated compound is known as
Knoevenagel reaction.
heat
CH3CHO + H2C(COOH)2 ¾¾® CH3CH = C(COOH)2 ¾¾¾¾
– CO
® CH CH = CHCOOH
3 2
Malonic acid Crotonic acid

(i) heat
C6H5CHO + H2C(COOH)2 ¾¾¾¾¾
(ii) – CO
® C H CH = CHCOOH
6 5 2
Cinnamic acid
Note that in Knoevenagel reaction, enol (or enolate ion) is provided by molonic acid and not by aldehyde.
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-15

(iii) Robinson Annulation Reaction (Ring forming reaction): Generally Michael reaction and aldol addition both form
new C–C bond. The Robinson annulation is a reaction that puts these two C–C bond forming reaction together in
order to form an a, b unsaturated cyclic ketone.
O O
base
+ ¾¾¾®
O
Step in R.A. Reaction Þ

OH – OH – OH –
+ ¾¾¾® D + H2O
O Michael reaction
O O O O O
OH
(xi) a-Halogenation of Aldehydes and Ketones : Aldehydes and ketones having a-hydrogen atom react with halogens
to form a-haloaldehyde or ketone.
H O X O
| || | ||
acid or
R - C - C- + X 2 ¾¾¾¾® R - C - C - + HX
| base |

The reaction is regiospecific for substitution of an a-hydrogen.

C6H5COCH3 + Cl2 ¾¾® C6H5COCH2Cl
Acetophenone Phenacyl chloride
Phenacyl chloride is a relatively harmless but powerful lacrymator or tear gas and is used by police to disperse
mobs.
Mechanism. The rate of reaction depends upon the concentration of acetone and of base, but is independent of
bromine concentration.
slow –
Step 1. CH3—C—CH 3 + : B– CH3—C—CH 2 ¬¾® CH3—C = CH2 + H : B
O O O–

.–. fast
CH3 — C — CH2 + Br — Br ¾ ¾¾® CH3 — C — CH 2Br — Br–
Step 2.
O O
Since base is not regenerated during the reaction, halogen of ketones in presence of base is called base-promoted,
rather than base-catalyzed reaction. As we will discuss below in haloform reaction, multiple halogenation of aldehydes
and ketones having more than one a – H occurs.
Mechanism of acid catalyzed a-halogenation of ketones. The ketone is dissolved in acetic acid, which serves as
both the solvent and the acid catalyst. In contrast with basic halogenation, acidic halogenation can selectively replace
just one hydrogen or more than one if appropriate amounts of the halogen are used.
In the first step, the carbonyl oxygen is protonated to form enol which reacts with the halogen (electrophile).
+ OH
H+
ôô Base
CH3 - C - CH 3 ¾¾¾ ® CH 3 - C - CH 3 ¾¾¾¾ ® CH 3 — C = CH 2
(say H 2O)
ôô ô
O OH
enol

+ –
Br — Br Br
¾¾¾¾
(–Br– )
® CH3 — C — CH2Br ¬¾
® CH3 — C — CH2Br ¾¾¾ ® CH3 — C — CH2Br + HBr
:OH +O —H
O
:

(xii) Haloform Reaction :

When methyl ketones (or acetaldehyde) react with halogen in the presence of base, multiple halogenation of the
a-methyl group takes place.
 C-16 Chemistry

O O
– – –
CH3 — C — CH3 + 3X2 + 4OH ¾¾® CH3 — C — O + CHX3 + 3X + 3H2O
Haloform
Mechanism :

O H –
O O
OH –
CH3 — C — C — H ¾¾® – 3×2
CH3 — C CH2 CH3 — C — CH2
H Enolate

O: :O:–
:

:
O O
OH – Proton exchange –
CH3 — C — CX3 ¾¾¾® CH3 — C — CX3 ¾¾® CH3 — C + –
:CX3 CH3 — C — O + HCX3
OH OH
Since haloform (CHCl3, CHBr3 or CHI3) is produced in the reaction, it is known as haloform reaction (reaction of
methyl ketones with alkaline halogen to form haloform, CHX3) Ethyl alcohol and Haloform reaction, particularly
iodoform reaction is used as a laboratory test for identifying methyl ketones, acetaldehyde and methyl secondary
alcohols.
(xiii)Oxidation
(a) Aldehydes reduce Tollen's reagent (an alkaline solution of silver nitrate) and form silver colour precipitate Ag.
2AgNO3 + 2NH 4OH ¾¾
® Ag2O ¯ (grey) + 2NH 4 NO3 + H 2O
® 2[Ag(NH 3 ) 2 ]+ OH - + H 2O
Ag 2 O + 4NH 4 OH ¾¾
Tollen's reagent

RCHO + 2[Ag(NH 3 ) 2 ] OH - + 3OH -

+
Aldehyde

RCOO- + 2Ag ¯ + 4NH3 + 2H 2O

Silver mirror

(b) Aldehydes (except benzaldehyde) also reduce Fehling’s solution (an alkaline solution of cupric ion complexed with
tartarate ion) and Benedict’s solution, in which complexing agent is citrate ion.
O O
2+ – +
R—C—H + 2Cu + 3OH R—C—O– + 2Cu + H2O
(deep blue colour) (red ppt.)

(c) Methyl ketones are oxidized smoothly by means of hypohalite (NaOH or KOH + halogen) to form carboxylate ion
and haloform, and hence the reaction is commonly known as haloform reaction.
O O
|| ||
R— C —CH3 + 3X2 + 4OH– ¾¾® R— C —O– + CHX3 + 3X– + 3H2O
(d) Baeyer-Villiger oxidation. Both aldehydes and ketones are oxidised by peroxy acids. This reaction, called Baeyer-
Villiger oxidation, is however especially useful with ketones, because it converts them to carboxylic esters.
O O O O

R—C—R¢ + R¢¢ —C—O—OH R—O—C—R¢ + R¢¢—C—OH

Ketone Peroxy acid Ester Carboxylic acid
Example
O O
OH O O
R O
¾¾¾¾¾¾® +
(peroxy carboxylic) R OH
acid O
Acetophenone Phenylacelate
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-17

It is also widely used for synthesizing lactones from cyclic ketones. meta–chloroperbenzoic acid (MCPBA) reagent
is commonly used for this reaction. Certain other peroxy carboxylic acid can be used as well.
(xiv) Reduction
(a) Aldehydes and ketones can be reduced to primary and secondary alcohols respectively by a variety of reagents.
Catalytic hydrogenation over a metal catalyst and reduction with lithium aluminium hydride or sodium borohydride
are common useful methods for reduction of ketones.
R R
H2/Ni or
C O CHOH
LiAlH4 or NaBH4
R¢ R¢
(i) LiAlH , or NaBH H /Ni
CH3CH = CHCH2OH ¬¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
+
4 4 ¾ CH CH = CHCHO ¾¾¾¾
3
2 ® CH 3CH 2CH 2CH2OH
(ii) H

(b) Aldehydes and ketones can be reduced to hydrocarbons by the action (i) of amalgamated zinc and concentrated
hydrochloric acid (Clemmensen reduction), or (b) of hydrazine (NH2NH2) and a strong base like NaOH, KOH or
potassium tert-butoxide in a high-boiling alcohol like ethylene glycol or triethylene glycol (Wolf-Kishner reduction).
R R
Zn (Hg), HCl
C O CH2
or NH2NH2, KOH, glycol
R¢ R¢
(c) Aldehydes and ketones can be reduced to hydrocarbons through thioacetal formation too.
R HSCH2 BF R S CH2
3
C O + ¾¾® C
+ H2O
HSCH2
R¢ R¢ S CH2
Aldehyde or Ketone Ethane–1,2–dithiol Cyclic thioacetal

R S CH2
R
C Raney Ni CH2 + CH3CH3 + 2NiS
H2
R¢ S CH2 R¢
(d) Many aldehydes and ketones are converted into amines by reductive amination (reduction in presence of ammonia).
Reduction can be done catalytically or by sodium cyanohydridoborate, NaBH3CN. Reaction involves reduction of an
intermediate imine.
R R R
H2, Ni or
C O + NH3 C NH NaBH 3CN
CHNH3
R¢
R¢ R¢
An aldehyde or ketone An imine 1° Amine

(e) Reduction of ketones to pinacols in presence of magnesium

CH3 CH3
Mg/benzene
2 CH3COCH3 CH3 — C — C — CH3
Acetone
OH OH
Pinacol

(xv) Polymerisation : Lower aldehydes undergo polymerisation to form different products under different conditions.
evaporate to dryness
nHCHO (CH2O)n
( n = 6 to 50) Paraformaldehyde
 C-18 Chemistry

room temp.
3HCHO (CH2O)3
Metaformaldehyde
(6-membered cyclic compound

conc. H2SO4
3CH3CHO (CH3CHO)3
Paraldehyde
(6-membered cyclic compound)

conc. H2SO4,0°C
4CH3CHO (CH3CHO)4
Metaldehyde
(8-membered cyclic compound)

CH3

conc. H2SO4
3CH3COCH3 heat
H3C CH3
Mesitylene

(xvi) Special Reactions Given by Aromatic Aldehydes and Ketones :

(a) Reaction with ammonia : Benzaldehyde reacts with ammonia to form hydrobenzamide, recall that aldehydes other
than formaldehyde give aldehyde ammonia, while formaldehyde forms hexamethylenetetramine, commonly known
as urotropine, an important urinary antiseptic.
C6H 5CH = O H2NH C 6H 5CH = N
+ + O = CHC 6H 5 CHC6H 5
C6H 5CH = O H2NH C 6H 5CH = N
Hydrobenzamide
(b) Benzoin condensation : Aromatic aldehydes, when heated with aqueous ethanolic NaCN or KCN, undergoes self
condensation to form benzoins. For example,
OH
KCN, heat Oxi.
½ benzil-benzilic acid
2C6H5CHO ¾¾¾¾® C6H5CHOHCOC6H5 ¾® C6H5COCOC6H5 ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾® C6H5 ¾ C — COOH
C2H 5 OH rearrangement ½
C6 H 5
Benzoin Benzil Benzilic acid
(an a-hydroxyketone)
Mechanism: The cyanide ion serve three different purposes in the cource of this reaction. It acts as a nucleophile,
facilitates proton abstraction and is also the leaving group in the final step.
–
O O OH H
H –
CN– CN
CN O
Resonance stabilized

O–H O
– –
O OH O
–
–CN
C
CN H CN H
OH
Benzoin
¾¾¾®

Oxi.

O
Benzil
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-19

–
O
HO
O
OH –
O
O

–
COOH COO
–
O OH +
H
¾¾® Benzilic acid

(c) Perkin reaction : Condensation of an aromatic aldehyde with an acid anhydride in presence of sodium salt of the
same acid to form a, b-unsaturated acid is known as Perkin reaction.
(i) CH COONa
(i) C6H5CHO + (CH3CO)2O ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
3
+ ® C6H5CH = CHCOOH
(ii) H

Benzaldehyde Acetic anhydride Cinnamic acid

CH3
b a (i) CH3CH2COONa
(ii) C6H5CHO + (CH3CH2CO)2O C6H5 CCOOH
(ii) H +
Benzaldehyde Propanoic anhydride a-Methylcinnamic acid

Remember that it is the a-carbon atom of the anhydride that reacts with the aldehydic group, observe (ii) example.
(d) Reaction with benzene nucleus : Aromatic aldehydes and ketones undergo electrophilic substitutions in the meta
position. However, these reactions are slow because of deactivating influence of the carbonyl group. Moreover,
certain side reactions like oxidation make the yield poor.

ANALYSIS OF ALDEHYDES AND KETONES

(i) Aldehydes and ketones can be differentiated from non-carbonyl compounds through their reactions with semicarbazide,
2, 4-dinitrophenylhydrazine, and hydroxylamine with which they form precipitates. Semicarbazones and oximes are
colourless, while 2, 4-dinitrophenylhydrazones are usually orange. The melting points of these derivatives can also
be used in indentifying specific aldehydes and ketones.
(ii) Aldehydes are differentiated from ketones through their ease of oxidation. They give a positive test with Tollen’s
reagent, while ketones do not. However, a positive Tollen’s test is also given by few other easily oxidisable compounds,
e.g. a-hydroxy ketones, certain phenols and hydroxylamines.
(iii) Schiff’s test is a highly sensitive test for aldehydes. An aldehyde reacts with the fuchsin-aldehyde reagent to form
a characteristic megenta colour.
(iv) Aldehydes are easily oxidised by cold, dilute, neutral KMnO 4 and by CrO3 in sulphuric acid.
(v) Aliphatic aldehydes and ketones having a-hydrogen react with bromine in CCl4 (caution this is also a test for
unsaturation).
(vi) Methyl ketones, acetaldehyde, ethyl alcohol and methyl secondary alcohols give positive iodoform test. In general,
iodoform test is given by following groups.

O O

(a) — C — CH3 present in ethanal, H — C — CH3 and all methyl ketones

 C-20 Chemistry

OH
(b) — C — CH3 present in ethanol and all secondary methyl ketones.

USES OF ALDEHYDES AND KETONES

In chemical industry, aldehydes and ketones are used as solvents, starting materials and reagents for the synthesis of other
products. Formaldehyde is a well known as formalin (40%) solution used to preserve biological specimens and to prepare
bakelite (a phenol-formaldehyde resin), urea-formaldehyde glues and other polymeric products. Acetaldehyde is used
primarily as a starting material in the manufacture of acetic acid, ethyl acetate, vinyl acetate, polymers and drugs. Benzaldehyde
is used in perfumery and in dye industries. Acetone and ethyl methyl ketone are common industrial solvents. Many aldehydes
and ketones, e.g., butyraldehyde, vanillin, acetophenone, camphor, etc. are well known for their odours and flavours.
ILLUSTRATION 1 :
Write structures for A to D in the following.
CN - H O+ H SO (i)BH /THF
(CH3)2CO ¾¾¾® [A] ¾¾¾®
3
[B] ¾¾¾¾
2 4®
[C] ¾¾¾¾¾¾
3 ® [D]
heat H O ,OH -
2 2

OH OH
Sol. CH3—C—CN CH3—C—COOH CH2 = C—COOH HOCH2 — CH — COOH
CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3
[A] [B] [C] [D]

ILLUSTRATION 2 :
Complete the following reaction.

NBS NaCN (i) C H MgBr

6 11
C6H5CH3 ¾¾¾ ® E ¾¾¾® F ¾¾ ¾ ¾¾ + ¾® G
(ii) H 3O

Sol.

CH3 CH2Br CH2CN CH2COC6H11

C H MgBr
¾NBS
¾® ¾NaCN
¾¾® ¾6¾11¾ ¾ ®

[E] [F] [G]

Cyclohexyl benzyl ketone

ILLUSTRATION 3 :
Give steps involved in the following conversions.
(a) Acetaldehyde to 2, 3-dibromobutanoic acid (b) Acetaldehyde to a-hydroxypropanoic acid (lactic acid)
(c) Benzene to p-chlorobenzaldehyde
Sol.
OH, heat
(a) 2CH3CHO ¾¾ ¾↑ CH3CHOHCH2CHO ¾¾¾
↑ CH3CH = CHCHO
[Ag(NH ) ]∗
¾¾ ¾¾¾¾
3 2
↑ CH3CH = CHCOOH ¾ ¾↑
Br
2 CH3CHCHCOOH

Br Br
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-21

NaCN H∗
(b) CH3CHO ¾¾ ¾↑ CH3CHOHCN ¾¾¾
↑ CH3CHOHCOOH
Lactic acid

(i ) Br , Fe (i ) CH O Cl , Fe
(c) C6 H6 ¾¾¾¾¾↑
2 C6 H5MgBr ¾¾¾¾
2 ¾
+ ↑ C 6 H5CH 2 OH ¾¾¾¾
2 ↑ p-Cl.C6H4CH2OH
(ii ) Mg, ether (ii ) H3O

CrO , Pyridine
¾¾¾¾¾¾
3
↑ p-ClC6H4CHO

ILLUSTRATION 4 :
Can you suggest a proper mechanism for the following reaction ?

H+
2C6H6 + (CH3)2CO ¾® (C6H5)2C(CH3)2.
Sol.

OH CH3
+
O OH C — CH3 C—CH3 C—C6H5
H+ C 6H 6 C6 H 6
CH3—C—CH3 CH3—C—CH3 ¾¾® H+
¾¾® ¾¾®
+ CH3 (–H2O) CH3 CH3
An electrophile
Another electrophile

ILLUSTRATION 5 :
Compound X, C9H10O, is inert to Br2 in CCl4. Vigorous oxidation with hot alkaline permanganate yields
benzoic acid. X gives a precipitate with semicarbazide hydrochloride and with 2, 4-dinitrophenylhydrazine
(DNPH). Write all possible structures for X. How can these isomers be distinguished by using simple chemical
tests ?
Sol. Formation of benzoic acid, on oxidation of the compound X, indicates that X is having only one side chain. The
formula reveals five degree of unsaturation, four for the benzene ring indicated by the formation of benzoic acid and
hence fifth must be present in the side chain. The side unsaturation must be due to C = O group, indicated by reaction
with DNPH. Thus the possible structures for the compound X are

CH3
½
C6 H5 COCH 2 CH3 C 6 H5CH 2COCH3 C6 H 5CH 2CH 2 CHO C6 H 5CHCHO
I II III IV

Difference between I, II, III and IV. Aldehydes III and IV undergo oxidation by cold KMnO4 and CrO3 in H2SO4;
while compound II undergoes iodoform reaction.

ILLUSTRATION 6 :
Would you expect benzaldehyde to be more reactive or less reactive in nucleophilic addition reactions than
propanal? Explain.
Sol. The carbon atom of the carbonyl group of benzaldehyde is less electrophilic due to resonance than carbon atom of the
carbonyl group present in propanal.
 C-22 Chemistry

d–
O O

C d+ C
H H
+

ILLUSTRATION 7 :
Explain why o-hydroxybenzaldehyde is a liquid at room temperature while p-hydroxybenzaldehyde is a high
melting solid.
Sol. o-Hydroxybenzaldehyde exhibits intramolecular hydrogen bonding, whereas p-hydroxybenzaldehyde exhibits inter-
molecular hydrogen bonding. The p-hydroxybenzaldehyde fits better in the lattice to give a close-packed structure.1

NOMENCLATURE, ISOMERISM, PREPARATION AND PROPERTIES OF

Topic 27.2 CARBOXYLIC ACIDS

CARBOXYLIC ACIDS O
||
Organic compounds containing carboxyl ( - C - OH ) group are known as carboxylic acids. The term 'carboxylic' was first
proposed by scientist 'Baeyer'.
Carboxyl group is made up of carbonyl and hydroxyl groups i.e.
O
||
>C=O + O–H ¾® - C - OH
(Carbonyl) (Hydroxyl) (Carboxyl group)
Hybridisation state of C in the carboxyl group is sp2 . Large number of carboxylic acids are found in nature. Some higher
members of aliphatic carboxylic acids (C12 – C18), known as fatty acids, occur in natural fats as esters of glycerol.
Carboxylic acids serve as starting material for several other important organic compounds such as anhydrides, esters, acid
chlorides, amides, etc. General formula is CnH2nO2 or CnH2n+1 COOH.
Classification
On the basis of the group to which –COOH group is attached.
O
||
(i) Aliphatic carboxylic acid Þ R - C - OH (R Þ H atom or alkyl group).

O O
|| ||
H - C - OH , CH3 - C - OH
Formic acid Acetic acid

O O
|| ||
(ii) Aromatic carboxylic acid Þ Ar - C - OH (Ar Þ Aryl group) C6H5 - C - OH (Benzoic acid)
On the basis of number of –COOH groups in their molecule.
No. of – COOH group
(a) Monocarboxylic acids 1
(b) Dicarboxylic acids 2
(c) Tricarboxylic acids 3
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-23

METHODS OF PREPARATION
1. By the Oxidation of Alcohols, Aldehydes and Ketones
(i) 1º Alcohol ¾ [¾
O]
¾® Corresponding carboxylic acid.
O
KMnO 4 or || [O]
R – CH2 – OH + [O] ¾¾¾¾¾
® R–CHO ¾¾¾
® R - C - OH
K 2 Cr2O7
O
KMnO 4 or || [O]
Ex. CH3 – CH2 – OH + [O] ¾¾¾¾¾
® CH3–CHO ¾¾¾
® CH3 - C - OH
K 2 Cr2O7

O
KMnO 4 or || [O]
C6H5 – CH2 – OH + [O] ¾¾¾¾¾
® C6H5–CHO ¾¾¾
® C6H5 - C - OH
K 2 Cr2O7
Oxidation of an alcohol with K2Cr2O7 or CrO3 in acidic media often gives some amount of ester also. Therefore, the
use of KMnO4 in neutral or alkaline media is preferred for the preparation of carboxylic acids.
[O]
(ii) Aldehyde ¾¾¾ ® Corresponding acid
∗
Ag O or Ag(NH )
RCHO ¾¾¾
2 ¾¾ ¾¾¾
∗
3 2 ¾
↑ RCOOH
or KMnO4 / H
or K2Cr2O7 / H∗
[O]
(iii) Ketone ¾¾ ¾® Mixture of acids having lesser number of carbon atoms than the ketone.
O O
|| Acidic K 2 Cr2O7 ||
R - C - CH 2 - R ' + [O] ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾ ® R - C - OH + R’–COOH
D

O O
|| Acidic K 2 Cr2O7 ||
Ex. CH3 – C – CH 3 + 3 [O] ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾ ® CH - C - OH + CO + H O
3 2 2
D
However, methyl ketones are good sources for carboxylic acids as these are quantitatively oxidised to carboxylic acids by
hypohalites (haloform reaction).
heat
RCOCH3 + 3I2 + 4NaOH ¾¾¾ ® RCOONa + 3NaI + CHI3 + 3H2O
14 [O] 14 14
Oxidation
HCOOH + HOOC CH2CH3 ¬¾¾
¾ CH3C OCH2CH3 ¾¾¾¾¾ ® CH3COOH + CH3COOH.
However, remember that in mixed ketones, major oxidation product is that in which carbonyl carbon (C 14) remains with
smaller alkyl group.
2. By the Hydrolysis of Cyanides (Nitriles)
Cyanides on complete hydrolysis in presence of dilute HCl form carboxylic acids. Aryl halides (except for those
having o & p–nitro group) do not react with HCN.
O
NaCN Complete hydrolysis ôô
R,X ¾¾¾↑ R , C º N ¾¾¾ ¾¾ ¾¾¾
↑ R , C, OH ∗ NH 3
3. By the Hydrolysis of Acid Derivatives
(i) From acyl halides :
O O
P P
CH3 – C – Cl + H – OH ¾® CH3 – C – OH + HCl
O O
P P
C6H5 – C – Cl + H – OH ¾® C6H5 – C – OH + HCl
 C-24 Chemistry

(ii) From acid anhydrides :

O
O
CH3 C P
O + H– OH ¾® 2 CH3 – C – OH
CH3 C
O

O
C6H5 O
C P
O + H–OH ¾® 2 C6H5 – C – OH
C6H5 C
O
Formic acid cannot be prepared by these two methods (a and b) because it’s corresponding formyl chloride and
formic anhydride are unstable compounds.
(iii) From carboxylic esters :
O O
P P
C2H5 – C – OCH3 + HOH ¾® C2H5 – C – OH + CH3 – OH
O O
P P
C6H5 – C – OCH3 + HOH ¾® C6H5 – C – OH + CH3 – OH
(iv) From acid amides :
O O
P dil. HCl
P
CH3 – C – NH2 + HOH ¾¾¾¾ ® CH3 – C – OH + NH4Cl
O O
P dil. HCl
P
C6H5 – C – NH2 + HOH ¾¾¾¾ ® C6H5 – C – OH + NH4Cl
4. By Carbonylation of
(i) sodium alkoxide or sodium hydroxide :
O
High temp. [Link] P
H – O – Na + CO ¾¾¾¾¾
® H – COONa ¾¾¾¾ ® H– C – OH
High pres. HOH

O
High temp. [Link] P
R – ONa + CO ¾¾¾¾¾
® R – COONa ¾¾¾¾ ® R– C – OH
High pres. HOH
(ii) alcohols and water :
O
BF3 /HOH P
R – OH + CO ¾¾¾¾¾¾ ® R– C – OH
High temp.& pres.
O
P BF3 /HOH
H – OH + CO ¾¾¾¾¾¾® H– C – OH
High temp.& pres.

5. By oxidation of alkenes:
(i) O3
(i) KMnO4/D (ii) H2O2
R R¢ E or Z R — COOH + R¢ — COOH
(ii) H3O+
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-25

6. Arndt - Eistert Reaction

Arndt-Eistert synthesis consists in the conversion of a carboxylic acid into its next higher homologue or its derivative
i.e., the chain is lengthened by one carbon atom.
RCOOH ¾¾
® RCH 2 COOH
SOCl 2CH N
RCOOH ¾¾¾¾
2 ® RCOCl ¾¾¾¾
2 2 ® RCOCHN
2
Diazoketone
H2O
RCH2COOH
Acid
EtOH
Ag2O
RCH2COOEt
RCOCHN2 ¾ ¾ ® Ester
Diazoketone
NH3
RCH2CONH2
Acid amide
R¢ N H 3
RCH2CONR¢
Acid amide
7. From Acetoacetic Ester
O O O
conc.
CH3 — C — CH2 — C — OC2H5 ¾¾¾®
2KOH
2CH3 — C — OK + C2H5OH
O O
CH3 — C — OK + HCl ¾¾¾® CH3 — C — OH + KCl
8. Grignard Reagent
é O ù O
ê P ú +
H /
P
RMgX + O = C = O ¾¾¾® ëê R - C - OMgX ûú ¾¾¾ ® R - C - OH + Mg(OH)X
dry
ether H O 2
O O
P P
dry H+ /
Ex. CH3MgBr + O = C = O ¾¾¾ ® CH 3 - C - OMgBr ¾¾¾ ® CH3 - C - OH + Mg(OH)Br
ether H 2O

9. Malonic Ester Synthesis

This is one of the most valuable methods for preparing carboxylic acids. The synthesis is based upon following two
important properties of ethyl malonate (malonic ester), CH2 (COOC2H5)2.
(i) High acidity of the a-hydrogens of malonic ester.
(ii) Extreme ease of decarboxylation of malonic acid and substituted malonic acids.
+ +-
HCH(COOC2H5)2 + C2H5O–Na ¾¾¾®
¬ Na CH (COOC2H5)2 + HOC2H5
Malonic ester (stronger acid) Sodiomalonic ester Weaker acid
- RX R¢X
Na+ CH (COOC2H5)2 ¾¾¾
® R — CH(COOC2 H5 )2 ¾¾¾
® R ¾ C(COOC2 H 5 )2 + NaX
Ethyl alkylmalonate
(An alkylmalonic ester) ½
R¢
A dialkylmalonic ester
The monoalkylmalonic and dialkylmalonic esters, so prepared are readily converted into monocarboxylic acids by
hydrolysis, acidification, and heat
- +
H2 O, OH H heat
RCH(COOC2H5)2 ¾¾¾¾¾® RCH(COO–)2 ¾¾¾® RCH(COOH)2 ¾¾¾® RCH2COOH
140°C
heat

+
H heat
R2C(COOC2H5)2 ¾¾® R2C(COO–)2 ¾¾¾® R2C(COOH)2 ¾¾¾® R2CHCOOH
140°C
Thus malonic ester provides an important method for synthesising RCH2COOH, R2CHCOOH and RR¢CHCOOH.
 C-26 Chemistry

10. Favorskii rearrangement. a-Haloketones, when treated with base, are converted into carboxylic acids.

O
Br – COOH
OH
¾¾¾®

–
O O O O
OH
Br Br
Mechanism. OH – – (–Br –) OH –
¾¾¾®
(–H O)
¾¾¾® ¾¾¾®
2

C — O– COOH
¾¾® H+
¾¾®

PROPERTIES OF CARBOXYLIC ACIDS

Physical Properties
(i) Physical State :
C1 to C3 = Colourless pungent smelling liquids
C4 to C9 = Oily liquids having goat’s butter like smell.
C10 + = Colourless and odourless waxy solids.
These are polar substances and can form H-bonds with each other to form dimer structures.
O H O
R C C R
O H O
(ii) Boiling Point : Due to dimeric structure, the effective molecular mass of the acid becomes double than the actual
mass. Hence carboxylic acids have higher boiling points than alcohols of comparable molecular masses.
(iii) Melting Point : The melting point of the carboxylic acids with even number of carbon atoms is higher than acid with
odd number of carbon atoms. Such effect is observed in first ten members of the homologous series.
(iv) Solubility
1
Upto C4 = Highly soluble in water; Solubility µ
Molecular weight
Solubility of lower members of carboxylic acids is due to the formation of hydrogen bond between – COOH group
and water molecules. As the alkyl group increases in size, water repelling (hydrophobic) tendency of the hydrocarbon
chain increases and it outweighs the effect of hydrogen bonding. This is the reason why solubility decreases in higher
members.
Chemical Properties
(i) Acidity of Carboxylic Acids : The acidic character of carboxylic acids is due to resonance in the acidic group which
imparts electron deficiency (positive charge) on the oxygen atom of the hydroxyl group.
–
O:
: :

O:
:

+
R — C —O — H R—C =O —H
: :

Non-equivalent structures (Resonance less important)

Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-27

The positive charge (electron deficiency) on oxygen atom causes a displacement of electron pair of the O—H bond
towards the oxygen atom with the result the hydrogen atom of the O—H group is eliminated as proton and a
carboxylate ion is formed. Once the carboxylate ion is formed, it is stabilised by means of resonance.

O: O–: O:

: :

: :
R—C R—C R—C –

O:

:
O–: O:

:
: :
Resonating forms of carboxylate ion (Equivalent structures), Resonating hybrid of carboxylate ion
hence resonance more important

It is important to note that although carboxylic acids and alcohols both contain —OH group, the later are not acidic
in nature. It is due to the absence of resonance (factor responsible for acidic character of —COOH) in both the
alcohols as well as in their corresponding ions (alkoxide ions).
R—O—H R — O– + H+
Alcohol Alkoxide ion
(No resonance) (No resonance)

Alkoxide ions are stabilized by solvation forces, while carboxylate ions are stabilized by solvation as well as resonance
and inductive effect of the carbonyl group.
Role of inductive effect of the carbonyl group. The carbonyl group is electron-withdrawing, and by attracting
electrons away from the negatively charged oxygen, carboxylate anion is stabilized.
Relative acidic character of carboxylic acids with common species not having —COOH group.
RCOOH > HOH > ROH > HC º CH > NH3 > RH
Effect of Substituents on Acidity : We know that the carboxylic acids are acidic in nature because of stabilisation
(i.e., dispersal of negative charge) of carboxylate ion. So any factor which can enhance the dispersal of negative
charge of the carboxylate ion will increase the acidity and vice versa. Thus electron-withdrawing substituents (like
halogens, —NO2, —C6H5 etc.) would disperse the negative charge and hence stabilise the carboxylate ion and thus
increase acidity of the parent acid. On the other hand, electron-releasing substituents would intensify the negative
charge, destabilise the carboxylate ion and thus decrease acidity of the parent acid.

Now since alkyl groups are electron-releasing, their presence in the molecule will decrease the acidity. In general,
greater the length of the alkyl chain, lower shall be the acidity of the acid. Thus formic acid (HCOOH), having no
alkyl group, is about 10 times stronger than acetic acid (CH3COOH) which in turn is stronger than propanoic acid
(CH3CH2COOH) and so on. Similarly, following order is observed in chloro acids.
Cl 3CCOOH Cl 2CHCOOH ClCH 2COOH CH 3COOH
Trichloroacetic acid
> Dichloroacetic acid
> Monochloroacetic acid
> Acetic acid
Trichloroacetic acid is more than 10,000 times more stronger than acetic acid, actually it is almost as strong acid as
a mineral acid. For further details of the relative acidities of the carboxylic acids, consult inductive effect in Chapter
on “General Organic Chemistry”.
Decreasing order of aliphatic acids
(i) O2NCH2COOH > FCH2COOH > ClCH2COOH > BrCH2COOH
(ii) HCOOH > CH3COOH > (CH3)2CHCOOH > (CH3)3 CCOOH
(iii) CH3CH2CCl2COOH > [Link] > ClCH2CHClCH2COOH
(iv) F3CCOOH > Cl3CCOOH > Br3CCOOH
 C-28 Chemistry

Benzoic acid is somewhat stronger than simple aliphatic acids. Here the carboxylate group is attached to a more
electronegative carbon (sp2 hybridised) than in aliphatic acids (sp3 hybridised). Remember that carbon becomes
more electron-withdrawing as its s character increases.
(ii) Reactions in which –OH of –COOH Group is Replaced (Conversion into Functional Derivatives)
O O

R — C — OH ¾ ¾® R—C—Z (Where, Z = —Cl,—OR¢, —NH2)

(a)Conversion into acid chlorides : Three reagents are commonly used for this purpose, namely thionyl chloride,
phosphorus trichloride and phosphorus pentachloride.
RCOOH + SOCl2 ¾¾¾® RCOCl + HCl­ + SO2­ (most convenient method)
3RCOOH + PCl3 ¾¾¾® 3RCOCl + H3PO3
RCOOH + PCl5 ¾¾¾® RCOCl + HCl­ + POCl3
(b) Conversion into esters : A carboxylic acid may be converted into esters in two ways
Direct esterification through alcohol : A carboxyl group is converted directly into an ester when heated with an
alcohol in the presence of a little mineral acid, usually conc. H2SO4 or dry hydrogen chloride.

O O
H+
R–C + R¢–OH R–C + H2O
OH OR¢
Acid Alcohol Ester

The yield of esterification can also be increased by removing water (one of the products) from the reaction mixture as
soon as it is formed. Note that it is the C—OH bond of the carboxylic acid that breaks up during esterification.
O O
18 H+ 18
C6H5 — C —— OH + CH3O ——H C6H5—C—O CH3 + H2O

Esterification through acid chlorides :

SOCl R ¢OH
RCOOH ¾¾¾¾
2 ® RCOCl ¾¾¾® RCOOR ¢

Esterification through acid chloride gives better results when tert-alcohols are used as one of the components
because in the direct esterification, the acid used may cause dehydration by elimination reaction.
(c) Conversion into amides. Acids are converted into amides by treating acid chlorides with ammonia, primary amines,
and secondary amines.
SOCl NH
RCOOH ¾¾¾¾
2 ® RCOCl ¾¾¾
3
® RCONH2
SOCl NH 3
C6H5CH2COOH ¾ ¾ ¾2 ® C6H5CH2COCl C6H5CH2CONH2
Phenylacetic acid Phenylacetal chloride Phenylacetamide
(Phenacyl chloride)

(iii) Formation of Anhydrides : It is prepared by the reaction of acetic acid with ketene (CH2 = C = O), which in turn
is prepared by high temperature dehydration of acetic acid.
AlPO , 700°C
CH 3 COOH
CH3COOH ¾¾¾¾¾¾
4
® CH2 = C = O ¾¾ ¾¾¾ ¾® (CH3CO)2O
- H 2O

Acid anhydrides, in general, can be prepared by treating acyl chloride with —COOH in the presence of pyridine or by
treating sodium salts of carboxylic acids with acyl chlorides.
RCOCl + R¢COOH (or R¢COONa) ¾¾¾® [Link]¢ + HCl (or NaCl)
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-29

(iv) Reduction of >C = O part of —COOH to —CH2OH

( i ) LiAlH 4 , ether
RCOOH ¾¾¾( ii¾ ¾¾¾
)H O
¾® RCH2OH
2
An alternate way of reducing carboxylic acid is via esters.
R ¢OH H ,Copper chromite
RCOOH ¾¾¾® RCOOR ¢ ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
2 ® RCH2OH + R ¢OH
150° C pressure

(v) Halogenation of a-Hydrogens : Aliphatic carboxylic acids react with bromine or chlorine in the persence of
phosphorus (or a phosphorus halide) to give a-halo acids, the reaction as known as Hell-Volhard-Zelinski (or HVZ)
reaction.
Cl
Cl2, P Cl2, P
RCH2COOH ¾ ¾ ¾ ® RCHCOOH ¾ ¾ ¾ ® R C COOH

Cl Cl
The function of phosphorus is to convert a little of the acid into acid halide which is the actual molecule on which
halogenation takes place and not on acid itself. Specific halogenation at a-position is due to formation of enols which
are readily formed by acyl halides than from carboxylic acids itself.

: :
O O OH
P + Br2 ¾¾®
RCH2 — C ¾¾¾¾® RCH2 — C ¾® ¾ RCH = C
(PBr3)

OH Br Br
Acyl bromide Enol form

Br—Br

O O
H2O
RCH — C ¾¾¾¾® RCH — C + HBr
Br OH Br Br
Harpp reaction is the modification of HVZ reaction. This reaction involves a-halogenation of carboxylic acid with
N-halosuccinimide in presence of HCl or HBr and SOCl2.
O O

SOCl2 HX
RCH 2 COOH ¾¾¾¾ ® RCH2COCl + N—X ¾¾® RCHCOCl + NH
X
O O
(X = Cl or Br)

Halogenation occurs specifically at the a-carbon ; because of this regioselectivity and the ease with which it takes
place, HVZ reaction is of considerable importance in synthesis.
(vi) Decarboxylation of Carboxylic Acids : The loss of a molecule of carbon dioxide from a carboxylic acid is known
as decarboxylation.
RCOOH ¾¾¾® RH + CO2
O
ôô
CH 3 – C – ONa + NaOH + CaO ¾¾® CH 4 + Na 2CO3
144244 3
Soda lime Methane
O
C – ONa + NaOH
¾¾¾¾
®
CaO,D + Na2CO3
 C-30 Chemistry

(vii) Reactions of Salts of Carboxylic Acids

(a) Heating of sodium salts with soda lime (NaOH + CaO) to form alkanes:
heat
CH3COONa + NaOH ¾¾¾
® CH4 ­ + Na 2CO3
Sod. acetate Methane
However, sodium formate on decarboxylation with soda lime gives hydrogen.
NaOH
HCOONa ¾¾¾¾
® H 2 + Na 2CO 3
(b) Electrolysis of conc. aq. solution of sod. or pot. salts gives alkanes (reaction is not given by sod. or pot.
formate).
electrolysis
2CH3COONa + 2H 2O ¾¾¾¾¾
® CH3 — CH3 + 2CO2 + 2NaOH + H 2
14 4244 3
Sod. acetate 144424443
Ethane at cathode
at anode

(c) Heating of ammonium salts (Formation of amides):

heat
CH3COONH 4 ¾¾¾
® CH3CONH 2 + H 2O
Ammo. acetate Acetamide

(d) Dry distillation of calcium salts (Formation of aldehydes and ketones).

heat
(i) (HCOO)2 Ca ¾¾¾
® HCHO + CaCO3
Cal. formate Formaldehyde

heat
(ii) (CH 3 COO) 2 Ca ¾¾® CH 3 COCH 3 + CaCO3
Cal. acetate Acetone

heat
(iii) (CH 3 COO) 2 Ca + (HCOO) 2 Ca ¾¾® 2CH 3CHO + 2CaCO3
Cal . accetate Cal . formate Acetaldehyde

CH2CH2COO
(iv) Ca heat
O + CaCO3
CH2CH2COO
(e) Sodium formate on heating gives sodium oxalate and hydrogen.
COONa
300°C
2HCOONa ¾¾¾¾
® ï + H2
COONa

(f ) Silver salt of a carboxylic acid on heating with bromine gives alkyl halide (Hunsdiecker reaction).
CCl , heat
RCOOAg + Br2 ¾¾¾¾¾
4 ® R — Br + CO 2 + AgBr

Special Properties of Formic Acid

In addition to properties discussed earlier, formic acid gives the following reactions.
(i) Action of conc. H2SO4 (Dehydration) :
H SO , heat
HCOOH ¾¾¾¾¾®
2 4 H 2 O + CO
(ii) Action of heat.
160°C
HCOOH ¾¾¾® H 2 + CO 2
(iii) Reducing agent (Reactions due to —CHO group): Like aldehydes, but unlike other acids, formic acid reduces
Tollen’s reagent, Fehling solution, mercuric chloride and potassium permanganate.
(a) HCOOH + Ag 2 O ¾¾¾® CO2 + H2O + 2 Ag ¯
Tollen’s reagent Silver mirror
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-31

(b) HCOOH + 2CuO ¾¾

® CO2 + H 2O + Cu 2O ¯
Fehling solution Cuprous oxide
(reddish brown)

(c) HCOOH + 2HgCl2 ¾¾¾® CO2 + 2HCl + Hg 2Cl 2 ¯

Mercurous chloride (white)

HCOOH + Hg2Cl2 ¾¾¾® CO2 + 2HCl + 2Hg ¯

Mercury (black)
or 2HCOOH + 2HgCl2 ¾¾¾® 2CO2 + 4HCl + 2Hg¯
(d) 2KMnO4 + 3H2SO4 ¾¾¾® K2SO4 + 2MnSO4 + 3H2O + 5O
5HCOOH + 5O ¾¾¾® 5CO2 + 5H2O
2KMnO4 + 3H2SO4 + 5HCOOH ¾¾¾® K2SO4 + 2MnSO4 + 5CO2 + 8H2O
However, remember that formic acid does not react with NH2OH, semicarbazide, phenylhydrazine, etc.
(iv) Reactions of salts of formic acid :
(a) Heating of sod. formate.
HCOONa COONa
300°C
+ ¾¾¾® ï + H2
HCOONa COONa
Sod. formate (2 moles) Sod. oxalate

(b) Heating of sod. formate with conc. H2SO4.

2HCOONa + H2SO4 ¾¾¾® Na2SO4 + 2H2O + 2CO
(c) Heating of sod. salt with soda lime.
HCOONa + NaOH ¾¾¾® H2­ + Na2CO3
Note the sod. salts of other acids give alkanes on such treatment.
ADDITIONAL CHEMISTRY OF AROMATIC CARBOXYLIC ACIDS
Preparation
Although the methods used for aliphatic carboxylic acids can be applied for preparing aromatic carboxylic acids, the most
important one is due to oxidation of side chain.
Oxidation of the Side Chain
Generally, benzene ring is very resistant to oxidation and hence benzene homologues are oxidised in the side chain to form
a carboxylic acid, the side chain is always oxidised to —COOH group, ignoring its length.

KMnO4
hot

(R = –CH3, –CH2CH3, n–C3H7)

(i) If the side chain is a tert-alkyl group, oxidation is not possible due to absence of a–hydrogen atom.

No hydrogen atom
KMnO4
heat No reaction

(ii) Side chain, like —CH2Cl, —CH2OH, and —CH2NH2, attached to benzene ring is also oxidised to —COOH group.
CH2X COOH

KMnO4

(X = —Cl, —OH, —NH2)

 C-32 Chemistry

(iii) Presence of electron withdrawing group like —NO 2 makes the ring resistant to oxidation, while presence of electron-
repelling group like —NH2 makes the benzene ring susceptible to oxidation.
NO2 NO2
HOOC
oxidation Ring B containing —NO2
A B ¾¾¾¾® B group is retained
HOOC

NH2
COOH
oxidation Ring B containing —NH2
A B ¾¾¾¾® A group is oxidised
COOH

PROPERTIES
Physical Properties
(i) It is a crystalline solid (M.P. 122ºC)
(ii) Sparingly soluble in cold water but rapidly in hot water, also, soluble in organic solvents like alcohol, ether, etc.
Chemical Properties
(i) Acidity of aromatic acids : Benzoic acid itself is somewhat stronger acid than acetic acid. Its carboxyl group is
attached to an sp2 hybridized carbon and ionizes to a greater extent than one that is attached to an sp3 hybridized
carbon (recall that carbon becomes more electron-withdrawing as its s character increases).
Moreover, benzoate anion is more stable, due to presence of benzene ring, than acetate ion.
– – – – – – –
O = C—O O—C—O O—C—O O—C—O
+ +

+
Resonance in benzoate anion due to benzene ring

CH3COOH CH2 = CHCOOH COOH

Acetic acid Acrylic acid Benzoic acid
Ka 1.8 × 10 –5 5.5 × 10 –5 6.3 × 10 –5
pKa 4.8 4.3 4.2

O O
C C
sp2 OH OH
O O
sp 3
; H3C—C H3C C
–
OH O
—COOH group attached –ve charge on O —COOH group on –ve charge on O
dispersesed intensified
on sp2C, hence more sp3 C, hence less
(hence more stable) (hence less stable)
electronegative electronegative

Like aliphatic acids, acidity of aromatic acids is affected by substituents : electron-releasing groups like —CH3,
—OH and NH2 make benzoic acid weaker, while electron-withdrawing groups like —Cl, —NO 2, —CN, etc. make
benzoic acid stronger.
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-33

In the second example, brominating agent is mild, hence

O O only monobromo product will be formed. Further,
C – C –
O O bromination will be favoured at para position because
of steric factors.

OH OH
G G
O2N NO2
Fuming
G (—NO2, —Cl; —CN) G (—CH3, —OH; —NH2, —OCH3)
withdraws electrons, disperses releases electrons, intensifies –ve HNO3
–ve charge on O, stabilises the charge on O, destabilises the anion
anion, hence strengthens acidity hence weakens acidity COOH NO2
(ii) Substitution in benzene nucleus : As described
earlier, —COOH group is m-directing and deactivating USES
group, so substitution takes palce in meta- position (i) As an antiseptic
and require stronger conditions.
(ii) Sodium benzoate for the preservation of food products,
COOH COOH etc.
(iii) In manufacturing of many synthetic dyes
Br 2, Fe
heat
(iv) In the form of esters, benzoic acid is used in perfume
Br industry.

COOH COOH
ILLUSTRATION 8 :
Conc. HNO 3 A hydrocarbon of the molecular formula C6H10 has
Conc. H2SO4, heat
two isomers ; X and Y. On oxidation X gives butanoic
NO2 acid and ethanoic acid, while Y gives 1, 6-hexanedioic
acid. Assign structures to X and Y.
COOH COOH
Sol. Molecular formula C6H10 indicates that it has two degree
Conc. H2SO4
of unsaturation which may be in the form of a triple
heat bond or one double bond and one ring. Proceed
SO3H backward from the oxidation product(s) in each case.
When some activating group e.g., —OH is present oxidation
n-C3H7COOH + CH3COOH ¬¾¾¾¾ n-C3 H 7 C º CCH 3
along with —COOH, substitution occurs w.r.t. —OH [X]
and —COOH group is replaced by the new group. For
example, COOH ¬¾¾¾
COOH
OH OH 1, 6-Hexanedioic acid Cyclohexene
COOH Br Br [Y]
Br2 water ILLUSTRATION 9 :
An organic compound with the molecular formula
Br
C9H10O forms 2, 4-DNP derivative, reduces Tollen’s
reagent and undergoes Cannizzaro reaction. On
vigorous oxidation, it gives 1, 2-benzenedicarboxylic
OH OH acid. Identify the compound.
COOH COOH Sol. The given reactions indicate the compound C H O to
Br 2 9 10
be an aromatic aldehyde with another carbon-substitu-
CH 3 COOH
ent at carbon number 2 (of the ring). Then,
Br Substituent =C6H4 – (CHO) = C2H5
 C-34 Chemistry

Therefore, the organic compound is ILLUSTRATION 10 :

CHO
A sulphuric acid solution of each of the compounds
namely tert -pentyl alcohol, neopentyl alcohol and
CH2CH3
2-methyl-2-butene when treated with carbon
monoxide gives 2, 2-dimethylbutanoic acid. Explain
2-Ethylbenzaldehyde with mechanism.
Sol. Each of the three compound gives tert-pentyl cation in presence of sulphuric acid.
CH3
|
CH3CH2 – C – OH
|
CH3
tert-Pentyl alcohol

H+ , (–H 2O)

CH3 CH3 CH3

| + | |
H CO
CH3CH = C – CH3 ¾¾¾ ® CH3CH2 – C+ ¾¾¾ ® CH3CH2 – C – COOH
| H2 O |
CH3 CH3
2-Methyl-2-butene tert-Pentyl cation 2, 2-Dimethylbutanoic acid

rearrangement

CH3 CH3
| | +
CH3 – C – CH2OH ¾¾¾® CH3 – C – CH2
| |
CH3 CH3
Neopentyl alcohol 1° Carbocation
Mechanism of conversion of R+ to RCOOH by means of CO
– + + H O
R+ + : C º O : ¾¾¾® R–CºO: ¾¾¾2 ® R–C=O
– H+ |
Acylium ion
(every atom has octet) OH
Carboxylic acid

Topic 27.3 CARBOXYLIC ACID DERIVATIVES

FUNCTIONAL DERIVATIVES OF CARBOXYLIC ACIDS

Four closely related functional derivatives of carboxylic acids are obtained by replacing —OH of a carboxylic group by
—Cl, —OCOR, —NH2, or —OR.

O O O O
R—C R—C R—C R—C
Cl O NH2 OR

R—C
O
Acid chloride Acid anhydride Amide Ester
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-35

O
||
They all contain the acyl group R ¾ C ¾ , and may be hydrolyzed to the parent acid using dilute OH– or H3O+.
O O O
+ –
R—C ; R—C + H2O H or OH R—C + HX
¾¾¾®
X OH
Acyl group Carboxylic acid Water Carboxylic acid Conjugate acid
derivative of the leaving group, X

PREPARATION OF ACID DERIVATIVES

1. Preparation of Acid Chlorides
All of these reactions are examples of acyl nucleophilic substitution reactions.
(i) Reaction with phosphorus chlorides :
O O
P P
3R - C - OH + PCl3 ¾¾¾® 3R - C - Cl + H 3PO3

O O
P P
R - C - OH + PCl5 ¾¾¾® R - C - Cl + HCl + POCl3
O O
|| ||
Ex. CH3 - C - OH + PCl5 ¾¾¾® CH 3 - C - Cl + HCl + POCl3
O
P
3C6H5COOH + PCl3 ¾¾¾® 3C6H5 – C – Cl + H3PO3
(ii) With Thionylchloride :
O O
P Pyridine P
R - C - OH + SOCl2 ¾¾¾¾® R - C - Cl + HCl + SO 2 ­

O O
P P
Pyridine
Ex. CH 3 - C - OH + SOCl 2 ¾¾¾¾® CH3 - C - Cl + HCl + SO 2 ­

Cl O
O ||
|| C – Cl + SO2 + HCl
C –– O + S = O ¾¾®
H Cl
Mechanism :
(i) with SOCl2 O– O
O O S Cl
O S
Cl O Cl
S ¾¾® ¾¾®
R OH + H H
Cl R O
+ R O
Cl +
O

S O
O Cl
¾¾® ¾¾® + SO2 + HCl
H
R O R Cl
Cl
 C-36 Chemistry

(ii) with PCl5

Cl Cl Cl Cl
O Cl Cl P P
O Cl O Cl
+ P ¾¾® ¾¾®
R OH Cl Cl
Cl Cl
R O–H – R O: H – Cl
Cl Cl
+
unstable intermediate

¬¾¾
O
Cl Cl Cl Cl
R Cl P P
+ ¬¾¾ O Cl ¬¾¾ O
Cl Cl Cl Cl
H +
O=P Cl R O R
Cl OH
Cl
Cl –
(b) Preparation of Acid Anhydrides
(i) Of the four carboxylic acid derivatives, acid anhydrides are less reactive (i.e. more stable) only from acid chlorides;
hence acid anhydrides can be prepared only from acid chlorides.
O O O O
ïï ïï Pyridine
ïï ïï
R — C— Cl + HO — C— R ¢ ¾¾¾¾® R — C— O — C— R ¢ + HCl
This method is applicable to the preparation of both symmetrical (R and R¢ are same) and mixed anhydrides.
(ii) Cyclic anhydrides can sometimes be prepared by simply heating the appropriate dicarboxylic acid. However, this
method succeeds, only when anhydride formation leads to a five- or six -membered ring.

O O O O
OH ¾300°C
¾¾® OH ¾130°C
¾¾®
O : O
OH OH
O O O O
Succinic acid Succinic anhydride Maleic acid Maleic anhydride

O O
OH ¾230°C
¾¾® O
OH
O O
Phthalic acid Phthalic anhydride

(iii) The most important member of acid anhydrides, acetic anhydride, is prepared by the reaction of acetic acid with
ketene, CH2 = C = O, which itself is prepared by high temperature dehydration of acetic acid.
AlPO , 700° C
4 CH3COOH
CH3COOH ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
®
( - H 2 O) CH2 = C = O ¾¾¾¾¾ ® (CH 3CO) 2 O
Acetic anhydride
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-37

3. Preparation of Esters
Esters are usually prepared by the reaction of alcohols (or phenols) with acids or acid chlorides.
(i) From Carboxylic Acids (Esterification) : Carboxylic acids react with alcohols to form esters through a condensation
reaction known as esterification, or Fischer esterification.
O O
½½ ½½
R— C ¾ OH + R¢—OH R— C ¾ OR ¢ + H2O
Mechanism of esterification. This is a typical mechanism of acid-catalyzed nucleophilic addition-elimination at acyl carbon
atom.
O O
P HA P
¾¾¾
® C6 H 5 - C - O - CH 3 + H 2O
C6 H5 - C – OH + H - O - CH 3 ¬¾¾
¾
The essential steps of the mechanism are summarised below.
OH

:
+
O:
:

:
O
:
+
+
: :

: :

:
R — C — OH + H R — C — OH R — C — OR¢
H
+
R¢OH
OH
Carboxylic acid accepts Alcohol attacks the protonated A proton is lost at
proton from strong carbonyl group to give a one oxygen and gained
acid catalyst tetrahedral intermediate at another

+
:

:
OH : O — H + H2O: O:
:

:
+

: :
R — C — OR¢ R — C — OR¢ R — C — OR¢ + H3O :
+ OH

Loss of a molecule Transfer of a Ester is formed

of water gives a proton to a base
protonated ester (water)

(ii) From Acid Chlorides and Acid Anhydrides

The reaction of an acyl chloride with an alcohol occurs rapidly in an irreversible manner and in absence of an acid
catalyst. However, pyridine is often added to the reaction mixture to remove HCl.
O

R — C — Cl + R¢ OH ¾ ¾ ® R — C — OR¢ +
N N Cl–
:

H+
Aromatic acid chlorides (ArCOCl) are considerably less reactive than the aliphatic acid chlorides.
(RCO)2O + R¢OH ¾¾® RCOOR¢ + RCOOH
(iii) Transesterification : When an ester is treated with an alcohol in presence of acid (H2SO4 or dry HCl) or base
(usually alkoxide ion), alcoholysis (cleavage by an alcohol) of an ester takes place to form new ester.
O O
½½ ½½
R— C ¾ OR ¢ + R²OH R— C ¾ OR ² + R¢OH
High boiling High boiling Higher boiling Lower boiling alcohol
Since the reaction is reversible, to carry out the reaction toward completion, it is necessary either to use a large
excess of the alcohol or to remove one of the products from the reaction mixture (when the alcohol formed has low
boiling point).
(iv) Lactones: Those compound which have a hydroxyl group on a g or d carbon with respect to carboxylic acid group
lead to intramolecular esterification to give cyclic esters known as g or d lactones. This reaction is acid catalysed.
 C-38 Chemistry

g a R
R OH HA
d b O
HO: O
O

:
4. Preparation of Amides
Among the four acid derivatives, amides are the least reactive, hence these can be prepared by treating acyl chlorides,
anhydrides, or esters with ammonia or amines (acylation of amines or ammonia). As expected, acid chlorides are the
most reactive and carboxylate ions are the least.
RCOCl + 2NH3
1442443 ¾¾® RCONH + NH Cl
2
1 : 2 molar ratio 4

(RCO) 2O + 2R¢ NH 2 +
144424443 ¾¾® RCONHR¢ + RCOO–H N R¢
1 : 2 molar ratio 3

RCOOR ¢ + R ²2 NH
144424443 ¾¾® RCONR ² + R¢OH
2
1 : 1 molar ratio
In industry, amides are more often made by heating ammonium salts of carboxylic acids.
NH3 evaporate to dryness
RCOOH ¾¾¾ ® RCOO– NH4+ ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾ ® RCONH2 + H2O
Since carboxylate ion has low reactivity toward nucleophilic addition-elimination, further reaction does not take
place in aqueous solution. However, if the dry ammonium salt is heated, dehydration takes place forming amide.
PROPERTIES OF ACID DERIVATIVES
Physical Properties
(i) Amides have quite high boiling points because they are capable of forming strong intermolecular hydrogen bonding.
Since N, N-disubstituted amides cannot form hydrogen bonds to each other, they have lower melting and boiling
points.
R
H
C
O N H O N H---
C
H
R
(ii) Lower esters and amides are soluble in water as these are capable of forming hydrogen bonding with water.
(iii) Acid chlorides have sharp, irritating odors, at least partly due to their ready hydrolysis to HCl and carboxylic acids.
Low molecular weight esters are fairly volatile and have pleasant odors ; hence these are often used in the preparation
of perfumes and artificial flavourings.
1. Chemical Properties of Acyl Chlorides
(i) Since acyl chlorides are the most reactive of the acyl derivatives, they are easily converted to less reactive ones,
viz. anhydrides, esters, and amides and also acids very easily.
O O O
½½ - ½½ ½½
OH
R— C ¾ O- + Cl– ¬¾¾¾
H2O
R— C ¾ Cl ¾¾¾
2 ®HO R— C ¾ OH + HCl

O O O O
½½ ½½ ½½ ½½
R ¢OH
R—C ¾ OR ¢ ¬¾¾¾ R— C ¾ Cl NaCOOR¢
¾¾¾¾¾
® R — C ¾ O — C ¾ R ¢ + NaCl
base

O O O O
½½ ½½ RNH ½½ ½½
R— C ¾ NR 2 or R— C ¾ NHR ¬¾¾¾¾
2
R— C ¾ Cl ¾¾¾®
32NH R— C ¾ NH 2 + NH4Cl
or R 2 NH
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-39

(ii) Friedel-Craft acylation :

O O
ïï AlCl3 or ether ïï
R— C— Cl + ArH ¾¾¾¾¾¾ ®R — C — Ar + HCl
Lewis acid A ketone

(iii) Reaction of organometallic compounds :

R¢ O
ï
CuX RCOCl ïï
R ¢ — Li ¾¾¾
® R — CuLi ¾¾¾¾ ® R ¢ — C — R + R ¢ Cu
(iv) Reduction :
O O
ôô
LiAlH (OBu - ter)3 ôô
LiAlH 4
R — CH 2OH ¬¾¾¾
¾ R — C ¾ Cl ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾® R — C¾H
or Rosenmund reduction
2. Chemical Properties of Acid Anhydrides
(i) Acid anhydrides undergo the same reactions as acid chlorides, but a little more slowly.
O O O
½½ ½½ ½½
CH3OH NH3
R— C ¾ OCH3 + RCOOH ¬¾¾¾ ¾ R— C ¾ OCOR ¾¾¾ ® R— C ¾ NH 2 + RCOONH4
O O O
½½ ½½ ½½
OH – H2 O
RCOO– + R— C ¾ O - ¬¾¾¾
H 2O
R— C ¾ OCOR ¾¾¾ ® R— C ¾ OH + RCOOH
Like acetyl chloride, acetic anhydride is used in acetylation (acylation) of alcohols, phenols, amines and imines.
(ii) Friedel-Craft acylation :
O
½½
3®AlCl
(RCO)2O + ArH ¾¾¾¾ Ar— C ¾ R + RCOOH
O O O

AlCl2 Cone. H2SO 4

O + Friedel-Craft Cyclisation
acylation C
O OH O
O
Phthalic anhydride o-Benzoylbenzoic acid 9, 10-Anthraquinone

(c) Chemical Properties of Esters

Esters are less reactive than acyl chlorides and acid anhydrides toward nucleophilic substitution. The three important
reactions are conversion to amides, other esters (transesterification or alcoholysis) and hydrolysis.
(i) CH3COOC2H5 + NH3 ¾¾® CH3CONH2 + C2H5OH
(ii) CH3COOC2H5 + CH3OH ¾¾® CH3COOCH3 + C2H5OH
+ -
H or OH
(iii) CH3COOC2H5 + H2O ¾¾¾¾¾ ® CH3COOH (or CH3COO–) + C2H5OH
(iv) Reaction with Grignard reagents : Esters react with two equivalents of a Grignard reagent to produce tertiary
alcohols. Since two of the three alkyl groups of the tertiary alcohol come from the Grignard reagent, hence these must
be identical.
O OH
½½ ½
(i) diethyl ether
R— C ¾ OR ¢ + 2R²MgX ¾¾¾¾¾¾ ® R ¾ C ¾ R ² + R¢OH
(ii) H3O+
½
R²
 C-40 Chemistry

Na / C H OH, or LiAlH , or
(v) Reduction : RCOOR¢ ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
2 5 4
H , Copper chromite
® RCH OH + R¢OH
2
2
high pressure, 150°C

Hydrogenolysis (cleavage by hydrogen) of esters may also be carried out by heating ester with H2 in presence of
Pd/C.
Pd/C
C6H5COOCH2C6H5 + H2 ¾¾¾ ® C6H5COOH + CH3C6H5
(vi) Due to acidic nature of a-hydrogens, esters when treated with a strong base (generally C2H5ONa) undergo condensation
to form b-keto ester (Claisen condensation).
O O O
½½ ½½ ½½
(i) C2 H5ONa/C2 H5OH
CH3 COC2 H 5 + CH3 COC2 H 5 ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾ + ® CH 3 CCH 2 COOC 2 H 5 + C2H5OH.
(ii) H3O Ethyl acetoacetate *
(Acetoacetic ester)
H + or OH -
(vii) Esters hydrolysis : CH3COOC2H5 + H2O ¾¾¾® CH3COOH (or CH3COO–) + C2H5OH
Since acid catalyzed esterification and acid hydrolysis of esters are reversible, if we reverse the mechanism of
esterification (discussed earlier), we get the mechanism of acid catalyzed ester hydrolysis.
Mechanism of base promoted ester hydrolysis. Unlike acid catalyzed, base promoted hydrolysis of ester, also
known as saponification, forms an alcohol and sodium salt of the acid.
O O
½½ ½½
R— C ¾ OR ¢ + OH– ¾¾® R— C ¾ O – + R¢OH
The carboxylate ion is very unreactive toward nucleophilic substitution because it is quite stable and negatively
charged, hence base-catalyzed hydrolysis of ester is an irreversible reaction. Since base is consumed in the reaction,
we generally speak base-promoted rather than base-catalyzed. The base-promoted hydrolysis of an ester is also an
example of nucleophilic addition-elimination at the acyl carbon.
–
:

: O:
R
– slow ½
¾¾® ¾¾®
: :

C = O + : OH
: :

¬¾¾ R—C—O—H ¬¾¾

R¢— O ½
:O—R'
:

–
OH attacks the The tetrahedral intermediate
carbonyl carbon expels an alkoxide ion
(acyl-oxygen fission)

O O
½½ –
½
½ –
: :

+ : O—R’ ¾¾® R—C—O : + H—O—R'

: :

: :

R—C—O—H
:

Transfer of a proton leads to

more stable carboxylate ion

4. Chemical Properties of Amides

(i) Amides are slowly hydrolyzed when heated under either acidic or basic conditions.
- +
OH H
RCOO– + NH3 ¬¾¾ ¾ RCONH2 + H2O ¾¾¾ ® RCOOH + NH4+
heat heat
(ii) Unsubstituted amides are converted to RCOOH with HNO2, and are dehydrated to RCN with P2O5, SOCl2,
POCl3 or PCl5.
RCONH2 + HONO ¾¾® RCOOH + N2 + H2O
PO
RCONH2 ¾¾¾
2 5®
Heat
RCN + H2O
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-41

(iii) Hofmann degradation of amides : On treatment with bromine in basic solution, unsubstituted amides are
degraded to amines with one carbon atom less. This is a useful method for the preparation of 1° amines, and
discussed in detail in amines.
RCONH2 + Br2 + 4OH– ¾¾® RNH2 + 2Br– + CO32– + 2H2O
(iv) Conversion to imides : Compounds containing acidic as well as amide group in the same molecule at the two
ends when heated, lose a molecule of water and produce a cyclic compound in which two acyl groups have
become attached to nitrogen ; such compounds are called imides.

O
CONH2 CONH2
2NH3 H+
O
– +
COO NH 4 COOH
O
Phthalic anhydride Phthalamic acid
NH3, heat heat, 300 °C heat

NH

O
Phthalimide
ILLUSTRATION 11 :
7. (a) Arrange the following acid chlorides in decreasing order of reactivity to hydrolysis.
C6H5COCl, p-NO2C6H4COCl, p-CH3OC6H4COCl
(b) Arrange the following in the decreasing ease of alkaline hydrolysis.
CH3COOC2H5, CH3COCl, (CH3CO)2O and CH3CONH2.
COCl COCl COCl

Sol. (a) > >

NO2 OCH3
Greater the partial +ve charge on carbonyl carbon, higher is the reactivity of carbonyl group towards nucleophilic
substitution.
Lesser the basic character of the leaving group (Cl– < OCOCH3 < –OC2H5 < NH2–), more easily it is removed.
CH3COCl > (CH3CO)2O > CH3COOC2H5 > CH3CONH2
ILLUSTRATION 12 :
Describe simple chemical tests that would serve to distinguish between
(i) Acetyl chloride and acetic anhydride.
(ii) Benzoyl bromide and p-bromobenzoic acid.
(iii) Acetic anhydride and n-butyl alcohol.
Sol. (i) On reaction with water, acetyl chloride reacts with water and liberates HCl which is detected by giving a white
precipitate of AgCl on adding AgNO3. Acetic anhydride on reaction with water liberates only acetic acid and no
HCl.
(ii) Only benzoyl bromide (C6H5COBr) gives yellow precipitate of AgBr with alcoholic AgNO3.
(iii) Only acetic anhydride reacts with aq. NaHCO 3 solution and evolve CO2.
C-42 Chemistry

Points to Remember
(1) Beckmann Rearrangement :
Oximes on treatment with catalysts such as conc. H2SO4, SOCl2, PCl5, etc. undergo a rearrangement to form
substituted amides. This reaction is called Beckmann rearrangement.
O O
H5C6 CH3 H5C 6 CH3
(i) conc. H 2SO 4 (i) conc. H 2SO 4
C=N ¾¾¾¾¾¾® CH3 – C – NHC6H5 ; C=N ¾¾¾¾¾¾® C6H5 – C – NHCH3
(ii) H2 O (ii) H 2O
OH Acetanilide HO N-Methylbenzamide
(2) Decarboxylation of b -keto acids :
Carboxylic acids containing an EWG such as CO , – COOH or –NO2 at b-carbon atom wrt the – COOH group
readily undergo decarboxylation on heating. For ex :
O O O
P D
P P D
CH3 - C - CH 2 - COOH ¾¾ ® CH3 - C - CH3 + CO 2 HO - C- CH 2 - COOH ¾¾ ® CH3 - COOH + CO 2
b a b a
3-Oxobutanoic acid Propanone Malonic acid Acetic acid
(3) Claisen Condensation :
Esters containing a-H-atoms undergo self-condensation in presence of a strong base such as sodium ethoxide to
form b-ketoesters. For ex :
O O
P C2H 5ONa P
CH3 - C -OC2 H5 + H - CH 2COOC2 H5 ¾¾¾¾¾ ® CH3 - C - CH 2COOC 2 H 5 + C 2 H 5 OH
Ethyl acetate Ethylacetoacetate
(2 molecules) (b -ketoester)
(4) Comparative reactivity of Acid Derivatives :
The relative reactivities of different acid derivatives towards nucleophilic acyl substitution reactions follow the
order :
O O O O O
P P P P P
R - C - Cl > R - C - O - C - R ' > R - C - OR ' > R - C - NH 2
Acid chloride Anhydride Ester Amide
This order can be explained in terms of relative basic strength of the leaving groups (LG). Here, the LG’s are :
Cl- , R 'COO - , R 'O - and NH -2 . Their relative basic strength decrease in the order : NH -2 > R 'O - > R 'COO - > Cl -
Since stronger base is a poor LG, the ease with which these LG’s depart decreases in the reverse order, i.e.,
Cl - > R 'COO - > R 'O - > NH -2 .
Consequently, relative reactivities of the acid derivatives decrease in the order :
RCOCl > RCO - O - COR ' > RCOOR ' > RCONH 2
(5) Electron withdrawing nature of halogen : F > Cl > Br > I
Thus, the acidic strength decreases in the order :
FCH2COOH > ClCH2COOH > BrCH2COOH > ICH2COOH
Similarly : CCl3COOH > CHCl2COOH > CH2ClCOOH > CH3COOH
(6) Inductive effect is stronger at a-position than b-position; similarly at b-position it is more stronger than at
g-position.
Example : CH3 - CH 2 - CH - COOH > CH3 - CH - CH 2 - COOH > CH 2 - CH2 - CH 2 - COOH
| | |
Cl Cl Cl
(7) Relative acid strength in different compounds
RCOOH > HOH > ROH > HC º CH > NH3 > RH
(8) Greater the value of Ka or lesser the value of pKa stronger is the acid, i.e., pKa = – log Ka
(9) Acidic nature (Ka) µ 1/molecular weight.
HCOOH > CH 3COOH > C 2 H 5COOH
K a Value 1.77 ´ 10-5 1.75 ´ 10-5 1.3 ´ 10-5
(10) Formic acid is strongest of all fatty acids.
(11) Acetic acid is weak acid than sulphuric acid due to smaller degree of ionisation.
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-43

Topicwise Multiple Choice Questions (MCQs)

Topic - 27.1 : Nature, Isomerism, Preparation, 7. A mixture of benzaldehyde and formaldehyde on heating
Physical and Chemical Properties of Aldehydes with aqueous NaOH solution gives
(a) benzyl alcohol and sodium formate
and Ketones (b) sodium benzoate and methyl alcohol
1. Which one of the following reactions will not form (c) sodium benzoate and sodium formate
acetaldehyde? (d) benzyl alcohol and methyl alcohol
CrO3 - H 2SO 4 8. Acetaldehyde reacts with HCN to give
(a) CH 3CH 2 OH ¾¾¾¾¾¾ ® (a) CH3CHOHCN (b) CH3CHOHCOCH3
Pd(II)/Cu(II) (c) CH3CHOHCOOH (d) CH3CHOHCHOHCH3
(b) CH 2 = CH 2 + O2 ¾¾¾¾¾ ¾ ®
H 2O 9. Acetone reacts with iodine (I2) to form iodoform in
Cu the presence of
(c) CH 3CH 2 OH ¾¾¾ ® (a) CaCO3 (b) NaOH
573K

(i) DIBAL - H (c) K2CO3 (d) MgCO3

(d) CH 3CN ¾¾¾¾¾¾ ® 10. Which of the following compound will show positive
(ii) H 2O

2. Identify the product C in the series silver mirror test?

(a) HCOOH
Na / C H OH
2 5 2 ® B ¾¾¾¾¾ HNO Cu / 573K
CH 3CN ¾¾¾¾¾¾ ® A ¾¾¾¾ ®C (b) CH 3 (CHOH ) 3 CHO
(a) CH3COOH (c) CH 3CO(CHOH )CH 3
(b) CH3CH2NHOH (d) Both (a) and (b)
(c) CH3CONH2 11. Which one gives positive iodoform test?
(d) CH3CHO
(a) (CH 3 ) 2 CHCH 2 OH
3. Ketones [ R — C — R1 , where R = R1 = alkyl groups]
|| (b) C 6 H 5 - OH
O H
can be obtained in one step by |
(a) oxidation of primary alcohols (c) CH3 CH 2 - C - CH 2 CH3
(b) hydrolysis of esters |
OH
(c) oxidation of secondary alcohols
(d) reaction of acid halides with alcohols (d) CH 3CH 2OH
4. The presence of unsaturation in organic compounds
can be tested with: 12. Reaction of phenylacetylene with dil. H2SO4 and HgSO4
(a) Schiff's reagent (b) Tollens' reagent gives
(c) Fehling's reagent (d) Baeyer's reagent (a) acetophenone (b) 2-phenylethanol
5. The enolic form of acetone contains (c) phenylacetaldehyde (d) phenylacetic acid
(a) 9 sigma bonds, 1 pi-bond 13. The product formed in the following chemical
and 2 lone pairs reaction is:
(b) 8 sigma bonds, 2 pi-bonds O
O
and 2 lone pairs NaBH
(c) 10 sigma bonds, 1 pi-bond and 1 lone pair CH 2 - C - OCH3 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾®
4
?
C 2 H 5OH
(d) 9 sigma bonds, 2 pi-bonds and 1 lone pair
6. Which of the following acts as a nucleophile in the CH3
Cannizzaro reaction involving benzaldehyde? O
– OH
(i) OH– (ii) C6H4CHO
CH 2 - C - OCH3
(iii) C6H5CH(OH)O– (iv) H2O (a)
(a) (i) and (iv) (b) (i) and (ii) CH3
(c) (i) and (iii) (d) only (i)
 C-44 Chemistry

H 21. Which of the following statement(s) is/are true

OH
regarding preparation of aldehydes and ketones?
CH 2 - C - OCH3 (i) Both can be prepared by the oxidation of the
(b) concerned alcohol with copper at about 250 ºC.
CH3 OH
(ii) Both can be prepared by the oxidation of the
O concerned alcohol by Oppenauer oxidation.
CH 2 - CH 2 - OH (iii) Both can be prepared by the oxidation of respective
(c) alcohol with acidic dichromate.
CH3 (a) (i) only (b) (ii) and (iii)
H (c) (i) and (iii) (d) All the three
OH 22. Benzaldehyde can be prepared by oxidation of toluene by:
CH 2 - C - CH3 (a) Acidic KMnO4 (b) K2Cr2O7 / H+
(d) (c) CrO2Cl2 (d) All of these
CH3 OH
23. What is X in the following conversion ?
14. A compound X of formula C3H8O yields a ketone O
C3H6O on oxidation. To which of the following class CH 2 OH ||
X
¾¾® C-H
of compounds would X belong?
(a) Aldehyde (b) Tertiary alcohol
(a) K 2Cr2 O 7 , H 2SO 4 / H 2 O
(c) Secondary alcohol (d) Alkene
15. In aldehydes and ketones, carbon of carbonyl group is (b) HIO4
(a) sp3 hybridised (b) sp2 hybridised (c) PCC / CH2 Cl2
(c) sp hybridised (d) Unhybridised (d) OsO 4 , (CH 3 ) 3 C. COOH , (CH 3 ) 3 COH , OH -
16. Ozonolysis of an organic compound 'A' produces 24. Given below are two statements.
acetone and propionaldehyde in equimolar mixture. Statement I: Formaldehyde is a planar molecule.
Identify 'A' from the following compounds: Statement II: It contains sp2 hybridised carbon atom.
(a) 1-Pentene (b) 2-Pentene In the light of the above statements, choose the correct
(c) 2-Methyl-2-pentene (d) 2-Methyl-1-pentene answer from the options given below.
17. The catalyst used in Rosenmund's reduction is (a) Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is true
(a) HgSO4 (b) Pd/BaSO4 (b) Both statement I and Statement II are true
(c) anhydrous AlCl3 (d) anhydrous ZnCl2 (c) Both Statement I and Statement II are false
18. Which of the following on heating with aqueous KOH, (d) Statement I is correct but statement II is false
produces acetaldehyde? 25. Match the columns
(a) CH3CH2Cl (b) CH2ClCH2Cl Column-I Column-II
(c) CH3CHCl2 (d) CH3COCl R
19. Which one of the following reactions will not form (A) C = NH (p) Oxime
R
acetaldehyde?
R
CrO3 - H 2SO 4
(a) CH 3CH 2 OH ¾¾¾¾¾¾ ® (B) C = NOH (q) Semicarbazone
R
Pd(II)/Cu(II)
(b) CH 2 = CH 2 + O2 ¾¾¾¾¾ ¾ ® R
H 2O
(C) C = N – NH2 (r) Imine
Cu R
(c) CH 3CH 2 OH ¾¾¾®
573K O
(i) DIBAL - H R
(d) CH 3CN ¾¾¾¾¾¾ ® (D) C = N – NH – C – NH 2 (s) Hydrazone
(ii) H 2O
R
20. Hydrogenation of benzoyl chloride in the presence of (a) A – (q), B – (s), C – (p), D – (r)
Pd and BaSO4 gives (b) A – (r), B – (p), C – (s), D – (q)
(a) benzyl alcohol (b) benzaldehyde (c) A – (r), B – (s), C – (p), D – (q)
(c) benzoic acid (d) phenol (d) A – (s), B – (r), C – (q), D – (p)
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-45

34. m-chlorobenzaldehyde on reaction with conc. KOH at

CHO
room temperature gives
dil. NaOH
(a) Potassium m-chlorobenzoate and
26. + CH 3CHO ¾¾¾¾¾ ® A . A will be – m-hydroxybenzaldehyde
(Major)
(b) m-hydroxybenzaldeyde and m-chlorobenzyl
alcohol
OH
| (c) m-chlorobenzyl alcohol and m-hydroxybenzyl
(a) C6 H5CH - CH 2 CHO (b) C6H5CH = CH – CHO alcohol
(c) C6H5CH2CH2CHO (d) Both (b) & (c) (d) Potassium m-chlorobenzoate and m-chlorobenzyl
27. Which of the following functional groups cannot be alcohol
reduced to alcohol using NaBH4 in ethanolic solution ? 35. Which of the following reagent reacts in different ways
(a) R – O – R (b) RCOCl with CH3CHO, HCHO and C6H5CHO ?
(c) R – COOH (d) R – CHO (a) Fehling solution (b) C6H5NHNH2
28. Nucleophilic addition reaction will be most favoured in (c) Ammonia (d) HCl
(a) (CH3)2C = O 36. Which carbon atoms are most susceptible to
(b) CH3CH2CHO nucleophilic attack ?
(c) CH3CHO O
||
O CH 3 – CH = CH – C – CH3
|| A B C D
(d) CH3 —CH2 —CH2 — C—CH3
(a) A and B (b) B and C (c) B and D (d) A and D
29. Aldehydes and ketones are distinguished by which of 37. Acetaldehyde reacts with
the following test ? (a) electrophiles only
(a) Lucas test (b) nucleophiles only
(b) Tollen’s test (c) free radicals only
(c) KMnO4 solution (Baeyer’s test) (d) both electrophiles and nucleophiles.
(d) None of these 38. Cross aldol condensation occurs between
30. Reaction between acetone and methyl-magnesium (a) two same aldehydes
chloride followed by hydrolysis will give : (b) two same ketones
(a) Sec. butyl alcohol (b) Tert. butyl alcohol (c) aldehydes and ketones
(c) Isobutyl alcohol (d) Isopropyl alcohol (d) None of these
31. The number of nitrogen atoms in a semicarbazone 39. An organic compound C3H6O neither gives precipitate
molecule of acetone is with semicarbazide nor reacts with sodium. It could
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4 be
32. Reduction of a carbonyl group to a methylene (a) CH3CH2CHO
group by alkaline decomposition of the hydrazone (b) CH3COCH3
is known as: (c) CH2 = CH —CH2—OH
(a) Rosenmund reduction (d) CH2 = CH —O—CH3
(b) Wolff-Kishner reduction 40. Which of the following compound will undergo self
(c) Clemmensen reduction aldol condensation in the presence of cold dilute alkali?
(d) Sabatier and Senderen reduction (a) CH2 = CH - CHO (b) CH º C - CHO
33. Reduction of aldehydes and ketones into hydrocarbons (c) C 6 H 5 CHO (d) CH 3 CH 2 CHO .
using zinc amalgam and conc. HCl is called:
41. Which one of the following is reduced with zinc and
(a) Cope reduction
hydrochloric acid to give the corresponding
(b) Dow reduction hydrocarbon?
(c) Wolff-Kishner reduction (a) Acetamide (b) Acetic acid
(d) Clemmensen redcution (c) Ethyl acetate (d) Butan-2-one
 C-46 Chemistry

42. Which of the following is best method for reducing 50. Cannizaro’s reaction is not given by :
3-bromopropanal to 1-bromopropane? CHO
(a) Wolf-Kishner reduction (a) CHO (b)
(b) Clemmensen reduction CH 3
(c) Either (a) or (b)
(c) CH3CHO (d) HCHO
(d) Stephen's reduction
51. The reaction,
43. Which one of the following reactions will not result in
the formation of carbon-carbon bond? Zn ( Hg )/Conc. HCl
CH 3CHO ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾® CH 3CH 3 is
(a) Reimer-Tieman reaction
(b) Friedel Craft’s acylation (a) Cannizaro’s reaction (b) Rosenmund reduction
(c) Wurtz reaction (c) Wolf-Kishner reduction(d) Clemmensen reduction
(d) Cannizzaro reaction 52. When ethanal reacts with propanal in the presence of a
O OH base, the number of products formed is
HCN (a) 2 (b) 3
44. R C R (catalyst)
R C R (c) 4 (d) 5
CN 53. Which of the followng acts as a nucleophile in the aldol
condensation of ethanal?
Which of following can be used as a catalyst in the
above reaction? (i) OH– (ii) H2O (iii) –CH2CHO
O (a) only (ii) (b) (i) and (ii)
(c) (i) and (iii) (d) All the three
(a) Cl– (b) CH3 C O 54. Ketone upon treatment with Grignard reagent gives
(c) Et — O– (d) HSO4— (a) primary alcohol (b) secondary alcohol
45. Which of the following gases does not form a ketone (c) tertiary alcohol (d) aldehyde
on treatment with dil H 2SO 4 and 1% HgSO4 ? 55. Tollen’s reagent and Fehling solutions are used to
(a) C 4 H 6 (b) C 2 H 2 distinguish between
(c) C 3 H 4 (d) All of these (a) acids and alcohols
OH OH H (b) alkanes and alcohols
(c) ketones and aldehydes
(1)NaOH O; (d) n-alkanes and branched alkanes
46. + (X) ¾¾¾¾
(2) H +
®

Reactant X is: Topic - 27.2 : Nomenclature, Isomerism,

(a) CH3Cl (b) CH2Cl2 Preparation and Properties of
(c) CHCl3 (d) CCl4
47. Which of the following is correct for the reaction? Carboxylic Acids
O
pH = 9 to 10
+ HCN ¾¾¾¾¾ ® (A) 56. In the anion HCOO– the two carbon-oxygen bonds are
found to be of equal length. What is the reason for it?
(a) A is cyanohydrin (a) Electronic orbitals of carbon atom are hybridised
(b) Nucleophilic addition reaction (b) The C=O bond is weaker than the C–C bond
(c) The above reaction is not shown by alkenes (c) The anion HCOO– has two reasonating structures
(d) All of these (d) The anion is obtained by removal of a proton from
10% NaOH D H
48. CH3CHO ¾¾¾® 5°C
¾® ¾® 2
(A) ; the acid molecule
Ni
Product (A) of the reaction is: 57. The compound that does NOT liberate CO2, on treatment
(a) propanol (b) ethanol with aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, is
(c) butanol (d) pentanol (a) Benzoic acid
49. Which is major product formed when acetone is heated (b) Benzene sulphonic acid
with iodine and potassium hydroxide? (c) Salicylic acid
(a) Iodoacetone (b) Acetic acid (d) Carbolic acid (Phenol)
(c) Iodoform (d) Acetophenone
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-47

58. Rancidity of butter is due to the formation of (a) Both statement 1 and statement 2 are true and
(a) butanoic acid (b) butene -1 statement 2 is the correct explanation for
(c) lactic acid (d) lactose statement 1
(b) Both statement 1 and statement 2 are true but
2 ® A ¾[Link]
KOH statement-2 is not the correct explanation for
59. CH3CH2COOH ¾¾¾ ¾ ¾¾® B. What is B?
red P
statement-1
(a) CH3CH2COCl (b) CH3CH2CHO (c) Statement 1 is true but statement 2 is false
(d) Both statement 1 and statement 2 are false
(c) CH2=CHCOOH (d) ClCH2CH2COOH.
66. The acid which contains the aldehyde group is
60. Strongest acid among the following is :
(a) acetic acid (b) formic acid
(a) CF3 COOH (b) CBr3 COOH (c) benzoic acid (d) propionic acid
(c) CH 3 COOH (d) CCl 3COOH 67. Formic acid is obtained when
61. Benzoic acid reacts with conc. HNO3 and H2SO4 to (a) calcium acetate is heated with conc. H2SO4
give : (b) calcium formate is heated with calcium acetate
(c) glycerol is heated with oxalic acid at 373 K
(a) 3-Nitrobenzoic acid
(d) acetaldehyde is oxidised with K2Cr2O7 and H2SO4.
(b) 4-Benzene sulphonic acid
68. When CH2 = CH — COOH is reduced with LiAlH4, the
(c) 4-Nitrobenzoic acid
compound obtained will be
(d) 2-Nitrobenzoic acid (a) CH2 = CH — CH2OH
62. The compound not soluble in acetic acid is : (b) CH3 — CH2 — CH2OH
(a) CaCO3 (b) CaO (c) CH3 — CH2 — CHO
(c) CaC2O4 (d) Ca(OH)2 (d) CH3 — CH2 — COOH
63. Consider the following transformations : 69. The correct acidity order of the following is
CaCO heat I OH COOH COOH
CH3COOH ¾¾¾¾
3® ¾® B ¾¾®
A ¾¾ 2
C OH
NaOH

The molecular formula of C is

OH Cl CH3
|
(a) CH 3- C - CH 3 (b) ICH2 — COCH3
| (I) (II) (III) (IV)
I (a) (III) > (IV) > (II) > (I)
(c) CHI3 (d) CH3I (b) (IV) > (III) > (I) > (II)
(c) (III) >(II) >(I) > (IV)
64. In a set of the given reactions, acetic acid yielded a
(d) (II) > (III) > (IV) > (I)
product C.
70. Select the acid(s) which cannot be prepared by Grignard
CH3 COOH + PCl5 ¾¾
® A ¾¾¾®
6 6 CH
B ¾¾¾¾¾
2 5 ®C
C H MgBr reagent.
[Link] 3 Ether
(a) Acetic acid (b) Succinic acid
Product C would be (c) Formic acid (d) All of the above
71. ¾® P , here P is
CH 3 CH = CHCOOH + HBr ¾
C2 H 5
| (a) CH 3 CHCH 2COOH (b) CH3 CH2 C HCOOH
(a) CH 3 - C (OH)C 6 H 5 (b) CH 3 CH (OH)C 2 H 5 | |
Br Br
(c) CH 3 COC 6 H 5 (d) CH 3 CH (OH ) C 6 H 5 (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) None
72. The strongest acid among the following is –
65. Statement-1 : Acetic acid does not undergo haloform
(a) Salicylic acid
reaction.
(b) m-Hydroxybenzoic acid
Statement-2 : Acetic acid has no alpha hydrogen.
(c) p-Hydroxybenzoic acid
(d) Benzoic acid
 C-48 Chemistry

73. Silver benzoate will react with bromine in CCl4 to form: 76. The decreasing order of ease of alkaline hydrolysis for
COOBr the following esters is
COOAg
(a) (b) COOC2H5

I
Br Br
COOH Cl COOC2H5
(c) (d)
II

Topic - 27.3 : Carboxylic Acid Derivatives O2N COOC2H5

74. Which of the following derivatives of alcohols is un- III
stable in an aqueous base?
O CH3O COOC2H5
IV
(a) RO Me (b) RO (a) III > II > IV > I (b) III > II > I > IV
(c) IV > II > III > I (d) II > III > I > IV
77. The reaction of sodium acetate with acetyl chloride
(c) (d) RO – CMe3
proceeds through which of the following mechanism?
O
RO
O O
75. The major product obtained in the following reaction –
(a) CH3 C O + CH3 C Cl
is:
CO2Et O O
NaOEt/D
O ¾¾¾¾¾
® (b) CH 3 — C — O– + CH 3 — C — Cl
O

O O O
(a) (c) CH — C — O –
3 + CH3 — C — Cl

CO2Et
O O
O (d) CH3 — C — O– + Cl — C — CH3
(b)
CO2Et
78. H2O18 + Na ® (A) + (B)
(base)
O
(c) O

CH3 C O CH 2 CH3 + (A) ® (C) + (D) alcohol

CO2Et
Product (C) of the reactions is:
O O18
O
(d)
CO2Et (a) CH3 C O H (b) CH3 C O H
18

O O
18
O–
–
(c) CH3 C (d) CH3 C O Na+
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-49

O CONH2
CO2Et COCH3
+
(i) H O
79. ¾¾¾¾ 3
® Product;
(ii) D

HOH2C
Product of the reaction is: CN

O O (a) B2 H6 (b) NaBH4

CHO (c) LiAlH4 (d) H2/Pd
(a) (b) 83. Calculate number of molecules of Grignard reagent
consumed by 1 molecule of following compound.

O O H
CH3 O O
(c) (d) O O
O

80. Given below are two statements : HO NO2

Statement I : Ethyl pent–4–yn–oate on reaction with

(a) 5 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 1
CH3MgBr gives a 3°–alcohol.
Statement II : In this reaction one mole of ethyl pent– 84. In the Friedel Craft's acylation reaction, the effective
4–yn–oate utilizes two moles of CH3MgBr. electrophile is
In the light of the above statements, choose the most (a) RCOCl+ (b) AlCl3
appropriate answer from the options given below : (c) RCOCl (d) RCO+
(a) Both Statement I and Statement II are false. 85. Benzoyl chloride is prepared from benzoic acid by
(b) Statement I is false but Statement II is true.
(a) Cl2, hν (b) SO2Cl2
(c) Statement I is true but Statement II is false.
(d) Both Statement I and Statement II are true. (c) SOCl2 (d) Cl2, H2O

Br NH (alc.) OH - ,Cl
2 ® Product P is
81. CH 3CH 2 COOH ¾¾
¾2 ® X ¾¾ ¾
3 ¾
¾® Y 86. CH 3 COCH 2 Cl ¾¾ ¾ ¾
¾
Re d P
Y in the above reactions is (a) ClCH2COCH2Cl (b) CH3COCHCl2
(a) lactic acid (c) both a and b (d) ClCH2COOH + CH3Cl
(b) ethylamine 87. At high temperature iodoform reaction is given by –
(c) propylamine
(a) CH3COOCH3 (b) CH3COOC2H5
(d) alanine
(c) C6H5COOCH3 (d) CH3COOC6H5
82. The most suitable reagent for the given conversion is:
A
88. CH 3COOH ¾¾® CH 3 COCl . What is A ?
CH3 (a) PCl5 (b) Cl2 (c) HCl (d) COCl2
CONH2
C=O
?
¾¾®

HO2C
CN
 C-50 Chemistry

Question Bank Level-1

1. The major product of the following reaction is: (a) diethyl ketone (b) formaldehyde
(c) acetaldehyde (d) acetone
5. Which of the following is an intermediate formed in
the reaction shown below?
+
O

CH3 C Cl + NH3 ¾¾
® Intermediate ¾¾
® product.

O
+ +
(a) (b) (a) C H3 NH 3 (b) CH3 C
OH O–

(c) CH3 C Cl (d) CH3 C Cl

+ NH3 +NH3
6. The reactant (X) in the reaction
(c) (d)
CH COONa
(X) ¾¾¾¾¾
3 ¾® Cinnamic acid, is
(CH CO) O
3 2

2. Consider the reaction : COOH CHO

RCHO + NH2NH2 ® RCH = N – NH2 (a) (b)
What sort of reaction is it ?
(a) Electrophilic addition – elimination reaction CH 3 CH2OH
(b) Free radical addition – elimination reaction (c) (d)
(c) Electrophilic substitution – elimination reaction
(d) Nucleophilic addition – elimination reaction 7. In the following reaction
HCI
3. Major products of the following reaction are : Aldehyde+Alcohol ¾¾¾ ® Acetal
Aldehyde Alcohol
HCHO t-BuOH
CH3CHO MeOH
The best combination is:
(a) (a) CH3CHO and t-BuOH (b) HCHO and MeOH
(c) CH3CHO and MeOH (d) HCHO and t-BuOH
8. Arrange the following carbonyl compounds in
decreasing order of their reactivity in nucleophilic
addition reaction.
(b)
CHO CHO COCH3 CHO

(c)

NO2 CH3
(d) CH3OH and HCO2H (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
4. The cyanohydrin of a compound on hydrolysis gives
an optically active a-hydroxy acid. The compound is (a) (ii) > (iii) > (i) > (iv) (b) (ii) > (i) > (iv) > (iii)
(c) (iii) > (ii) > (i) > (iv) (d) (iii) > (i) > (iv) > (ii)
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-51

9. What is the final product (B) of this sequence? 13. The major product of the following reaction is:
CH3 CN
(i) DIBAL-H
Br2 1. KCN ¾¾¾¾¾®
+
¾¾¾
hight
® A ¾¾¾¾¾¾
+ ®B O (ii) H 3O
2. H 3O , heat

CH3 CO2H O
CO2H CHO CH = NH
(a) (b) (a) (b)
O OH
CH3 CH2CO2H
O OH
CHO CHO
(c) (d)
CO2H
(c) (d)
OH O
CH3
Br CHO
1. Mg/Ether
10. ¾¾¾¾¾¾®
+
A; 14. The major product obtained in the following reaction
2. H3O
3. KMnO 4 /OH - is:
4. H+
Product A is; O OH
COOH OH
OH CH3 LiAlH
(a) (b) ¾¾¾®
4

CH3 (excess)

COOH NO2 O

(c) (d)
O OH OH
11. How many cross aldol products (without counting
stereoisomers) are produced in the following reaction?
(a) (b)
O CH3 CH3
||
NaOH
CH3 - CH = O + CH3 - C - CH3 ¾¾¾¾ ®
NO2 OH NH2 OH
(a) 5 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 1
12. The major product of the following reaction is:
OH OH
NaBH
¾¾¾®
4

OH (c) (d)
(a) CH3N CH3 CH3
OH
(b) CH N NH2 OH NO2 OH
3

O 15. An aromatic compound ‘A’ having molecular formula

(c) CH3H,
CH NHN C7H6O2 on treating with aqueous ammonia and heating
OH forms compound ‘B’. The compound ‘B’ on reaction
(d) CH3H,NH
CH N with molecular bromine and potassium hydroxide
provides compound ‘C’ having molecular formula
C6H7N. The structure of ‘A’ is:
 C-52 Chemistry

COOH
19. Ozonolysis
(a) X +Y

(b)
O CH = CH – CHO Ozonolysis
C+D
CHO
B
(c)
From the ozonolysis products, the two isomers A and
OH
B can be distinguished with the help of
OHC (a) Fehling solution (b) Tollen’s reagent
(d) (c) Haloform test (d) Only spectroscopy
OH
O
16. In the presence of a small amount of phosphorus,
aliphatic carboxylic acids react with chlorine or HNO3
¾¾®
Ca(OH)2
(A) ¾¾¾® (B)
bromine to yield a compound in which a-hydrogen 20.
has been replaced by halogen. This reaction is known
Product (B) in this reaction is:
as :
O
(a) Wolff - Kishner reaction O
(b) Rosenmund reaction (a) (b)
(c) Etard reaction
(d) Hell - Volhard - Zelinsky reaction O O
17. The compound that undergoes decarboxylation most
readily under mild condition is (c) (d)
COOH COOH
21. Correct order of reactivity of following compounds
CH2COOH O towards Grignard reagent?
(a) (b)
O
O O
COOH CH2COOH CH3 C
CH3 C H H C H
COOH O (I) (II) (III)
(c) (d) (a) I > II > III (b) II > I > III
(c) II > III > I (d) I > III > II
OH 22. Which of the following pairs of reactants is most
effective in forming an enamine?
18. PCC
¾¾® dil. NaOH
(A) ¾¾¾® (B) O
D
(a) CH3CH2CH + [(CH3)2CH]2 NH
Product (B) is: O
O O
(b) + CH3 NH CH3

(a) (b)
O
(c) (CH3)3CCH + (CH3)2NH
O O
(d) None of these form an enamine.

(c) (d)
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-53

23. Which of the following acids has the smallest O

dissociation constant ? NH 2 OH H + LAH
26. ¾¾¾¾ ® (A) ¾¾¾ ® (C) ;
® (B) ¾¾¾
(a) CH3CHFCOOH (b) FCH2CH2COOH
(c) BrCH2CH2COOH (d) CH3CHBrCOOH Product (C) of the reaction is:
24. The major product of the following reaction is:
OH

(a) (b)
N N

H H

(c) (d)
N O N OH
(a) (b)
H H

27. Reaction of cyclohexanone with dimethylamine in the

presence of catalytic amount of an acid forms a
compound if water during the reaction is continuously
(c) (d) removed. The compound formed is generally known
as
(a) an amine (b) an imine
25. The major product of the following reaction is : (c) an enamine (d) a schiff’s base

Å
Conc. KOH
CHO ¾¾¾¾¾ H
28. ® (A) ¾¾¾ ® (B)
D D
CHO Cyclic product

(a) Structure of (B) is:

COOH
(a) O (b)
(b) CH2OH

(c)
O

O COOK
(c) (d)
CH2OH

(d)
 C-54 Chemistry

29. Which of the following is the product of aldol 32. The compund having formula,
condensation?
O O
O OH O || ||
OH CH 3 - C- CH 2 - C - OC 2 H 5
(a) (b)
(a) forms dioxime
O O (b) undergoes iodoform test
HO
(c) (d) (c) both (a) & (b)
OH (d) neither of the two
33. The structure of the compound Y in the following
30. Which of the following reacts with (CH 3CH 2 ) 2 NH
reactions should be
to give the compound ?
CH 3 CH 2 CH = CHN (CH 2 CH 3 ) 2 CH3COCl
[X]
SeO2
[Y]
AlCl3
(a) CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 Br

O COCH3 COOH
(b) CH3CH2 — C — CH3 (a) (b)
O
O
COCHO COCOOH
(c) CH3 — CH2CH2 — C — H
(c) (d)
O
(d) CH3CH2CH2 — C — OH 34. In which of the following, the number of carbon atoms
does not remain same when carboxylic acid is obtained
O by oxidation
+
H
31. X , most likely the compound X is (a) CH3COCH3 (b) CCl3CH2CHO
(c) CH3CH2CH2OH (d) CH3CH2CHO
R R
35. Polarization of electrons in acrolein may be written as:
OH OH
d- d+
(a) C H 2 = CH — CH = O
(a) (b)
R d+ d-
R R R (b) C H 2 = C H — CH = O

OH d+ d-
OH (c) C H 2 = CH — CH = O
R
(c) (d) R R
d- d+
R (d) C H 2 = C H — C H = O
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-55

Chapter Test 1
(a) Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is true
2H
1. CH3 COCl ¾¾¾¾¾
® CH3CHO + HCl; (b) Both statement I and Statement II are true
Pd / BaSO4
(c) Both Statement I and Statement II are false
The above reaction is called (d) Statement I is correct but statement II is false
(a) Reimer-Tiemann reaction 7. Acetophenone is prepared by the reaction of which of
(b) Cannizzaro reaction the following in the presence of AlCl3 catalyst ?
(a) Phenol and acetic acid
(c) Resenmund reaction
(b) Benzene and acetone
(d) Reformatsky reaction (c) Benzene and acetyl chloride
2. Calcium acetate, on heating, gives : (d) Phenol and acetone
(a) Acetic anhydride (b) Acetone 8. Which of the following reaction can produce
(c) Acetaldehyde (d) Ethyl alcohol R – CO – Ar ?
AlCl3
3. Predict the product ‘B’ in the sequence of reactions (a) ArCOCl + H - Ar ¾¾¾®
30% H SO
CH º CH ¾¾¾¾¾®
2 4 A ¾¾¾¾
®B
NaOH (b) RCOCl + ArMgX ¾¾
®
% HgSO4
(c) ArCOCl + RMgX ¾¾
®
(a) CH3COONa (b) CH3COOH
AlCl3
(d) RCOCl + H - Ar ¾¾¾®
(c) CH3CHO (d) CH3 - CH - CH 2 - CHO 9. If formaldehyde and KOH are heated, then we get
|
OH (a) methane (b) methyl alcohol
4. In the scheme given below, how many number of (c) ethyl formate (d) acetylene
intramolecular aldol condensation products formed from 10. Which of the following compound gives a ketone with
Grignard reagent ?
‘Y’?
(a) Formaldehyde (b) Ethyl alcohol
1. O 1. NaOH (aq) (c) Methyl cyanide (d) Methyl iodide
¾¾¾¾®
3
Y ¾¾¾¾¾®
2. Zn, H2O 2. heat 11. Phenylmethyl ketone can be converted into ethylbenzene
in one step by which of the following reagents?
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4 (a) LiAlH4 (b) Zn-Hg/HCl
5. By which one of the following reaction ketones cannot (c) NaBH4 (d) CH3MgI
be prepared? 12. 2-Pentanone and 3-pentanone can be distinguished by :
(a) Hydration of alkynes (a) Cannizzaro reaction
(b) Aldol condensation
(b) Hydrolysis of gem-dihalides
(c) Iodoform reaction
(c) Dry distillation of calcium carboxylates (d) Clemmensen reduction
(d) Stephen's reaction 13. Which of the following is an example of aldol
6. Given below are two statements. condensation?
CH3
|
Statement I: Hydroxyketones are not directly used in (a) 2CH3COCH3 ¾¾¾¾¾
[Link]
® CH3C(OH)CH 2 COCH3
Grignard reaction.
dil. NaOH
Statement II: Grignard reagents react with hydroxyl (b) 2HCHO ¾¾¾¾¾ ® CH3OH
group. dil. NaOH
(c) C6H5CHO + HCHO ¾¾¾¾¾ ®
In the light of the above statements, choose the correct C6H5CH2OH
answer from the options given below. (d) None of the above
 C-56 Chemistry

14. Hydride ion transfer takes place in: (a) electronegativity difference of carbon and oxygen
(a) Frankland method atoms.
(b) Wurtz reaction (b) electromeric effect.
(c) Cannizzaro reaction (c) more stable anion with negative charge on oxygen
(d) Wolff-Kishner reduction atom and less stable carbonium ion.
15. Which is not true about acetophenone ? (d) None of these.
(a) It reacts with 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine to form
21. Methyl ethyl ketone is prepared by the oxidation of
2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone.
(b) It reacts with Tollen’s reagent to form silver mirror. (a) 2-propanol (b) 1-butanol
(c) It reacts with I2/NaOH to form iodoform. (c) 2-butanol (d) t-butyl alcohol
(d) On oxidation with alkaline KMnO4 followed by H SO
hydrolysis it gives benzoic acid. 22. CH3 - CH 2 - C º CH ¾¾¾¾
2 4® A
, the compound A
HgSO4
16. (CH3)2C = CHCOCH3 can be oxidised to
is
(CH3)2C = CHCOOH by
(a) Chromic acid (b) NaOI O
||
(c) Cu at 300ºC (d) KMnO4
(a) CH3 - CH 2 - C - CH3
17. Aldehydes and ketones are generally reduced by :
(a) Clemmensen reduction (b) CH3 - CH 2 - CH 2 - CHO
(b) H2S
(c) H2/Ni (c) CH3 - CH 2 - CH 2 - COOH
(d) None of these
18. Match the columns . (d) None of these
Column-I Column-II O
H
(Reactions) (Reagents) 23. Ph C OH ¾¾® 2 SOCl
(A) ¾¾¾®2
(B)
Pd-BaSO4
(A) Benzophenone ® (p) LiAlH4
Product (B) is:
Diphenylmethane
O
(B) Benzaldehyde ® (q) DIBAL–H
1-Phenylethanol (a) Ph C H (b) Ph—CH2—OH
(C) Cyclohexanone ® (r) Zn(Hg)/Conc HCl (c) Ph—CH2—Cl (d) Ph—CH CH2
Cyclohexanol
(D) Phenyl benzoate ® (s) CH3MgBr
Integer/Numerical Value Type Questions
Benzaldehyde 24. How many of the following compound is
(a) A – (p), B – (s), C – (r), D – (q) decarboxylated on heating ?
(b) A – (q), B – (s), C – (p), D – (r)
CH 2 COOH
(c) A – (s), B – (r), C – (q), D – (p) (I) ½ (II) C2H5CH(COOH)2
(d) A – (r), B – (s), C – (p), D – (q) CH 2 COOH
19. Which one of the statements about
O
HOH2CCH(OH)CHO is not correct ? It
COOH
(a) is an isomer of 1, 3-dihydroxypropanone.
(III)CH3COCH2COOH (IV)
(b) contains a tertiary alcoholic group.
(c) has the same empirical formula as glucose i.e., 25. How many of the following compounds can be used
CH2O. as an acylating agent ?
(d) can show optical isomerism. (I) CH3COCl (II) (CH3CO)2O
20. Carbonyl compounds undergo nucleophilic addition (III)CH3COOH (IV)CH3CH2COCl.
reaction because of
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-57

Question Bank Level-2

1. An organic compound neither reacts with neutral ferric
chloride solution nor with Fehling solution. It however,
(a) (b)
reacts with Grignard reagent and gives positive
iodoform test. The compound is :

(c) (d)
(a) (b)
O
KOH
5. (P) ¾¾¾®
D

KOH
(c) (d) (Q) ¾¾¾ ® Ph—CH2—OH + Ph— CO-2
D

O
(R) ¾¾®
3
P + Q, Structure of (R) is:
CH3
(a) Ph CH CH CH 3 (b) Ph CH C
CH3
O3 NH2 NH2
2. C16H16 ¾® (B) ¾¾¾¾®
HO–/D ; CH3 CH3
C8H8O
(A)
(c) Ph C CH CH3 (d) Ph C CH2
Reactant (A) in this reaction is:
Ph CH3 Ph CH3 6. Which of the following is true regarding preparation of
(a) C C (b) C C aldehydes and ketones?
Ph CH3 CH3 Ph (i) Both can be prepared by the oxidation of the
Ph Ph concerned alcohol with copper at about 250ºC.
(c) C C (d) both (b) and (c) (ii) Both can be prepared by the oxidation of the
CH3 CH3 concerned alcohol by Oppenauer oxidation.
3. The major product in the following reaction is: (iii) Both can be prepared by the oxidation of respective
alcohol with acidic dichromate.
(a) (i) (b) (ii) and (iii)
(c) (i) and (iii) (d) All the three
OH O
PCC NH2 NH C NH2
O 7. Ph CH CH 3 (A) (B)

(a) (b) Product (B) is:

CH3 O
HO CH3
(a) Ph C N C NH NH2
O
(c) (d) (b) Ph C N NH C NH2

CH3
4. In the following reaction A is: O
H O
(i) Br2, hv
(c) Ph CH N N C NH NH2
(ii) KOH (alc.)
A ¾¾¾¾¾¾® CH3
(iii) O3
(iv) (CH3)2S O
(v) NaOH(aq) + D
(d) Ph CH N C NH2
 C-58 Chemistry

8. Arrange the stabilities of given gem-diols in decreasing (c) H3COCH2COC6H5

order. (d) p – H3CO – C6H4 – COCH3
OH 12. In the following reactions, products A and B are:
OH
(I) (II) OH O O
OH
dil NaOH
OH H3C
H3C H ¾¾¾® [A]
(III) CH3
OH
(a) I > II > III (b) III > II > I [A] ¾¾® [B]
(c) I > III > II (d) III > I > II O O
O CH3 CH3

D
(a) A = CH3 ; B = CH3
9. ¾¾
® (A) ¾¾¾¾¾
Zn(Hg)/HCl
® (B)
O HO
H O
In the above reaction, product (B) is: O O
CH3 CH3
(b) A = CH3 ; B = CH3
(a) (b)
HO
O
(c) (d) O
OH C CH3
H3C H H
CºCH 2+
(c) A = ;B =
H2SO4, Hg
10. A, H3C H3C
CH3 CH3
O
CºCH 2+ O O
H 2SO4, Hg OH H2C
B
H3C H H
(d) A = ;B =
The respective compounds A and B are
H3C H3C
O
COCH3 CH3 CH3
COCH3
(a) and CrO2 Cl2 [Link]
13. Ph—CH3 ¾¾¾¾ ® (A) ¾¾¾¾¾ ®

O Ph—CH2OH + (B)
CH2CHO CH2CHO Product (B) of above the reaction is :
(b) and (a) Ph — CO2H (b) PhCO2–
(c) Ph — CHO (d) PH — CH3
O OH
COCH3 CH2CHO PCC OH PCC
14. ¾¾® (A); ¾¾® (B)
(c) and
(A) and (B) are differentiated by:
O (a) NaH (b) 2,4 DNP
CH2CHO COCH3 (c) Tollen's reagent (d) NaHSO3
(d) and 15. The final product (III) obtained in the reaction
sequence–
11. An ester (A) with molecular fomula, C9H10O 2 was PCl
3® I
CH3 - CH 2 - COOH ¾¾¾
treated with excess of CH3MgBr and the complex so
formed was treated with H2SO4 to give an olefin (B). 6 6C H /AlCl
3 ® II ¾¾¾¾¾
2 2 ® III NH - NH
¾¾¾¾¾¾
Ozonolysis of (B) gave a ketone with molecular formula base/heat
C8H8O which shows positive iodoform test. The
structure of (A) is (a) CH 2 – CH 2 – CH 3
(a) C6H5COOC2H5
(b) C2H5COOC6H5
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-59

CH3
(b) CH – CH2 – CH3
dil. KMnO HIO OH-
¾¾¾¾¾
4 ® A ¾¾¾®
4 B ¾¾¾® C
OH
CH3
O
||
(c) C – O CH2 – CH3 O
CHO
O
|| (a) (b)
(d) C – CH2 – CH3 CH3 CH3
16. The major products of the following reaction are:
CHO
CH3 CHO
|
(i)KO t Bu / D (c) (d)
CH3 - CH - CH - CH3 ¾¾¾¾¾¾ ®
| (ii)O3 / H 2 O 2
OSO2 CH3 CHO
CH3
O O
(a)
CH3 O PhMgBr
3 CH MgBr
2 ¾ H + /H O
19. ¾¾¾¾® ¾¾¾¾¾
® ¾¾¾¾ ®
(1 eq.) (1 eq.) (2 eq.)
CH3
(b) + CH3COOH O
CH3 O Product.
The product formed in the reaction is –
CH3
+ HCHO OH OH
(c)
O O
CH3 CHO || ||
(a) Me Ph (b) Me - C - C - Ph
CH3
(d) + HCOOH O
CH3 COOH
OH O O
17. The suitable reaction steps to carry out the following | || ||
transformation (c) Me - C - COOH (d) Ph - C - C - O - Me
|
? ? H Ph
¾¾¾® ¾¾¾®
O 20. Which of the following reaction is possible ?
(i ) BH 3 , THF PCC (i) CH 3COCl + H 2O ® CH 3COOH + HCl
(a) ¾¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® ¾¾¾®
(ii ) H 2O 2 , NaOH CH 2Cl 2
(ii) CH 3COOCH3 + HBr ® CH 3COBr + CH 3OH
(i ) BH 3 , THF
(b) ¾¾ ¾ ¾¾ ¾¾® ¾¾¾® HIO4
(iii) CH 3CONH 2 + HBr ® CH 3COBr + NH 3
(ii ) H 2O 2 , NaOH

H2 O, H2SO4
(iv) CH 3COOCOCH 3 + H 2O ® 2CH 3COOH
(c) ¾¾¾¾¾¾ ® ¾PCC
¾¾®
CH 2Cl 2 (a) (i) and (iv) (b) (i), (iii) and (iv)
(c) (i), (ii) and (iv) (d) All the four
OsO4 K Cr O , H SO
(d) ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾–
® ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
2 2 7 2 4® 21. The increasing order of the rate of HCN addition to
(CH3 )3 [Link], OH H2 O
compounds, A – D is
18. Suggest appropriate structures for the missing final (A) HCHO (B) CH3COCH3
compound. (The number of carbon atom remains the (C) PhCOCH3 (D) PhCOPh
same throughout the reaction) (a) D < C < B < A (b) C < D < B < A
(c) A < B < C < D (d) D < B < C < A
 C-60 Chemistry

22. The major products of the following reaction are : 25. The best combination of reagents for carrying out the
conversion
RCH2CH2OH ® RCH2CH2COOH is
3
(a) PBr3, KCN, H3O+ (b) PBr3, KCN, H2/Pt
(c) KCN, H3O + (d) PBr3, H3O+
3
26. The major product [R] in the following sequence of
reactions is :
(i) LiNH2/ether
HC º CH ¾¾¾¾¾® [P]
(ii) H3C
CH – Br
(a) (CH3)2CH
(i) HgSO4/H2SO4 Conc. H2SO4
¾¾¾¾¾® [Q] ¾¾¾¾® [R]
(ii) NaBH4 D

H2C

(a) C – CH2– CH3

CH(CH3)2
(b) H3C
(b) C = CH – CH3
(CH3)2CH
H3C
(c) C = C(CH3)2
(c)
H3CCH2
H3C
(d) CH – CH = CH2
(CH3)2CH
27. Choose the best sequence of reactions for
(d)
transformation given. Semicolons indicate separate
reaction steps to be used in the order shown.
?
23. Which is not formed as an intermediate in the reaction H3C CO2CH3
given below?
H O+ O
PhCH(OH)C º CH ¾¾3 ¾
¾® C 6 H 5CH = CHCHO ||
+ H3C C—NH—CH3
O H2
| + (a) H3O+; SOCl2; CH3NH2
(a) C 6 H 5 C HC º CH (b) C 6 H 5CH = C = C H
(b) HO–/H2O; PBr3; Mg; CO2; H3O–; SOCl2; CH3NH2
+
(c) C 6 H 5 C HC º CH (d) C6H5CH – C = CH
+
(c) LiAlH4; H2O; HBr; Mg; CO 2; H3O +; SOCl2;
| | CH3NH2
OH H (d) None of these would yield the desired product.
24. Which of the following statement is incorrect about
28. Which of the following reagent(s) are used for the
the reaction of ammonia derivatives with carbonyl
conversion?
compounds?
O O
(a) pH of solution is maintained between 4 to 5
OH
(b) Addition of ammonia derivatives occurs followed
CO2Et
by elimination of H2O
(a) glycol/LiAlH4/H3O+ (b) glycol/NaH/H3O+
(c) At very low pH (less than 3) ammonia derivatives (c) LiA1H4 (d) NaBH4
are protonated and do not act as nucleophile
(d) At very high pH, reaction becomes explosive
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-61

29. The end product ‘C’ in the following sequence of

chemical reactions is
O
CaCO 3 heat NH 2OH O O
CH 3COOH ¾¾ ¾
¾® A ¾¾
¾® B ¾¾ ¾¾® C
(A) (B)
(a) Acetaldehyde oxime (b) Formaldehyde oxime 33.
(c) Methyl nitrate (d) Acetoxime
30. Predict the nature of the major product in the following
CO2CH3 CO2CH3
reaction
HCN Conc. H SO
CH 3CH 2 COCH 3 ¾¾¾®[ ] ¾¾¾¾¾¾
2 4®
heat
Major product O
O O O O
OH (C) (D)
|
(a) CH 3CH 2 C COOH (b) CH 3CH = C CN
| |
CH3 CH3 CH2 OH CHO CHO

OH
| Identify the correct sequence:
(c) CH 3CH = C COOH (d) CH 3CH 2 C HCH 3 CH2 OH
|
CH3 (A) = (B) = NaBH4
OH CH2 OH

Ni/3H
(C) = KMnO4 (D) = H3O+
Cu
31. ¾¾¾¾¾
2
® (A) ¾¾® (B) (a) A, C, B, D (b) A, D, B, C
(High temp
& pressure)
(c) A, B, D, C (d) A, B, C, D
NH OH H+ HO – O
¾¾¾¾
2
® (C) ¾¾¾ ® (E) ¾¾
® (D) ¾¾¾ ®
(i) SOCl
34. Ph CH CH C O H ¾¾ ¾ ¾®2 (A);
polymer; (ii) NH 2
Product (E) is:
(a) Nylon 66 (b) Nylon 6 Product (A) of the reaction is:
(c) Styrene (d) Polystyrene
O
O (a) Ph CH CH C CH2 NH
C
PCl5 LiAlH 4
32. O ¾¾¾ ® (A) ¾¾¾¾ ® (B) O
C (b) Ph CH CH C NH
O
PCC HO –
¾¾¾ ® (C) ¾¾¾
D
® (D) O
What is the final product (D) of the sequence? (c) Ph CH CH C H
CH2 OH CO2–
(d) Ph CH CH NH
(a) (b)
CO2– CO2– 35. Identify X in the following sequence of reactions?
CH2 OH CH2 O–
(c) (d) C4 H 7OCl ¾¾¾
3 NH
® C 4 H 9ON ¾¾¾¾
2
® CH3CH2CH2NH 2
Br , KOH
CH2 OH CH2 O– (X)

(a) (CH3)2CHCOCl
(b) CH3CH2CH(OH)CH2Cl
(c) CH3CH2CH2COCl
(d) ClCH2CH2CH2CHO
 C-62 Chemistry

Chapter Test 2
1. Acetophenone when reacted with a base, C2H5ONa, CHO
yields a stable compound which has the structure. 5.
(i) KOH/D
[X] . What is [X]?
(ii) H2O/H +
— C = CH – C —
(a) CHO
CH3 O
CH2 – OH CHO
— CH – CH2C —
(b) (a) (b)
CH O
CH33CH3 COOH COOH

—C–C— CH2 – OH CH2 – OH

(c)
OH OH (c) (d)
–
— CH – CH — CHO COO K+
(d)
OH OH 6. Compound ‘A’ (molecular formula C3H8O) is treated
with acidified potassium dichromate to form a product
2. Which of the following reagents cannot be used to
‘B’ (molecular formula C3H6O). ‘B’ forms a shining
distinguish between hexanal and 2-hexanone? silver mirror on warming with ammonical silver nitrate.
(a) Tollen’s reagent ‘B’ when treated with an aqueous solution of
(b) Br2 in CCl4 [Link] and sodium acetate gives a product
(c) I2 in NaOH ‘C’. Identify the structure of ‘C’
(d) Fehling solution (a) CH 3CH 2 CH = NNHCONH2
3. A substance C4H10O yields on oxidation a compound,
C4H8O which gives an oxime and a positive iodoform (b) CH3 - C = NNHCONH2
|
test. The original substance on treatment with conc. CH3
H2SO4 gives C4H8. The structure of the compound is
(a) CH3CH2CH2CH2OH (c) CH3 - C = NCONHNH2
|
(b) CH3CH(OH)CH2CH3 CH3
(c) (CH3)3COH
(d) CH 3CH 2CH = NCONHNH2
(d) CH3CH2 – O – CH2CH3
7. The most reactive compound towards formation of
4. cyanohydrin on treatment with KCN followed by
acidification is
(a) benzaldehyde
(b) p-nitrobenzaldehyde
(c) phenylacetaldehyde
(d) p-hydroxybenzaldehyde
Which of the following reagent is suitable for the 8. Hydrolysis of ozonide of 1-butene gives
preparation of the product in the above reaction? (a) Ethylene only
(a) NaBH4 (b) Acetaldehyde and Formaldehyde
(-) Å
(b) NH - NH / C H O Na (c) Propionaldehyde and Formaldehyde
2 2 2 5
(c) Ni/H2 (d) Acetaldehyde only
(d) Red P + Cl2
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-63

12. The following change can be brought about by

O
|| CHO CHO
H+
9. C6 H 5 CCH 3 + C 6 H 5 CHO ¾¾¾ ®
¾ ¾?¾ ®
O OH
|| |
C6 H5 - C- CH2 CHC6 H5
Br D
The above aldol condensation does not involve the
(a) Mg/ diethyl ether, D2O
formation of
(b) LiA1D4/diethyl ether, D2O
OH OH
| | (c) HOCH2CH2OH/H+, Mg/diethyl ether,
(a) C 6 H 5 - C - CH 3 (b) C 6 H 5 - C - H D2O, H2O/H+
+ +
(d) HOCH 2CH 2OH / H + , DCl, H 2O / H +
O 13. End product of the following sequence of reactions
|| -
(c) C 6 H 5 - C - CH 2 (d) Both (a) and (b) are:
10. Consider the following sequence of reactions. O
(i) I +NaOH, D
(i) C H MgBr H SO , heat ¾¾¾¾¾¾
2
+ ®
Ketone (A) ¾¾¾¾¾¾
2 5
(ii) H O
® (B) ¾¾¾¾¾
2 4
—H O
® C CH3
(ii) H
2 2 (iii) D

O O
O
(i) O3 (a) yellow ppt. of CHI3,
(C) ¾¾¾¾¾
(ii) Zn, H2O
® + H
O COOH
O
The ketone (A) is:
(b) yellow ppt. of CHI3,
CHO
(a) (b)
O O O
(c) yellow ppt. of CHI3,
(c) (d)
O O
COOH
11. What is the product of the following reaction ? (d) yellow ppt. of CHI3, COOH
CHO
14. The order of reactivity of phenyl magnesium bromide
| (PhMgBr) with the following compounds
NaCN , ethanol
¾¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾®
dil. HCl H3C H3C Ph
C=O, C=O and C=O
| H3C
Br H Ph
I II III
OH OH (a) III > II > I (b) II > I > III
H CN H Cl (c) I > III > II (d) I > II > III
(a) (b) 15. Which of the following is not a good method to make
2, 2- dimethyl propanoic acid ?
Mg
Br Br (a) (CH 3 ) 3 CBr ¾¾¾ ® ¾CO
¾¾ 2®
Et OEt H 2O ,H +
CN OH NaCN +
H H H Cl (b) (CH 3 ) 3 CBr ¾¾ ¾® ¾H
¾ O, H
¾2 ¾ ¾®
D
(c) (d) (c) (CH 3 ) 3 C - C º CH ¾¾®
¾
H O
¾¾2¾®
O3

K Cr O , H SO
Br Br (d) (CH 3 ) 3 CCH 2OH ¾¾2¾2¾7¾2¾¾
4®
H 2O D
 C-64 Chemistry

16. The property which distinguishes formic acid from OH

acetic acid is
(a) only ammonium salt of formic acid on heating gives CH2 – C – CH3
amide. (c)
CN
(b) when heated with alcohol/H2SO 4 only acetic acid
forms ester. OH
(c) only acetic acid forms salts with alkali.
(d) only formic acid reduces Fehling’s solution. C – COOH
O (d)
CH3
OH
17. OH X + H2O 20. Methyl ketones are usually characterized through
H 2SO4 (a) the Tollen’s reagent.
OH
Product (X) of the reaction is– (b) the iodoform test.
(c) the Schiff’s test.
O
O (d) the Benedict’s reagent
OH 21. In a set of reactions, ethylbenzene yield a product D.
(a) (b) O
O CH2CH3 KMnO 4 Br
OH ¾¾ ¾ ¾ ® B ¾¾¾®2
FeCl
KOH 3

C H OH
C ¾¾
2 ¾
5 ¾® D
+
O O H
Identify D :
(c) O (d)
OH HO CH2 – CH – COOC 2H5
(a)
18. Given below are two statements. Br
Statement I: The p-chlorobenzoic acid is stronger than
benzoic acid. Br
Statement II: This is due to –I effect of chlorine.
In the light of the above statements, choose the correct (b)
answer from the options given below. Br
(a) Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is true CH2 COOC2H5
(b) Both statement I and Statement II are true
(c) Both Statement I and Statement II are false COOH COOC2H5
(d) Statement I is correct but statement II is false
19. In a set of reactions, acetic acid yielded a product D. (c) (d)
CH3COOH ¾¾¾¾
SOCl2
® (A) ¾¾¾¾® (B)
Benzene OCH2CH3 Br
AlCl3
22. The intermediate formed when CH3COOH react with
HCN
¾¾¾® (C) ¾¾¾® (D)
HOH CH3CH2OH
The structure of (D) would be – OH OH
COOH
(a) H 3C OH (b) H 3C OH
CH2 – C – CH3
(a) CH 2 CH 3 OCH 2 CH 3
OH
OCH 2 CH 3 OCH 2 CH 3
CN (c) H 3C OH (d) H 3C OH
C – CH3
OCH 2 CH 3 CH 2 CH 3
(b)
OH
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-65

Integer/Numerical Value Type Questions 25. Compound A is obtained by following reaction.

OMe (i) C H ONa
(i) H + H O CH3COOC2H5 ¾¾¾¾¾¾
2 5 ® [A]
23. ¾¾¾¾¾ 2 ®
Z. (ii) H O+ 3
(ii) heat
OMe
COOC2H5
How many following statement(s) is(are) true about A ?
How many number of sp2 hybridised carbon atoms are (i) It gives red colour with blue litmus solution.
there in the product Z. (ii) It decomposes NaHCO 3 solution and evolves
24. How many membered ring will be formed in the CO2 gas.
product P of the following reaction. (iii) It decolourises bromine water colour.
O
(iv) It reacts with 2,4-dinitrophenyl-hydrazine
OH (i) NaBH
¾¾¾¾¾
4®
+ P (v) Product A will undergo acid catalysed halogenation.
(ii) H3O
O

Past Years JEE Main Questions

1. An organic compound 'X' having molecular formula OCOCH3
C5H10O yields phenylhydrazone and gives negative
(a)
response to the iodoform test and Tollen's test. It
produces n-pentane on reduction. 'X' could be :- ON
2
[2015]
OCOCH3
(a) 2-pentanone (b) 3-pentanone
(c) n-amyl alcohol (d) pentanal (b)
H CO
3
2. Treatment of cyclopentanone =O with methyl OCOCH3

lithium gives which of the following species? [2015] (c)

(a) Cyclopentanonyl cation
(b) Cyclopentanonyl radical OCOCH3
(c) Cyclopentanonyl biradical (d)
(d) Cyclopentanonyl anion
Cl
3. The enolic form of ethyl acetoacetate has: [2015]
6. Which compound would give 5 - keto - 2 -
H H2 methylhexanal upon ozonolysis ? [2015]
H3C C O H3C C O
C C C C CH3
CH3
OH OC2H5 O OC2H5
(a) 16 sigma bonds and 1 pi - bond (a) (b) H3C
(b) 9 sigma bonds and 2 pi - bonds
CH3
(c) 9 sigma bonds and 1 pi - bond
(d) 18 sigma bonds and 2 pi - bonds CH3
4. Reaction of a carbonyl compound with one of the CH3
following reagents involves nucleophilic addition
followed by elimination of water. The reagent is : (c) CH3 (d)
[2015]
CH3
(a) a Grignard reagent
(b) hydrazine in presence of feebly acidic solution 7. The correct statement regarding a carbonyl compound
(c) hydrocyanic acid with a hydrogen atom on its alpha carbon, is : [2016]
(d) sodium hydrogen sulphite (a) a carbonyl compound with a hydrogen atom on its
5. Which one of the following esters gets hydrolysed most alpha carbon never equilibrates with its corresponding
easily under alkaline conditions? [2015] enol.
 C-66 Chemistry

(b) a carbonyl compound with a hydrgen atom on its OH OH

alpha carbon rapidly equilibrates with its
corresponding enol and this process is known as
aldehyde-ketone equilibration. (a) CHO (b) CHO
(c) a carbonyl compound with a hydrogen atom on
its alpha carbon rapidly equilibrates with its COOH CHO
corresponding enol and this process is known as
carbonylation. CHO CHO
(c) (d)
(d) a carbonyl compound with a hydrogen atom on
its alpha carbon rapidly equilibrates with its COOH CHO
corresponding enol and this process is known as 12. In the reaction [2018]
keto-enol tautomerism. OH O Na+
–
8. The product formed by the reaction of an aldehyde
with a primary amine is [2016] CHO
(a) Schiff base (b) Ketone + CHCl3+ NaOH ¾®
(c) Carboxylic acid (d) Aromatic acid
9. Consider the reactions [2017] The electrophile involved is

X
Cu
573K
A
[Ag(NH3)2]
– OH/D
+

Silver mirror (a) Dichloromethyl cation C HCl2 ( Å

)
(C2H6O)
– OH/D
observed
Y (b) Formyl cation C HO (Å )
O
(c) Dichlorocarbene (: CCl2 )

( )
NH2 – NH – C – NH2
!
Z (d) Dichloromethyl anion CHCl2
Identify A, X, Y and Z
(a) A-Methoxymethane, X-Ethanol, Y-Ethanoic acid, 13. Carboxylic acids have higher boiling points than aldehydes,
Z-Semicarbazide. ketones and even alcohols of comparable molecular
(b) A-Ethanal, X-Ethanol, Y-But-2-enal, mass. It is due to their [2018]
Z-Semicarbazone (a) Formation of intramolecular H-bonding
(c) A-Ethanol, X-Acetaldehyde, Y- Butanone, (b) Formation of carboxylate ion
Z- Hydrazone (c) Formation of intermolecular H-bonding
(d) A-Methoxymethane, X-Ethanoic acid, Y-Acetate (d) More extensive association of carboxylic acid via
ion, Z-hydrazine. van der Waals force of attraction
10. The correct sequence of reagents for the following 14. Identify the major products P, Q and R in the following
conversion will be : [2017] sequence of reactions: [2018]
Anhydrous
O HO CH3 AlCl
+ CH3CH2CH2Cl ¾¾¾¾®
3

(i) O
P ¾¾¾¾®
2
+ Q+R
(ii) H3O /D

HO CH3 P Q R
CHO CH3 CH2CH2CH3 CHO
(a) [Ag(NH3)2]+ OH–, H+/CH3OH, CH3MgBr
(b) CH3MgBr, H+/CH3OH, [Ag(NH3)2]+ OH– (a) , , CH3CH2 – OH
(c) CH3MgBr, [Ag(NH3)2]+ OH–, H+/CH3OH
(d) [Ag(NH3)2]+ OH–, CH3MgBr, H+/CH3OH CH2CH2CH3 CHO COOH
11. The major product obtained in the following reaction
is : [2017] (b) , ,
O
OH
O CH(CH3)2
(c) , , CH3 – CO – CH3
DIBAL–H
CH(CH3)2 OH
(d) , , CH3CH(OH)CH3
COOH
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-67

15. The major product of the given reaction is: [2018] 19. The major product of the following reaction is :[2019]
(i) OHC CH COCl O
¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
2 ®
(ii) H 2SO4 , heat NaBH
MeO OH ¾¾®
EtOH
4

OMe O
OH OH
(a) (b)
MeO O O
O (a) (b)
O OMe
OEt
(c) (d) O OH
MeO O O O
16. The major product B formed in the following reaction (c) (d)
sequence is: [2018]
20. The aldehydes which will not form Grignard product
CHO
(i) C H MgBr HCl with one equivalent of Grignard reagent are : [2019]
¾¾¾¾¾¾®
2 5 A ¾¾¾
®B
(ii) H2 O CHO
MeO
(A)
(a)
Cl Cl CHO

(B)
(b) HO2C
MeO
CHO

(c) (C)
MeO H3COC

Cl CHO
(D)
(d)
HOH2C
MeO (a) (B), (D) (b) (B), (C)
17. Which of the following compounds will most readily be (c) (B), (C), (D) (d) (C), (D)
dehydrated to give alkene under acidic condition? [2018] 21. Identify compound X in the following sequence of
(a) 4-Hydroxypentan-2-one reactions [2020]
(b) 3-Hydroxypentan-2-one CHO
(c) 1-Pentanol
(d) 2-Hydroxycyclopentanone Cl /hv H O
¾¾®
2
X ¾¾®
2
18. The increasing order of the acidity of the following 373K
carboxylic acids is: [2018]
CH2Cl CHCl2
CO2H CO2H CO2H CO2H

(a) (b)

NO2 OH Cl CCl2 Cl
I II III IV

(a) III < II < IV < I (b) I < III < II < IV (c) (d)
(c) IV < II < III < I (d) II < IV < III < I
 C-68 Chemistry

22. What is the product of following reaction? [2020] (a) A - (ii), B - (iii), C - (iv), D - (i)
Hex-3-ynal (b) A - (iv), B - (i), C - (ii), D - (iii)
(i) ¾¾¾¾NaBH4 (ii) PBr3 (c) A - (iii), B - (ii), C - (i), D - (iv)
®
(d) A - (i), B - (iv), C - (iii), D - (ii)
(iii) Mg/ether (iv) CO2/H3O+
25. Identify products A and B [2021]
(a) COOH
CH3
(b) COOH dil. KMnO4 CrO3
(c) COOH A B
273 K
(d) COOH CH3 CH3
23. The intermediate compound 'X' in the following (a) A : OH
B:
chemical reaction is:
OH O
CH3
CS H O+ CH3 CH3
+ CrO2 Cl2 ¾¾¾
2
® X ¾¾¾®
3
(b) A : B:
O OH OH
OH O
C
H [2021] O

(c) A : OHC – CH2CH2CH2 – C – CH3

Cl
CH O
(a) H
B : HOOC – CH2CH2CH2 – C – CH3
CH(OCrOHCl2)2 CH3 CH3
(b) (d) A : B:

CH(OCOCH3)2 OH O
(c) 26. Which of the following reagent is used for the following
reaction? [2021]
Cl CH 3CH 2 CH 3 ¾¾
?
® CH 3CH 2CHO
CH
(d) Cl (a) Manganese acetate
(b) Copper at high temperature and pressure
24. Match List-I with List-II (c) Molybdenum oxide
List-I List-II (d) Potassium permanganate
CO, HCl O
(A) ¾ ¾¾¾¾¾® (i) DiBAl-H
Anhyd. AlCl /CuCl
3 27. EtO — C — H 2C CH 2CH 2CN ¾¾¾¾® ?
(ii) H2O
(i) Hell-Volhard-
Zelinsky reaction Consider the above reaction and predict the major
product. [2022]
O
|| (a) OHC — H 2C CH 2CH2CHO
(B) R - C - CH3 + (ii) Gattermann-
NaOX ¾¾ ® Koch reaction O
(C) R — CH2 — OH (iii) Haloform
+R¢ COOH reaction (b) EtO — C — H2C CH2CH2CHO
Conc. H SO
¾¾¾¾¾¾
2 4
®
O
(D) R — CH2 COOH (iv) Esterification
(i) X / Re d P (c) EtO — C — H2C CH2CH2COOH
¾¾¾¾¾¾
( )
2
® [2021]
ii H 2O
Choose the correct answer from the options given (d) OHC — H 2C CH2CH 2COOH
below.
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-69

30. Identify major product "X" formed in the following

O
reaction: [2024]
H2O
28. O ¾¾® 'A' [2023] CO,HCl
¾¾¾¾¾® X
Anhydrous
AlCl3 / CuCl
( Major product))
O
O O
major product ‘A’ formed in the above reaction is
OH C C
OH OH (a) (b)
Cl

(a) OH (b) O
CHO CH2 Cl
O O (c) (d)
OH O
31. Highest enol content will be shown by : [2024]
OH
(c) O (d) O
OH O O

OH O (a) (b)
O O
O
O
AlCl3 Zn–Hg O
29. + O ¾¾® A ¾¾® B [2024]
HCl O O
(c) (d)
O Conc.H2SO4
C O
What is the structure of C ? 32. Which of the following has highly acidic hydrogen?
O [2024]
O
(a)
C CH3
(a) H 3C C

O O

C OH O
C (b) H 3C CH2
(b) C
C CH2 CH3
O
O
CH2 OH
C CH3
(c) (c) H 3C
O

O O

O (d) H 3C CH2 CH2

(d) C C
CH3
O O
 C-70 Chemistry

Past Years JEE Advanced Questions

1. The reaction (s) leading to the formation of (c) P-1, 5; Q-3, 4 ; R-5; S-2, 4
1,3,5-trimethylbenzene is (are) [More than one 2018] (d) P-1, 5; Q-2, 3 ; R-1, 5; S-2, 3
O Conc. H2SO4 An organic acid P (C11H12O2) can easily be oxidized to
(a) ¾¾¾¾¾® a dibasic acid which reacts with ethylene glycol to pro-
D
heated iron tube
duce a polymer dacron. Upon ozonolysis, P gives an
(b) Me H ¾¾¾¾¾¾® aliphatic ketone as one of the products. P undergoes
873 K
the following reaction sequences to furnish R via Q.
O
The compound P also undergoes another set of reac-
1) Br2 , NaOH tions to produce S.
+
2) H 3O
¾¾¾¾¾® 1) H2/Pd-C
(c) 3) sodalime, D
2) NH3/D 1) H2/Pd-C 1) HCl
3. Br2/NaOH 2) SOCl 2) Mg/Et2O
O O S 2
P ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾® Q ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾® R
4) CHCl3, KOH, D 3) MeMgBr, CdCl2 3) CO2 (dry ice)
CHO +
5) H2/ Pd-C 4) NaBH4 4) H3O
Zn/Hg, HCl 3. The compound R is [Passage Based 2018]
(d) ¾¾¾¾¾®
OHC CHO
2. The desired product X can be prepared by reacting (a) CO2H
the major product of the reactions in LIST-I with one
or more appropriate reagents in LIST-II. (given, order HO2C
of migratory aptitude: aryl > alkyl > hydrogen)
[Matching 2018] (b)
O
Ph
OH
Me Ph
CO2H
X (c)
List - I List- II
Ph
(P) HO Me + H SO (1) I2, NaOH
2 4
Ph OH
Me (d) CO2H
Ph
(Q) H2N H + HNO (2) [Ag(NH ) ]OH
2 3 2
Ph OH 4. The compound S is [Passage Based 2018]
Me
Ph
HO Ph
(R) + H2SO4 (3) Fehling solution
Me OH
Me (a) (b)
Ph
Br H NH2 HN
(S) + AgNO3 (4) HCHO, NaOH
Ph OH
Me
(5) NaOBr H
The correct option is N
(a) P-1; Q-2, 3 ; R-1, 4; S-2, 4 (c) NH2 (d)
(b) P-1, 5 ; Q-3, 4 ; R-4, 5; S-3
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-71

5. The correct order of acid strength of the following

carboxylic acid is [Single Correct 2019]

(b)

(a) I > II > III > IV (b) II > I > IV > III
(c) I > III > II > IV (d) III > II > I > IV
6. Choose the correct option(s) for the following reaction
sequence

(c)

Consider Q, R and S as major products.

[More than one 2019] (d)

(a)

7. Answer the following by appropriately matching the lists based on the information given in the paragraph. List–I
includes starting materials and reagents of selected chemical reactions. List–II gives structures of compounds that
may be formed as intermediate products and/ or final products from the reactions of List–I. [Matching 2019]
List–I List–II

(I) (P)

(II) (Q)

(III) (R)
 C-72 Chemistry

(IV) (S)

(T)

(U)

Which of the following options has correct combination considering List–I and List–II?
(a) (I), (S), (Q), (R) (b) (II), (P), (S), (U)
(c) (I), (Q), (T), (U) (d) (II), (P), (S), (T)

8. In the reaction scheme shown below, Q, R, and S are CH3

the major products. [More than one 2020] (d) S is H3C H3C CH3
H3C
O
H3C

CH3 O
H3C H3C CH3
H3C O 9. In the reaction given below, the total number of atoms
Q having sp2 hybridization in the major product P is _____
AlCl3 1. O 3 (excess)
then Zn/H 20
P P [Interger 2021]
2. NH2OH (excess)
(i) CH3MgBr 10. Consider the following reaction scheme and choose the
(i) Zn–Hg/HCl (ii) H3O
+
correct option(s) for the major products Q, R and S.
R S
(ii) H 3PO 4 (i) B H (i) CrO , H SO
(iii) H 2SO 4/ D 2 6
Styrene ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾® P ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
3 2 4
®Q
(ii) NaOH, H 2 O 2 , H 2 O (ii) Cl 2 , Red phosphorus
The correct structure of (iii) H 2 O

CH3 (i)SOCl conc.H SO

(a) S is H3C H3C CH3 P ¾¾¾¾¾¾
2
® R ¾¾¾¾¾®
2 4
S
(ii) NaCN
H3C (iii) H3O + , D
[More than one 2023]

CH3

CH3
(b) Q is H3C H3C CH3 (a)
H3C

Cl COOH COOH
HO2C O
(b)
CH3 R O
(c) R is H3C H3C CH3 Q S
H3C O

Cl COOH

O (c)

Q R O
S
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-73

Glycerol reacts completely with excess P in the

presence of an acid catalyst to form Q. Reaction of Q
with excess NaOH followed by the treatment with
CaCl2 yields Ca-soap R, quantitatively. Starting with
(d) one mole of Q, the amount of R produced in gram is
______.
[Given, atomic weight: H = 1, C = 12, N = 14, O = 16,
Na = 23, Cl = 35, Ca = 40] [Integer 2024]
11. In the following reactions, P, Q, R, and S are the major
15. Reaction of iso-propylbenzene with O2 followed by the
products. [More than one 2023]
treatment with H3O+ forms phenol and a by-product
( i ) KMnO , KOH, D
P. Reaction of P with 3 equivalents of Cl2 gives
¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
Å
4 ®P compound Q. Treatment of Q with Ca(OH)2 produces
( ii ) H3O
H3CH2C compound R and calcium salt S. The correct
( i ) NaOH, H O statement(s) regarding P, Q, R and S is(are)
¾¾¾¾¾¾¾®
2 Q
Å( ii) H3O [More than one 2024]
(a) Reaction of P with R in the presence of KOH fol-
lowed by acidification gives
( i ) H OÅ , D HO CCl3
¾¾¾¾¾¾
( )
3 ®R
ii H 2CrO 4

Br H3C CH3
( i ) Mg, dry ether
¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾®
( ii ) CO2 , then H 3OÅ
S (b) Reaction of R with O2 in the presence of light gives
O phosgene gas
( iii) Ammoniacal AgNO3 , H3OÅ
O (c) Q reacts with aqueous NaOH to produce
The correct statement(s) about P, Q, R, and S is(are)
Cl3CCH2OH and Cl3CCOONa
(a) P and Q are monomers of polymers dacron and
(d) S on heating gives P
glyptal, respectively.
16. The option(s) with correct sequence of reagents for
(b) P, Q, and R are dicarboxylic acids.
(c) Compounds Q and R are the same. the conversion of P to Q is(are): [More than one 2024]
(d) R does not undergo aldol condensation and S does O HO
not undergo Cannizzaro reaction. CO2Et reagents
CO2H
O CN
12. Complete reaction of acetaldehyde with excess O P
CHO
formaldehyde, upon heating with conc. NaOH solution, H3C HO Q
gives P and Q. Compound P does not give Tollens’ (a) (i) Lindlar’s catalyst, H2; (ii) SnCl2/HCl; (iii) NaBH4;
test, whereas Q on acidification gives positive Tollens’ (iv) H3O+
test. Treatment of P with excess cyclohexanone in the (b) (i) Lindlar’s catalyst, H2; (ii) H3O+; (iii) SnCl2/HCl;
presence of catalytic amount of p-toluenesulfonic acid (iv) NaBH4
(PTSA) gives product R. Sum of the number of (c) (i) NaBH4; (ii) SnCl2/HCl; (iii) H3O+; (iv) Lindlar’s
methylene groups (-CH2-) and oxygen atoms in R is
catalyst, H2
______. [Integer 2024]
13. An organic compound P having molecular formula (d) (i) Lindlar’s catalyst, H2; (ii) NaBH4; (iii) SnCl2/
C6H6O3 gives ferric chloride test and does not have HCl; (iv) H3O+
intramolecular hydrogen bond. The compound P reacts An organic compound P with molecular formula C9H18O2
with 3 equivalents of NH2OH to produce oxime Q. decolorizes bromine water and also shows positive iodoform
Treatment of P with excess methyl iodide in the presence test. P on ozonolysis followed by treatment with H2O2 gives
of KOH produces compound R as the major product. Q and R. While compound Q shows positive iodoform test,
Reaction of R with excess iso-butylmagnesium bromide compound R does not give positive iodoform test. Q and R
followed by treatment with H3O+ gives compound S on oxidation with pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC) followed
as the major product. by heating give S and T, respectively. Both S and T show
The total number of methyl (–CH3 ) group(s) in positive iodoform test.
compound S is _____. [Integer 2024] Complete copolymerization of 500 moles of Q and 500 moles
14. In the following reaction sequence, the major product of R gives one mole of a single acyclic copolymer U.
P is formed. [Given, atomic mass: H =1, C = 12, O =16]
17. Sum of number of oxygen atoms in S and T is _____.
2+ +
(i) Hg , H3O
(ii) Zn-Hg/HCI
H +
(iii) H3O , D
[Passage Based 2024]
CO Et P
( )15 2 18. The molecular weight of U is _____.
[Passage Based 2024]
 C-74 Chemistry

JEE Advanced Level Questions

Single Correct Option

1. The conversion PhCN ® PhCOCH 3 , can be achieved 7. (CH3)3C–CHO does not undergo aldol condensation due
to
most conveniently by reaction with
(a) CH3MgBr followed by hydrolysis (a) three electron donating methyl groups
(b) I2 – NaOH, CH3I (b) cleavage taking place between —C— CHO bond
(c) Dil. H2SO4 followed by reaction with CH2N2 (c) absence of alpha hydrogen atom in the molecule
(d) LiAlH4 followed by reaction with CH3I (d) bulky (CH3)3 C—group
2. 1-Phenylethanol can be prepared by reaction of benzal- 8. Acetaldehyde reacts with semicarbazide and forms
dehyde with semicarbazone. Its structure is
(a) methyl bromide (a) CH3CH = NNHCON = CHCH3
(b) ethyl iodide and magnesium (b) CH3CH = NNHCONH2
(c) methyl bromide and aluminium bromide
(d) methyl iodide and magnesium (c) CH 3CH = N — N — CONH 2
|
3. The following reaction OH
OH OH (d) CH3CH = N—CONHNH2
Anhyd.
+ HCN + HCl ¾¾¾¾
ZnCl
® 9. Appropriate reducing agent for the following conversion
2
CHO is–
is known as O
(a) Perkin reaction ||
(b) Gattermann aldehyde synthesis CH2 = CH - CH 2 - C - H
(c) Kolbe’s reaction ¾¾
® CH 3 - CH 2 - CH 2 - CH 2 OH
(d) Gattermann-Koch reaction (a) LiAlH4/H2O (b) NaBH4/H2O
4. The correct reagents to carry out the following (c) Na + C2H5OH (d) B2H6/H+
conversion is O
?
HC º CCH 2CH 2CH3 ¾¾
¾® OH -
O 10. 2 ¾¾¾® Product is
D
||
CH 3 - C - CH 2 CH 2 CH 3
O
(a) H2/Lindlar Pd followed by H 2SO 4 / H 2O (a) (b)
(b) H 2O, H 2SO4 / HgSO 4
(c) LiAlH4 followed by H2O
(d) O3 followed by H2O (c) (d) O
5. Benzaldehyde reacts with ethanoic KCN to give O
(a) C6H5CHOHCN 11. Aldol condensation would not occur in :
(b) C6H5CHOHCOC6H5 (a) CH3COCH3 (b) CH3CH2CHO
(c) C6H5CHOHCOOH (c) HCHO (d) CH3CHO
(d) C6H5CHOHCHOHC6H5
12. Cannizzaro reaction occurs with
6. Aldehydes and ketones will not form crystalline
(a) CH3 – CH2OH (b) C6H5CHO
derivatives with
(a) sodium bisulphite (c) CH3CHO (d) CH3 – CO – CH3
(b) phenylhydrazine 13. In an alkaline medium, acetaldehyde undergoes:
(c) semicarbazide hydrochloride (a) benzoin condensation (b) aldol condensation
(c) polymerisation (d) Cannizzaro reaction
(d) dihydrogen sodium phosphate.
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-75

CH3 (a) Trioxane (b) Formose

14. on reductive ozonolysis yields (c) Paraformaldehyde (d) Metaldehyde
Br NH (alc.)
20. CH 3CH 2 COOH ¾¾
¾2 ® X ¾¾ ¾
3 ¾
¾® Y
(a) 6- oxoheptanal Re d P
(b) 6-oxoheptanoic acid Y in the above reactions is
(a) lactic acid (b) ethylamine
(c) 6-hydroxyheptanal
(d) 3-hydroxypentanal (c) propylamine (d) alanine
21. Which of the following is a mixed ketone
15. What is the final product of the following reaction ? (a) Pentanone (b) Acetophenone
O (c) Benzophenone (d) Butanone
22. Carboxylic acid group does not give the usual addition
C – CH3 and elimination reactions of aldehydes and ketones
CH OH
¾¾¾¾
3 ® ¾¾¾¾
®? because
- H 2O
C – OH (a) O–H bond is more polar than C = O group
O (b) carboxylate ion gets ionised
(c) carboxylate ion gets stabilised by resonance
O O (d) it exists as – COOH and there is no carbonyl group
23. When propanoic acid is treated with aqueous sodium
C C
bicarbonate, CO2 is liberated. The ‘C’ of CO2 comes
(a) (b) O
from
C CH2 (a) methyl group
(b) caboxylic acid group
O
(c) methylene group
O (d) bicarbonate
CH3O CH3 24. Which of the following carboxylic acids undergoes
C CH3 decarboxylation easily ?
(c) (d) O (a) C6H5–CO–CH2–COOH (b) C6H5–CO–COOH
C
O (c) C6 H5 - CH - COOH (d) C6 H5 - CH - COOH
O | |
OH NH 2
16. Aldehydes can be oxidised by : 25. On bromination, propionic acid gives two isomeric
(a) Tollen’s reagent (b) Fehling solution 2- bromopropionic acids. This pair will be an example of
(c) Benedict solution (d) All the above (a) optical isomers (b) cis-trans isomers
17. Which of the following is disproportionation reaction? (c) chain isomers (d) position isomers
NaOH
(a) 2HCHO ¾¾¾¾ ® CH3OH + HCOONa 26. What is Z in the following sequence of reactions?
Zn CH Cl Alkaline
(b) 2CH3CHO ¾¾¾¾
NaOH
® CH3CHCH 2CHO Phenol ¾¾® X ¾¾¾¾
3 ® Y ¾¾¾¾®Z
dust Anhyd.AlCl3 KMnO4
|
OH (a) Benzene (b) Toluene
(c) Benzaldehyde (d) Benzoic acid
NO2
+ 27. Identify Z in the sequence
(c) + NO 2 ¾
¾®
D PO H O/H +
CH 3COONH 4 ¾¾® X ¾¾¾
2 5 ® Y ¾¾¾¾®
2 Z
(d) Both (a) & (b) D
18. Which of the following compounds would be the main (a) CH3CH2CONH2 (b) CH3CN
product of an aldol condensation of acetaldehyde and (c) CH3COOH (d) (CH3CO)2O
18
acetone? 28. When CH3COOH reacts with labelled CH3OH and
(a) CH3CH = [Link] (b) CH3CH = CHCOCH3 catalytic H2SO4, it gives
(c) (CH3)2C=[Link] (d) (CH3)2C = CHCOCH3 O
CH2 O || 18
19. O CH 2 (a) CH3 – C – OCH3+ H2O
CH2 O 18 O
The above shown polymer is obtained when a carbonyl ||
compound is allowed to stand. It is a white solid. The (b) CH3 – C – OCH3
polymer is
 C-76 Chemistry

O 33. The following reaction is called

|| 2CH3COOC2H5 ¾® CH3COCH2COOC2H5
(c) CH3 – C – OCH3
(a) Perkin reaction
(d) Equal amounts of (a) and (b)
29. What is B in the sequence of reactions shown below ? (b) Tischenko reaction
(c) Claisen condensation
Br
(d) Schotten-Baumann’s reaction
34. Identify Z in the following reaction sequence.
NaCN +
¾¾ ¾
¾® A ¾H O ,H
¾2 ¾¾® B MnO – SOCl CH COONa
DMSO D
CH3CHO ¾¾¾¾¾
4 ® X ¾¾¾¾
2 ® Y ¾¾¾¾¾
3 ¾
®Z
dil.H 2SO4 D
(a) CH3COCH2COONa (b) (CH3CO)2O
CH 2 Br (c) CH3CO–O–COCH2Cl (d) CH3CO–OCOCHCl2
COOH COOH 35. Which of the following esters cannot undergo Claisen
self condensation ?
(a) (b) (a) CH3CH2CH2CH2COOC2H5
(b) C6H5–COOC2H5
CH 2 COOH CH 2 Br (c) C6H11CH2COOC2H5
(d) C6H5CH2COOC2H5
Br 36. Which of the following reagent(s) used for the
conversion?
(c) (d) O O
OH
CH 2 COOH CO2Et

30. Which one of the following compounds undergoes (a) glycol/LiAlH4/H3O+ (b) glycol/NaH/H3O+
decarboxylation upon heating ? (c) LiA1H4 (d) NaBH4
O 37. Statement-1 : RCOCl, (RCO)2O and RCOOR’ all react
with Grignard reagents to form 3º alcohols.
(a) OH Statement-2 : RCOCl reacts with R2Cd to form
ketones but (RCO)2O and RCOOR' do not react at all.
O
(a) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-
O 2 is a correct explanation for Statement-1.
(b) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True;
(b) OH
Statement-2 is NOT a correct explanation for
O Statement-1.
O O (c) Statement -1 is True, Statement-2 is False.
(c) (d) Statement -1 is False, Statement-2 is True.
OH 38. Statement-1 : During the preparation of esters from a
O O carboxylic acid and an alcohol in the presence of an acid
(d) catalyst, the water or the ester should be removed as fast
OH as it is formed.
31. Which of the following cannot convert caboxylic acid Statement-2 : The reaction between an acid and an
into its acyl chloride ? alcohol in the presence of an acid catalyst is a reversible
(a) PCl3 (b) SOCl2 reaction.
(c) PCl5 (d) NaCl (a) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-
2 is a correct explanation for Statement-1.
LiAlH
32. In C6H5COOCH3 ¾¾ ¾¾ 4®
X will be (b) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True;
(a) C6H5COOH +CH3OH Statement-2 is NOT a correct explanation for
(b) C6H5CH2OH + CH3OH Statement-1.
(c) C6H5CHO +CH3COOH (c) Statement -1 is True, Statement-2 is False.
(d) All of these (d) Statement -1 is False, Statement-2 is True.
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-77

39. Benzoin is b g b a
OH –
(a) Compound containing an aldehyde and a ketonic C6 H5CH = CHCHO + C H3CH = CHCHO ¾¾¾®
group Which of the following statement(s) is/are not true about
(b) a, b-unsaturated acid the above reaction ?
(c) a-hydroxy aldehyde (a) Aldol condensation takes place and a-carbon atom
(d) a-hydroxy ketone of crotonaldehyde provides the carbanion,
40. Which are the starting materials for the preparation of (b) Aldol condensation takes place and b-carbon atom
O of crotonaldehyde provides the carbanion.
(c) Aldol condensation takes place and g-carbon atom
of crotonaldehyde provides the carbanion.
NO2 (d) Aldol condensation takes place and a-carbon atom
of cinnamic aldehyde provides the carbanion.
O 44. Each of the following two ketones is treated with a
conc. HNO3 base (KOH)
(a) conc. H2SO4 O CH 3
|| | OH –
(+) – C6H5— C — CH— C6H 5 ¾¾¾® PI ;
COCl
anhydrous I
(b) + AlCl3
O CH3
NO2 || | OH –
(+) – C6H5— C— C —C6H5 ¾¾¾® PII
COCl |
C2H5
anhydrous II
(c) + AlCl3 Which of the following statement(s) is/are false regarding
above reactions?
NO2 (a) Both PI as well as PII are racemic mixtures
(d) Any of the three (b) Both PI as well as PII are optically pure enantiomers
(c) PI is optically pure while PII is a racemic mixture
One or More Than One Option Correct (d) PI is a racemic mixture while PII is optically pure.
45. RCOOR¢ can be prepared by
41. Pentaerythritol, an important industrial chemical, is
(a) esterification of RCOOH
prepared by the following reaction
(b) esterification of (RCO)2O
Ca (OH) (c) Baeyer-Villiger oxidation of RCOR¢ with peroxy
2
4CH2O + CH3CHO ¾¾¾¾¾ ® CH2OH acid
CH2OH (d) reaction of RCOCl with R¢OH.
46. The following conversion reaction can be carried out
C CH2OH
by using reaction sequence(s).
CH2OH O O COOH
Pentaerythritol
This reaction involves OH

(a) Cannizzaro reaction H O+, D

(a) Zn/Hg/HCl, D
KCN Br /hu
(b) aldol condensation ¾¾¾¾¾® ¾¾¾®
2
¾¾® ¾¾¾®
3

(b) NaBH Al O , D O /H O (oxidative)

(c) crossed Cannizzaro reaction ¾¾¾®
4
¾¾¾®
2 3
¾¾¾¾¾¾¾®
3 2

Heat I /NaOH, D
H +
(d) crossed aldol condensation (c) ¾¾® ¾¾¾¾®
2
¾¾®
42. Which of the following undergoes Cannizzaro reaction? KMnO4 / OH /heat–
(d) ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾ ®
(a) (CH3)3C CHO (b) (CH3)3CCDO 47. Formic acid and formaldehyde can be distinguished by
(c) C6H5CH2Cl (d) CH3CHO using
43. A mixture of cinnamaldehyde and crotonaldehyde is (a) 2, 4 - D.N.P. (b) Tollen’s reagent
treated with concentrated alkali, (c) Conc. H2SO4 (d) Fehling’s reagent
 C-78 Chemistry

48. Which of the following compounds on oxidation with

(CH3COO)4Pb would give the product OHC(CH2)4CHO? O2N CHO + Me
alc.
CHO ¾¾¾ ®
KCN

H H OH H (A) (B)
(a) (b)

OH OH (a) CN attacks at the (C == O) group of (A).

H OH
(b) CN attacks at (C == O) group of (B).
H H H OH (c) The major product formed is:

(c) (d) O
OH OH OH H O2N Me
49. Which of the following are crossed aldol products in OH
the given reaction? (d) The major product formed is:
- OH
OH
MeCHO + MeCH 2CHO ¾¾¾®
25°C
O2N Me
OH O
CHO
(a) Me 52. Consider the following reaction using isotopically
labelled Cl35, Cl37, and C14 (C*).
Me
35
Cl
(b) Me CHO (*)
37 H O
Cl + NaOH ¾¾¾®
2
OH Me
What are the products of this SN reaction?
OH
35
CHO Cl
(c) Me (*)
Me (a) Me OH

(d) Me CHO OH
(*)
OH 37
(b) Me Cl
50. Which of the following statements are correct about
the reaction given below? OH
(*)

O (c) Me OH
HCN Sn + HCl HNO 35
¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® (B) ¾¾ ¾ ¾® (C) ¾ ¾ ¾¾
2 ® (D)
Cl
Traces of KOH (*)
(A)
CH2
(d) Me
OH
(a) In the formation of (D) from (C), ring expansion
takes place. 53. Which of the following statements are wrong about
the given reaction?
(b) The product (D) is cyclopentanone. O
(c) The product (D) is a, b-unsaturated cyclopentanone
Me (i) Mg/Hg H+
(d) Conversion of (B) to (C) can also be carried out ¾¾ ¾ ¾¾ + ® (B)
¾¾ ¾® (C)
Me (ii) H3O
with LAH.
O
51. Which of the following statements are true about the (a) Formation of (B) from (A) is called bimolecular
benzoin reaction? reduction and takes place by radical anion
mechanism.
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-79

(b) Formation of (B) from (A) takes place by free (a) The compounds (B) and (C), respectively, are
radical mechanism. Me — N = C = O and MeNHCOOMe.
(c) Products (B) and (C), respectively, are: (b) The compounds (B) and (C), respectively, are
Et — N = C = O and MeNH2.
OH (c) The reaction proceeds via the formation of acyl
Me
nitrene (MeCON: ) as the intermediate species.

:
OH and O (d) The reaction proceeds via the formation of acyl
nitrene (EtCON: ) as the intermediate species.

:
Me
Me Me 57. The structure of AZT (azidothymine) is given below.
It is used to treat AIDS patients. It fights an AIDS
(d) Products (B) and (C), respectively, are infection but does not cure it.

HO Me Me O

and O NH

O N
Me O
Me OH HO
54. Which of the following reactions are correct? – +
N=N=N (AZT)
® EtCONH - Li + + MeH
(a) EtCONH 2 + MeLi ¾¾
(b) EtCON Pr2 + MeLi ¾¾
® Et — C— Me + Pr2 NLi Which of the following statements are correct about
ôô AZT?
(c) MeCONH 2 + HNO 2 ¾¾ ® O
MeCOOH + N 2 + H 2O (a) It shows acidic property.
(d) Me — CONHMe + HNO 2 ¾¾
® (b) It undergoes tautomerisation.
O Me (c) It gives white precipitate with (ZnCl2 + HCl)
ôô ô (Lucas reagent).
Me — C — N — N =O + H 2O
55. Which of the following statements are correct about (d) Azide ion ( N 3- ) cannot replace Br – by S N 2
the given reaction? reaction.
58. Which of the following statement(s) is/are false?
O
(a) No aldehyde can be prepared by the oxidation of
BF
Me Cl + Me ¾ ¾ 3¾
® (C) primary alcohol with acidic KMnO4.
(A) (B)
O
(b) Aldehyde having a boiling point less than 100°C
can be prepared by the oxidation of primary alco-
(a) The product (C) is Me Me hol with acidic dichromate.
(c) Secondary alcohols on oxidation with PCC in
O
dichloromethane give carboxylic acids having
(b) The product (C) is Me lesser number of carbon atoms
(c) The formation of (C) proceeds via the formation (d) Tertiary alcohols can't be oxidised at all
of acylium ion. 59. Which of the following can be used for the
(d) The formation of (C) proceeds via the formation preparation of chloroform ?
of carbocation. (a) C6H5CHCl2 (I) (b) CH3CHO (II)
(i) NH NH MeOH
(c) CD3COCH3 (III) (d) CCl3CHO (IV)
56. 2 2 ®(B) ¾¾¾¾
MeCOOCEt ¾¾¾¾¾¾ ®(C)
(ii) HNO2
(iii) - OH

Which of the following statements are correct about

the given reaction?
 C-80 Chemistry

Match the Column

Directions : Each question contains statements given in two columns which have to be matched. Statements (A,
B, C, D) in column I have to be matched with statements (p, q, r, s, t, u) in column II.
60. Column-I Column-II
(Reaction) (Reagent)

(A) (p) i. Glycol + HCl; ii. SOCl2

iii. DIBAL-H; iv. H3O+

(B) (q) i. NaBH4/EtOH

(C) (r) i. LAH; ii. Conc. H2SO4/D

iii. O3/Zn-AcOH

(D) (s) i. PCl5; ii. 2NaNH2

-
(t) i. BH3/THF; ii. H2O2/ OH
61. Column-I Column-II
(Reaction) (Product)
OHC

(A) (p)

CHO

(B) (q)

CHO
(C) (r)

CHO

(D) (s)

(t) Product (I)

(u) Product (III)
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-81

62. Column-I Column-II

(Reactions) (Number of crossed aldol products)
-
OH
(A) MeCHO + MeCH 2 CHO ¾¾¾ ® (p) 3

(B) (q) 2

O
-
OH
Me + MeCHO ¾¾®
(C) Me (r) 4
O
-
OH
Me + Ph Me ¾¾®
(D) Me (s) 1
O
63. Column-I Column-II
(Reactions) (Products)

(A) (p) Final product is a, b-unsaturated ketone or

ketone.

(B) (q) Formation of six-membered ring takes place.

HCN LAH NaNO

(C) ¾¾¾¾
traces
® (II) ¾¾¾® (III)¾¾¾¾
2 ® (IV)
(r) Final product will give positive Tollens test.
HCl
of KOH
(I)
Ph
+
(D) H (s) Ring expansion takes place.
Me ¾¾¾® (II)
D
OH OH (t) Final product gives positive test with Brady’s
(I) reagent.
64. Column-I (Reactions) Column-II (products)
O

HCN
(A) ¾¾¾¾¾¾
® A ¾¾
® B ¾¾
®C (p) Formation of six membered ring takes place.
trace of KOH

(B) NH OH (q) Final product is ketone or a, b-unsaturated ketone.

¾¾¾¾
2 ® A ¾¾
®B

O O
P P
OH -
(C) H3C - C- CH 2 - CH 2 - CH 2 - C - H ¾¾¾ ®A (r) Final product formed will give positive Tollen’s test.
D

Ph
H+
(D) CH3 ¾¾¾ ®A (s) Final product formed will react with 2, 4-DNP
D
OH OH (t) Ring expansion takes place
 C-82 Chemistry

65. Column-I Column-II

O
H3C O
O

(A) aq. NaOH (p) Nucleophilic substitution

O O

CH2CH2CH2Cl
(B) CH 3MgI
CH3 (q) Electrophilic substitution

18
O O
18
CH2CH2CH2OH
(C) H2SO 4 (r) Dehydration

CH2CH2CH2C(CH3)2
H 2SO4
(D) OH (s) Nucleophilic addition

H3C
CH3

Passage Based Questions

Directions : This section contains groups of multiple choice questions based on a paragraph. Each question has
4 choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) for its answer, out of which only one is correct.

Passage - 1
Aldehydes containing no a-hydrogen atom, when treated with concentrated alkali (aqueous or alcoholic), undergo self
oxidation-reduction to yield a mixture of an alcohol and a salt of a carboxylic acid. This reaction, known as Cannizzaro
reaction, is carried out at room temperature. Cannizzaro reaction may be crossed, e.g.
conc . NaOH
C 6 H 5 CHO + HCHO ¾¾ ¾ ¾¾® C 6 H 5 CH 2 OH + HCOONa
Further, Cannizzaro reaction may be internal too.
Aldehydes, having a-hydrogen atom, undergo reaction in different way.
OH
- |
OH
2CH 3CHO ¾¾¾® CH 3 C HCH 2 CHO
66. Which of the following statement is correct?
(a) Different behaviour of CH3CHO and HCHO is due to difference in their acidic character
(b) Both reactions (Cannizzaro reaction and aldol condensation) involve nucleophilic addition
(c) Both are correct
(d) None is correct
67. Which of the following can't undergo Cannizzaro reaction?
O
||
(a) C6H5CHO (b) [Link] (c) C6 H5 CCHO (d) None of these
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-83

68. When (CH3)3CCHO and C6H5CHO are treated with 72. The structure of the product I is –
aq. NaOH, the possible number of products are
(a) 1 (b) 2 (a) Me Br
(c) 3 (d) 4
(b) Me
Passage - 2
When methyl ketones react with halogens in the presence of Br
a base, all a-hydrogen atoms are replaced by halogens, one
after the other. (c) Me Br
O O O
(d) Me Br
|| X 2 , OH -
|| ||
CH 3 - C - CH 3 ¾¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® CH 3 - C - CX 3 ¾
¾® X 3C - C - CX 3 73. The structures of compound J and K, respectively, are
Trihaloketone
Moreover, the trihaloketone also undergoes hydrolysis in (a) Me COOH and SOCl2
presence of OH– forming
O O (b) OH and SOCl2
|| - ||
OH
CH 3 - C - CX 3 ¾¾¾® CH 3 - C - O - + CHX 3 Me
69. During formation of trihaloketone, which halogen is O
introduced most easily?
(a) First (b) Second Me
(c) Third (d) All at the same rate (c) and CH3SO2Cl
COOH
70. Acetone as well as trihaloacetone, both contain C = O (d) Me COOH and CH3SO2Cl
group, only the latter is hydrolysed by alkali while the
former does not undergo hydrolysis. This is because 74. The structure of product L is
O O (a) Me CHO
|| ||
(a) CH 3 - C - CH 3 is stable, while CH 3 - C - CX 3
is unstable
(b) –CX is stable while –CH is unstable (b) Me CHO
3 3
O CHO
|| (c) Me
(c) CH 3 - C - CH 3 undergoes nucleophilic addition,
O (d) Me CHO
|| Passage-4
while CH 3 - C - CX 3 undergoes nucleophilic
alc. Zn–Hg/HCl
substitution PhCHO ¾¾¾¾ ® (B) (C14H12 O2)
KCN
(d) Size of bromine is more than that of H. (A)
NaBH4/EtOH Unsaturated
71. Which of the following compound does not undergo compound
Acetone (C)
haloform reaction? (D) ¾¾¾¾ ® Cyclic
compound
(a) CH3CHO (b) C6H5CHOHCH3 Conc. H 2SO 4
(E)
(c) CH3CH2COCH2Cl (d) None of these
(F)
Passage - 3
75. Compound (B) is:
In the following reaction sequence, product I, J and L are
formed. K represents a reagent. O O
Ph Ph
(i) Mg/ether
(i) NaBH (ii) CO 2 K (a) Ph (b) Ph
Hex - 3 - ynal ¾¾¾¾¾
4 ® I ¾¾¾¾¾® J ¾¾
+
®
(ii) PBr3 (ii) H3O O
OH
6
5
OH
2
7 4 Cl Ph
Me 1 H
3
¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
2 ®L (c) Ph (d) None
Pd/BaSO 4 quinoline
O OH
 C-84 Chemistry

76. Compound (D) is: 79. Compound (C) is:

O OH Me .. OH
Ph Ph N
(a) Ph (b) Ph (a) CH2
OH
Me
Ph Ph
(c) Ph (d) Ph Me ..
OH N
(b) CH2 OH
77. Compound (E) is:
Ph Ph Me
Ph Ph
Me OH

:
(a) (b) O O N
O O (c) Me CH2
Me
Me OH
Ph Ph

:
Ph N
(d) Me CH2
(c) O O (d) O O
80. Compound (A) is:
Me Me Ph Me O
Passage-5
O /Red. (a) Me
(i) Compound (X) ¾¾¾¾
3 ® (A) (C10 H10O) + (B) (C8H 8O 2 )
(C18H20O)
Me
(ii) O

Compound (A) (b) Me Me

NH 2 OH (i) PCl5/ether
(Shows +ve ¾¾ ¾ ¾® Oxime (C)
iodoform test) (ii) H 3O+
(C10H13ON)
O
CH3COOH + (D) (C8H11N)
[ ]¾
Phthalic acid ¬¾
O
¾ Aromatic alcohol
HNO2 (c)
Et
at 0°C Me
(E) (C8H10O)
O
Mild HI
(iii) Compound (B) ¾ Oxid.
¾ ¾® Acid (F) (C8H8O3 ) (d) Me
Et

HO COOH + CH3I Passage-6

O O OH
78. Compound (B) is:
Me ? Me OH
Me ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® OH
(i) Reagent (P)
COOH dry HCl
(a) MeO O (ii) H3O+
(B) O
H +
LAH (C)
(E) ¬¾excess
¾¾ ¾ (D) ¬¾ ¾¾
(b) MeO CHO
81. Reagent (P) is:
-
(c) MeO CH2OH (a) Br2 / OH (b) NaOI
(c) Ca(OH)2 + I2 (d) All of these

(d) HO CHO
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-85

82. Compound (D) is: 85. Compound (B) is:

Me

O O O O (a) Ph COOH
Br
Me Me
(a) OH (b) Br
Me

(b) Ph COOH
(c) Both (a) and (b)
COOH
O O O O (d) Ph
(c) Me (d) Me Br
OH 86. Compound (C) is:
CHO COOH
COOH
(a) (b) Ph
83. Compound (E) is: Ph
O O (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) None of these
Passage-8
Me Me
(a) OH (b)
Me

O O
Me CH2
(c) (d)

Passage-7
(i) Carboxylic acid 87. Compound (B) is:
[O]
(a) CH2 = O (b) HCOOMe
(A) (C9H10O3) ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® PhCOOH
KMnO (c) HCOOEt (d) Both (b) and (c)
4
HBr 88. Which statement(s) is/are correct about the formation of
(D)?
alc. KOH H /Pd
(B) (C9H9O2Br) ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® (C) ¾ ¾ 2¾ ¾
® (D) (a) It is a Claisen–Schmidt reaction.
(ii) Compound (D) is prepared by carbonation (Mg/ether, (b) It is a Michael addition reaction.
(c) The (CHO) group is introduced in (C) to increase
Me
the acidity of a-H atom.
CO2/H3O+) of compound . (d) The (CHO) group is lost as (CO) in the formation
Ph Br
of (D).
(iii) Compounds (A) and (D) give positive test with CrO3 89. Product (E) is:
in acid. Et Et
84. Compound (A) is: O O
OH (a) (b)
Me

COOH COOH Et Et
(a) Ph (b) Ph
OH O O
COOH (c) (d)
(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) Ph
OH
 C-86 Chemistry

Stem Based Questions

Directions : The answer to each questions is a NUMERICAL VALUE.
Question Stem
Three isomeric tetracarboxylic acids (I), (II), and (III) are given.
COOH
COOH
COOH
COOH

COOH
HOOC COOH
COOH
(I) (II)
COOH
COOH

HOOC
COOH
(III)
They can be distinguished by anhydride formation by treating with one equivalent and two equivalents of SOCl 2.
90. The number of isomeric monoanhydrides formed by reaction of one equivalent of SOCl2 with tetracarboxylic acid
(I).
91. How many number of tetracarboxylic acid among I, II and III gives only one monoanhydride with one equivalent of
SOCl2?
Passage cum Matching Based Questions

Passage-1
Column I contains some reaction and Column II & Column III contains Reagent used and Products formed respectively.
Column I Column II Column III
(Reaction) (Reagent) (Product)

– CHO
(A) (I) (i) BH 3 /THF (ii) H 2 O 2 /OH (P)
CHO

CHO

(B) (II) (i) NaBH4/EtOH (Q)

CHO
OH
H
(C) (III) (i) Glycol + HCl (R)

(ii) SOCl2 (iii) DIBAL – H

(iv) H3OÅ
 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids C-87

(D) (IV) (i) LAH (ii) Conc.H2SO4 / D (S) HO

O
(iii) O3 / Zn or Me2S
92. Find the correct combination
(a) (A) (III) (P) (b) (B) (IV) (Q) (a) (A) (IV) (P) (d) (D) (I) (R)
93. Find the combination where acid group is converting into aldehyde group
(a) (A) (IV) (Q) (b) (A) (III) (S) (c) (B) (III) (P) (d) (B) (III) (Q)
94. Find suitable combination which follows hydroboration-oxidation reaction
(a) (C) (I) (R) (b) (D) (IV) (S) (c) (C) (I) (S) (d) (A) (III) (S)
Passage-2
Column I contains reactant and Column II & Column III contains reagent used for reaction and product respectively.
Column I Column II Column III
(Reactant) (Reagent) (Product)

O O

-
(A) (I) H + / D(ii)O3 , Zn (iii) OH/ D (P)
OH

O
OH
(B) (II) (i) NH2OH (ii) H2SO4/D (Q)

O
(C) (III) H2SO4/H2O (R) O

O O

-
O
(D) (IV) OH / D (S)

O
95. Find appropriate combination in which product is formed through retro aldol followed by intermolecular aldol reaction
(a) (C) (II) (Q) (b) (D) (III) (P) (c) (A) (IV) (Q) (d) (A) (II) (S)
96. Product ‘R’ is formed by
(a) (C) (II) (R) (b) (D) (IV) (R) (c) (A) (II) (R) (d) (B) (I) (R)
97. Incorrect statement is
(a) (C) (II) (Q) (b) (D) (III) (P) (c) (A) (IV) (Q) (d) (B) (I) (R)

Integer/Numerical Value Type Questions

98. 1, 2-Diethylbenzene on ozonolysis gives how many different products?
99. How many products are formed when ethanal reacts with propanal in the presence of a base?
100. Acetic acid is dissolved in water having oxygen as 18O. How many 18O atom will be present in the product molecule?
C-88 Chemistry

ANSWER KEYS
Exercise 27.1: Multiple Choice Questions MCQs
1 (a) 2 (d) 3 (c) 4 (d) 5 (a) 6 (c) 7 (a) 8 (a) 9 (b) 10 (d)
11 (d) 12 (a) 13 (a) 14 (c) 15 (d) 16 (c) 17 (b) 18 (c) 19 (a) 20 (b)
21 (a) 22 (c) 23 (c) 24 (b) 25 (b) 26 (b) 27 (a) 28 (c) 29 (b) 30 (b)
31 (c) 32 (b) 33 (d) 34 (d) 35 (c) 36 (c) 37 (b) 38 (c) 39 (d) 40 (d)
41 (d) 42 (b) 43 (d) 44 (c) 45 (b) 46 (c) 47 (d) 48 (c) 49 (c) 50 (c)
51 (d) 52 (c) 53 (c) 54 (c) 55 (c)
Exercise 27.2: Multiple Choice Questions MCQs
56 (c) 57 (d) 58 (a) 59 (c) 60 (a) 61 (a) 62 (c) 63 (c) 64 (a) 65 (c)
66 (b) 67 (c) 68 (a) 69 (a) 70 (c) 71 (a) 72 (a) 73 (c)
Exercise 27.3: Multiple Choice Questions MCQs
74 (a) 75 (d) 76 (b) 77 (c) 78 (c) 79 (b) 80 (c) 81 (d) 82 (a) 83 (a)
84 (d) 85 (c) 86 (b) 87 (b) 88 (a)
Question Bank Lev el-1
1 (a) 5 (d) 9 (d) 13 (c) 17 (b) 21 (b) 25 (d) 29 (b) 33 (c)
2 (d) 6 (b) 10 (c) 14 (c) 18 (b) 22 (c) 26 (b) 30 (c) 34 (a)
3 (c) 7 (b) 11 (b) 15 (a) 19 (c) 23 (c) 27 (c) 31 (b) 35 (c)
4 (c) 8 (b) 12 (d) 16 (d) 20 (c) 24 (b) 28 (a) 32 (b)
Chapter Test 1
1 (c) 4 (a) 7 (c) 10 (c) 13 (a) 16 (b) 19 (b) 22 (b) 25 (3)
2 (b) 5 (d) 8 (d) 11 (b) 14 (c) 17 (a) 20 (c) 23 (a)
3 (d) 6 (b) 9 (b) 12 (c) 15 (b) 18 (d) 21 (c) 24 (3)
Question Bank Lev el-2
1 (d) 5 (b) 9 (b) 13 (b) 17 (a) 21 (a) 25 (a) 29 (d) 33 (d)
2 (d) 6 (a) 10 (c) 14 (c) 18 (a) 22 (d) 26 (c) 30 (c) 34 (b)
3 (d) 7 (b) 11 (a) 15 (a) 19 (c) 23 (d) 27 (a) 31 (b) 35 (c)
4 (a) 8 (a) 12 (a) 16 (b) 20 (a) 24 (d) 28 (a) 32 (a)
Chapter Test 2
1 (a) 4 (b) 7 (b) 10 (b) 13 (c) 16 (d) 19 (d) 22 (b) 25 (4)
2 (b) 5 (a) 8 (b) 11 (a) 14 (d) 17 (b) 20 (b) 23 (1)
3 (b) 6 (a) 9 (c) 12 (a) 15 (b) 18 (b) 21 (d) 24 (5)
Past Years JEE Main Questions
1 (b) 2 (d) 3 (d) 4 (b) 5 (a) 6 (d) 7 (d) 8 (a) 9 (b) 10 (a)
11 (b) 12 (c) 13 (c) 14 (c) 15 (b) 16 (d) 17 (a) 18 (a) 19 (b) 20 (a)
21 (b) 22 (d) 23 (b) 24 (a) 25 (b) 26 (c) 27 (a) 28 (d) 29 (a) 30 (c)
31 (b) 32 (d)
Past Yea rs JEE Advanced Questions
1 (a, b, d) 2 (d) 3 (a) 4 (b) 5 (a) 6 (a, d) 7 (b) 8 (b, d) 9 (12) 10 (b)
11 (c, d) 12 (18) 13 (12) 14 (909) 15 (a, b, d ) 16 (c, d) 17 (2) 18 (102018)
JEE Advanced Level Questions
1 (a) 11 (c) 21 (b) 31 (d) 41 (b,c) 51 (a,c) 60 A-r;B-p;C-s;D-t 71 (d) 81 (d) 91 (2)
2 (d) 12 (b) 22 (c) 32 (b) 42 (a,b,c) 52 (a,d) 61 A-q,r;B-p,s;C-t;D-u 72 (d) 82 (c) 92 (c)
3 (b) 13 (b) 23 (d) 33 (c) 43 (a,b,d) 53 (b,d) 62 A-q;B-q;C-p;D-r 73 (a) 83 (c) 93 (d)
4 (b) 14 (a) 24 (a) 34 (b) 44 (a,b,c) 54 (a,b,c,d) 63 A-q,s;B-p,q,t;C-p,q,s,t;D-p,q,s,t 74 (c) 84 (b) 94 (c)
5 (b) 15 (d) 25 (a) 35 (b) 45 (a,b,c,d ) 55 (a,c) 64 A-p,q,s,t; B-p,t; C-p,q,s; D-p,q,s,t 75 (a) 85 (b) 95 (c)
6 (d) 16 (d) 26 (c) 36 (a) 46 (b,c,d) 56 (a,c) 65 A-r,s;B-p,s;C-r,s;D-q,r 76 (b) 86 (a) 96 (d)
7 (c) 17 (a) 27 (c) 37 (b) 47 (a,c) 57 (a,b,d) 67 (d) 77 (c) 87 (d) 97 (a)
8 (b) 18 (b) 28 (a) 38 (a) 48 (a) 58 (a,c,d) 68 (d) 78 (b) 88 (b) 98 (3)
9 (d) 19 (a) 29 (c) 39 (d) 49 (c,d) 59 (b,c,d) 69 (c) 79 (a) 89 (b) 99 (4)
10 (c) 20 (d) 30 (d) 40 (c) 50 (a,b,d) 66 (c) 70 (b) 80 (a) 90 (2) 100 (2)
 16 Determinants

Trend Analysis – JEE Main & Advanced

DETERMINANTS, MINOR AND CO-FACTOR OF A SQUARE MATRIX,

Topic 16.1 VALUE OF A DETERMINANT, PROPERTIES OF DETERMINANTS

DETERMINANT Difference Between a Matrix and a Determinant

Every square matrix associats to an expression or a number (i) A matrix cannot be reduced to a number but determinant
which is known as its determinant. If A = [aij] is a square can be reduced to a number.
matrix of order n, then the determinant of A is denoted by (ii) The number of rows may or may not be equal to the
det [A] or |A| and written as number of columns in matrices but in determinant the
a11 a12 ¼ a1 j ¼ a1n number of rows is equal to the number of columns.
(iii) On interchanging the rows and columns, a different
a21 a22 ¼ a2 j ¼ a2n
matrix is formed but in determinant it does not change
M M the value.
ai1 ai 2 ¼ aij ¼ ain
M M M M
Properties of the Determinant of a Matrix
an1 an2 ¼ anj ¼ anm If A and B are square matrices of same order, then
(i) |A| exists Û A is a square matrix.
In general a determinant is represented by the symbol ‘D’. (ii) |A¢| = |A|
 M-2 MATHEMATICS

(iii) |AB| = |A||B| and |AB| = |BA| a12 a13

(iv) If A is orthogonal matrix, then |A| = ± 1 A31 = (–1)3+1 M31 = a a33
32
(v) If A is skew-symmetric matrix of odd order, then |A| = 0
a11 a12
(vi) If A is skew-symmetric matrix of even order, then |A| Co-factor of element a21 of of order 2 is
a21 a22
is a perfect square.
(vii) |kA| = kn|A|, where n is order of A and k is scalar. A21 = (–1)2+1 |a12| = –|a12|
(viii)|An| = |A|n, where n Î N VALUE OF A DETERMINANT
(ix) If A = (a1, a2, a3, ..., an), then |A| = a1 . a2 . a3 ... an
VALUE OF A DETERMINANT OF ORDER TWO
MINOR AND CO-FACTOR OF AN ELEMENT
Value of a determinant of order two is equal to product of
OF A DETERMINANT the principal diagonal elements minus product of the
preceeding diagonal elements.
MINOR Principal diagonal of a determinant is the diagonal which
The determinant that is left by cancelling the row and column passes through its element of first row and first column
intersecting at a particular element of a determinant is called preceeding diagonal of a determinant is the diagonal which
the minor of that element of the determinant. Minor of an passes through its element of last row and first column.
element aij of a determinant is denoted by mij. Main diagonal
Thus minor of element a23 of the determinant Preceeding diagonal
a11 a12

a11 a12 a13 = a11a22 – a12a21

a21 a22 a23 a11 a12 a21 a22
of order 3 is M23 =
a31 a32 a33 a31 a32
2 5
a11 a12 a13 \ = 2 × 0 – 5 × (–1) = 5
-1 0
Similarly, minor of element a 12 of a21 a22 a23 is

a21 a23
a31 a32 a33 VALUE OF A DETERMINANT OF ORDER THREE
M12 = Value of a determinant of order three can be obtained by
a31 a33
expanding the determinant of order three along any of the
a11 a12 three rows or any of the three columns of the determinant as
Minor of element of a 21 of of order 2 is
a21 a22
a11 a12 a13
M21 = a12 a21 a22 a23 =
a31 a32 a33
CO-FACTOR ìa11 A11 + a12 A12 + a13 A13 , expanding along first row
ïa A + a A + a A , expanding along second row
The co-factor of an element aij of a determinant is denoted ï 21 21 22 22 23 23
by Aij (or Cij) and is equal to (–1)i+j mij, where mij is the ïïa31 A31 + a32 A32 + a33 A33 , expanding along third row
í
minor of the element aij. ïa11 A11 + a21 A21 + a31 A31, expanding along first column
Thus co-factor of element a23 of the determinant ïa12 A12 + a22 A22 + a32 A32 , expanding along second column
ï
ïîa13 A13 + a23 A23 + a33 A33 , expanding along third column
a11 a12 a13
a21 a22 a23 of order 3 is Thus the value of a determinant of order three is the sum of the
a31 a32 a33 products of element of any row or column with their
corresponding co-factor.
a11 a12
A23 = (–1)2+3 M23 = -
a31 a32 a11 a12 a13
a11 a12 a13 \ a21 a22 a23 = a111A11 + a12 A12 + a13 A13
Similarly, co-factor of element a31 of a21 a22 a23 is a31 a32 a33
a31 a32 a33 (expanding along the first row,)
 Determinants M-3

= a11(–1)1+1M11 + a12(–1)1+2M12 + a13(–1)1+3M13 = a11(a22a33 – a23a32) – a12(a21a33 – a23a31)

+ a13(a21a32 – a22a31)
a22 a23 a21 a23 a21 a22
= a11 - a12 + a13
a32 a33 a31 a33 a31 a32 Similarly, we can find the value of the determinant by
expanding it along any other row or column.

Note : (v) If A and B are square matrices of same order, then

(i) | A | exists Û A is a square matrix | AB | = | BA |
(ii) | AB | = | A | | B | (vi) If A is a skew symmetric matrix of odd order then
(iii) | AT | = | A | |A| = 0
(iv) | kA | = kn | A |, if A is a square matrix of order n. (vii) If A = diag (a1,a2, ....., an), then | A | = a1a2...an
(viii)| A |n = | An |, n Î N.

ILLUSTRATION 1 : Sol. A is singular Þ |A| = 0

a +1 a - 2 1 -3 2
Find the value of .
a + 2 a -1 k
Þ 2 5
=0
a +1 a - 2 4 2 1
Sol. a + 2 a - 1 = (a + 1) (a – 1) – (a + 2) (a – 2)
Þ 1(k – 10) + 3 (2 – 20) + 2 (4 – 4k) = 0
= (a2 – 1) – (a2 – 4) = 3
Þ 7k + 56 = 0 Þ k = – 8
ILLUSTRATION 2 :
1 2 3 PROPERTIES OF DETERMINANT
Find the value of -4 3 6
. Property-1
2 -7 9 The value of determinant remains unchanged, if the rows and
the columns are interchanged.
1 2 3 After interchanging the rows and the columns, the determinant
3 6 -4 6 -4 3
Sol. - 4 3 6 =1 – 2 + 3 obtained is called transpose of the determinant. If D is a
-7 9 2 9 2 -7 determinant, then its transpose is denoted by D'.
2 -7 9
a1 b1 c1 a1 a 2 a 3
= 1 (3 × 9 – 6 (–7)) –2 (– 4 × 9 –2 × 6) +3 ((–4) (–7) – 3 × 2)
Ex. D = a 2 b2 c 2 and D' = b1 b2 b3
= (27 + 42) –2 (–36 –12) + 3 (28 – 6) = 231
a 3 b 3 c3 c1 c 2 c3
SINGULAR AND NON-SINGULAR MATRICES Then D' = D, where D and D' are transpose of each other.
Matrix A is said to be singular matrix if its determinant,
Property-2
| A | = 0, otherwise non-singular matrix i.e.
If any two rows (or columns) of a determinant are inter-changed,
If | A | = 0 Þ singular the determinant is unaltered in numerical value, but is changed
and | A | ¹ 0 Þ non-singular in sign only.
a1 b1 c1 a 2 b 2 c2
ILLUSTRATION 3 :
a 2 b 2 c2 a1 b1 c1
Ex. A = and B =
é 1 -3 2ù a 3 b3 c3 a 3 b 3 c3
ê ú
If A = ê 2 k 5ú is a singular matrix, then find the then B = – A
êë 4 2 1úû
Property-3
value of k. If a determinant has two rows (or columns) identical, then its
value is zero.
a1 b1 c1
Ex. If D = a1 b1 c1 , then, D = 0
a 2 b2 c 2
 M-4 MATHEMATICS

Property-4 (iv) Ri ® Ri + l Rj to denote the addition of l times the

If each element of any row (or column) of a determinant is elements of jth row to the corresponding elements of
multiplied by the same number, then the value of determinant is ith row.
multiplied by that number. Similar notations are used to denote column operations if R
a1 b1 c1 ka1 kb1 kc1 is replaced by C.
Ex. A = a 2 b2 c 2 and B = a 2 b2 c2 , then B = kA. AREA OF TRIANGLE
Area of triangle whose vertices are (x1y1), (x2y2) and (x3y3) is
a 3 b 3 c3 a3 b3 c 3
x1 y1 1
Property-5 1
x2 y2 1
If each element of any row (or column) are expressed as a sum of 2
x3 y3 1
two terms, then the determinant can be expressed as the sum of
the two determinants as ILLUSTRATION 4 :
a1 + x b1 + y c1 + z a1 b1 c1
If a, b, c are pth, qth and rth, terms of a G.P., then
x y z
a2 b2 c2 a b c
= 2 2 2 + 2 b2 c 2
a log a p 1
a3 b3 c3 a 3 b 3 c3 a 3 b 3 c3 evaluate log b q 1
log c r 1
Property-6
Sol. If A be the first term and R be the common ratio of a
If any multiple of any row (or column) of a determinant is added
or subtracted from corresponding element of any other row (or
G.P., then
column) of the determinant, then value of the determinant is not a = ARp–1, b = ARq–1, c = ARr–1
altered. log a = logA + (p – 1)log R

a1 b1 c1 a1 + ma 2 b1 + mb2 c1 + mc2 log A p 1 ( p - 1)log R p 1

a 2 b2 c 2 a2 b2 c2 \ D = log A q 1 + (q - 1)log R q 1
Ex. =
a 3 b 3 c3 a 3 - na1 b3 - nb1 c3 - nc1 log A r 1 (r - 1)log R r 1

Note : p -1 p -1 1
It should be noted that while applying property-6, at least = 0 + log R q - 1 q - 1 1 = 0 [by C2 ® C2 – C1]
one row (or column) must remain unchanged. r -1 r -1 1
ILLUSTRATION 5 :
Property-7
If D = f (x) and f (a) = 0 then (x – a) is a factor of D. a + b + nc (n - 1)a (n - 1)b
Prove that (n - 1)c b + c + na (n - 1)b is equal to
1 1 1 (n - 1)c (n - 1)a c + a + nb
a b c
Ex. D = n(a + b + c)3
2 2 2
a b c Sol. Applying C1 ® C1 + C2 + C3 and taking n(a + b + c)
1 1 1 common from C1, we get
If we replace a by b, then D = b b c =0
2 2 2 1 (n - 1)a (n - 1)b
b b c
Þ (a – b) is a factor of D D = n (a + b + c) 1 b + c + na (n - 1)b
1 (n - 1)a c + a + nb
NOTATIONS USED IN EVALUATING A
DETERMINANT 1 (n - 1)a (n - 1)b
= n (a + b + c) 0 a + b + c 0
(i) Ri to denote ith row.
0 0 a+b+c
(ii) Ri « Rj to denote the interchange of ith and jth rows.
[By R2 ® R2 – R1, R3 ® R3–R1]
(iii) lRi to denote the multiplication of all elements of ith = n (a + b + c)3
row by l.
 Determinants M-5

MULTIPLICATION OF TWO DETERMINANTS, ADJOINT OF A

Topic 16.2 MATRIX, INVERSE OF A MATRIX, ORTHOGONAL MATRIX,
DIFFERENTIATION OF A DETERMINANT

MULTIPLICATION OF TWO DETERMINANTS Note :

Multiplication of two second order determinants is defined (i) Every diagonal element of a skew symmetric
as follows determinant is always zero.
a1 b1 l1 m1 a1 l1 + b1 l 2 a1 m1 + b1m2 (ii) The value of a skew symmetric determinant of even
× l m = a l +b l order is always a perfect square and that of odd order is
a 2 b2 2 2 2 1 2 2 a 2 m1 + b2 m 2
always zero.
Multiplication of two third order determinants is defined as
follows LIMIT OF A DETERMINANT
a1 b1 c1 l1 m1 n1
f (x) g(x) h(x)
a 2 b 2 c2 l 2 m2 n 2 Let D (x) = l(x) m(x) n(x) , then lim D (x)
× =
a 3 b3 c3 l 3 m3 n 3 x ®a
u(x) v(x) w(x)

a1 l1 + b1 l 2 + c1 l3 a1 m1 + b1m2 + c1m3 a1 n1 + b1n 2 + c1n3

a 2 l1 + b2 l 2 + c2 l3 a 2 m1 + b2m2 + c2m3 a2 n1 + b2n2 + c2n3 lim f (x) lim g(x) lim h(x)
x ®a x ®a x ®a
a3 l1 + b3 l2 + c3 l3 a3 m1 + b3m2 + c3m3 a3 n1 + b3n2 + c3n3 = lim l(x) lim m(x) lim n(x) ,
x ®a x ®a x ®a
lim u(x) lim v(x) lim w(x)
Note : x ®a x ®a x ®a

In above two cases the order of determinant which are provided each of nine limiting values exist finitely.
multiplied are same, if the order is different then for their
multiplication first of all they should be expressed in the DIFFERENTIATION OF A DETERMINANT
same order. 1. Second Order Determinant

SYMMETRIC AND SKEW SYMMETRIC a11 (x ) a 12 ( x )

Let D( x ) = . Then,
a 21 (x ) a 22 ( x)
DETERMINANT
SYMMETRIC DETERMINANT d a ' (x ) a 12 ( x ) a 11( x ) a'12 ( x)
D' ( x ) = D( x ) = 11 +
A determinant |aij|n×n is called symmetric determinant, if aij dx a' 21 (x ) a 22 ( x) a 21 ( x ) a ' 22 (x )
= aji " i , j
If we write D(x ) = [C1 C 2 ] where Ci denotes the ith
a h g
column, then D' ( x ) = [C'1 , C 2 ] + [C1 , C' 2 ]
Ex. h b f
Where C' denotes that column with contains the derivative
g f c
of all the functions in the ith column Ci, i = 1, 2.
SKEW SYMMETRIC DETERMINANT é R1 ù
Further if we write D( x) = ê ú . Then
A determinant |aij|n×n is called skew symmetric determinant, ëR 2 û
if aij = – aji " i, j éR ' ù é R ù
D' ( x ) = ê 1 ú + ê 1 ú
0 3 -1 ëR 2 û ëR ' 2 û

Ex. -3 0 5
1 -5 0
 M-6 MATHEMATICS

2. Third Order Determinant

1 6 x2
a11 ( x) a12 ( x ) a13 (x ) d
D = 1 + cos x cos x 4
dx
Next if D( x ) = a 21 (x ) a 22 ( x ) a 23 (x ) and if we write 0 ln x tan -1 x
a 31 ( x ) a 32 (x ) a 33 ( x)
D( x ) = [C1 , C 2 , C 3 ] then x +1 0 x2 x +1 6 2x
D' ( x ) = [C'1 , C 2 , C3 ] + [C1 , C'2 , C3 ] + [C1, C 2 , C'3 ] . + x + sin x - sin x 4 + x + sin x cos x 0
1 1
é R1 ù 0 tan -1 x 0 ln x
Again if we write D( x) = êêR 2 úú . Then 1 + x2
x
[Differentiating along columns]
êë R 3 úû
ADJOINT OF A SQUARE MATRIX
éR '1 ù é R1 ù é R1 ù
If every element of a square matrix A be replaced by its co-factor,
D' (x ) = êêR 2 úú + êêR ' 2 úú + êê R 2 úú
then the transpose of the matrix so obtained is called the adjoint
êë R 3 úû êë R 3 úû êëR '3 úû of matrix A and it is denoted by adj A.
Thus, if A = [aij] be a square matrix and Aij be the co-factor of aij,
x +1 6 x2 then Adj. A = [Aij]T
Ex. Let D = x + sin x cos x 4
é a11 a12 ...a1n ù
-1 ê
0 ln x tan x Hence, if A = ê a21 a22 ...a2 n ú , then Adj.
ú
1 0 2x êë an1 an 2 ...ann úû
d
then D = x + sin x cos x 4 T
dx é A11 A12 A13 ù
0 ln x tan -1 x ê ú
A = ê A 21 A 22 A 23 ú
êA A32 A33 ú
x +1 6 x2 x +1 6 x2 ëê 31 ûú
+ 1 + cos x - sin x 0 + x + sin x cos x 4 T
é 9 -4 ù é3 2ù é 3 4ù
0 ln x tan -1 x 1 1 Ex. if A = ê -2 3 ú , then adj A = ê4 9ú = ê2 9ú
0 ë û ë û ë û
x 1 + x2
[Differentiating along rows]
Again
SHORTCUT METHOD TO FIND THE ADJOINT OF A MATRIX
This method is applicable only for third order square matrix and can be easily understand through the following example.

é2 5 1ù
Let A = ê 0 -1 2 ú . To find the adj (A) follow the steps:
ê ú
êë 3 -2 4 úû
Write all elements First write first two rows Delete first row and first From the product of
as in the given below the third row, then column and mark cross sign (×) –1 and 4, subtract the
matrix write first two columns between the remaining product of –2 and 2
after third column elements as shown and so on.

0 6 3
2 5 1 2 5 –1 2 0 –1 First column of adj (A)
2 5 1 0 -1 2 0 -1 –22 5 19
–2 4 3 –2
0 -1 2 ¾¾
® 3 -2 4 3 -2 ¾¾
® ¾¾
® Second column of adj (A)
5 1 2 5 11 – 4 –2
3 -2 4 2 5 1 2 5
–1 2 0 –1 Third column of adj (A)
0 -1 2 0 -1
 Determinants M-7

é 0 -22 11 ù
INVERSE OF A MATRIX
ê ú
Hence adj (A) = ê 6 5 -4 ú If A and B are two matrices such that
êë 3 19 -2 úû AB = I = BA,
then B is called the inverse of A and it is denoted by A–1, thus
PROPERTIES OF ADJOINT OF A MATRIX A–1 = B Û AB = I = BA
If A, B are square matrices of order n and In is corresponding To find inverse matrix of a given matrix A, we use following
unit matrix, then adj.A
formula A–1 = , if |A| ¹ 0
(i) A (adj. A) = | A | In = (adj A) A |A|
Thus A–1 exists Û | A | ¹ 0
(ii) |adj A| = | A |n–1
To Compute the Inverse of a Non-Singular Matrix by
(iii) adj (adj A) = | A |n–2 A
Elementary Operations (Gauss-Jordan Method)
2
(iv) |adj (adj A)| = | A |(n -1) If A be a non-singular matrix of order n, then write A = In A.
(v) adj (AT) = (adj A)T If A is reduced to In by elementary operations (LHS), then
suppose In is reduced to P(RHS) and not change A in RHS, then
(vi) adj (AB) = (adj B) (adj A)
after elementary operations, we get In = PA, then P is the inverse
(vii) adj (Am) = (adj A)m, m Î N of A \ P = A–1
(viii) adj (kA) = kn–1 (adj. A), k Î R (i) Matrix A is called invertible, if A–1 exists.
(ix) adj (In) = In (ii) Inverse of a matrix is unique.
(x) adj O = O
(xi) A is symmetric Þ adj A is also symmetric PROPERTIES OF INVERSE OF A MATRIX
(xii) A is diagonal Þ adj A is also diagonal Let A and B are two invertible matrices of the same order, then
(xiii)A is triangular Þ adj A is also triangular (i) (AT)–1 = (A–1)T

(xiv)A is singular Þ | adj A | = O (ii) (AB)–1 = B–1A–1

(iii) (Ak)–1 = (A–1)k, k Î N
ILLUSTRATION 6 : (iv) adj (A–1) = (adj A)–1
(v) (A–1)–1 = A
é 1 3 5ù 1
ê ú (vi) | A–1 | = = | A |–1
If A = ê 3 5 1ú , then find adj. A. |A|
êë 5 1 3úû
(vii) If A = diag (a1, a2.....,an), then
A–1 = diag (a1–1, a2–1, .........an–1)
T
é 14 -4 -22ù é 14 -4 -22ù
ê -4 -22 14 ú (viii) A is symmetric matrix Þ A–1 is symmetric matrix.
ê -4 -22 14 ú
Sol. adj. A = ê ú = ê ú (ix) A is triangular matrix and | A | ¹ 0 Þ A–1 is a triangular
êë -22 14 -4 úû êë -22 14 -4 úû matrix.
(x) A is scalar matrix Þ A–1 is scalar matrix
ILLUSTRATION 7 : (xi) A is diagonal matrix Þ A–1 is diagonal matrix
é 1 0 3ù (xii) AB = AC Þ B = C, iff | A | ¹ 0.
ê ú
If A = ê 2 1 1ú , then find | adj (adj A) |.
êë 0 0 2úû ILLUSTRATION 8 :
é2 - 3ù
Find the inverse of the matrix ê ú
1 0 3 ë -4 2 û
Sol. |A| = 2 1 1 = 2 Sol. Let the given matrix is A, then | A | = – 8
T
0 0 2 é2 4ù é 2 3ù
and adj A = ê ú = ê 4 2ú
\ |adj (adj A) | = | A | (n -1)2 22 [Q n = 3] ë3 2û ë û
=| A |
= 24 = 16
 M-8 MATHEMATICS

1 1 é 2 3ù 1 é 1 -2 ù é1/ 6 -1/ 3ù
\ A–1 = adj A = – ê M–1 = 6 ê 2
|A| 8 ë 4 2 úû ë 2 úû
= ê1/ 3 1/ 3 ú
ë û

ILLUSTRATION 9 : ORTHOGONAL MATRIX

é 0 1ù A square matrix A is called orthogonal, if AAT = I = ATA
é 0 -1 2ù ê ú
If A = ê 2 -2 0ú , B = –1
ë û ê 1 0ú and M = AB, then find M .
êë 1 1úû
é1 0 0ù
ê ú
é0 1ù Ex. A = ê0 1 0ú is a orthogonal matrix because here
é 0 -1 2 ù ê 0ú é 1 2ù êë0 0 1 úû
Sol. M = ê 2 -2 0 ú ê1 ú = ê ú
ë û ê1 1 úû ë -2 2 û
ë
(i) If A is orthogonal, then A' is also orthogonal.
é 1 -2 ù
|M| = 6, adj M = ê 2 2 ú (ii) If A and B are orthogonal matrices, then AB and BA are
ë û
also orthogonal matrices.

SOLUTION OF SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS USING DETERMINANT

Topic 16.3 METHOD (CRAMER'S RULE), USING MATRIX METHOD

SYSTEM OF SIMULTANEOUS LINEAR SOLUTION OF NON-HOMOGENEOUS

EQUATIONS SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS BY
Consider a system of linear equations MATRIX METHOD
a11x1 + a12x2 + … + a1nxn = b1 Consider a system of linear equations
a21x1 + a22x2 + … + a2nxn = b2 a11x1 + a12x2 + … + a1nxn = b1

M M M M a21x1 + a22x2 + … + a2nxn = b2

an1x1 + an2x2 + … + annxn = bn

M M M M
(i) If the constants b1, b2, …, bn are all zero, then system an1x1 + an2x2 + … + annxn = bn
of equations is called homogeneous otherwise called
We can express these equations as a single matrix equation
non-homogeneous.
é a11 a12 ¼ a1n ù é x1 ù é b1 ù
(ii) A set of values of the variables x1, x2, …, xn which êa
ê 21 a22 ¼ a2 n úú êê x2 úú êêb2 úú
simultaneously satisfy all the equations of the system =
ê M M M M ú êMú êMú
of equations is called solution of the system of linear ê ú ê ú ê ú
ë an1 an 2 ¼ ann û ë xn û ëbn û
equations.
(iii) If the system of equations has one or more than one é a11 a12 ¼ a1n ù é x1 ù é b1 ù
êa a ¼ a2 n ú êx ú êb ú
solutions, then system is called consistent otherwise Let A = ê 21 22 ú, X = ê 2 ú and B = ê 2ú ;
called inconsistent. ê M M M ú êMú êMú
ê ú ê ú ê ú
ë an1 an 2 ann û ë xn û ëbn û
Note that we have given maximum 4 simultaneous linear then
equations to solve. AX=B
 Determinants M-9

Now,
2 -1 3
(i) If |A| ¹ 0, then the system is called consistent having unique
Now, | A | = 3 2 -1
solution. The unique solution is find out by equating the
corresponding elements from both sides of the matrix 4 5 -5
equation = 2(–10 + 5) + 1(–15 + 4) + 3(15 – 8) = 0
X = A–1 B
So, A is singular. Thus, the given system of equations is
(ii) If |A| = 0 and (adj A) B ¹ O, then the system is inconsistent either inconsistent or it is consistent with infinitely many
i.e., the system has no solution.
solutions according as (adj A) B ¹ O or (adj A) B = O
(iii) If |A| = 0 and (adj A) B = O, then (a) the system is consistent
respectively.
and dependent having infinitely many solutions in case of
the system of two equation in two variables. (b) the system Let Cij be the co-factors of elements aij in A = [aij].
may or may not be consistent in case of more than two Then,
equations in more than two variables. However, if it is
consistent, then it is dependent also having infinitely many 2 -1
C11 = (–1)1+1 = - 5,
solutions. 5 -5
In order to find the solution of a system of three linear
equations in three variables, 3 -1
C12 = (–1)1+2 = 11,
a1x + b1 y + c1z = d1 4 -5
a2x + b2 y + c2z = d2 -1 3
3 2
a3x + b3 y + c3z = d3 C13 = (–1)1+3 = 7, C21 = (–1)2+1 5 -5 = 10,
4 5
replace one of the variables (say z) by any real number
(say k) in all three equations. This will reduce the number of 2 3
variables by one. Now take any two out of the three C22 = (–1)2+2 = –22,
4 -5
equations and solve them by matrix method. By which, we
get the value of x and y in term of k. Now put the value of 2 -1
the two variables x and y in terms of k in third equation. If C23 = (–1)2+3 = –14,
4 5
the value of the variables x and y satisfy the third equation,
then the system is consistent and the value of the three -1 3
variables in terms of k constitute a solution. For each value C31 = (–1)3+1 = –5,
2 -1
of k, there is a unique set of solution and hence for infinite
values of k, there are infinitely many set of solutions. If the 2 3
value of the two variables x and y do not satisfy the third C32 = (–1)3+2 = 111
3 -1
equation, then the system is inconsistent and hence the
system has no solution. 2 -1
and C33 = (–1)3+3 =7
ILLUSTRATION 10 : 3 2
Show that the following system of equations is consistent. T
é -5 11 7 ù é -5 10 -5 ù
2x – y + 3z = 5, 3x + 2y – z = 7, 4x + 5y – 5z = 9. \ (adj A) = 10 -22 -14 = êê 11 -22 -11úú
ê ú
ê ú
Also, find the solution. êë 7 -14 7 úû
ëê -5 11 7 ûú
Sol. The given system of equation can be written in matrix
form é -5 10 -5ù é 5 ù
é 2 -1 3 ù é x ù é5ù Þ (adj A) B = êê 11 -22 11 úú êê 7 úú
ê 3 2 -1 ú ê y ú = ê 7 ú êë 7 -14 7 úû êë 9 úû
ê úê ú ê ú
êë 4 5 -5 úû êë z úû êë 9 úû
é -25 +70 - 45ù é0ù
é 2 -1 3 ù = êê 55 -154 + 99 ú = êê 0 úú
ê ú ú
or, AX = B, where A = ê 3 2 -1 ú , êë 35 -98 + 63úû êë 0 úû
êë 4 5 -5 úû
éxù Thus, AX = B has infinitely many solutions. To find
ê yú é5ù
these solutions, we put z = k in the first two equations
X = ê ú and B = êê 7 úú
êë z úû and write them as follows :
ëê 9 ûú
 M-10 MATHEMATICS

2x – y = 5 – 3k and 3x + 2y = 7 + k (i) If | A | ¹ 0, then the system has unique solution x1 = x2 = …

= xn = 0. This solution is known as the trivial solution.
é 2 -1 ù é x ù é 5 -3k ù (ii) If |A| = 0, then the system has infinitely many solutions.
or, ê ú ê ú = ê ú
ë3 2 û ë yû ë7 + k û The solutions obtained in this case is called non-trivial
solutions.
é 2 -1ù In order to find the solution of the homogeneous system
or, AX = B, where A = ê ,
ë3 2 úû of three linear equations with three variables,
a1x + b1y + c1z = 0
é xù é 5 -3k ù
X = ê ú and B = ê7 + k ú a2x + b2y + c2z = 0
ë yû ë û a3x + b3y + c3z = 0
2 -1 2 1 Replace any one variable (say z) by any real number (say
Now, | A| = = 4 + 3 = 7 ¹ 0 and adj A = k) i.e. z = k in all the three equations. Then solve any two
3 2 -3 2
equations for x and y by the matrix method. The value of x
1 1 é 2 1ù and y so obtained in terms of k and (z = k) give the infinitely
\ A–1 = A (adj A) Þ A–1 = ê ú many solutions.
7 ë -3 2 û
Because there is an unique set of solution of x, y, z for each
Now, X = A–1 B value of k and hence infinitely many set of solutions for
infinite many values of k.
é xù 1é2 1 ù é 5 -3k ù
Þ ê ú = ê úê
ë yû 7 ë -3 2 û ë 7 + k úû
ILLUSTRATION 11 :
1 é 10 - 6k + 7 + k ù Show that the homogeneous system of equations
= ê-15 + 9 k + 2 k + 14 ú
7 ë û x – 2y + z = 0, x + y – z = 0, 3x + 6y – 5z = 0 has a
non-trivial solution. Also, find the solution.
é17 - 5k ù
é xù ê 7 ú Sol. The given system of homogeneous equations can be
17 - 5k 11k - 1
Þ ê y ú = ê 11k - 1 ú Þ x= ,y= written in matrix form as
ë û ê ú 7 7
êë 7 úû é1 -2 1 ù é x ù é 0ù
ê1 1 -1ú ê y ú = ê 0ú
ê úê ú ê ú
These values of x, y and (z = k) also satisfy the third equation. êë3 6 -5ûú êë z ûú ëê 0ûú
17 - 5k 11k - 1 é1 -2 1 ù
Hence, x =
7
,y=
7
and z = k, where k is any real or, AX = O, where A = êê1 1 -1úú ,
êë3 6 -5úû
number satisfy the given system of equations.
é xù é 0ù
SOLUTION OF HOMOGENEOUS SYSTEM OF X = êê y úú and O = ê 0ú .
ê ú
LINEAR EQUATIONS BY MATRIX METHOD êë z úû êë 0úû

Consider a system of linear equations 1 -2 1

Now, |A| = 1 1 -1
a11x1 + a12x2 + … + a1n xn = 0
3 6 -5
a21x1 + a22x2 + … + a2n xn = 0
= 1(–5 + 6) + 2 (–5 + 3) + 1(6 – 3) = 0.
M M M Thus, |A| =. 0. So, the given system of equations has a
an1x1 + an2x2 + … + annxn = 0 non-trivial solution. To find these solutions, we put z =
k in the first two equations and write them as follows:
é a11 a12 ¼ a1n ù é x1 ù x – 2y = –k and x + y = k
êa a22 ¼ a2 n úú êx ú
Let A = ê 21 and X = ê 2ú
é1 -2 ù é x ù é -k ù
ê M M M ú êMú or, ê
ê ú ê ú 1 1 ú ê yú = ê k ú
ë an1 an 2 ann û ë xn û ë ûë û ë û

Then AX = O
 Determinants M-11

é1 -2 ù (ii) If D = 0 and one of D1, D2, …, Dn is non-zero, then the

or, AX = B, where A = ê , system is inconsistent i.e. the system has no solution.
1 ë 1 úû
(iii) If D = 0 and also D1 = D2 = … = Dn = 0, then (a) the system
é xù é-k ù is consistent and dependent having infinitely many
X = ê ú and B = ê ú . solutions in case of the system of two equations with two
ë yû ëk û
variables (b) the system may or may not be consistent in
1 -2 case of more than two equations in more than two variables.
Now, |A| = = 3 ¹ 0.
1 1 However, if it is consistent, then it is dependent also having
infinitely many solutions.
So, A–1 exists.
In order to find the solution of a system of three equations
1 2 in three variables,
We have, adj A =
-1 1 a1x + b1 y + c1z = d1
1 1 é 1 2ù a2x + b2 y + c2z = d2
\ A–1 = adj A Þ A–1 = ê ú
A 3 ë -1 1 û a3x + b3 y + c3z = d3
Now, X = A–1 B replace one of the variables (say z) in all the three equations
by any real number (say k). This will reduce the number of
éxù 1é 1 2ù é -k ù é k /3 ù variables by one. Now take any two out of the three
Þ ê y ú = 3 ê -1 1 ú ê k ú = ê 2k / 3ú equations and solve them for x and y by Cramer’s Rule,
ë û ë ûë û ë û
which gives the value of x and y in term of k. Now put the
Þ x = k/3, y = 2k/3 when z = k
value of the two variables x and y in the place of x and y in
These values of x, y and z also satisfy the third equation. third equation. If the value of the variables x and y satisfy
Hence x = k/3, y = 2k/3 and z = k, where k is any real the third equation, then the system is consistent and the
number satisfy the given system of equations. value of the three variables x, y and z in terms of k constitute
an infinite many set of solutions because for each value of
SOLUTION OF NON-HOMOGENEOUS SYSTEM k, there is an unique set of solution for x, y, z and hence for
infinite many values of k, there are infinitely many set of
OF LINEAR EQUATIONS BY CRAMER’S RULE solutions. If the value of the variables x and y in terms of k
(OR DETERMINANT METHOD) do not satisfy the third equation, then the system is
inconsistent and hence the system has no solution.
Consider a system of n simultaneous linear equations
a11x1 + a12x2 + … + a1nxn = b1 ILLUSTRATION 12 :
Solve the system of equations x + 2y = 3 and 4x + 8y = 12
a21x1 + a22x2 + … + a2nxn = b2
by using determinants.
M M M Sol. We have,
an1x1 + an2x2 + … + annxn = bn 1 2 3 2 1 3
D= = 0, D1 = = 0 and D2 = = 0.
a11 a12 ¼ a1n 4 8 12 8 4 12
a a22 ¼ a2 n Thus, D = D1 = D2 = 0
Let D = 21 and Di be the determinant obtained
M M M So, the given system has infinite number of solutions.
an1 an 2 ¼ ann Let y = k. Then,
x + 2y = 3 Þ x = 3 – 2k.
é b1 ù Hence, x = 3 – 2k, y = k is the solution of the given
êb ú
system of equations, where k is any real number.
from D after replacing the ith column by the column ê 2 ú .
êMú
ê ú ILLUSTRATION 13 :
ë bn û
By using determinants, solve the following system of
(i) If D ¹ 0, then the system of equation is consistent having equations:
D1 D D x + y + z = 1, x + 2y + 3z = 4, x + 3y + 5z = 7
unique solution given by x1 = , x2 = 2 , …, xn = n
D D D
 M-12 MATHEMATICS

Sol. We have, Sol. We have,

1 1 1 1 –3 5
D= 1 2 3 D = 2 – 6 10 = 0 [Q C2 is proportional C1]
1 3 5 3 –9 15
= 1 × (10 – 9) – 1 × (5 – 3) + 1 × (3 – 2) = 0,
4 –3 5 4 1 1
1 1 1
D1 = 11 – 6 10 = –15 11 2 2 = 0
D1 = 4 2 3 12 –9 15 12 3 3
7 3 5
[QC2 and C3 are identical]
= 1 × (10 – 9) – 1 × (20 – 21) + 1 × (12 – 14) = 0, 1 4 5 1 4 1
1 1 1 D2 = 2 11 10 = 5 2 11 2 = 0 and,
D2 = 1 4 3 3 12 15 3 12 3
1 7 5 [QC1 and C3 are identical]
= 1 × (20 – 21) – 1 × (5 – 3) + 1 × (7 – 4) = 0, 1 –3 4 1 1 4
1 1 1 D3 = 2 –6 11 = -3 2 2 11 = 0
and D3 = 1 2 4 3 –9 12 3 3 12
1 3 7 [QC1 and C2 are identical]
= 1 × (14 – 12) – 1 × (7 – 4) + 1 × (3– 2) = 0. D = D1 = D2 = D3 = 0.
Thus, we have So, the given system of equations may or may not be
D = D1 = D2 = D3 = 0 consistent.
So, either the system is consistent with infinitely many If we now put z = k in any two of three equations, we
solutions or it is inconsistent. Consider the first two find that the two equations obtained are inconsistent as
equations and put z = k in it, then they represent a pair of parallel lines.
x+y=1–k Hence, the given system of equations is inconsistent.
x + 2y = 4 – 3k SOLUTION OF HOMOGENEOUS SYSTEM OF
To solve these equations, we use Cramer’s rule. LINEAR EQUATIONS BY CRAMER’S RULE
1 1 1- k 1 (OR DETERMINANT METHOD)
Here, D = = 2 - 1 = 1, D1 =
1 2 4 - 3k 2 Let us now consider a homogeneous system of equations
= 2 – 2k – 4 + 3k = k – 2 given by, a1x + b1 y + c1z = 0, a2x + b2 y + c2z = 0,
a3 x + b3 y + c3z = 0
1 1- z
and D2 = = 4 – 3k – 1 + k = 3 – 2k. For this system of equations, we have
1 4 - 3z
0 b1 c1 a1 0 c1
D1 D
\ x= and y = 2 D1 = 0 b2 c2 = 0, D2 = a2 0 c2
D D = 0 and,
0 b3 c3 a3 0 c3
Þ x = k – 2, y = 3 – 2k, when z = k.
These values satisfy the third equation. a1 b1 c1
a1 b1 0
Hence, x = k – 2, y = 3 – 2k, z = k is a solution of the a b2 a
0 = 0 , If D = 2 b2 c2 ¹ 0, then
D3 = 2
given system of equation for each value of k. a3 b3 c3
a3 b3 0
ILLUSTRATION 14 :
D1 D D3
Using determinants, show that the following system of x= = 0, y = 2 = 0 and z = = 0.
D D D
linear equation is inconsistent.
x – 3y + 5z = 4, 2x – 6y + 10z = 11, 3x – 9y + 15z = 12 Thus, if D ¹ 0, then the homogeneous system of equations has
unique solution x = 0, y = 0, z = 0. This solution is called the
trivial solution.
 Determinants M-13

So, the system has infinitely many solutions. Consider the

If D = 0, then a homogeneous system of equations has infinitely
first two equations. Putting z = k in first two equations, we get
many solutions. This solution is called non-trivial or non-zero
solutions.
x + y = k, x – 2y = –k
Solving these equations by Cramer’s rule, we have
In order to find the solution of the homogeneous system of
three linear equations of three variables. k 1
a1x + b1y + c1z = 0 D1 – k –2 – k k
x= = = = and,
a2x + b2y + c2z = 0 D 1 1 –3 3
1 –2
a3x + b3y + c3z = 0
Replace any one of the three variables (say z) by any real number 1 k
(say k) i.e. z = k in all the three equations then solve any two D 1 –k –2k 2k
y= 2 = = =
equations for x and y by Cramer's Rule. The value of x and y so D 1 1 –3 3
obtained in terms of k and (z = k) give the infinitely many solutions. 1 –2
There is an unique set of solution for each value of k and hence
k 2k
infinite many sets of solutions for infinite many values of k. Thus, we have : x = , y = ,z = k
3 3
ILLUSTRATION 15 : Clearly, these values satisfy the third equation.
Find values of k so that the following system of equations k 2k
Hence, x = , y = , z = k gives the solution for each
has non-trivial solution 3 3
value of k.
x + ky + 3z = 0, kx + 2y + 2z = 0, 2x + 3y + 4z = 0
Sol. Here D = 0 CHARACTERISTIC ROOTS (OR EIGEN
1 k 3 VALUES) OF A SQUARE MATRIX
k 2 2
Þ = 0 Þ 8 + 9k + 4k – 12 – 4k2 –6 = 0 The characteristic roots of a matrix are the values of l that are
2 3 4 the roots of the characteristic equation
Þ 4k2 – 13k + 10 = 0 |A – lI| = 0
\ k = 2, 5/4
Note :
ILLUSTRATION 16 :
It will be useful to remember that
Solve the following system of homogeneous equations:
(i) Any square matrix A and its transpose AT have the
3x – 4y + 5z = 0, x + y – 2z = 0, 2x + 3y + z = 0
same eigen values.
3 –4 5 (ii) The sum of the eigen values of a matrix is equal to the
Sol. We have, D = 1 1 – 2 = 46 ¹ 0. trace of the matrix.
2 3 1 (iii) The product the eigen values of a matrix A is equal to
the determinant of A.
So, the given system of equations has only the trivial
solution i.e. x = y = z = 0. (iv) If l1, l2, l3, l4,…, ln are the eigen values of A, then the
eigen values of
ILLUSTRATION 17 :
Solve the following system of homogeneous equations : (a) kA are kl1, kl2, kl3, kl4, ..., kln.
x + y – z = 0, x – 2y + z = 0, 3x + 6y – 5z = 0 (b) Am are l1m , l 2m , l3m , l 4m ,..., l m
n.
Sol. We have, 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 –1 (c) A–1 are , , , ,..., .
l1 l 2 l3 l 4 ln
D = 1 –2 1 = 1 × (10 – 6) – 1 × (–5 – 3) – 1 × (6 + 6)
MATRIX POLYNOMIAL
3 6 –5
= 4 + 8 – 12 = 0 Let f(x) = a 0 + a 1x + a2 x2 + a 3 x3 + ..... + a nxn be a
polynomial in x and let A = [aij]m×m ,
 M-14 MATHEMATICS

then f(A) = a0 + a1A + a2 A2 + a3 A3 + ..... + anAn is called Therefore, 1/l is an eigen value of A–1 and X is a
a matrix polynomial. corresponding eigen vector.
Here, to obtain f(A) replace x by A in f(x) and the constant
term is multiplied by the identity matrix of order equal to MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM VALUES OF
that of A. DETERMINANTS WHEN ELEMENTS
ILLUSTRATION 18 : ARE KNOWN
Show that if l1, l2, …, ln are n eigen values of a square
a1 a2 a3
matrix A of order n, then the eigen values of the matrix
If | A | = a 4 a5 a6
A2 be l21, l22, … ln2.
a7 a8 a9
Sol. AX = lX Þ A(AX) = A(lX)
Þ A2X = l(AX) = l(lX) = l2X where ai¢ s Î {a1, a2,....., an}, then
i.e., A2X = l2X | A |max when diagonal elements are {min (a1, a2,....., an)}
Hence, eigen value of A2 is l2. Thus if l1, l2, …, ln and non-diagonal elements are {max (a1, a2,....., an)}.
are eigen values of A, then l1, l2 , … ln2 are eigen
2 2 also, | A |min = – | A |max
values of A2.
ILLUSTRATION 19 : ILLUSTRATION 20 :
The maximum and minimum value of (3 × 3)
If A is non-singular, prove that the eigen values of A–1
determinant where elements belongs to (0, 1, 2, 3) is
are the reciprocals of the eigen value of A. (a) 9, –9 (b) 0
Sol. Let A be an eigen value of A and X be a corresponding (c) 54, –54 (d) None of these
eigen vector. Then, 0 3 3
AX = lX Þ X = A–1 (lX) = l(A–1X) Sol. (c) We have, | A |max = 3 0 3 , i.e., diagonal
1 3 3 0
Þ X = A–1 X [Q A is non-singular Þ l ¹ 0] elements are {min (0, 1, 2, 3)} = 0 and non-diagonal
l
elements are
1 {max (0, 1, 2, 3)} = 3
Þ A–1X = X \ | A |max = 0 – 3 (–9) + 3 (9) = 54 and
l
| A |min = – | A |max = –54
 Determinants M-15

Points to Remember
1. Minor : The determinant that is left by cancelling the row and column intersecting at a particular element of
a determinant is called the minor of that element of the determinant. Minor of an element aij of a determinant
is denoted by mij.
2. Co-factor : The co-factor of an element aij of a determinant is denoted by Aij (or Cij) and is equal to (–1)i+j mij,
where mij is the minor of the element aij.

a11 a12
3. (i) = a11a 22 - a 21a12
a 21 a 22

a11 a12 a13

(ii) a 21 a 22 a 23 = a11A11 + a12A12 + a13 A13 , on expanding along first row
a 31 a 32 a 33

4. (i) Symmetric determinant : A determinant [aij] is called symmetric determinant if aij = aji for all i, j .
(ii) Skew-symmetric determinant : A determinant [aij] is called skew-symmetric determinant if aij = –aji for all i, j.
5. Singular and Non-singular Matrix :
A matrix A is said to be singular matrix if its determinant |A| = 0, other wise non-singular matrix.
6. Properties of Determinant :

(i) The value of determinant remains unchanged, if the rows and the columns are interchanged.
(ii) If any two rows (or columns) of a determinant are inter-changed, the determinant is unaltered in numerical
value, but is changed in sign only.
(iii) If a determinant has two rows (or columns) equal, then its value is zero.

(iv) If each element of any row (or column) of a determinant is multiplied by the same number, then the value
of determinant is multiplied by that number.
(v) If each element of any row (or column) are expressed as a sum of two terms, then the determinant can
a1 b1 c1 x y z
a1 + x b1 + y c1 + z
be expressed as the sum of the two determinants as a 2 b2 c2 = a 2 b2 c2 + a 2 b2 c2
a3 b3 c3 a3 b3 c3 a3 b3 c3

(vi) If any multiple of any row (or column) of a determinant is added or subtracted from corresponding
element of any other row (or column) of the determinant, then value of the determinant is not altered.
(vii) If D = f(x) and f(a) = 0, then (x–a) is a factor of D.
M-16 MATHEMATICS

7. Adjoint of a Matrix :
If every element of a square matrix A be replaced by its co-factor, then the transpose of the matrix so
obtained is called the adjoint of matrix A and it is denoted by adj A.
8. Inverse of a Matrix :

adj A
A -1 = , if | A | ¹ 0
|A|

9. Solution of Non-homogeneous System of Linear Equations :

(i) If D ¹ 0, then the system of equation is consistent having unique solution given by
D1 D D
x1 = , x 2 = 2 ,..., x n = n .
D D D

(ii) If D = 0 and one of D1, D2,..., Dn is non-zero, then the system is inconsistent i.e. the system has no
solution.
(iii) If D = 0 and also D1= D2 = ...=Dn = 0, then
(a) the system is consistent and dependent having infinitely many solutions in case of the system of
two equations with two variables.
(b) the system may or may not be consistent in case of more than two equations in more than two
variables. However, if it is consistent, then it is dependent also having infinitely many solutions.
10. Solution of Homogeneous System of Linear Equations :
(i) If D ¹ 0, then the system of equations has unique solution x = 0, y = 0, z = 0. This solution is called
trivial solution.
(ii) If D = 0, then the system of equations has infinitely many solution. This solution is called non-trivial
or non-zero solution.
 Determinants M-17

Topicwise Multiple Choice Questions (MCQs)

Topic-16.1 : Determinants, Minor and Co-factor 5. If a, b are the roots of the equation x2 – 2x + 4 = 0,
of a Square Matrix, Value of a Determinant, a+b a2 + b2 a 3 + b3
Properties of Determinants
find the value of a 2 + b 2 a 3 + b3 a4 + b4
m b a m
1. If xayb = em, xc yd = en, D1 = , D2 = a 3 + b3 a 4 + b4 a 5 + b5
n d c n
(a) 0 (b) –1 (c) 1 (d) 2
a b
and D 3 = then the values of x and y are b1 + c1 c1 + a1 a1 + b1
c d
6. The determinant b 2 + c 2 c 2 + a 2 a 2 + b 2 is equal to
respectively.
b 3 + c3 c3 + a 3 a 3 + b3
D1 D2
(a) D 3 and D 3
a1 b1 c1 a1 b1 c1
D2 D3 (a) a 2 b 2 c 2 (b) 2 a 2 b2 c2
(b) D and D
1 1 a3 b3 c3 a3 b3 c3

æD ö æD ö
(c) log ç 1 ÷ and log ç 2 ÷ a1 b1 c1
è D3 ø è D3 ø
(c) 3 a 2 b 2 c 2 (d) None of these
(d) eD1 / D3 and e D 2 / D 3 a3 b3 c3
2. If a = cos q + i sin q, b = cos 2q – i sin 2q, c = cos
éa b cù 3 5 6 x 10 5
ê ú
3 q + i sin 3 q and if A = êb c a ú , then find the 7. If D = 7 8 9 , then 5 3 6 equal to:
10 x 5 8 7 9
êë c a b úû
values of q if matrix A is non-invertible (a) D (b) –D (c) D x (d) 0
(a) np; n Î ¢ (b) 2np; n Î ¢ 8. If rows and columns of the determinant are
(c) (2n + 1) p/2; n Î ¢ (d) None of these interchanged, then its value
3. If a2 + b2 + c2 + ab + bc + ca £ 0 " a, b, c Î R, then (a) remains unchanged (b) becomes change
value of the determinant,
(c) is doubled (d) is zero
2 2 2
(a + b + 2) a +b 1 9. If any two rows (or columns) of a determinant are
1 (b + c + 2) 2 2
b +c 2 equals identical (all corresponding elements are same), then
2 2
the value of determinant is
c +a 1 (c + a + 2)2
(a) 1 (b) –1 (c) 0 (d) 2
(a) 65 (b) a + b + c + 31
2 2 2
10. If each of third order determinant of value D is multiplied
(c) 4(a2 + b2 + c2) (d) 0 by 4, then value of the new determinant is:
4. If a, b, c, are real, and
(a) D (b) 21D (c) 64D (d) 128D
2
x+a ab ac 11. If p + q + r = a + b + c = 0, then the determinant
f (x) = ab x+b 2
bc > 0if pa qb rc
2 D = qc ra pb equals
ac bc x +c
rb pc qa
(a) x > a2 + b2 + c2 (b) x > – (a2 + b2 + c2)
(c) x > abc (d) None of these (a) 0 (b) 1
(c) pa + qb + rc (d) None of these
 M-18 MATHEMATICS

cos(a + b) - sin(a + b) cos 2b 1 1 1

12. The value of D = sin a cos a sin b is 4p 4p
19. If a = cos – i sin , then 1 a a 2 is
- cos a sin a cos b 3 3
1 a2 a
independent of
(a) purely real (b) purely imaginary
(a) a (b) b (c) 0 (d) None of these
(c) a, b (d) None of these 1 cos a cos b 0 cos a cos b
13. If A(x1, y1), B(x2, y2) and C(x3, y3), are the vertices of 20. cos a 1 cos g = cos a 0 cos g
an equilateral triangle whose each side is equal to a, cos b cos g 1 cos b cos g 0
x1 y1 4
2 If cos2 a + cos2 b + cos2 g =
then x2 y2 4 is equal to 3 1
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) (d)
x3 y3 4 2 2
21. If x is a complex root of the equation
(a) 3a4 (b) 12a4 (c) 9a4 (d) 16a4 1 x x 1- x 1 1
14. If ‘a’ is a root of x4
= 1 with negative principal x 1 x+ 1 1- x 1 =0,
argument, then the principal argument of D(a) x x 1 1 1 1- x
then x2007 + x–2007
=
1 1 1 (a) 1 (b) – 1 (c) – 2 (d) 2
1 -4ù é -16 -6ù
= an a n+1 a n+ 3 is 22. The matrix X for which éê ú ê 7 2 ú is
X =
1 1 ë 3 -2û ë û
0
n +1
a an é 1 2ù
é -2 4 ù ê -5 5ú
5p 3p p p (a) ê ú (b) ê ú
(a) (b) - (c) (d) - ë -3 1 û ê- 3 1ú
14 4 4 4 êë 10 5 úû

cos 2 x sin 2 x cos 4 x é 6 2ù

é -16 -6ù
(c) ê ú (d) ê11 ú
15. When the determinant sin 2 x cos 2 x cos 2 x is expanded ë 7 2û
ê 2ú
ë2 û
cos 4 x cos 2 x cos 2 x
é6 - x 4 ù
in powers of sin x, then the constant term in that 23. For what value of x, matrix A = ê ú is a singular
expression is ë3 - x 1 û
matrix ?
(a) 1 (b) 0 (c) – 1 (d) 2 (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) – 1 (d) – 2
16. The poins (a, b + c), (b, c + a) and (x, a + b) are
a1 b1 c1
collinear, if x =
(a) a (b) b (c) c (d) – a 24. Suppose D = a 2 b 2 c 2 and
17. If the points (2, – 3), (k, – 1) and (0, 4) are collinear a3 b3 c3
then find the value of 4k.
a1 + pb1 b1 + qc1 c1 + ra1
7 40
(a) 4 (b) (c) 47 (d) D' = a 2 + pb 2 b 2 + qc 2 c 2 + ra 2 . Then
140 7
18. If a, b, g are roots of the equation x2(px + q) = r(x + 1), a 3 + pb3 b 3 + qc 3 c 3 + ra 3
1+ a 1 1 (a) D' = D (b) D' = D (1 – pqr)
(c) D' = D (1 + p + q + r) (d) D' = D (1 + pqr)
then the value of determinant 1 1+ b 1 is
1 1 1+ g sin 2 x cos 2 x 1
2
25. cos x sin 2 x 1 =
1 1 1
(a) abg (b) 1+ + + - 10 12 2
a b g
(c) 0 (d) None of these (a) 0 (b) 12cos2x – 10 sin2x
2 2
(c) 12 sin x – 10 cos x – 2 (d) 10 sin 2x
 Determinants M-19

x sin q cos q
(a) x2 (x + 10) (b) x3 (x + 10)
26. If D1 = - sin q - x 1 and (c) x4 (x + 10) (d) None of these
cos q 1 x 1 bc a(b + c )
33. The value of the determinant 1 ca b( c + a ) is
x sin 2q cos 2q 1 ab c(a + b)
D 2 = - sin 2q -x 1 ,x ¹ 0; (a) 0 (b) a + b + c
cos 2q 1 x (c) bc + ca + ab (d) a3 + b3 + c3 – 3abc
æ pö x2 + x + 2 2x 2 + 3x + 1 3x 2 + 5x + 3
then for all q Î ç 0, ÷ :
è 2ø
34. D = 20x2 + 20x + 59 40x2 + 60x + 20 60x 2 +100x + 70
3
(a) D1 - D 2 = -2 x
2x2 + 2x + 6 4x2 + 6x + 2 6x 2 + 10x + 7
(b) D1 - D 2 = x(cos 2q - cos 4q)
= Ax2 + Bx + C, where A and B are determinants of
(c) D1 ´ D 2 = - 2( x3 + x - 1) order 3 not involving x, then A, B and C is
(a) A = 2, B = 3, C = 1 (b) A = 3, B = 2, C = – 1
(d) D1 + D 2 = -2 x3 (c) A = 4, B = 3, C = – 1 (d) None of these
27. If x, y, z are complex numbers, and 35. Which of the following is INCORRECT?
0 -y -z (a) If A is a skew-symmetric matrix and n is a positive
integer, then An is always symmetric
D= y 0 - x then D is
(b) If A and B are two matrices such that AB = B and
z x 0 BA = A, then A2 + B2 = A + B
(a) purely real (b) purely imaginary (c) If A and B are two matrices such that AB = O,
(c) complex (d) 0 then : |A| = 0 or |B| = 0.
28. If A, B, C are the angles of a triangle, then the value of (d) All three are correct
36. Which of the following is NOT true?
-1 cos C cos B (a) Every skew-symmetric matrix of odd order is non-
D = cos C -1 cos A is singular.
cos B cos A -1 (b) If determinant of a square matrix is non-zero, then
it is non-singular.
(a) cosA cosB cosC (b) sinA sinB sinC
(c) Adjoint of a sysmmetric matrix is symmetric.
(c) 0 (d) None of these (d) Adjoint of a diagonal matrix is diagonal.
é 2 1 ù é1 0 ù a b c
If A = ê T T 2
29. ú ,B = ê1 1ú , C =ABA and X =A C A,
ëê -1 2 ûú ë û 37. If a ¹ a, b ¹ b, g ¹ c and a b c = 0 , then
then det X is equal to: a b g
(a) 243 (b) 729 (c) 27 (d) 891
a b g
30. If a2 + b2 + c2 = – 2 and + + is equal to:
a -a b-b g -c
1+ a2 x (1 + b 2 ) x (1 + c 2 ) x (a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 0 (d) 1
2 2 2
f (x) = (1 + a ) x 1+ b x (1 + c ) x a cot A / 2 l
2
(1 + a ) x (1 + b ) x 2 2
1+ c x 38. If b cot B / 2 m = 0 , where a, b, c, A, B, and
then f (x) is a polynomial of degree c cot C / 2 g
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 0 (d) 1 C are elements of a triangle ABC with usual meaning.
Then, the value of a (m – g) + b (g – l) + c (l – m)
a 2 + 2a 2 a + 1 1 is
31. The determinant 2a + 1 a + 2 1 is (a) 0 (b) abc
3 3 1
(c) ab + bc + ca (d) 2abc
(a) > 0 if a > 1 (b) = 0 if a = 1 39. The maximum and minimum value of (3 × 3)
(c) < 0 if a < 1 (d) all of these determinant whose elements belongs to {0, 1} is
(a) 1, – 1 (b) 2, – 2
1+ x 2 3 4
(c) 4, – 4 (d) None of these
1 2+ x 3 4
32. The value of the determinant 1 2 3+ x 4
is
1 2 3 4+ x
 M-20 MATHEMATICS

40. If C = 2 cos q , then the value of the determinant Statement II : The determinant of a skew
éC 1 0 ù symmetric matrix of odd order is zero.
(a) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
D = êê 1 C 1 úú is
(b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II
ëê 6 1 C úû is a correct explanation for Statement I.
(c) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II
2sin 2 2q is not a correct explanation for Statement I.
(a) (b) 8 cos3q – 4 cosq + 6
sin q (d) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
2sin 2q é cos 2q - sin 2q ù
(c) (d) 8 cos3 q + 4 cosq + 6 48. Inverse of the matrix ê is
sin q ë sin 2q cos 2q úû
é1 2 ù
41. If A ê ú , then the value of the determinant é cos 2q - sin 2q ù é cos 2q sin 2q ù
(a) ê (b) ê
ë3 5û
ë sin 2q cos 2q úû ú
ë sin 2q - cos 2q û
| A2009 – 5A2008 | is
(a) – 6 (b) – 5 (c) – 4 (d) 4 é cos 2q sin 2q ù é cos 2q sin 2q ù
(c) ê ú (d) ê ú
-5 3 + 4i 5 - 7i ë sin 2q cos 2q û ë - sin 2q cos 2q û
42. If z = 3 - 4i 6 8 + 7i , then z is sin x cos x sin x
5 + 7i 8 - 7i dy
9 49. If y = cos x - sinx cos x , then is
dx
(a) Purely real x 1 1
(b) Purely imaginary (a) 0 (b) 1
(c) a + ib, where a ¹ 0, b ¹ 0 (c) –1 (d) None of these
(d) a + ib, where b = 4 50. The value of the determinant
43. Let A(–1, 1) and B(2, 3) be two points and P be a variable
point above the line AB such that the area of DPAB is 10. cos a - sin a 1
If the locus of P is ax + by = 15, then 5a + 2b is : sin a cos a 1 is
12 6 cos( a + b) - sin(a + b) 1
(a) - (b) - (c) 4 (d) 6
5 5
(a) independent of a (b) independent of b
10 10 11
C4 C5 Cm (c) independent of a & b (d) None of these
44. The value of 11
C6 11
C7 12
C m + 2 = 0 , when m is 51. If x, y, z are in A.P., then the value of the determinant
12
C8 12
C9 13
Cm +4 a + 2 a + 3 a + 2x
a + 3 a + 4 a + 2 y is
equal to
(a) 6 (b) 5 (c) 4 (d) 1 a + 4 a + 5 a + 2z
45. For all values of A, B, C and P, Q, R the value of the (a) 1 (b) 0 (c) 2a (d) a
determinant
x 3 7
cos(A - P) cos(A - Q) cos(A - R) 52. If one root of the determinant 2 x 2 = 0, is – 9,
(x + a)3 cos(B - P) cos(B - Q) cos(B - R) is 7 6 x
cos(C - P) cos(C - Q) cos(C - R)
then the other two roots are
(a) 1 (b) 0 (a) 2, 7 (b) 2, – 7
(c) 2 (d) None of these (c) – 2, 7 (d) – 2, – 7
46. Let w be a complex number such that 2w + 1 = z where
a 2b 2c
1 1 1
53. If a ¹ 0, b, c satisfy 3 b c = 0 , then abc =
z= 2 2
-3 . If 1 -w - 1 w = 3k, then k is equal to : 4 a b
1 w2 w7 (a) a + b + c (b) 0
(a) 1 (b) –z (c) z (d) – 1 (c) b 3 (d) ab + bc
47. Statement I : The determinant of a matrix 6i - 3i 1
é 0 p - q p - rù 54. If 4 3i – 1 = x + iy, then (x, y ) is
ê ú
êq - p 0 q - r ú is zero. 20 3 i
êë r - p r - q 0 úû (a) (3, 1) (b) (1, 3) (c) (0, 3) (d) (0, 0)
 Determinants M-21

a1 b1 c1 a1 + 2b1 – 3c1 b1 c1 écos a sin a ù é cos a sin a ù

(a) ê ú (b) ê ú
55. If D = a 2 b 2 c 2 , D1 = a 2 + 2b 2 – 3c 2 b 2 c 2 ë sin a cos a û ë – sin a cos a û
a3 b3 c3 a 3 + 2b 3 – 3c 3 b3 c3 é – cos a sin a ù é – cos a sin a ù
(c) ê ú (d) ê
then ë sin a cos a û ë sin a – cos a úû
(a) D = D1 (b) D = – 6 D1 5 5a a
(c) D = – D1 (d) – 6 D = D1 63. Let A = 0 a 5a . If A2 = 25 , then a is
56. If x, y, z are in A.P., then the value of the determinant 0 0 5

a + 2 a + 3 a + 2x 1 2 1 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
a + 3 a + 4 a + 2y is 5 5 2 3
a + 4 a + 5 a + 2z 64. If 1, w, w2 are the cube roots of unity, then
(a) 1 (b) 0 (c) 2a (d) a 1 wn w 2n
x +a b c
D = wn w2n 1 is equal to
57. If c x+b a =0 2n n
w 1 w
a b x +c
then the value of x is equal to (a) =1 (b) 0 (c) –1 (d) 2
(a) abc (b) 1 é2 b 1ù
(c) – (a + b + c) (d) abc + a + b + c ê 2 ú
65. Let A = ê b b + 1 b ú where b > 0. If the minimum
– a2 ab ac ê1 b 2úû
58. If 2 = l a 2 b 2 c 2 , then the value of ë
ab –b bc
det (A) r
ac bc – c2 value of is q r , then is equal to
b q
l is (a) 1.5 (b) 2.5 (c) 1 (d) 2
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 4 (d) 3
x 2 + 2 2x + 1 1 Topic-16.2 : Multiplication of Two Determinants,
59. Let x < 1, then value of 2x + 1 x + 2 1 is Adjoint of a Matrix, Inverse of a Matrix,
3 3 1 Orthogonal Matrix, Differentiation of a Determinant
(a) Non-negative (b) Non-positive é -4 -3 -3ù
(c) Negative (d) Positive 66. If A = êê 1 0 1 úú , then adj A =
a+b a b ëê 4 4 3 úû
60. a a +c c = (a) A –1 (b) AT
b c b+c (c) A (d) Both (a) and (c)
é1 2 2ù
(a) 4 a 2 b 2 c 2 (b) 4abc
67. If A = ê 2 1 2ú , then find A–1.
ê ú
(c) a 2 b 2 c 2 (d) 4 a 2 bc êë 2 2 1 úû
61. If the determinant
é b-c c-a a -b ù éa b cù é -3 2 2 ù é 3 2 2ù
1ê 1ê
ê b¢ - c¢ c¢ - a¢ a¢ - b¢ ú = m ê a¢ b¢ c¢ ú (a) 2 -3 2 ú (b) 2 3 2ú
ê ú ê ú 5ê ú 5 ê ú
êë 2 2 -3úû êë 2 2 3úû
ëê b² - c² c² - a ² a² - b²ûú ëê a² b² c²úû
then the value of m is é 3 2 2ù é3 2 2 ù
(a) 0 (b) 2 (c) –1 (d) 1 1ê
2 -3 2ú
1ê
(c) (d) 2 3 2ú
écos a – sin aù 5ê ú 5ê ú
62. The inverse of the matrix ê is êë 2 2 3úû êë 2 2 -3úû
ë sin a cos a úû
 M-22 MATHEMATICS

é1 1 2 ù x1 y1 1 a1 b1 1
68. Computer (AB)–1, if A = êê0 2 -3úú and 75. If x2 y2 1 = a2 b2 1 then two triangles with vertices
x3 y3 1 a3 b3 1
ëê 3 -2 4 úû
( x1 , y1 ), ( x 2 , y 2 ), ( x 3 , y3 ) and (a1, b1); (a2, b2); (a3, b3) are
é1 2 0 ù (a) congruent (b) similar
B = 0 3 -1ú
-1 ê (c) triangles of equal area (d) none of these
ê ú
ëê1 0 2 úû l 2 + 3l l - 1 l + 3
é16 12 1 ù é16 12 10 ù 76. Let pl4 + ql3 + rl2 + sl + t = l +1 -2 l l - 4
1 ê 1 ê
(a) 21 11 -7ú (b) 21 11 -2ú l-3 l + 4 3l
19 ê ú 19 ê ú
ëê10 -2 3 úû ëê10 -7 3 úû be an identity in l, where p, q, r, s and t are constants.
Then, then value of t is
é 16 12 1 ù é16 -21 1 ù (a) – 2 (b) – 1 (c) 0 (d) 1
1 ê
-21 -11 7 ú
1 ê
(c) (d) 21 11 7 ú 77. Let A be a matrix of order 3 × 3 and matrix B, C, D
19 ê ú 19 ê ú
ëê 10 -2 3úû êë10 -2 3úû are such that B = adj (A), C = adj (adj A), D = adj
(adj(adj A)), if |adj(adj(adj(adj ABCD)))| is |A|k, then
é1 -2 ù é6 0 ù k is equal to
69. Find a 2 × 2 matrix B such that B ê ú=ê ú. (a) 256 (b) 240 (c) 360 (d) 270
ë1 4 û ë0 6 û
é 4 2ù é 4 2ù éx y - zù
(a) ê -1 1 ú (b) ê1 1 ú 78. Let matrix A = êê1 2 3 úú , where x, y z, Î N.
ë û ë û
êë1 1 2 úû
é 1 2ù é 1 -2 ù
(c) ê -1 4 ú (d) ê -1 4 ú If |adj (adj (adj (adj A)))| = 48 × 516, then the number of
ë û ë û such (x, y, z) are
écos a - sin a 0ù (a) 28 (b) 36 (c) 45 (d) 55
ê sin a cos a 0ú 79. If A is a skew symmetric matrix, then B = (I – A)
70. A =
If ê ú , then find adj A. (I + A)–1 is (where I is an identity matrix of same
êë 0 0 1úû order as of A)
(a) idempotent matrix (b) symmetric matrix
é cos a sin a 0ù é cos a - sin a 0ù (c) orthogonal matrix (d) None of these
(a) ê - sin a cos a 0ú (b) ê - sin a cos a 0ú
ê ú ê ú é2 0 0ù
êë 0 0 1úû êë 0 0 1úû ê ú
80. If A = ê 2 2 0 ú , then adj (adj A) is equal to
é cos a sin a 0ù é - cos a - sin a 0ù êë 2 2 2 úû
ê sin a cos a 0ú ê sin a cos a 0ú
(c) ê ú (d)
ê ú é1 0 0 ù é1 0 0ù
êë 0 0 1úû êë 0 0 1úû ê ú ê ú
(a) 4 ê1 1 0 ú (b) 8 ê1 1 0ú
71. If A is a square matrix of order 3 such that |A| = 5, êë1 1 1úû êë1 1 1úû
then |Adj (4A)| =
(a) 53 × 42 (b) 52 × 43 é1 0 0 ù
2
(c) 5 × 16 3 (d) 53 × 162
72. If the area of a triangle ABC, with vertices A(1, 3), (c) 16 êê1 1 0 úú (d) None of these
B(0, 0) and C(k, 0) is 3 sq. units, then the value of k is êë1 1 1úû
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 5 81. Find the cofactors of elements a12, a22, a32 respectively
73. If area of triangle is 4 sq. units with vertices (–2, 0),
(0, 4) and (0, k), then k is equal to é 1 sin q 1 ù
(a) 0, –8 (b) 8 (c) – 8 (d) 0, 8 ê - sin q 1 sin qú .
of the matrix ê ú
74. Area of the triangle whose vertices are (a, b + c), (b, c + a)
ëê -1 - sin q 1 úû
and (c, a + b), is
(a) 2 sq units (b) 3 sq units (a) 0, 2, – 2 sin q (b) 2, 0, 2 sin q
(c) 0 sq unit (d) None of these (c) 2, 0, – 2 sin q (d) – 2 sin q, 2, 0
 Determinants M-23

82. If cij is the co-factor of the element aij of the determinant 90. A be a square matrix of order 2 with |A| ¹ 0 such that
2 -3 5 |A + |A| adj (A)| = 0, where adj (A) is a adjoint of
matrix A, then the value of |A– |A| adj (A)| is
6 0 4 , then write the value of a32 × c32.
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4
1 5 -7
91. If there are three square matrix A, B, C of same order
(a) 110 (b) 22 (c) – 110 (d) – 22 n
83. If Aij denotes the cofactor of the element aij of the satisfying the equation A2 = A–1 and let B = A2 and
( n - 2)
2 -3 5 C = A2 then det (B – C) =
determinant 6 0 4 then the value of (a) 2n (b) 2 (c) 1 (d) 0
1 5 -7
é 3 -1 3 + 1ù
a11A31 + a12A32 + a13A33 is ê ú
2 2 é 1 0ù
92. Let S = êê
2 2 ú
(a) 0 (b) 5 (c) 10 (d) – 5
æ 3 + 1ö ú , A = ê -1 1 ú and
84. Find the cofactor of the element of third row and ê- ç 3 - 1ú ë û
second column of the following determinant êë è 2 2 ÷ø 2 2 úû
1 x y+z
éA Bù
1 y z+x . P = S(adj A) ST. If ST P10 S = ê ú , then
ëC D û
1 z x+ y
A + B + C + D is equal to
(a) x – y (b) y – x (c) x – z (d) z – x
(a) 8 (b) 12 (c) 55 (d) 20
é 0 1 -1ù
é 3 2ù
85. If A = êê 2 1 3 úú , then [A (adj A) A–1] A =
–1 3
93. (a) If A = ê ú , then (A ) is equal to
ë 0 1 û
êë 3 2 1 úû
1 é1 -26 ù 1 é1 26 ù
é 3 0 0ù é -6 0 0 ù (a) (b)
27 êë0 27 úû 27 êë0 27 úû
(a) 2 ê 0 3 0ú (b) êê 0 -6 0 úú
ê ú
êë 0 0 3úû êë 0 0 -6úû 1 é1 -26 ù 1 é-1 -26 ù
(c) (d)
27 êë0 -27 úû 27 êë 0 -27 úû
é 1 1ù
ê0 – 94. If the value of a third order determinant is 11, then the
2 6ú
ê ú é1 0 0ù value of the determinant formed by its cofactors will be
1 1 1ú
(c) êê (d) êê 0 1 0úú (a) 11 (b) 121 (c) 1331 (d) 33
3 6 2ú
ê ú êë 0 0 1úû
ê1 1 1ú x3 sin x cos x
êë 2 3 6 úû 95. Let f(x) = 6 -1 0
86. If P is non-singular matrix then value of adj(P–1) in p p 2
p3
terms of P is
P d3
(a) (b) P|P| where p is a constant. Then [f(x)] at x = 0 is
|P| dx 3
(c) P (d) None of these
(a) p (b) p + p2
87. If A and B are symmetric non-singular matrices such 3
that AB = BA and A–1B–1 exist then matrix A–1 B–1 is (c) p + p (d) independent of p
(a) symmetric (b) skew-symmetric 96. If fr(x), gr(x), hr(x), r = 1, 2, 3 are polynomials in x
(c) null (d) None of these such that fr(a) = gr(a) = hr(a), r = 1, 2, 3
88. Let A = [aij] be a 3 × 3 invertible matrix. If determinant of f1 (x ) f 2 (x ) f 3 (x)
A is 2, then the value of |(adj AT)T| + |(adj A–1)–1| equals
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 8 (d) 16 and F(x) = g1 ( x ) g 2 ( x ) g 3 ( x) then F'(a) =
89. If A and B are two non-singular matrices which h1 (x ) h 2 (x ) h 3 (x )
commutes, then (A(A + B)–1 B)–1 (AB) =
(a) A + B (b) A–1 + B–1 (a) 0 (b) f1(a) + f2(a) + f3(a)
–1
(c) A + B (d) None of these (c) 3 [f1(a) + f2(a) + f3(a)](d) f1(a) f2(a) f3(a)
 M-24 MATHEMATICS

é3 2ù 103. If x, y, z are not all zero and a, b, c are distinct such that
97. If A = ê ú then A(adj A) is equal to ax + by + cz = 0, bx + cy + az = 0, cx + ay + bz = 0 then
ë1 4 û (a) a + b + c = 0 (b) a2 + b2 + c2 = abc
é 10 0 ù é 0 10 ù (c) a + b + c = abc (d) None of these
(a) ê (b) ê
ú
ë 0 10 û ë 10 0 úû 104. The equations 2x + 3y + 4 = 0; 3x + 4y + 6 = 0 and
4x + 5y + 8 = 0 are
é 10 10 ù é 0 0 ù (a) consistent with unique solution
(c) ê ú (d) ê ú
ë 0 0 û ë 10 10 û (b) inconsistent
98. If A is a square matrix of order n, then adj (adj A) is (c) consistent with infinitely many solutions
equal to (d) None of the above
105. The system ax – 3y + 5z = 4, x – ay + 3z = 2, 9x – 7y +
(a) | A |n-1 A (b) | A | n A
8az = 0 has
(c) | A | n-2 A (d) None of these (a) a unique solution for all a
99. Find the cofactor of the element a32 of the determinant (b) no solution for all a
(c) unique solution if 4a3 – 45a + 58 = 0
2 3 -4 (d) no solution if 4a3 – 45a + 58 = 0
3 6 5 106. The maximum and minimum value of (3 ´ 3)
1 8 9 determinant whose elements belongs to {0, 1} is
(a) –2 (b) –4 (c) –6 (d) –9 (a) 1, –1 (b) 2, –2
(c) 4, –4 (d) None of these
12 22 32 107. Let l and a be real. Let S denote the set of all values of
100. If D = 22 32 42 , the minor of a22 is l for which the system of linear equations.
lx + (sin a) y + (cos a) z = 0
32 42 52 x + (cos a) y + (sin a) z = 0
(a) – 46 (b) 46 (c) –56 (d) 56 –x + (sin a) y – (cos a) z = 0
has a non-trivial solution then S contains
Topic-16.3 : Solution of System of Linear Equations (a) (–1, 1) (b) [ - 2, -1]
Using Determinant Method (Cramer's Rule), Using
Matrix Method (c) [1, 2 ] (d) [- 2, 2]
108. If the system of linear equations x + ky + 3z = 0,
x c -b 3x + ky – 2z = 0, 2x + 4y – 3z = 0 has a non-zero
101. The square of the determinant -c x a is equal to xz
solutions (x, y, z), then is equal to
b -a x y2
(a) 30 (b) – 10 (c) 10 (d) – 30
(a) 0 109. Let S be the set of all real values of k for which the
(b) the given determinant itself system of linear equations x + y + z = 2; 2x + y – z = 3;
3x + 2y + kz = 4 has a unique solution. Then S is
a2 + x2 ab - cx ac + bx (a) an empty set (b) equal to R
2 2 (c) equal to {0} (d) equal to R – {0}
(c) the determinant ab + cx b +x bc - ax 110. Sum of values of p for which, the equations x + y + z
ac - bx bc + ax c2 + x 2 = 1; x + 2y + 4z = p and x + 4y + 10z = p2 have a
solution is
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 5
(d) None of these
111. The set of equations : lx - y + (cos q) z = 0;
102. The equations 2x + 3y + 4 = 0; 3x + 4y + 6 = 0 and
4x + 5y + 8 = 0 are 3 x + y + 2 z = 0; (cos q) x + y + 2 z = 0 ; 0 £ q < 2p , has
(a) consistent with unique solution non-trivial solutions
(b) inconsistent (a) for no value of l and q
(b) for all values of l and q
(c) consistent with infinitely many solutions
(c) for all values of l and only two values of q
(d) None of the above
(d) for only one value of l and all values of q
 Determinants M-25

112. The set of homoegeneous equations :

1
tx + (t + 1) y + (t - 1) z = 0; (t + 1) x + ty + (t + 2) z = 0; (a) 1 (b)
3
(t - 1) x + (t + 2) y + tz = 0 has non-trivial solution for (c) (d) None of these
3
(a) three values of t (b) two values of t 119. The equations (l – 1)x + (3l + 1)y + 2lz = 0, (l – 1)x
(c) one value of t (d) no value of t + (4l – 2)y + (l + 3)z = 0 and 2x + (3l + 1)y + 3(l – 1)z
113. If a, b, c are non-zeros, then the system of equations
= 0 gives non-trivial solution for some values of l, then
: (a + a) x + ay + az = 0; ax + (a + b) y + az = 0; the ratio x : y : z when l has the smallest of these values:
ax + ay + (a + c ) z = 0 has a non-trivial solution if : (a) 3 : 2 : 1 (b) 3 : 3 : 2
(c) 1 : 3 : 1 (d) 1 : 1 : 1
(a) a-1 = -(a-1 + b-1 + c-1) (b) a -1 = a + b + c
120. Let the following system of equations, kx + y + z = 1,
(c) a + a + b + c = 1 (d) None of these x + ky + z = k, x + y + kz = k2, has no solution. Find |k|.
114. The set of linear equations : (a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 3
x + 2wy + 3w2 z = (1+w)(1-w); 121. An ordered pair (a, b) for which the system of linear
equations (1 + a) x + by + z = 2, ax + (1 + b)y +
2 x + 3wy + w2 z = w(w - 1); 3 x + wy + 2w 2 z = w - 1 . z = 3, ax + by + 2z = 2
Where w ¹ 1 is a cube root of unity, has the unique has a unique solution, is :
solution (a) (2, 4) (b) (–3, 1)
(a) (1, 1, 1) (b) (1, –1, 1) (c) (–4, 2) (d) (1, – 3)
(c) (1, –1, –1) (d) (–1, –1, –1) 122. The greatest value of c Î R for which the system
115. If the system of equations – ax + y + z = 0, x – by + z of linear equations x – cy – cz = 0, cx – y + cz = 0,
= 0 and x + y – cz = 0 (a, b, c ¹ –1) has a non-zero cx + cy – z = 0 has a non-trivial solution, is :
1 1 1 1
solution, then + + = (a) –1 (b) (c) 2 (d) 0
1 + a 1+ b 1 + c 2
(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 3 123. If the system of equations 2x + 3y – z = 0, x + ky – 2z
116. If the system of equations ax + y + z = 0, x + by + z = 0 = 0 and 2x – y + z = 0 has a non-trivial solution
and x + y + cz = 0 (a, b, c ¹ 1) has a non-trivial
x y z
1 1 1 (x, y, z), then + + + k is equal to:
solution, then the value of + + is y z x
1– a 1– b 1– c
(a) –1 (b) 0 3 1 1
(a) (b) (c) - (d) – 4
(c) 1 (d) None of these 4 2 4
117. If a, b, c are non-zero real numbers and if the system 124. The value of a2 for which the system of linear
of equations (a – 1)x = y + z, (b – 1)y = z + x, (c – 1)z equations, x + y + z = 2, 2x + 3y + 2z = 5
= x + y, 2x + 3y + (a2 – 1)z = a + 1 is inconsistent, is
has a non-trivial solution, then ab + bc + ca equals: (a) 3 (b) 4 (c) 0 (d) 1
(a) a + b + c (b) abc 125. The number of values of q Î (0, p) for which the
(c) 1 (d) – 1 system of linear equations x + 3y + 7z = 0, – x + 4y
118. Let l and q be real and consider system of equations + 7z = 0 and (sin 3q)x + (cos 2q)y + 2z = 0 has a
lx + y sin a + z cos a = 0, x + y cos a + z sin a = 0, non-trivial solution, is
– x + y sin a – z cos a = 0 has a non-trivial solution. (a) 3 (b) 2 (c) 1 (d) 0
If l = 1, then find |tan 2a|
 M-26 MATHEMATICS

Question Bank Level-1

9. If the area of a triangle ABC, with vertices A(l, 3),
é1 bc a ù B(0, 0) and C(k, 0) is 3 sq. units, then the value of k is
1. A = ê1 ca b ú then cofactors C11, C21, C31 are. (a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 5
ê ú
ëê1 ab c úû 10. If the points (3, – 2), (x, 2), (8, 8) are collinear, then
(a) a(c2 – b2), b(a2 – c2), c(b2 – a2) find the value of x.
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 5
(b) a(c2 – b2), b(c2 – a2), c(b2 – a2)
(c) bc, ab, 2b –2
é1/ 25 0 ù é 5 0ù
(d) None of these 11. If ê ú=ê ú , then then value of x is
ë x 1/ 25û ë -a 5û
2. Find the area of the triangle with vertices P(4, 5),
Q(4, –2) and R(–6, 2). (a) a/125 (b) 2a/125
(a) 21 sq. units (b) 35 sq. units (c) 2a/25 (d) None of these
(c) 30 sq. units (d) 40 sq. units
é 3 -3 4ù
3. Find cofactors of a21 and a31 of the matrix
12. If A = êê 2 -3 4úú , then which of the following is false?
é 1 3 -2ù êë 0 -1 1 úû
A = [aij] = êê 4 -5 6úú
(a) adj(adj A) = A (b) |adj (adj A)| = 1
ëê 3 5 2úû (c) |adj A| = 1 (d) None of these
(a) –16, 8 (b) –16, –8 (c) 16, 8 (d) 16, –8 é a + ib c + id ù
13. If A = ê 2 2 2 2
4. Find the area of the triangle whose vertices are (–2, 6), ú and a + b + c + d = 1, then
ë -c + id a - ib û
(3, – 6) and (1, 5).
(a) 30 sq. units (b) 35 sq. units A–1 is equal to
(c) 40 sq. units (d) 15.5 sq. units é a - ib -c - id ù é a + ib -c + id ù
5. Find the minor of 6 and cofactor of 4 respectively in (a) ê -c + id a - ib úû
(b) ê ú
ë ë -c + id a - ib û
1 2 3
é a - ib c - id ù
the determinant D = 4 5 6 . (c) ê ú (d) None of these
ë -c - id a + ib û
7 8 9

(a) 6, 6 (b) 6, –6 (c) –6, –6 (d) –6, 6 é1 0 0ù

ê ú
14. If A = ê1 5 0ú , then adj A is equal to
log3 512 log4 3 êë1 3 0úû
6. Evaluate the determinant D =
log3 8 log 4 9

14 é 14 -4 -22ù é -14 4 22 ù
(a) 15 (b) 12 (c) (d) 6 ê -4 -22 14 ú ê 4 22 -14úú
2 3 (a) ê ú (b) ê
ëê -22 14 -4 ûú êë 22 -14 4 úû
cos15º sin15º
7.
sin 75º cos 72º
é 0 0 0ù
(a) 0 (b) 5 (c) 3 (d) 7 (c) êê 0 0 0úú (d) None of these
a + ib c + id êë -2 -3 5úû
8.
- c + id a - ib
(a) (a + b)2 (b) (a + b + c + d)2
(c) (a2 + b2 – c2 – d2) (d) a2 + b2 + c2 + d2
 Determinants M-27

éa - b - c 2a 2a ù é1 2 ù
20. Find the adjoint of the matrix A = ê ú .
15. The matrix ê ú
ê 2b b-c-a 2b ú is singular, if ë3 4 û
êë 2c 2c c - a - b úû
é 4 2ù é 4 -2 ù
(a) ê ú (b) ê ú
(a) a = 0 (b) a + b = 0 ë3 1û ë -3 1 û
(c) a – b = 0 (d) a + b + c = 0
é1 2 ù é 1 -2 ù
(c) ê ú (d) ê ú
é0 1 1ù éb + c c - a b - a ù ë 3 4û ë -3 4 û
ê ú 1ê ú
16. If S = ê1 0 1 ú , A = êc - b c + a a - b ú ,
2 21. If a , b, g Î R, then the determinant
êë1 1 0úû êë b - c a - c a + b úû
(ei a + e- i a ) 2 (ei a - e - i a )2 4
then SAS–1 =
ib - ib 2 ib -ib 2
D = (e + e ) (e - e ) 4 is
éa 0 0ù éa 0 0ù ig -i g 2 ig -i g 2
1ê ú (e + e ) (e - e ) 4
(a) ê0 b 0ú (b) 0 b 0ú
ê ú 2ê
êë0 0 c úû êë0 0 c úû (a) independent of a , b and g
(b) dependent on a , b and g
éa 0 0 ù éa 0 0ù (c) independent of a , b only
(c) 2 ê0 b 0 ú (d) 3 êê0 b 0úú (d) independent of a , g only
ê ú
êë0 0 c úû êë0 0 c úû
b2 - ab b - c bc - ac
2
22. The value of the determinant ab - a a - b b 2 - ab is
-1
æ 1 - tan qö æ 1 tan qö é a - bù bc - ac c - a ab - a 2
17. If ç ÷ ç =ê ú , then
è tan q 1 ø è - tan q 1 ÷ø ëb a û
(a) 1 (b) 0
(a) a = sin 2q, b = cos 2q (b) a = 1, b = sin 2q
(c) –1 (d) None of these
(c) a = b = 1 (d) a = cos 2q, b = sin 2q
23. Let a1, a2, a3, ..., a10 be in G.P. with ai > 0 for i =
é 1 -5 7 ù 1, 2, ..., 10 and S be the set of pairs (r, k), r, kÎN
18. If the sum of the matrices A and êê -9 2 6úú is 3I3 (the set of natural numbers) for which
êë -10 5 2úû
log e a1r a k2 log e a 2r a 3k log e a 3r a k4
(l 3 denotes the unit matrix of order 3) and P = log e a r4 a 5k log e a 5r a 6k log e a 6r a 7k = 0

é -1 0 2ù log e a r7 a 8k log e a 8r a 9k log e a 9r a10

k

ê ú
ê 0 0 3ú Then the number of elements in S, is :
êë 5 2 4úû
(a) 4 (b) infinitely many
then det {(Adj A) . P–1} is equal to (c) 2 (d) 10
(a) –54 (b) 1/54 (c) 54 (d) 1 24. If the system of linear equations
2x + 2y + 3z = a
é a 1 2ù é 7 -1 -5ù 3x – y + 5z = b
ê ú ê ú
19. If A = ê 1 2 bú and Adj A = ê -3 9 5 ú then x – 3y + 2z = c
êë c 1 3úû ëê 1 -3 5 ûú where, a, b, c are non-zero real numbers, has more
than one solution, then :
a 2 + b 2 + c2 =
(a) b – c + a = 0 (b) b – c – a = 0
(a) 10 (b) 14 (c) 11 (d) 29
(c) a + b + c = 0 (d) b + c – a = 0
 M-28 MATHEMATICS

a–b–c 2a 2a é64 0 0 ù é88 0 0 ù

25. If 2b b–c–a 2b (a) êê 0 64 0 úú (b) êê 0 88 0 úú
2c 2c c–a–b êë 0 0 64úû êë 0 0 88úû

= (a + b + c) (x + a + b + c)2, x ¹ 0 and a + b + c ¹ 0, é68 0 0 ù é34 0 0 ù

then x is equal to : (c) êê 0 68 0 úú (d) êê 0 34 0 úú
(a) abc (b) – (a + b +c) êë 0 0 68úû êë 0 0 34úû
(c) 2 (a + b +c) (d) – 2 (a + b +c)
26. Let A and B be two invertible matrices of order 3 × 3. If é 1 2 -1ù
det (ABAT) = 8 and det (AB–1) = 8, then det (BA–1 BT) 31. If A = êê -1 1 2 úú , then det (adj (adj A)) is
is equal to :
ëê 2 -1 1 úû
1 1
(a) (b) 1 (c) (d) 16 (a) (14)4 (b) (14)3 (c) (14)2 (d) (14)1
4 16
1+ a 2 + a4 1 + ab + a 2 b 2 1 + ac + a 2c 2
é 1 sin q 1 ù
32. If 1 + ab + a 2 b2 1 + b2 + b4 1 + bc + b 2 c2
27. If A = ê - sinq 1 sin q ú ; then for all
ê ú 1 + ac + a 2 c2 1 + bc + b 2 c 2 1 + c2 + c 4
êë -1 - sinq 1 úû
= (a – b)k (b – c)k (c – a)k, then k is
æ 3p 5p ö (a) –1 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) –2
q Î ç , ÷ , det (A) lies in the interval :
è 4 4 ø 33. Let a1 , a2 and b1, b2 be the roots of ax2 + bx + c
= 0 and px2 + qx + r = 0, respectively. If the system
æ 5ù é5 ö æ 3ù æ3 ù of equations a1y + a2z = 0 and b1y + b2z = 0 has
(a) ç1, ú (b) ê , 4 ÷ (c) ç 0, ú (d) ç , 3ú
è 2û ë2 ø è 2û è2 û a non-trivial solution, then
(a) b2pr = q2ac (b) bpr2 = qac2
28. The set of all values of l for which the system of 2 2
(c) bp r = qa c (d) None of these
linear equations, x – 2y – 2z = lx, x + 2y + z = ly,
34. If a system of three linear equations x + 4ay + a = 0,
–x – y = l2 has a non-trivial solution :
x + 3by + b = 0, and x + 2cy + c = 0 is consistent,
(a) is a singleton then a, b, c are in
(b) contains exactly two elements (a) A.P. (b) G.P.
(c) is an empty set (c) H.P. (d) None of these
(d) contains more than two elements 35. Given a = x/(y – z),b = y/(z – x) and c = z/(x – y),
29. If a, b, g are the roots of px3 + qx2 + r = 0, then where x, y and z are not all zero, Then the value of
ab + bc + ca
ab bg ga (a) 0 (b) 1
the value of the determinant bg ga ab is (c) – 1 (d) None of these
ga ab bg 36. If c < 1 and the system of equations x + y – 1 = 0,
2x – y – c = 0 and – bx + 3by – c = 0 is consistent,
(a) p (b) q (c) 0 (d) r then the possible real values of b are

é x 3 2ù æ 3ö æ 3 ö
(a) b Î ç -3, ÷ (b) b Î ç - , 4 ÷
30. Matrix A = êê 1 y 4úú , if x y z = 60 è 4 ø 2è ø
êë 2 2 z úû
æ 3 ö
(c) b Î ç - , 3 ÷ (d) None of these
and 8x + 4y + 3z = 20, then A (adj A) is equal to è 4 ø
 Determinants M-29

37. The value (s) of m does the system of equations

1 + x1y1 1 + x1y 2 1 + x1 y 3
3x + my = m and 2x – 5y = 20 has a solution satisfying
43. Let D = 1 + x 2 y1 1 + x 2 y 2 1 + x 2 y3 , then value of D is
the conditions x > 0, y > 0
1 + x 3 y1 1 + x 3 y 2 1 + x 3 y 3
(a) m Î (0 ¥)
æ 15 ö (a) x1x 2 x 3 + y1y 2 y 3
(b) m Î ç - ¥, - ÷ È (30, ¥)
è 2ø (b) x1x 2 x 3 y1y 2 y3
æ 15 ö (c) x 2 x 3 y 2 y 3 + x 3 x1y3 y1 + x1x 2 y1y 2
(c) m Î ç - , ¥÷
è 2 ø (d) 0
(d) None of these
1 sin A sin 2 A
a b aa - b 44. If in a triangle ABC, 1 sin B sin 2 B = 0 then the
38. The determinant b c ba - c vanishes if 1 sin C sin 2 C
2 1 0
triangle is
1 (a) equilateral or isosceles
(a) a, b, c are in AP (b) a =
2 (b) equilateral or right-angled
(c) a, b, c are in GP (d) (b) or (c) (c) right angled or isosceles
39. If a > 0, b > 0, c > 0 are respectively the pth, qth, rth (d) None of these
terms of G.P., then the value of the determinant
1+ a 1 1
log a p 1 45. If 1 + b 1 + 2b 1 = 0 where
1 + c 1 + c 1 + 3c
log b q 1 is
log c r 1 a ¹ 0, b ¹ 0, c ¹ 0 then a -1 + b -1 + c -1 is
(a) 0 (b) 1 (a) 4 (b) –3 (c) –2 (d) –1
(c) –1 (d) None of these 46. Let the numbers 2, b, c be in an A.P. and
40. If bc + qr = ca + rp = ab + pq = -1 , then é1 1 1ù
A = ê2 b c ú . If det(A) Î [2, 16], then c lies in the
ap bq cr ê 2 ú
ë4 b c2 û
a b c is equal to
p q r interval :
(a) [2, 3) (b) (2 + 23/4, 4)
(a) bc + ca + ab (b) 0 (c) [4, 6] (d) [3, 2 + 23/4]
(c) 1 (d) 2 47. If the system of linear equations
41. If x, y, z are all distinct and x – 2y + kz = 1, 2x + y + z = 2, 3x – y – kz = 3
has a solution (x, y, z), z ¹ 0, then (x, y) lies on the
x x2 1+ x3
straight line whose equation is :
y y 2 1 + y 3 = 0 , then the value of xyz is
(a) 3x – 4y – 1 = 0 (b) 4x – 3y – 4 = 0
z z2 1 + z3
(c) 4x – 3y – 1 = 0 (d) 3x – 4y – 4 = 0
(a) –2 (b) –1
a -1 0
(c) –3 (d) None of these 48. If f ( x ) = ax a -1 then f (2 x ) - f ( x) is equal to
42. The determinant ax 2 ax a
x -y+z x + y + 2z 3z
(a) ax (b) ax (2a + 3x)
- x - y + z - x + y + 2z 3z simplifies to
(c) ax (2 + 3x) (d) None of these
1 2 3

(a) 12xy (b) 6xy (c) 3xy (d) xy

 M-30 MATHEMATICS

49. The value of x obtained from the equation

a 2b 2c
x+a b g
50. If a ¹ 6, b, c satisfy 3 b c = 0 , then abc =
g x +b a =0 will be
a b x+g
4 a b

(a) 0 and -(a + b + g ) (b) 0 and a + b + g (a) a + b + c (b) 0

(c) b3 (d) ab + bc
(c) 1 and (a - b - g) (d) 0 & a 2 + b 2 + g 2

Chapter Test 1
1. If A is a square matrix of order 3, then Adj.A = (a) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
(b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II
–1 3 2
(a) A (b) A (c) A (d) A is a correct explanation for Statement I.
2. If c < 1 and the system of equations x + y – 1 = 0, (c) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II
2x – y – c = 0 and –bx + 3by – c = 0 is consistent, then is not a correct explanation for Statement I.
the possible real values of b are (d) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.

æ 3ö
(b) b Î æç - , 4 ö÷
3 x b b
(a) b Î ç -3, ÷ x b
è 4ø è 2 ø 5. If D1 = a x b and D 2 = are the given
a x
a a x
æ 3 ö
(c) b Î ç - ,3 ÷ (d) None of these
è 4 ø determinants, then
é1 ù d
ê a 0 0ú
(a) D1 = 3(D 2 )2 (b) D1 = 3D 2
é a 0 0ù dx
ê ú
Statement I : If A = êê 0 b 0úú then A-1 = ê 0
1
3. 0ú d
ê b ú (c) D1 = 3D 22 (d) D1 = 3(D 2 )3/2
êë 0 0 cúû ê 1ú dx
ê0 0 cú
ë û
6. If the system of linear equations
Statement II : The inverse of a diagonal matrix is a x – 4y + 7z = g, 3y – 5z = h, – 2x + 5y – 9z = k
diagonal matrix. is consistent, then :
(a) Statement I is false, Statement II is true. (a) g + 2h + k = 0 (b) g + h + 2k = 0
(b) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II (c) 2g + h + k = 0 (d) g + h + k = 0
is a correct explanation for Statement I.
(c) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement II ée t e-t cos t ùe-t sin t
is not a correct explanation for Statement I. ê -t -t -t
ú -t
7. If A = êet -e cos t - e sin t -e sin t + e cos t ú
(d) Statement I is true, Statement II is false. ê t ú
ëêe 2e-t sin t -2e-t cos t ûú
é1 4 2ù
4. Statement I : The inverse of the matrix êê 2 -2 4 ú
ú
then A is:
êë - 3 7 - 6úû (a) invertible for all tÎR.
does not exist. (b) invertible only if t = p.
(c) not invertible for any tÎR.
é1 4 2ù
ê
Statement II : The matrix ê 2 - 1 4 úú is singular. p
(d) invertible only if t = .
êë- 3 7 - 6 úû 2
 Determinants M-31

8. If the system of equations x + y + z = 5, x + 2y +

3z = 9, x + 3y + az = b has infinitely many solutions, a2 + 1 ab ac
then b – a equals: 15. If a, b, c are real, ab 2
b +1 bc = 1 , iff
(a) 21 (b) 8 (c) 18 (d) 5
ac bc c2 + 1
9. Let dÎR, and

é- 2 4+d (sin q) - 2 ù (a) a + b + c = 0 (b) a + b + c = 1

ê
A = ê 1 (sin q) + 2 d ú, (c) a + b + c = –1 (d) a = b = c = 0
ú
êë 5 (2 sin q) - d (- sin q) + 2 + 2d úû 16. If p, q, r are in A.P., then the value of
x+4 x+9 x+p
q Î [0, 2p]. If the minimum value of det (A) is 8,
then a value of d is: x + 5 x + 10 x + q is
(a) – 5 (b) – 7 x+6 x + 11 x + r

(c) 2 ( )
2 +1 (d) 2 ( 2+2 ) (a) x + 15
(c) x + p + q + r
(b) x + 20
(d) None of these
10. If the system of linear equations x + y + z = 5,
écos a - sin a 0ù
x + 2y + 2z = 6, x + 3y + lz = m, (l, m Î R), has
infinitely many solutions, then the value of l + m is : 17. Let F(a ) = êê sin a cos a 0úú where a Î R . Then
(a) 12 (b) 9 (c) 7 (d) 10 êë 0 0 1úû

é 5 2a 1 ù [F(a )]-1 is equal to

11. If B = ê 0 2 1 ú is the inverse of a 3 × 3 matrix (a) F( -a ) (b) F(a -1)
ê a 3 -1ú
ë û
(c) F(2a ) (d) None of these
A, then the sum of all values of a for which det (A) + 1
= 0, is : 1 + sin 2 x cos2 x sin 2x
(a) 0 (b) –1 (c) 1 (d) 2 ép pù
18. Let f ( x ) = sin x 2
1 + cos x 2
sin 2x , x Î ê , ú .
12. A value of q Î (0, p/3), for which ë6 3û
sin 2 x cos2 x 1 + sin 2x
1 + cos 2 q sin 2 q 4 cos 6q If a and b respectively are the maximum and the
cos 2 q 1 + sin 2 q 4 cos 6q = 0, is : minimum values of f, then
2 2
cos q sin q 1 + 4 cos 6q 2 19 2 19
(a) b + 2 a = (b) b - 2 a =
4 4
p p 7p 7p 2 2 9
(a) (b) (c) (d) (c) a + b = (d) a 2 - b2 = 4 3
9 18 24 36 2
13. For which of the following ordered pairs (m, d), the 19. If x + y + z = 6, x - y + z = 2, 2x + y - z = 1 then x, y, z
system of linear equations x + 2y + 3z = 1, are respectively
3x + 4y + 5z = m, 4x + 4y + 4z = d is inconsistent? (a) 3, 2, 1 (b) 1, 2, 3
(a) (4, 3) (b) (4, 6) (c) (1, 0) (d) (3, 4) (c) 2, 1, 3 (d) None of these
20. The system of linear equations x + y + z = 2, 2x + y – z
é1 1 2ù = 3, 3x + 2y + kz = 4 has a unique solution if
14. If the matrices A = êê1 3 4úú , B = adj A (a) k ¹ 0 (b) –1 < k < 1
êë1 -1 3úû (c) –2 < k < 2 (d) k = 0
Numeric Answer Questions
adj B
and C = 3A, then is equal to : 21. If a1 , a2 , a3 , ............, an , ...... are in G. P., then the
C
log an log an + 1 log an + 2
(a) 8 (b) 16 (c) 72 (d) 2
determinant D = log an + 3 log an + 4 log an + 5
log an + 6 log an + 7 log an + 8
is equal to ________.
 M-32 MATHEMATICS

24. If pl4 + ql3 + rl2 + sl + t =

x2 + x x +1 x - 2
2 x + 3 x - 1 3x
2
3 x - 3 = Ax – 12, then the l 2 + 3l l - 1 l + 3
22. If
x + 2x + 3 2 x - 1 2 x - 1
2
l + 1 2 - l l - 4 , then the value of t is
l - 3 l + 4 3l
value of A is ________.
23. The sum of the real roots of the equation ________.
x -6 -1 log 3 512 log 4 3 log 2 3 log8 3
2 -3x x - 3 = 0, is equal to ________. 25. ´ = ________.
log 3 8 log 4 9 log 3 4 log 3 4
-3 2 x x + 2

Question Bank Level-2

1. Using determinants, find the equation of the line joining 7. If a2 + b2 + c2+ ab + bc + ca £ 0 " a, b, c Î R, then
the points (1, 2) and (3, 6). value of determinant
(a) y = 2x (b) x = 3y
(c) y = x (d) 4x – y = 5 (a + b + 2)2 a 2 + b2 1
2
é1 6 1ù 1 (b + c + 2) b + c2
2
equals
2. Find the minor of a22 of the matrix ê 5 3 0ú . c2 + a 2 1 (c + a + 2)2
ê ú
ëê 2 2 9úû
(a) 5 (b) 6 (c) 7 (d) 8 (a) 65 (b) a2 + b2+ c2+ 31
3. Find the minor of the element of second row and third (c) 4(a2 + b2 + c2) (d) 0

2 -3 5 ax by cz
column in the following determinant 6 0 4 . 8. If x + y + z = 0, then cy az bx is not divisible by
1 5 -7 bz cx ay

(a) 13 (b) 4 (c) 5 (d) 0 (a) xyz

(b) a + b + c
5 3 8 (c) abc
4. If D = 2 0 1 , then write the minor of the element a23. (d) a2 + b2 + c2 – ab – bc – ca
1 2 3 9. Let x, y, z are three integers lying between 1 and 9
such that x51, y41 and z31 are three digit numbers.
(a) 7 (b) – 7 (c) 4 (d) 8 Also, x, y, z are in A.P.
Statement I: The value of the determinant
x2 + x x +1 x - 2
2 5 4 3
5. If 2 x + 3x - 1 3x 3x - 3 = ax – 12, then ‘a’ is equal to
x51 y41 z31 is zero.
x2 + 2 x + 3 2 x - 1 2 x - 1
x y z
(a) 12 (b) 24 (c) – 12 (d) – 24 Statement II: The value of the determinant is zero, if
é2 b 1ù the entries in any two rows (or columns) of the
ê ú determinant are correspondingly proportional.
6. Let A = êb b2 + 1 b ú where b > 0. Then the minimum (a) Both statement I and II are correct.
ê1 b 2ú
ë û (b) Both statement I and II are incorrect.
(c) Statement I is correct but statement II is incorrect.
det( A) (d) Statement II is correct but statement I is incorrect.
value of is
b
(a) 3 (b) – 3 (c) – 2 3 (d) 2 3
 Determinants M-33

é1 0 aù é 1 0 xù 18. Consider a system of equations: x sinq – 2y cos q – az

10. Let A = êê 2 3 b ú , B = êê 2 3 y úú
ú = 0, x + 2y + z = 0, – x + y + z = 0, qÎ R. Then which
êë -3 1 c úû êë -3 1 z úû of the following statement is not correct.
(a) the given system will have infinite solutions for a = 2.
é1 0 a + xù (b) the number of integer values of a is 3 for the system
and C = êê 2 3 b + y úú . to have nontrivial solutions
êë -3 1 c + z úû (c) for a = 1 there exists q for which the system will
Statement I: det A + det B = det C. have infinite solutions
Statement II: A + B = C. (d) for a = 3 there exists q for which the system will
(a) Both statement I and II are correct. have unique solution
(b) Both statement I and II are incorrect. 19. If (x, y, z) = (a, b, g) is the unique solution of the
(c) Statement I is correct but statement II is incorrect. system of simultaneous linear equations 3x – 4y + z +
(d) Statement II is correct but statement I is incorrect. 7 = 0, 2x + 3y – z = 10, x – 2y – 3z = 3 then a =
11. If the system of equations, x + 2y – 3z = 1, (p + 2) z = 3, (a) 3 (b) –3 (c) –1 (d) 1
(2p + 1) y + z = 2 is inconsistent, the value of p is 20. If the system of equations 3x – 2y + z = 0, lx – 14y + 15z
(a) –2 (b) –1/2 (c) 0 (d) 2 = 0 and x + 2y – 3z = 0 has a solution other than x = y =
12. If the system of linear equations 2x + 2y + 3z = a, z = 0, then l is equal to
3x – y + 5z = b, x – 3y + 2z = c where a, b, c are non- (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 5
zero real numbers, has more than one solution, then a b 0
(a) b + c – a = 0 (b) a + b + c = 0 21. If the determinant 0 a b = 0 then
(c) b – c + a = 0 (d) b – c – a = 0 b 0 a
13. The system of linear equations x + y + z = 6, x + 2y (a) a/b is one of the cube roots of unity
+ 3z = 14 and 2x + 5y + lz = m (l, m Î R) has a (b) a is one of the cube roots of unity
unique solution then (c) b is one of the cube roots of unity
(a) l ¹ 8 (b) l ¹ 8, m ¹ 36 (d) a/b is one of the cube roots of – 1
(c) l = 8, m = 36 (d) None of these 22. If every element of a third order determinant of value D is
14. Let a1, a2 and b1, b2 be the roots of ax2+ bx + c = 0 multiplied by 5 then the value of the new determinant is
and px2 + qx + r = 0, respectively. If the system of (a) D (b) 5D (c) 25D (d) 125D
equations a1y + a2z = 0 and b1y + b2z = 0 has a non- x1 y1 1 a1 b1 1
trivial solution, then 23. If x2 y2 1 = a2 b2 1 then two triangles with vertices
(a) b2pr = q2ac (b) bpr2 = qac2 x3 y3 1 a3 b3 1
2
(c) bp r = qa c 2 (d) None of these ( x1 , y1 ), ( x 2 , y 2 ), ( x 3 , y3 ) and (a1, b1); (a2, b2); (a3, b3) are
15. The system of linear equations x + 2y + z = –3,
(a) congruent (b) similar
3x + 3y – 2z = –1, 2x + 7y + 7z = –4 has
(c) triangles of equal area (d) None of these
(a) infinite number of solutions
(b) no solution cos2 x cos [Link] x - sin x
2
(c) unique solution 24. If f(x) = cos x sin x sin x cos x , then for all x
(d) finite number of solutions sin x - cos x 0
16. The equations (l – l)x + (3l + l)y + 2lz = 0, (l – l )x + (a) f(x) = 0 (b) f(x) = 1
(4l – 2)y + (l + 3)z = 0 and 2x + (3l + l)y + 3(l – l) (c) f(x) = 2 (d) None of these
z = 0 give non-trivial solution for some values of l, then
25. Let a1, a2 and b1, b2 be the roots of ax2 + bx + c = 0
the ratio x : y : z when l has the smallest of these values is
(a) 3 : 2 : 1 (b) 3 : 3 : 2 and px2 + qx + r = 0 respectively. If the system of
(c) 1 : 3 : 1 (d) 1 : 1 : 1 [Link] a1y + a2z = 0 and b1y + b2z = 0 has a non-
17. If the system of equations x + ky + 3z = 0; 3x + ky – 2z trivial solution, then
= 0; and 2x + 3y – 4z = 0 has infinite solutions, then b2 ac c2 ab
(a) = (b) =
(a) the value of k is 12 q2 pr r 2 pq
(b) the value of k is 10 a2
bc
(c) the values of x, y, z satisfy the equation z + 4y = 0 (c) 2 = (d) None of these
p qr
(d) the values of x, y, z satisfy the equation 2x + 15y = 0
 M-34 MATHEMATICS

26. In a third order determinant, each element of the first 33. The parameter on which the value of the determinant
column consists of sum of two terms, each element of
the second column consists of sum of three terms and 1 a a2
each element of the third column consists of sum of cos( p - d )x cos px cos( p + d) x does not depend
four terms. Then it can be decomposed into n sin(p - d) x sin px sin(p + d )x
determinants, where n has the value
upon is
(a) 1 (b) 9 (c) 16 (d) 24
(a) a (b) p (c) d (d) x
27. If a, b, c are different, then the value of x satisfying
34. If a, b, c are sides of a triangle and
0 x 2 - a x3 - b
2
x +a 0 x 2 + c =0 a2 b2 c2
x4 + b x - c 0 (a + 1) 2 (b + 1) 2 (c + 1) 2 = 0 , then
(a - 1) 2 (b - 1) 2 (c - 1) 2
(a) a (b) b (c) c (d) 0
28. Let a and b be the roots of the equation x2 + x + 1 (a) DABC cannot be equilateral triangle
= 0. Then for y ¹ 0 in R, (b) DABC is a right angled isosceles triangle
y +1 a b
(c) DABC is an isosceles triangle
(d) None of these
a y+b 1 is equal to:
35. For positive numbers x, y, z the numerical value of the
b 1 y+a
1 log x y log x z
(a) y(y2 – 1) (b) y(y2 – 3)
determinant log y x 3 log y z is
(c) y3 (d) y3 – 1
log z x log z y 5
29. Let l be a real number for which the system of linear
equations: x + y + z = 6, 4x + ly – lz = l –2, (a) 0 (b) log x log y log z
3x + 2y – 4z = –5 has infinitely many solutions. Then (c) 1 (d) 8
l is a root of the quadratic equation :
(a) l2 + 3l – 4 = 0 (b) l2 – 3l – 4 = 0 36. If f ( x ) = ax 6 + bx 5 + cx 4 + dx 3 + ex 2 + fx + g
2
(c) l +l – 6 = 0 (d) l2 – l – 6 = 0
30. The sum of the real roots of the equation x 2 - 2x + 3 7x + 2 x+4
2
= 2x + 7 x -x+2 3x then g =
x -6 -1 3 2x - 1 2
x - 4x + 7
2 -3x x - 3 = 0, is equal to :
-3 2 x x+2 (a) –200 (b) 100 (c) 112 (d) –108
(a) 6 (b) 0 (c) 1 (d) –4 37. If a be a repeated root of the quadratic equation f(x) =
31. The system of linear equations lx + 2y + 2z = 5, 0 and A(x), B(x), C(x) be polynomials of degrees 3, 4
2lx + 3y + 5z = 8, 4x + ly + 6z = 10 has: A( x ) B( x ) C( x )
(a) no solution when l = 8
and 5 respectively, then A(a ) B(a ) C(a )
(b) a unique solution when l = –8
A' (a ) B' (a ) C' (a )
(c) no solution when l = 2
(d) infinitely many solutions when l = 2 (a) is divisible by f(x) for all x
32. The following system of linear equations (b) is not divisible by f(x) for all x
7x + 6y – 2z = 0, 3x + 4y + 2z = 0, x – 2y – 6z = 0, (c) vanishes
has (d) None of these
(a) infinitely many solutions, (x, y, z) satisfying y = 2z. 38. If A is a non-zero column matrix of order m × 1 and B
(b) no solution. is a non-zero row matrix of order 1× n, then rank of AB
(c) infinitely many solutions, (x, y, z) satisfying x = 2z. is equal to
(d) only the trivial solution. (a) n (b) m
(c) 1 (d) None of these
 Determinants M-35

39. If B is a non-singular matrix and A is a square matrix, 0 < y < 1; 1 < z < 2 , then the value of the determinant
then det (B–1 AB) is equal to
[ x] + 1 [ y] [z]
(a) det (A–1) (b) det (B–1) [ x ] [ y ] + 1 [ z ] is
(c) det (A) (d) det (B) [ x] [ y] [ z] + 1
40. If the system of equations lx + 2y – 2z = 1, 4x + 2ly
– z = 2, 6x + 6y + lz = 3 has a unique solution, then (a) [z] (b) [y]
(a) l ¹ 1 (b) l ¹ 2 (c) [x] (d) None of these
(c) l ¹ 3 (d) None of these sin x cos x cos x
46. The number of distinct real roots of cos x sin x cos x
41. Let Sk = a k + b k + g k , then cos x cos x sin x
S0 S1 S2
π π
D = S1 S2 S3 is equal to = 0 in the interval - £x£ is
S2 S3 S4
4 4
(a) 0 (b) 2 (c) 1 (d) 3
(a) S6 (b) S5 – S3
47. If a, b, c are in A.P. then the determinant
(c) S6 – S4 (d) None of these
2 y + 4 5y + 7 8y + a
1 n n n 3 y + 5 6 y + 8 9 y + b is equal to
42. If D r = 2r n2 + n + 1 n2 + n and å D r = 56 then n 4 y + 6 7 y + 9 10 y + c
2r - 1 n 2 2
n + n +1 r =1 (a) 0 (b) y2 + 10
equals (c) 4(y2 + 5) (d) y3
(a) 4 (b) 6 x sin q cos q
(c) 7 (d) 8 48. The determinant - sin q -x 1 is independent of
cos q 1 x
b2 + c 2 a 2 + l a 2 + l
43. If pl 4 + ql 3 + r l 2 + s l + t = b 2 + l c 2 + a 2 b 2 + l (a) x only (b) q only
c 2 + l c 2 + l a 2 + b2 (c) x and q both (d) None of these
49. Consider the system of equations in x, y, z as
is an identity in l where p, q, r, s, t are constants, then 2x sin 3q – y + z = 0, x cos 2q + 4y + 3z = 0,
the value of t is 2x + 7y + 7z = 0. If this system has a non-trivial solution,
(a) 1 (b) 2
then for integer n, values of q are given by
(c) 0 (d) None of these
44. If f(x), g(x) and h(x) are three polynomials of degree 2 æ (–1)n ö æ (–1)n ö
(a) p ç n + ÷ (b) p çè n + ÷
è 3 ø 4 ø
f ( x) g ( x) h( x)
and D(x) = f '( x ) g '( x ) h '( x ) , then D(x) is a æ (–1)n ö np
f "( x ) g "( x ) h "( x ) (c) p ç n + ÷ (d)
è 6 ø 2
polynomial of degree 50. Let P is a non-singular matrix such that 1 + P + P2 + ...
(a) 2 (b) 3 + Pn = O (O denotes the null matrix), then P–1 is
(c) at most 2 (d) at most 3 (a) P n (b) – Pn
45. If [ ] denotes the greatest integer less than or equal to (c) – (1 + P + .... + Pn) (d) None of these
the real number under consideration and –1 < x < 0;

Chapter Test 2
1. If a be a repeated root of the quadratic equation f(x) = 0
and A(x), B(x), C(x) be polynomials of degrees 3, 4 and (a) is divisible by f(x) for all x
(b) is not divisible by f(x) for all x
A( x) B( x ) C ( x) (c) is equal to 0
5 respectively, then A(a) B (a ) C (a) (d) None of these
A '(a) B '(a) C '(a )
 M-36 MATHEMATICS

2. The value of q lying between q = 0 and p and (a) 2 (b) 4

2 (c) 0 (d) None of these
satisfying the equation
1 + sin 2 q cos 2 q 4 sin 4q a -x e x log e a x2
2 2
sin q 1 + cos q 4 sin 4q = 0 are 9. If g(x) = a -3x e3x log e a x 4 , then
sin 2 q 2
cos q 1 + 4 sin 4q a -5x e5 x loge a 1
11p p
(a) 7p (b) 5p (c) (d) (a) g (x) + g (– x) = 0 (b) g (x) – g (– x) = 0
24 24 2 24
(c) g (x) × g (– x) = 0 (d) None of these
1 + ax 1 + bx 1 + cx
3. If 1 + a1x 1 + b1x 1 + c1x sin x × cos y sin x × sin y cos x
1 + a 2 x 1 + b2 x 1 + c 2 x 10. If D = cos x × cos y cos x × sin y - sin x , then D is
- sin x × sin y sin x × cos y 0
= A0 + A1x + A2x2 + A3x3, then A0 is equal to
(a) abc (b) 1 independent of
(c) 0 (d) None of these (a) x (b) y
(c) constant (d) None of these
a 2 +1 ab ac 1

4. If ab 2
b +1 bc 2 2 2
= K + a + b + c , then K is 11. If ar= (cos 2 r p + i sin 2rp) 9 ,then the value of
2
ac bc c +1 a1 a2 a3
(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 3 a4 a5 a6 is
a7 a8 a9
yz zx xy
5. The value of p 2q 3r , where x, y, z are (a) 1 (b) – 1
(c) 0 (d) None of these
1 1 1

respectively pth, (2q)th, and (3r)th terms of an H.P., is a -1 0

(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 3 12. If f (x) = ax a -1 , then f (2x) – f (x) is not
2
ax ax a
x2 -1 x 2 + 2x + 1 2x 2 + 3x + 1
6. Solving : 2x 2 + x - 1 2x 2 + 5x - 3 4x 2 + 4x - 3 = 0 , divisible by
(a) x (b) a (c) 2a + 3x (d) x2
6x 2 - x - 2 6x 2 - 7x + 2 12x 2 - 5x - 2
13. If A, B, and C are the angles of a triangle and
we get
1 1 1
1 2 -2 2 1 + sinA 1 + sin B 1 + sin C = 0,
(a) x = -1, , , (b) x = ±1, ±
2 3 3 3 2 2 2
sin A + sin A sin B + sin B sin C + sin C
(c) x = 0, 1, 2, –3 (d) x = 0, ± 1, ± 2
7. The value of then the triangle must be
(a) Isosceles (b) Equilateral
2 a+b+ g +d ab + gd (c) Right-angled (d) None of these
a+b+ g +d 2(a + b)(g + d ) ab(g + d ) + gd (a + b)
is 6 2i 3+ 6
ab + gd ab(g + d ) + gd (a + b) 2abgd
14. If D = 12 3 + 8i 3 2 + 6i , then D is
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 0
18 2 + 12i 27 + 2i
b2 + c 2 ab ac
8. If ab c2 + a 2 bc = ka2b2c2 then the value (a) an integer (b) a rational number
(c) an irrational number (d) an imaginary number
ca cb a 2 + b2
of k is
 Determinants M-37

20. The system of simultaneous equations kx + 2y – z = 1,

sin q cos f
sin q sin f cos q
(k – 1)y – 2z = 2 and (k + 2)z = 3 have a unique solution
15. Let D = cos q cos f
cos q sin f - sin q , then if k equals
- sin q sin f sin q cos f 0 (a) – 2 (b) – 1 (c) 0 (d) 1

dD ù Numeric Answer Questions

(a) D is independent of q (b) =0
dq úû q=p /2 21. l, m, n are the pth, qth and rth term of a G. P. all positive,
(c) D is a constant (d) None of these log l p 1
16. Which of the following is correct then log m q 1 equals ________.
(a) If A and B are square matrices of order 3 such that log n r 1
| A | = –1, | B | = 3, then the determinant of 3 AB is
equal to 27. x -1 5x 7
(b) If A is an invertible matrix, then det (A–1) is equal
to det (A) 22. If x 2 - 1 x - 1 8 = ax 3 + bx 2 + cx + d , then c is equal
(c) If A and B are matrices of the same order, then 2x 3x 0
(A + B)2 = A2 + 2AB + B2 is possible if : AB = I
to ________.
(d) None of these
23. Find the co-efficient of x in the expansion of the
é2 1ù é- 3 2ù é1 0 ù
17. If ê ú A ê5 = ê0 1 ú , then the matrix A
ë 3 2û ë - 3úû ë û (1 + x) 2 (1 + x )4 (1 + x)6
equals determinant (1 + x )3 (1+ x)6 (1 + x) 9 ________.

é1 1 ù é1 1ù é1 0ù é0 1ù (1 + x) 4 (1 + x )8 (1 + x)12
(a) ê1 0ú (b) ê0 1ú (c) ê1 1 ú (d) ê1 1ú
ë û ë û ë û ë û
24. Let k be positive real number and let
18. If D = diag(d1 , d 2 , d 3 , ......,d n ) where d i ¹ 0 for all i =
é 2k –1 2 k 2 kù é 0 2k –1 kù
1, 2, ....., n, be a diagonal matrix, then D -1 is equal to ê ú ê ú
A= ê2 k 1 –2k ú & B = ê1–2k 0 2 k ú.
(a) diag (d1-1 , d 2-1 , d3-1,....., d n-1 ) ê ú ê ú
(b) D ëê–2 k 2k –1 ûú ëê – k –2 k 0 ûú

(c) I n If det (Adj. A) + det(Adj. B) = 106, then find [k]

(d) O ________.
19. If d is the determinant of a square matrix A of order m,
é0 a ù éa bù
then the determinant of its adjoint is : 25. Let A = ê 50
ú and (A + I) – 50A = ê c d ú , find
ë0 0 û ë û
(a) d m (b) d m – 1 (c) d m – 2 (d) d
a + b + c + d ________.

Past Years JEE Main Questions

1. If A is an 3 × 3 non-singular matrix such that AA' = A'A (b) contains more than teo elements
and B = A–1A', then BB' equals: [2014] (c) is an empty set.
(d) is a singleton
(a) B –1 (b) ( B -1)¢
3. The system of linear equations
(c) I + B (d) I x + ly – z = 0; lx – y – z = 0
2. The set of all values of l for which the system of x + y – lz = 0; has a non-trivial solution for: [2016]
linear equations : 2x1 – 2x2 + x3 = lx1 (a) exactly two values of l.
2x1 – 3x2 + 2x3 = lx2; –x1 + 2x2 = lx3 (b) exactly three values of l.
has a non-trivial solution, [2015] (c) infinitely many values of l.
(a) contains two elements. (d) exactly one value of l.
 M-38 MATHEMATICS

4. Let k be an integer such that triangle with vertices 10. Let a and b be the roots of the equation x2 + x + 1 = 0.
(k, –3k), (5, k) and (–k, 2) has area 28 sq. units. Then
y +1 a b
the orthocentre of this triangle is at the point : [2017]
Then for y ¹ 0 in R, a y+b 1 is equal to: [2019]
æ 1ö æ 1ö
(a) ç 2, ÷ (b) ç 2, - ÷ b 1 y+a
è 2ø è 2ø
(a) y(y2 – 1) (b) y(y2 – 3)
æ 3ö æ 3ö (c) y3 (d) y3 – 1
(c) ç1, ÷ (d) ç1, - ÷
è 4ø è 4ø 11. If the system of linear equations
5. If S is the set of distinct values of ‘b’ for which the 2x + 2ay + az = 0, 2x + 3by + bz = 0, 2x + 4cy + cz = 0,
following system of linear equations x + y + z = 1 where a, b, c Î R are non-zero and distinct; has a
x + ay + z = 1; ax + by + z = 0 non-zero solution, then: [2020]
has no solution, then S is : [2017]
1 1 1
(a) a singleton (a) , , are in A.P.. (b) a, b, c are in G.P.
a b c
(b) an empty set
(c) a + b + c = 0 (d) a, b, c are in A.P.
(c) an infinite set
12. Let a be a root of the equation x2 + x + 1 = 0
(d) a finite set containing two or more elements
é2 -3ù é1 1 1ù
6. If A = ê , then adj (3A2 + 12A) is equal to : 1 ê ú
ë -4 1 úû and the matrix A = 1 a a2 ú ,
3 êê 2 ú
[2017] ë1 a a4 û

é 72 -63ù é 72 -84 ù then the matrix A31 is equal to:

(a) ê (b) ê
ë -84 51 úû ë -63 51 úû [2020]
(a) A (b) I3 (c) A 2 (d) A 3
é 51 63ù é 51 84 ù 13. Let A = [aij] and B = [bij] be two 3 ´ 3 real matrices
(c) ê ú (d) ê ú
ë84 72 û ë 63 72 û such that bij = (3)(i + j – 2) aij, where i, j = 1, 2, 3.
If the determinant of B is 81, then the determinant
x - 4 2x 2x of A is: [2020]
7. If 2x x - 4 2x = (A + Bx)(x - A) 2 , then the (a) 1/3 (b) 3 (c) 1/81 (d) 1/9
2x 2x x -4 14. If the system of linear equations, x + y + z = 6,
x + 2y + 3z = 10, 3x + 2y + lz = m has more than
ordered pair (A, B) is equal to : [2018]
two solutions, then m – l2 is equal to _________.
(a) (– 4, 3) (b) (– 4, 5)
[2020]
(c) (4, 5) (d) (– 4, – 5)
15. The system of linear equations :
8. If the system of linear equations x + ky + 3z = 0,
3x – 2y – kz = 10 ; 2x – 4y – 2z = 6 ; x + 2y – z = 5m
3x + ky – 2z = 0, 2x + 4y – 3z = 0 has a non-zero
is inconsistent if : [2021]
xz 4
solution (x, y, z), then is equal to : [2018] (a) k = 3, m = (b) k ¹ 3, m Î R
y2 5
(a) 10 (b) – 30 (c) 30 (d) – 10 4 4
(c) k ¹ 3, m ¹ (d) k = 3, m ¹
5 5
é1 1ù é1 2 ù é1 3ù é1 n – 1ù é1 78ù
9. ú×ê ú×ê ú ............ ê0 =
1 úû êë0 1 úû
If ê , é 3 -1 -2 ù
ë0 1û ë0 1 û ë0 1û ë
16. Let P – ê 2 0 a ú , where aÎR. Suppose Q = [qij]
ê ú
é1 n ù
then the inverse of ê 0 1 ú is: [2019] ëê 3 -5 0 úû
ë û
is a matrix satisfying PQ = kI3 for some non-zero k Î
é 1 0ù é1 -13ù
(a) ê12 1 ú (b) ê 0 1 ú k k2
ë û ë û R. If q23 = - and | Q |= , then a2 + k2 is equal to
8 2
é1 -12 ù é1 0ù _____. [2021]
(c) ê0 1 úû
(d) ê13 1 ú
ë ë û
 Determinants M-39

é2 aù 3 5
é 1 -2 a ù (a) 0 (b) (c) (d) 2
17. Let A = ê ê ú 2 2
a 2 - 1ú and B = ê -1 2 ú , a Î C. Then
ë û êë 4 -5úû ê 2 0 1ú
23. Let A = êê1 1 0úú , B = [B1, B2, B3], where B1, B2,
the absolute value of the sum of all values of a for
which det(AB) = 0 is : [2022] ëê1 0 1úû
(a) 3 (b) 4 (c) 2 (d) 5
ê1 ú ê 2ú
18. Let A and B be two square matrices of order 2. If ê ú
B3 are column matrices, and AB1 = ê0ú , AB2 = êê3 úú ,
det(A) = 2, det(B) = 3 and det ((det(5(detA)B))A2) =
êë0úû êë0 ûú
2a3b5c for some a, b, c Î N, then a + b + c is equal to:
[2022] ê3 ú
(a) 10 (b) 12 (c) 13 (d) 14 AB3 = êê 2úú . If a = |B| and b is the sum of all the
19. Let the area of the triangle with vertices A(1, a ), B( a , 0) êë1 úû
and C(0, a ) be 4 sq. units. If the point ( a , – a ),
diagonal elements of B, then a3 + b3 is equal to
(– a , a ) and (a2, b) are collinear, then b is equal to
_____. [2024]
[2022]
(a) 64 (b) – 8 (c) – 64 (d) 512 3 3
1 a+
2 2
1 2k 2k - 1
1 1
n 24. The value of a, for which 1 a+ =0,
2
20. Let Dk = n n + n + 2 n2 . If å Dk = 96, 3 3
2 2 k =1 2a + 3 3a + 1 0
n n +n n +n+2

then n is equal to _____ . [2023] lie in the interval [2024]

(a) (–2, 1) (b) (–3, 0)
x +1 x x
9 l æ 3 3ö
21. If x x+l x = (103x + 81), then l, are (c) çè - , ÷ø (d) (0, 3)
8 2 2
3
x x x + l2
é2 a 0 ù
the roots of the equation [2023] 25. Let A = êê1 3 1 úú . If A3 = 4A2 – A – 21I, where I is
(a) 4x2 + 24x – 27 = 0 (b) 4x2 – 24x + 27 = 0 êë0 5 b úû
(c) 4x2 + 24x + 27 = 0 (d) 4x2 – 24x – 27 = 0
22. Let A be a 2 × 2 matrix with real entries such that the identity matrix of order 3 × 3, then 2a + 3b is equal
A¢ = aA + I, where a Î ¡ – {–1, 1}. If det (A2 – A) = to :
4, then the sum of all possible values of a is equal to [2024]
[2023] (a) – 10 (b) – 13 (c) – 9 (d) – 12

Past Years JEE Advanced Questions

MCQ: One Option Correct a = a(q) and b = b(q) are real numbers, and I is the
2 × 2 identity matrix. If a* is the minimum of the set
DIRECTIONS : Each of these questions has 4 choices {a(q) : q Î [0, 2 p)} and b* is the minimum of the set
(a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which only one is correct. {b( q) : q Î [0, 2p)}. Then the value of a* + b* is [2019]
31 17 37 29
é sin 4 q -1 - sin 2 qù -1
(a) - (b) - (c) - (d) - ]
1. Let M = ê ú = aI + bM . Where 16 16 16 16
2 4
ë1 + cos q cos q û
 M-40 MATHEMATICS

MCQ: One or More Than One Option Correct é1 0 0 ù é -1 0 0 ù

ê 0 -1 0 ú ê 0 -1 0 ú
DIRECTIONS : Each of these questions has 4 choices (c) ê ú (d) ê ú
êë 0 0 -1úû êë 0 0 -1úû
(a), (b), (c) and (d) for its answer out of which one or
more than one is correct.
éb1 ù
2. Let M be a 2 × 2 symmetric matrix with integer entries. Then 7. Let S be the set of all column matrices êêb2 úú such that b1,
M is invertible if [2014] êëb3 úû
(a) The first column of M is the transpose of the second
row of M b2, b3¸ Î ¡ and the system of equations (in real variables)
(b) The second row of M is the transpose of the first –x + 2y + 5z = b1, 2x – 4y + 3z = b2, x – 2y + 2z = b3
column of M has at least one solution. Then, which of the following
(c) M is a diagonal matrix with non-zero entries in the system(s) (in real variables) has (have) at least one
main diagonal
(d) The product of entries in the main diagonal of M is éb1 ù
not the square of an integer ê ú
solution for each êb2 ú Î S? [2018]
3. Let M and N be two 3 × 3 matrices such that MN = NM.
êëb3 úû
Further, if M ¹ N 2 and M 2 = N 4, then [2014]
2 2
(a) determinant of (M + MN ) is 0
(a) x + 2y + 3z = b1, 4y + 5z = b2 and x + 2y + 6z = b3
(b) there is 3 × 3 non-zero matrix U such that (M 2 + MN 2)U
(b) x + y + 3z = b1, 5x + 2y + 6z = b2 and –2x – y – 3z = b3
is the zero matrix
(c) –x + 2y – 5z = b1, 2x – 4y + 10z = b2 and x – 2y + 5z = b3
(c) determinant of (M 2 + MN 2) ³ 1
(d) x + 2y + 5z = b1, 2x + 3z = b2 and x + 4y – 5z = b3
(d) for a 3 × 3 matrix U, if (M 2 + MN 2)U equals the zero
matrix then U is the zero matrix é1 0 0ù é1 0 0 ù é0 1 0 ù
4. Which of the following values of a satisfy the equation 8. Let P1 = I = ê0 1 0ú , P2 = ê0 0 1ú , P3 = ê1 0 0ú ,
ê0 0 1 ú ê0 1 1 ú ê0 0 1 ú
2 2 2 ë û ë û ë û
(1 + a) (1 + 2a ) (1 + 3a)
2 2
(2 + a) (2 + 2a ) (2 + 3a ) 2 = –648a ? é0 1 0ù é0 0 1 ù é0 0 1 ù
2 2 2 P4 = ê 0 0 1 ú , P5 = ê1 0 0 ú , P6 = ê0 1 0 ú and
(3 + a ) (3 + 2a) (3 + 3a ) ê1 0 0 ú ê0 1 0 ú ê1 0 0 ú
ë û ë û ë û
[2015]
(a) –4 (b) 9 (c) –9 (d) 4 é 2 1 3ù
6
5. Let a, l, m,Î ¡ . Consider the system of linear equations X = å Pk ê1 0 2ú PkT where PkT denotes the
k =1 ê3 2 1ú
ax + 2y = l , 3x – 2y = m ë û
Which of the following statement(s) is (are) correct? transpose of the matrix Pk. Then which of the
[2016]
following options is/are correct? [2019]
(a) If a = –3, then the system has infinitely many solutions
for all values of l and m .
(a) X is a symmetric matrix
(b) The sum of diagonal entries of X is 18
(b) If a ¹ –3, then the system has a unique solution for
all values of l and m . (c) X – 30I is an invertible matrix
(c) If l + m = 0, then the system has infinitely many é1ù é1ù
solutions for a = –3. (d) If X ê1ú = a ê1ú , then a = 30
ê1ú ê1ú
(d) If l + m ¹ 0, then the system has no solution for ëû ëû
a = –3. é1 1 1 ù é2 x xù
6. Which of the following is(are) not the square of a 3 × 3 9. Let x Î R and let P = ê0 2 2ú , Q = ê0 4 0 ú
matrix with real entries? [2017] ê0 0 3ú êx x 6 úû
ë û ë
é1 0 0ù é1 0 0 ù and R = PQP-1. Then which of the following options
ê0 1 0ú ê0 1 0 ú is/are correct? [2019]
(a) ê ú (b) ê ú
êë0 0 1 úû êë0 0 -1úû
 Determinants M-41

é2 x xù
13. For any 3 × 3 matrix M, let |M| denote the determinant
(a) det R = det ê 0 4 0 ú + 8 , for all x Î R of M. Let I be the 3 × 3 identity matrix. Let E and F be
ê x x 5ú two 3 × 3 matrices such that (I – EF) is invertible. If
ë û
G = (I – EF)–1, then which of the following statements
(b) For x = 1, there exists a unit vector a$i + b $j + g k$ is (are) TRUE? [2021]
éa ù é 0ù (a) |FE| = |I – FE||FGE| (b) (I – FE)(I + FGE) = I
for which R êê b úú = êê 0úú (c) EFG = GEF (d) (I – FE)(I – FGE) = I
ë g û ë 0û 14. For any 3 × 3 matrix M, let |M| denote the determinant
(c) There exists a real number x such that PQ = QP of M. Let

é1 ù é1 ù é1 2 3ù é1 0 0ù é1 3 2 ù
(d) For x = 0, if R = ê a ú = 6 ê a ú , then a + b = 5 E = ê2 3 4 ú, P = ê0 0 1 ú and F = ê8 18 13ú
êb ú êb ú êë 8 13 18 úû êë0 1 0 úû êë 2 4 3 úû
ë û ë û
If Q is a non-singular matrix of order 3 × 3, then which
é0 1 a ù é -1 1 -1ù
ê1 2 3 ú ê ú of the following statements is (are) TRUE ?
10. Let M = ê ú and (adj M) = ê 8 -6 2 ú where
ë3 b 1 û ë -5 3 -1û [2021]
a and b are real numbers. Which of the following options é1 0 0ù
is/are correct ? [2019] (a) F = PEP and P2 = ê0 1 0ú
(a) a + b = 3 êë0 0 1 úû
(b) det (adj M 2) = 81
-1 -1
(c) (adjM)–1 + adjM–1 = –M (b) EQ + PFQ = EQ + PFQ
éa ù é1 ù 3 2
ê ú ê ú (c) ( EF ) > EF
(d) If M ê b ú = ê 2ú , then a – b + g = 3
ë g û ë 3û (d) Sum of the diagonal entries of P–1 EP + F is equal
11. Let M be a 3 × 3 invertible matrix with real entries and to the sum of diagonal entries of E + P–1FP
let I denote the 3 × 3 identity matrix. If M–1 = adj (adj 15. Let |M| denote the determinant of a square matrix M.
M), then which of the following statements is/are é pù
Let g : ê0, ú ® ¡ be the function defined by
ALWAYS TRUE? ë 2û
(a) M = I (b) det M = 1 [2020] æp ö
(c) M2 = I (d) (adj M)2 = I where g ( q) = f ( q) - 1 + f ç - q ÷ -1
è2 ø
12. For any 3 × 3 matrix M, let |M| denote the
é1 2 3 ù 1 sin q 1
1
determinant of M. Let E = ê 2 3 4 ú , f ( q ) = - sin q 1 sin q +
êë 8 13 18úû 2
-1 - sin q 1
é1 0 0 ù é1 3 2 ù
P = ê 0 0 1 ú and F = ê8 18 13ú . If Q is a
êë 0 1 0 úû æ pö æ pö
êë2 4 3 úû sin p cos ç q + ÷ tan ç q - ÷
è 4ø è 4ø
nonsingular matrix of order 3 × 3, then which of the
æ pö p æ 4ö
following statements is (are) TRUE ? [2021] sin ç q - ÷ - cos log e ç ÷ .
è 4ø 2 è pø
é1 0 0ù æ pö æ pö
(a) F = PEP and P2 = ê0 1 0ú cot ç q + ÷ log e ç ÷ tan p
êë0 0 1 úû è 4ø è 4ø

-1
(b) EQ + PFQ = EQ + PFQ
-1 Let p(x) be a quadratic polynomial whose roots are the
maximum and minimum values of the function g(q),
3 2
(c) ( EF ) > EF and p(2) = 2 - 2. Then, which of the following is/are
TRUE ? [2022]
(d) Sum of the diagonal entries of P–1 EP + F is equal
to the sum of diagonal entries of E + P–1FP
 M-42 MATHEMATICS

Match the Following

æ 3+ 2ö æ1+ 3 2 ö
(a) p ç 4 ÷ < 0 (b) p ç 4 ÷ > 0 21. Let p, q, r be nonzero real numbers that are, respectively,
è ø è ø
the 10 th, 100 th and 1000 th terms of a harmonic
æ 5 2 - 1ö æ5- 2ö progression. Consider the system of linear equations
(c) p ç ÷ >0 (d) p ç ÷ <0 x + y + z = 1, 10x + 100y + 1000z = 0, qr x + pr y + pq
è 4 ø è 4 ø
z = 0. [2022]
16. Let M = (aij ), i, j Î {1,2,3}, be the 3 × 3 matrix such that
List-I List-II
aij = 1 if j + 1 is divisible by i, otherwise aij = 0. Then
which of the following statements is(are) true? [2023] q 10 1
(I) If = 10, then the (P) x = 0, y = , z = - as a
(a) M is invertible. r 9 9
system of linear solution
æ a1 ö equations has
ç ÷
(b) There exists a nonzero column matrix ç a 2 ÷ such p 10 1
ça ÷ (II) If ¹ 100, then the (Q) x = , y = - , z = 0
è 3ø r 9 9
system of linear solution
æ a1 ö æ -a1 ö equations has
ç ÷ ç ÷
that M ç 2 ÷ = ç -a 2 ÷ .
a p
ça ÷ ç -a ÷ (III) If q ¹ 1 0, then the (R) infinitely many
è 3ø è 3ø
system of linear solutions
æ 0ö equations has
ç ÷
{ }
(c) The set X Î ¡ 3 : MX = 0 ¹ {0} where 0 = ç 0÷. p
ç 0÷
è ø
(IV) If q = 1 0, then the(S) no solution

(d) The matrix (M – 2I) is invertible, where I is the system of linear

3 × 3 identity matrix. equations has
(T) at least one solution
Integer Value Answer Non-Negative Integer The correct option is:
17. For a real number a, if the system (a) (I) ® (T); (II) ® (R); (III) ® (S); (IV) ® (T)
é 1 a a 2 ù é x ù é 1ù (b) (I) ® (Q); (II) ® (S); (III) ® (S); (IV) ® (R)
ê úê ú ê ú (c) (I) ® (Q); (II) ® (R); (III) ® (P); (IV) ® (R)
ê a 1 a ú ê y ú = ê - 1ú of linear equations, has (d) (I) ® (T); (II) ® (S); (III) ® (P); (IV) ® (T)
ê 2 ú ê z ú ê 1ú
ëa a 1 û ë û ë û 22. Let a, b and g be real numbers. Consider the following
infinitely many solutions, then 1 + a + a2 = [2017] system of linear equations [2023]
18. Let P be a matrix of order 3 × 3 such that all the entries x + 2y + z = 7, x + az = 11, 2x – 3y + bz = g
in P are from the set {–1, 0, 1}. Then, the maximum Match each entry in List-I to the correct entries in
possible value of the determinant of P is ____ . List-II.
[2018] List-I List-II
19. The trace of a square matrix is defined to be the sum 1
of its diagonal entries. If A is a 2 × 2 matrix such that (P) If b = ( 7a - 3) and g = 28, (1) a unique solution
2
the trace of A is 3 and the trace of A3 is –18, then the then the system has
value of the determinant of A is _____ [2020]
1
ì æ0 1 c ö (Q) If b = ( 7a - 3) and g ¹ 28, (2) no solution
2
20. Let S = íï A = çç 1 a d ÷÷ : a , b, c, d , e Î {0,1} and then the system has
ï ç1 b e ÷
î è ø 1
(R) If b ¹ ( 7a - 3) where a = 1 (3) infinitely many
| A | Î {-1,1}} where | A | denotes the determinant of A. 2
Then the number of elements in S is _______. [2024] and g ¹ 28, then the system solutions
has
 Determinants M-43

1 ìæ x ö æ x ö æ a12 ö ü
(S) If b ¹ ( 7a - 3) where a = 1(4) x = 11, y = –2 and ïç ÷ ç ÷ ç ÷ï
2 íç y ÷ : x , y , z Î ¡, M ç y ÷ = ç 0 ÷ ý is
and g = 28, then the system z = 0 as a solution ïç z ÷ ç z ÷ ç -a ÷ ï
has îè ø è ø è 23 ø þ
(5) x = –15, y = 4 and (S) Let M = (aij)3´3 be a (4) 6
z = 0 as a solution matrix with all entries
The correct option is: in T such that Ri = 0 for
(a) (P) ® (3), (Q) ® (2), (R) ® (1), (S) ® (4) all i. Then the absolute
value of the determinant
(b) (P) ® (3), (Q) ® (2), (R) ® (5), (S) ® (4)
of M is
(c) (P) ® (2), (Q) ® (1), (R) ® (4), (S) ® (5)
(5) 0
(d) (P) ® (2), (Q) ® (1), (R) ® (1), (S) ® (3) The correct option is [2024]
23. Let a and b be the distinct roots of the equation x2 + x – 1 (a) (P) ® (4) (Q) ® (2)(R) ® (5) (S) ® (1)
= 0. Consider the set T = {1, a, b} For a 3 ´ 3 matrix (b) (P) ® (2) (Q) ® (4)(R) ® (1) (S) ® (5)
M = (aij)3´3, define Ri = ai1 + ai2 + ai3 and Cj = a1j + (c) (P) ® (2) (Q) ® (4)(R) ® (3) (S) ® (5)
a2j + a3j for i = 1, 2, 3 and j = 1, 2, 3. Match each entry (d) (P) ® (1) (Q) ® (5)(R) ® (3) (S) ® (4)
in List-I to the correct entry in List-II.
Numeric Answer Stem Based Questions
List-I List-II
Let a, b and g be real numbers such that the system of
(P) The number of matrices (1) 1
linear equations, x + 2y + 3z = a, 4x + 5y + 6z = b,
M = (aij)3´3 with all entries
7x + 8y + 9z = g – 1 is consistent. Let |M| represent the
in T such that Ri = Cj = 0 determinant of the matrix
for all i, j is
(Q) The number of symmetric (2) 12 é a 2 gù
M = êê b 1 0úú
matrices M = (aij)3´3 with . Let P be the plane containing all those
êë -1 0 1 úû
all entries in T such that
Cj = 0 for all j, is (a, b, g) for which the above system of linear equations is
(R) Let M = (aij)3´3 be a (3) infinite consistent, and D be the square of the distance of the point
skew symmetric matrix (0, 1, 0) from the plane P. [2021]
such that aij Î T for 24. The value of M is _____.
i > j. Then the number 25. The value of D is _____.
of elements in the set

JEE Advanced Level Questions

MCQ: One Option Correct 2. The value of the determinant

DIRECTIONS : Each of these questions has 4 choices æ 3p ö æ 5p ö æ 7p ö

sin 2 ç x + ÷ sin 2 ç x + ÷ sin 2 ç x + ÷
è 2ø è 2ø è 2ø
(a), (b), (c) and (d) out of which only one is correct.
æ 3p ö æ 5p ö æ 7p ö
1. The parameter, on which the value of the determinant sin ç x + ÷ sin ç x + ÷ sin ç x + ÷
è 2ø è 2ø è 2ø
is
1 a a 2 æ 3p ö æ 5p ö æ 7p ö
sin ç x - ÷ sin ç x - ÷ sin ç x - ÷
è 2ø è 2ø è 2ø
cos( p - d ) x cos px cos( p + d ) x
does not depend
sin( p - d ) x sin px sin( p + d ) x (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 0
upon is
(a) a (b) p (c) d (d) x
 M-44 MATHEMATICS

3. If (x1 – x2)2 + (y1 – y2)2 = a2 11. Given 2x – y + 2z = 2, x – 2y + z = – 4, x + y + lz = 4

(x2 – x3)2 + (y2 – y3)2 = b2 then the value of l such that the given system of
(x3 – x1)2 + (y3 – y1)2 = c2 equation has no solution, is
x1 y1 1
2 (a) 3 (b) 1 (c) 0 (d) – 3
and k x2 y2 1 = (a + b + c)(b + c – a)(c + a – b) × é yù
é1 2 x ù
x3 y3 1 12. If A=ê ú and B = ê x ú be such that
ë3 - 1 2 û ê ú
(a + b – c), then the value of k is êë 1 úû
(a) 1 (b) 2
é6 ù
(c) 4 (d) None of these AB = ê ú , then:
a a +b a+b+g ë8 û
4. Let D = 3a 4a + 3b 5a + 4b + 3g (a) y = 2x (b) y = – 2x (c) y = x (d) y = – x
6a 9a + 6b 11a + 9b + 6g 13. If [p] stands for the greatest integer less than or equal to
If a , b, g represent three cube roots of unity then the p, then in order that the set of equations, 2x – 3y = 4,
value of D is 7x – 2y = 2, [3p]x - [2e] y = [4a] may be consistent is
(a) 0 (b) – 1 (c) 1 (d) w2 that a should lie in :
1 3cos q 1
é1 ù é3 7 ö é 3ö
5. If D = sin q 1 3 cos q , then maximum value of D is (a) ê , 1ú (b) [2, 3] (c) ê 2 , 4 ÷ (d) ê1, 2 ÷
1 sin q 1 ë2 û ë ø ë ø

(a) 1 (b) 9 (c) 16 (d) 10 2

6. The value of the determinant 14. If t is real and l = t - 3t + 4 , then the number of
2
t + 3t + 4
1 a a2
cos (n –1) x cos nx cos (n + 1) x
solutions of the system of equations 3x – y + 4z = 3,
is zero, if x + 2y – 3z = – 2, 6x + 5y +lz = –3 is :
sin (n –1) x sin nx sin (n + 1) x
(a) one (b) two (c) zero (d) infinite
(a) sin x = 0 (b) cos x = 0
15. Let a and b be two real numbers such that a > 1, b > 1.
1 + a2
(c) a = 0 (d) cos x =
2a If A = æ a 0ö , then lim A– n is
7. Let a, b, c be the real numbers. Then following system çè 0 b÷ø n®¥
x2 y2 z2
of equations in x, y and z ; + – =1, (a) unit matrix (b) null matrix
a2 b2 c2
(c) 2 I (d) None of these
x2 y2 z2 x2 y2 z2
– + =1,– + 2
+ = 1 has
a2 b2 c2 a2 b c2 ìæ a11 a12 ö ü
16. Let S = íç ÷ : aij Î{0,1, 2}, a11 = a22 ý
(a) no solution (b) unique solution îè a21 a22 ø þ
(c) infinitely many solutions (d) finitely many solutions
8. If the system of equations x – ky – z = 0, kx – y – z = 0, Then the number of non-singular matrices in the set S
x + y – z = 0 has a non-zero solution, then the possible is :
values of k are (a) 27 (b) 24 (c) 10 (d) 20
(a) –1, 2 (b) 1, 2 (c) 0, 1 (d) –1, 1
9. The number of values of k for which the system of equations a- x e x log e a x2
(k + 1)x + 8y = 4k; kx + (k + 3) y = 3k – 1 has infinitely -3 x
17. If g ( x) = a e3 x log e a x 4 , then
many solutions is
(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) infinite a -5 x e5 x log e a 1
10. If the system of equations x + ay = 0, az + y = 0 and
ax + z = 0 has infinite solutions, then the value of a is (a) g(x) + g(–x) = 0 (b) g(x) – g(–x) = 0
(a) –1 (b) 1 (c) g(x) × g(–x) = 0 (d) None of these
(c) 0 (d) no real values
 Determinants M-45

18. If xi = aibici, i = 1, 2, 3 are three-digit positive integer 23. If P, Q and R represent the angles of an acute angled
such that each xi is a multiple of 19, then for some triangle, no two of them being equal then the value of
1 1 + sin P sin P(1 + sin P)
a1 a2 a3 1 1 + sin Q sin Q(1 + sin Q)
is
integer n, D = b1 b2 b3 is given by 1 1 + sin R sin R(1 + sin R)
c1 c2 c3
(a) 0 (b) positive
(a) 19n + 1 (b) 19n + 2
(c) negative (d) can not be determined
(c) 19n (d) 19n + 3
19. If a, b, c, are the sides of a triangle ABC such that 24. Consider the set A of all determinants of order 3 with
entries 0 or 1 only. Let B be the subset of A consisting
a2 b2 c2 of all determinants with value 1. Let C be the subset of
( a + 1) 2 (b + 1) 2 ( c + 1) 2 = 0 , then A consisting of all determinants with value –1. Then
(a) C is empty
( a - 1) 2 ( b - 1) 2 ( c - 1) 2
(b) B has as many elements as C
(a) D ABC is non-isosceles right-angled triangle (c) A = B È C
(b) D ABC is an equilateral (d) B has twice as many elements as elements as C
(c) D ABC is an acute angled triangle with no two 25. Consider three points
angles being equal
(d) D ABC is an isosceles P = ( - sin(b - a ), - cos b), Q = (cos(b - a ),sin b) and
20. If a, b, c, are the sides of a triangle ABC and A, B, C p
R = (cos(b - a + q),sin(b - q)) , where 0 < a, b, q < .
are angles opposite to a, b, c, and 4
Then,
2
a b sin A c sin A (a) P lies on the line segment RQ
D = b sin A 1 cos A (b) Q lies on the line segment PR
then,
c sin A cos A 1 (c) R lies on the line segment QP
(a) D = area of triangle (d) P, Q, R are non-collinear
(b) D = perimeter of the triangle 26. If a, b, c, are non zero complex numbers satisfying
(c) D = Sa2 b2 + c 2 ab ac
(d) None of these a2 + b2 + c2 = 0 and ab 2
c +a 2
bc
a x x x
ac bc a + b2
2
x b x x
21. If = f ( x ) - xf ¢( x) , then f(x) is = ka2b2c2, then k is equal to
x x g x
x x x d (a) 1 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 2
27. If B is a 3 × 3 matrix such that B 2 = 0, then
(a) ( x - a )( x - b)( x - g )( x - d)
det. [(I + B)50 – 50B] is equal to:
(b) ( x + a )( x + b)( x + g )( x + d) (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 50
(c) 2( x - a )( x - b)( x - g )( x - d) 28. Let for i = 1, 2, 3, pi(x) be a polynomial of degree
2 in x, p¢i(x) and p¢¢i(x) be the first and second order
(d) None of these derivatives of pi(x) respectively. Let,
22. X, Y and Z are positive numbers greater than 10 such
that Y and Z have respectively 1 and 0 at their unit's é p ( x ) p ¢ ( x ) p ¢¢ ( x ) ù
ê 1 1 1
ú
X 4 1 A ( x ) = p 2 ( x ) p 2 ( x ) p 2¢¢ ( x ) ú
ê ¢
place and D is the determinant Y 0 1 . If (D + 1) is ê ú
ê p3 ( x ) p3¢ ( x ) p3¢¢ ( x ) ú
Z 1 0 ë û
divisible by 10 then X has at its unit’s place and B(x) = [A(x)]T A(x). Then determinant of B(x):
(a) 1 (b) 0 (a) is a polynomial of degree 6 in x.
(c) 2 (d) None of these (b) is a polynomial of degree 3 in x.
(c) is a polynomial of degree 2 in x.
(d) does not depend on x.
 M-46 MATHEMATICS

(a) k = – 1 (b) k = 1
r 2r - 1 3r - 2
(c) k = 0 (d) None of these
n 34. If A is matrix of order 3 such that |A| = 5 and B = adj
29. If D r = n -1 a
2
1 1 A, then the value of |A–1 | ( AB)T is equal to
n(n - 1) (n - 1)2 (n - 1)(3n - 4)
2 2 (where |A| denotes determinant of matrix [Link] denotes
n -1 transpose of matrix A, A– 1 denotes inverse of matrix
then the value of å Dr A. adj A denotes adjoint of matrix A)
r =1
(a) depends only on a 1
(a) 5 (b) 1 (c) 25 (d)
(b) depends only on n 25
(c) depends both on a and n 35. If a1, a2, a3, ..., an are in G.P. and ai > 0 for each i, then the
(d) is independent of both a and n
log a n log an + 2 log an + 4
30. If complex numbers z1 and z2 such that
-1 -1 determinant D = log an + 6 log an + 8 log an +10 is equal to:
é z1 - z2 ù é z1 z2 ù
|z1| = |z2| =1, then ê ú ê- z z ú is equal to log an +12 log an +14 log an +16
ë z2 z1 û ë 2 1û
é z1 z2 ù é 1 0ù æ n2 + n ö
(a) ê
ë z1 z1 û
ú (b) ê 0 1ú
ë û (a) 0 (b) log ç å ai ÷
çè i =1 ÷ø
1 é 1 0ù (c) 1 (d) 2
(c) 2 ê 0 1 ú (d) None of these
ë û 36. Area of triangle whose vertices are (a, a 2) (b, b 2)
é3; when $i = $j 1
(c, c2) is , and area of another triangle whose vertices
31. Let A = [aij]3 × 3 be such that aij = ê $i ¹ $j , 2
ëê 0; are (p, p2) , (q, q2) and (r, r2) is 4, then the value of
ì det (adj(adj A)) ü
then í ý equals: (where {×} denotes (1 + ap)2 (1 + bp)2 (1+ cp)2
î 5 þ
fractional part function) (1 + aq)2 (1 + bq)2 (1+ cq)2 is

(a)
2
(b)
1
(c)
2
(d)
1 (1 + ar )2 (1 + br )2 (1 + cr )2
5 5 3 3
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 8 (d) 16
éx 3 2ù
ê ú é1 - 4 ù é -16 -6 ù
32. Matrix A = ê1 y 4 ú , if x y z = 60 and 8x + 4y + 3z 37. The matrix X for which ê úX = ê 7 ; is
ë 3 -2 û ë 2 úû
êë 2 2 z úû
= 20, then A(adj A) is equal to é 1 2ù
é - 2 4ù ê- 5ú
é 64 0 0ù é88 0 0ù (a) ê - 3 1 ú (b) ê 53 1ú
ê ú ë û ê- ú
(a) êê 0 64 0úú (b) ê 0 88 0ú ë 10 5û
êë 0 0 64úû êë 0 0 88úû é6 2ù
é- 16 - 6ù
(c) ê11 2ú (d) ê ú
é 68 0 0 ù é34 0 0 ù êë 2 úû ë 7 2û
ê ú ê ú
(c) ê 0 68 0 ú (d) ê 0 34 0 ú 38. If a, b, c are non-zeros, then the system of equations
êë 0 0 68úû êë 0 0 34 úû (a + a)x + ay + az = 0, ax + (a + b)y + az = 0,
33. Let x > 0, y > 0, z > 0 are respectively the 2nd, 3rd, 5th ax + ay + (a + c)z = 0 has a non-trivial solution if
(a) a –1 = – (a– 1 + b– 1 + c– 1)
xk xk +1 xk + 2
(b) a– 1 = a + b + c
terms of a G.P and D = y k y k + 1 y k + 2 = (r – 1)2 (c) a + a + b + c = 1
z k z k +1 zk + 2 (d) None of these

æ 1ö
çè1– 2 ÷ø (where r is the common ratio), then
r
 Determinants M-47

39. The values of q, l for which the following equations

sin qx – cos qy + (l + 1)z = 0; cos qx + sin qy – lz = 0; MCQ: One or More Than One Option Correct
lx + (l + 1)y + cos qz = 0 have non-trivial solution, is
DIRECTIONS : Each of these questions has 4 choices
(a) q = np, l Î R – {0} (a), (b), (c) and (d) for its answer out of which one or
(b) q = 2np, l is any rational number more than one is correct.
(c) q = (2n + 1) p, l Î R+, n Î I a b aa + b
44. The determinant b c ba + c is equal to
p
(d) q = (2n + 1) , l Î R, n Î I aa + b ba + c 0
2 zero, if
40. The system of equations (a) a, b, c are in A. P.
(b) a, b, c are in G.. P.
kx + (k + 1)y + (k – 1)z = 0
(c) a is a root of the equation ax 2 + bx + c = 0.
(k + 1)x + ky + (k + 2)z = 0 (d) (x – a ) is a factor of ax2 + 2bx + c.
(k – 1)x + (k + 2)y + kz = 0 x2 + 4 x - 3 2x + 4 13
has a non-trivial solution for: 2
45. If D (x) = 2 x + 5 x - 9 4 x + 5 26
(a) Exactly three real values of k. 2
8x - 6 x + 1 16 x + 1 104
(b) Exactly two real values of k. = ax3 + bx2 + cx + d,
(c) Exactly one real value of k. then
(d) Infintie number of values of k. (a) a = 3 (b) b = 0
(c) c = 0 (d) None of these
41. If c < 1 and the system of equations x + y – 1 = 0,
2x – y – c = 0, and bx + 3by – c = 0 is consistent, sin q cos q sin q
then the possible real values of b are 46. If f (q) = cos q sin q cos q , then
cos q sin q sin q
æ 3ö
(b) b Î æç – , 4 ö÷
3
(a) b Î ç – 3, ÷ (a) f (q) = 0 has exactly 2 real solutions in [0, p]
è 4ø è 2 ø (b) f (q) = 0 has exactly 3 real solutions in [0, p]
f (q)
(c) b Î æç – ,3ö÷ is é - 2, 2 ùû
3 (c) range of function
(d) None of these 1 - sin 2q ë
è 4 ø
f (q)
42. The number of distinct real values of K such that the (d) range of function is [ -3, 3]
sin 2q - 1
system of equations x + 2y + z = 1, x + 3y + 4z = K,
x + 5y + 10z = K2 has infinitely many solutions is: 3 3x 3x2 + 2a2
(a) 0 (b) 4 (c) 2 (d) 3 47. If f (x) = 3x 3x2 + 2a2 3x3 + 6a2x , then
3x2 + 2a2 3x3 + 6a2 x 3x4 +12a2x2 + 2a4
é1 0ù
0 é1 0 0ù
(a) f ¢(x) = 0
43. A = ê0 1 ú and I = ê0 1 0ú and
1
ê ú ê ú (b) y = f (x) is a straight line parallel to x-axis
êë0 -2 4 úû êë0 0 1úû
2
(c) ò0 f ( x ) dx = 32a 4
é1
2 ù (d) None of these
A–1 = ê ( A + cA + dI )ú , then the value of c and d are
ë6 û
cos (q + f) - sin (q + f) cos 2 f
(a) (–6, –11) (b) (6, 11) 48. If determinant sin q cos q sin f is
(c) (–6, 11) (d) (6, –11) - cos q sin q sin f
(a) positive (b) independent of q
(c) independent of f (d) None of these
 M-48 MATHEMATICS

49. Which of the following statements is/are true about (a) x = 3, y = 1 (b) x = 1, y = 3
square matrix A of order n? (c) x = 0, y = 3 (d) x = 0, y = 0
(a) (–A)–1 is equal to –A–1 when n is odd only. 56. Let {D1, D2, D3, ....., Dk}; (not necessary Di ¹ Dj for
(b) If An = 0, then I + A + A2 + ... + An–1 = (I – A)–1. i ¹ j) be the set of third order determinant that can be
(c) If A is skew-symmetric matrix of odd order, then made with the distinct non-zero integer a1, a2, a3, .....,
its inverse does not exist. a9, then
(d) (AT)–1 = (A–1)T holds always. k
(1 + x ) a
(1 + 2 x ) b
1 (a) k = 9! (b) å Di =0
i =1
50. If f ( x ) = 1 (1 + x ) a (1 + 2 x ) b a, b being
(1 + 2 x ) b 1 (1 + x ) a
(c) at least one Di = 0 (d) None of these
57. If ai, i = 1, 2, ..., 9 are perfect odd squares, then
positive integers, then
(a) constant term of f (x) is 0 a1 a2 a3
(b) coefficient of x in f (x) is 0 a4 a5 a6 is always a multiple of
(c) constant term in f (x) is a – b
a7 a8 a9
(d) constant term in f (x) is a + b
51. If a > b > c and the system of equations ax + by + cz = 0, (a) 4 (b) 7 (c) 16 (d) 64
bx + cy + az = 0 and cx + ay + bz = 0 has a non trivial
solution then both the roots of equation at2 + bt + c = 0 are cos 2 x sin 2 x cos 4 x
(a) real (b) of opposite sign 2 2
58. Let D(x) = sin x cos 2 x cos x
(c) positive (d) complex
cos 4 x cos 2 x cos 2 x
ex sin x 1
52. If D = cos x log e (1 + x 2 ) 1 = a + bx + cx 2 then = a0 + a1 sin x + a2sin2 x + ....., then
x x2 1 (a) a0 = – 1 (b) a1 = 0
(c) a1 = 18 (d) a1 = 5
(a) a = 0 (b) a = 1 (c) b = –1 (d) b = –2
53. The value of x for which 59. Consider the system of equations:
x sin q – 2y cos q – az = 0, x + 2y + z = 0, – x + y + z
x 2 2 1- x 2 4 = 0, q Î R
3 x 2+ 2 4- x 8 > 33 is (a) the given system will have infinite solutions for a
3 3 x 4 8 16 - x =2
1 1 (b) the number of integer values of a is 3 for the system
(a) 0 < x < 1 (b) - < x < to have non-trivial solutions
2 2
1 (c) for a = 1 there exists q for which the system will
(c) x < - (d) x > 1 have infinite solutions
7
(d) for a = 3 there exists q for which the system will
1
2i –1 sin iq have unique solution
i(i +1) 60. If a, b, c are sides of D ABC such that
n
54. If Di = x y z , then å Di is
c b cos b + cb a cos A + ba + c g
æ n + 1ö nq i=1
n
sin ç ÷ q sin a c cos b + ab b cos A + ca + ag = 0
è 2 ø 2
2n –1
n +1 q b a cos b+ bb c cos A + aa + bg
sin
2
(where a, b, g Î R+), then DABC is
(a) 0 (b) independent of n (a) isosceles (b) equilateral
(c) independent of q (d) independent of x, y and z (c) can't say (d) right angled
6i -3i 1
61. If the elements of a matrix A are real positive and distinct
55. If 4 such that det(A + AT)T = 0, then
3i -1 = x + iy, then which of the following
(a) det A > 0 (b) det A ³ 0
20 3 i
(c) det (A – AT) > 0 (d) det (AAT) > 0
are incorrect?
 Determinants M-49

62. Let f (x) = a + bx + cx2 and w ¹ 1 be a cube root of p p 3p

(a) A = ,q=– (b) A = =q
a b c 4 8 8
unity and D = b c a , then factors of D are p p p 3p
c a b (c) A = ,q= – (d) A = ,q=
5 8 6 8
(a) f (1) (b) f (w)
64. If A, B are two square matrices of same order such
(c) f (w2) (d) None of these that A + B = AB and I is identity matrix of order same
p p p as that of A, B then
63. The value of q lying between – & and 0 £ A £ (a) AB = BA (b) | A – I | = 0
4 2 2
(c) | B – I | ¹ 0 (d) | A – B | = 0
1+ sin2 A cos2 A 2sin4q
65. The digit A, B, C are such that the three digit numbers
2 2
and satisfying the equation sin A 1+ cos A 2sin 4q A88, 6B8, 86C are divisible by 72, then the determinant
sin2 A cos2 A 1+ 2sin 4q A 6 8
= 0 is:
8 B 6 is divisible by
8 8 C

(a) 72 (b) 144 (c) 288 (d) 216

Match the Columns

DIRECTIONS : Each question contains statements given in two columns which have to be matched. Statements
(A, B, C, D) in column I have to be matched with statements (p, q, r, s) in column II.
66. Let A is a non-singular and det (A) = k.
Column-I Column-II
(A) (Adj A)–1 (p) kn – 1 (adj A)
A
(B) Adj (A–1) (q)
k
(C) Adj (k A) (r) k n - 2 A
1
(D) Adj (Adj A) (s) adj ( adj A )
k2
1+ x x x2
x 1+ x x2 = ax 5 + bx 4 + cx 3 + dx 2 + ex + f
67. Let
x2 x 1+ x
Column-I Column-II
(A) The value of f is equal to (p) A is Idempotent
(B) The value of e is equal to (q) 1
(C) The value of a + c is equal to (r) –1
(D) The value of b + d is equal to (s) 3
68. Column-I Column-II
é1 0 –1ù é a11 a12 a13 ù
ê ú 2
(A) If matrix A = ê 3 4 5 ú and its inverse A = êê a21 a22
–1 a23 úú (p) –
5
êë 0 6 7 úû êë a31 a32 a33 úû

then the value of a23 is

 M-50 MATHEMATICS

é cos x sin x ù é1 0ù
(B) If A = ê – sin x cos x ú and A (Adj. A) = k ê 0 1 ú then the value of k is (q) 1
ë û ë û
é 1 logb a ù
(C) If A = ê then |A| is equal to (r) 0
ëlog a b 1 úû
éa b ù
(D) If A = ê n
ú is nth root of 4I2, then the value of a is (s) 4
ë0 a û
69. Column-I Column-II

x (1 + sin x ) 2 cos x
(A) Coefficient of x in f (x) = 1 log (1 + x) 2 (p) 10
x2 1 + x2 0

1 3cos q 1
(B) Value of sin q 1 3cos q is (q) 0
1 sin q 1

x+a x2 + 1 1
2
(C) If a, b, c are in A.P. and f (x) = x + b 2 x - 1 1 , then f ¢(0) is (r) – 12
2
x + c 3x - 2 1

x 2 x
1 x 6
(D) If = a4 x4 + a3x3 + a2x2 + a1x + a0, then a0 is (s) – 2
x x x +1
70. Column-I Column-II
(A) If w is a cube root of unity, then a root of the equation (p) 0

x +1 w w2
w x + w2 1 = 0 is
2
w 1 x+w

(B) If a = i, b = w and c = w2, then the value of determinant (q) –3 3i

a a+b a+b+c
3a 4a + 3b
5a + 4b + 3c is
6a 9a + 6b 11a + 9b + 6c

1 1 1
(C) The value of determinant 1 w 2 w is equal to (r) i
2
1 w w

Sa 2 Sab Sab
(D) Let a, b, c are real and different such that D = Sab Sa 2 Sab (s) 3 3i
Sab Sab Sa 2

if D = 0, then the value of Sa2 + 2Sab is given by

 Determinants M-51

71. Consider the lines given by L1 : x + 3y – 5 = 0; L2 : 3x – ky – 1 = 0; L3 : 5x + 2y – 12 = 0

Match the Statements / Expressions in Column I with the Statements / Expressions in Column II and indicate your
answer by darkening the appropriate bubbles in the 4 × 4 matrix given in the ORS.

Column-I Column-II
(A) L1, L2, L3 are concurrent, if (p) k = –9
6
(B) One of L1, L2, L3 is parallel to at least one of the other two, if (q) k = -
5
5
(C) L1, L2, L3 from a triangle, if (r) k =
6
(D) L1, L2, L3 do not form a triangle, if (s) k = 5
x2 2x 1 + x2
72. Let f(x) denotes the determinant f (x) = x 2 + 1 x + 1 1 .
x –1 x –1

On expansion f(x) is seen to be a 4th degree polynomial given by f (x) = a0 x4 + a1x3 + a2x2 + a3x + a4. Using
differentiation of determinant or otherwise match the entries in Column I with one or more entries of the elements of
Column II.
Column -I Column -II
2
(A) a0 + a1 is divisible by (p) 2
(B) a22 + a4 is divisible by (q) 3
2
(C) a0 + a2 is divisible by (r) 4
(D) a42 + a32 + a12 is divisible by (s) 5
73. Column-I Column-II
x (1 + sin x )3 cos x
(A) Coefficient of x in f (x) = 1 log(1 + x) 2 (p) 10
2 2
x 1+ x 0

1 3cos q 1
(B) Value of sin q 1 3cos q is (q) 0
1 sin q 1

x + a x2 + 1 1
(C) If a, b, c, are in A.P. and f (x) = x + b 2 x 2 –1 1 , then f '(0) is (r) – 12
2
x + c 3x – 2 1
x 2 x
(D) If 1 x 6 = a4x4 + a3x3 + a2x2 + a1x + a0, then a0 is (s) – 2
x x x +1

Passage 1
Passage Based Questions
Consider a system of linear equations in three variables x, y, z
DIRECTIONS : This section contains groups of
multiple choice questions based on a paragraph. Each a1 x + b1 y + c1 z = d1 ; a2 x + b2 y + c2 z = d 2 ;
question has 4 choices (a), (b), (c) and (d) for its answer, a3 x + b3 y + c3 z = d3
out of which only one is correct.
 M-52 MATHEMATICS

The system can be expressed by matrix equation

é3 ù
é a1 b1 c1 ù é x ù é d1 ù 79. The value of [3 2 0] U êê2úú is
ê ú ê y ú = ê d ú or AX = B
ê a2 b2 c2 ú
ê ú ê 2ú êë0 úû
êë a3 b3 c3 úû êë z úû êë d3 úû
If A is a non-singular matrix then the solution of above 5 3
(a) 5 (b) (c) 4 (d)
systmem can be found by X = A–1 B. The solution in this 2 2
case is unique. Passage 3
If A is a singular matrix i.e | A | = 0, then the system will
have no unique solution if (Adj A) B = 0 and the system has – bc b2 + bc c 2 + bc
no solution (i.e it is inconsistent) if (Adj A) B ¹ 0
Let D = a 2 + ac – ac c 2 + ac and the equation
Where Adj A is the adjoint of the matrix A, which is obtained
2 2
by taking transpose of the matrix obtained by replacing each a + ab b + ab – ab
element of matrix A with corresponding copactors
Now consider the following matrices px3 + qx2 + rx + s = 0 has roots a, b, c, where a, b, c Î R+.
80. The value of D is
éa 1 0 ù é a 1 1ù éf ù éa 2 ù éxù (a) r2/p2 (b) r3/p3
ê ú ê ú
A = 1 b d , B = 0 d c ,U = g ,V = ê 0 ú , X = ê y ú
ê ú ê ú (c) – s/p (d) None of these
ê ú ê ú ê ú ê ú
êë1 b c úû êë f g húû êë h úû ê0ú êë z úû 81. The value of D is
ë û
(a) £ 9r2/p2 (b) ³ 27s2/p2
74. If the system AX = U has infinitely many solutions then 3
(c) £ 27s /p 3 (d) None of these
(a) c = d, ab = 1 (b) c = d, h = g 2 2 2
82. If D = 27 and a + b + c = 2, then
(c) ab = 1, h = g (d) a = b, c = d, g = h (a) 3p + 2q = 0 (b) 4p + 3q = 0
75. If AX = U has infinitely many solutions then the (c) 3p + q = 0 (d) None of these
equation BX = V has
(a) unique solution Numeric/Integer Type Questions
(b) infinitely many solution
1+ x 1 1
(c) no solution
(d) either infinitely many solutions or no solution. 83. If x ¹ 0, y ¹ 0, z ¹ 0 and 1 + y 1 + 2 y 1 =0,
76. If AX = U has infinitely many solutions then the equation 1+ z 1+ z 1 + 3z
BX = V is consistent if then –(x–1 + y–1 + z–1 ) is equal to_____.
(a) abc = 0 (b) bcd = 0
x sin x cos x
(c) adf = 0 (d) fgh = 0 f ¢( x)
2
Passage 2 84. If f ( x) = x - tan x - x3 then lim is equal
x ®0 x
2 x sin 2 x 5x
é 1 0 0ù to _____.
Let A = êê2 1 0úú , and U1, U2 and U3 are columns of a 3 ×
éa b cù
ëê3 2 1 ûú
85. If matrix A = êê b c a úú where a, b, c are real positive
3 matrix U. If column matrices U1, U2 and U3 satisfying
êë c a b úû
é1ù é 2ù é 2ù numbers, abc = 1 and ATA = I, then find the value of
AU1 = 0 , AU 2 = 3 , AU 3 = ê 3ú evaluate as directed in
ê ú ê ú
a3 + b3 + c3_____.
ê ú ê ú ê ú
ëê0ûú êë 0ûú ëê1 ûú p b c
the following questions. 86. If a ¹ p, b ¹ q, c ¹ r and a q c = 0. Then find
77. The value |U| is a b r
3 p q r
(a) 3 (b) –3 (c) (d) 2 the value of + + _____.
2 p -a q-b r -c
78. The sum of the elements of the matrix U–1 is
(a) –1 (b) 0 (c) 1 (d) 3
 Determinants M-53

87. If a, b, c are pth, qth and rth, terms of a G.P., then

evaluate é 0 2k –1 k ù
ê ú
log a p 1 B = ê1– 2k 0 2 kú.
ê ú
log b q 1 _____.
ëê – k –2 k 0 ûú
log c r 1
If det (Adj. A) + det(Adj. B) = 106, then find [k]_____.
é1 0 3ù
ê ú 1 4 1/ 2 4 1/ 4 4
88. If A = ê 2 1 1 ú , then find | adj (adj A) | _____. 95. The determinant + + + ..... ¥ is
4 1 3 1/ 3 3 1/ 9 3
êë 0 0 2úû
equal to _____.
89. The total number of distinct x Î ¡ for which
x x2 1 + x3 (b + g – a – d)4 (b + g – a – d)2 1
4 2
2x 4x 2 1 + 8x3 96. If ( g + a – b – d) (g + a – b – d) 1 = –k(a – b) (a – g)
= 10 is _____.
3x 9x 2 1 + 27x 3 (a +b – g – d)4 (a +b – g – d) 2 1
90. Let X be the solution set of the equation Ax = I; where
(a – d) (b – g) (b – d) (g – d), then the value of (k)1/2
é2 –1 ù
A= ê and I is the corresponding unit matrix is_______.
ë3 – 2 úû
and x Î ¥ , then find the minimum value of a 1 1
ì np ü 97. If the value of the determinant 1 b 1 is positive
S(cos x q + sin x q), qΡ – í ; n ΢ ý _____.
î2 þ 1 1 c
91. Consider the system of linear equations in x, y, z: (sin
and abc > – k; then find the maximum value of k; where
3q)x – y + z = 0, (cos2q) x + 4y + 3z = 0, 2x + 7y + 7z
a, b, c > 0 _____.
= 0. If the value of q for which this system has non-
98. If three distinct points P(3u2, 2u3); Q(3v2, 2v3), and
trivial solutions are given by np, np + (– 1) n p/k, then
find the value of k_____. R(3w2, 2w3) are collinear, then uv + vw + wu is equal
92. Let (x, y, z) be points with integer coordinates satisfying to _____.
the system of homogeneous equations: 3x – y – z = 0, – 1 + a1 + b1 a1 + b2 a1 + b3
3x + z = 0, – 3x + 2y + z = 0. Then find the number of
99. If a2 + b1 1+ a2 + b2 a2 + b3
such points for which x2 + y2 + z2 £ 100 _____.
a3 + b1 a3 + b2 1 + a3 + b3
93. Find the co-efficient of x in the expansion of the
3
(1 + x) 2 (1 + x )4 (1 + x)6
=k+ å (ai + b i ) + å å (ai – a j )(b j – bi ) , then find
determinant (1 + x )3 (1+ x)6 (1 + x) 9 _____. i =1 1£ i < j £ 3
4 8 12
(1 + x) (1 + x ) (1 + x) the value of k _____.
100. If (1 + ax + bx2)4 = a0 + a1x + a2x2 + ... + a8x8, where
94. Let k be positive real number and let a, b, a0, a1, ..., a8 Î R such that a0 + a1 + a2 ¹ 0 and

é 2k –1 2 k 2 kù a0 a1 a2
ê ú a1 a2 a0 = 0, then the value of 5 a is _____.
A= ê 2 k 1 – 2k ú &
b
ê ú a2 a0 a1
êë – 2 k 2k –1 úû
M-54 MATHEMATICS

ANSW E R KE YS
T opicwise Multiple Choice Questio ns MCQs
1 (d) 14 (b) 27 (b ) 40 (b) 53 (c) 66 (d) 79 (c) 92 (b ) 10 5 (d ) 11 8 (a )
2 (b) 15 (c) 28 (c) 41 (a) 54 (d) 67 (a) 80 (c) 93 (a) 10 6 (b ) 11 9 (d )
3 (a) 16 (c) 29 (b ) 42 (a) 55 (a) 68 (a) 81 (a) 94 (b ) 10 7 (d ) 12 0 (c )
4 (b) 17 (d) 30 (a) 43 (a) 56 (b) 69 (a) 82 (a) 95 (d ) 10 8 (c) 12 1 (a )
5 (a) 18 (c) 31 (d ) 44 (b) 57 (c) 70 (a) 83 (a) 96 (a) 10 9 (d ) 12 2 (b )
6 (b) 19 (b) 32 (b ) 45 (b) 58 (c) 71 (c) 84 (b) 97 (a) 11 0 (c) 12 3 (b )
7 (b) 20 (a) 33 (a) 46 (b) 59 (c) 72 (a) 85 (a) 98 (c) 11 1 (a) 12 4 (a )
8 (a) 21 (c) 34 (a) 47 (b) 60 (b) 73 (d) 86 (a) 99 (a) 11 2 (c) 12 5 (b )
9 (c) 22 (d) 35 (a) 48 (d) 61 (a) 74 (c) 87 (a) 100 (c) 11 3 (a)
10 (c) 23 (b) 36 (a) 49 (b) 62 (b) 75 (c) 88 (c) 101 (c) 11 4 (d )
11 (a) 24 (d) 37 (c) 50 (a) 63 (a) 76 (c) 89 (a) 102 (c) 11 5 (b )
12 (a) 25 (a) 38 (a) 51 (b) 64 (b) 77 (b) 90 (d) 103 (a) 11 6 (c)
13 (b) 26 (d) 39 (b ) 52 (a) 65 (a) 78 (b) 91 (d) 104 (a) 11 7 (b )
Questio n B ank L evel-1
1 (a) 6 (a) 11 (b ) 16 (a) 21 (a) 26 (c) 31 (a) 36 (c) 41 (b ) 46 (c )
2 (b) 7 (a) 12 (d ) 17 (d) 22 (b) 27 (d) 32 (c) 37 (b ) 42 (a) 47 (b )
3 (a) 8 (d) 13 (d ) 18 (c) 23 (b) 28 (a) 33 (a) 38 (d ) 43 (d ) 48 (b )
4 (d) 9 (a) 14 (c) 19 (a) 24 (b) 29 (c) 34 (c) 39 (a) 44 (a) 49 (a )
5 (d) 10 (d) 15 (d ) 20 (b) 25 (d) 30 (c) 35 (c) 40 (b ) 45 (b ) 50 (c )
Chapter T est-1
1 (d) 4 (b) 7 (a) 10 (d) 13 (a) 16 (d ) 19 (b) 22 (24) 25 (10)
2 (c) 5 (b) 8 (b ) 11 (c) 14 (a) 17 (a) 20 (a) 23 (0)
3 (c) 6 (c) 9 (a) 12 (a) 15 (d) 18 (b) 21 (0) 24 (18)
Questio n B ank L evel-2
1 (a) 6 (d) 11 (a) 16 (d) 21 (d) 26 (d) 31 (c) 36 (d ) 41 (d ) 46 (c )
2 (c) 7 (a) 12 (d ) 17 (d) 22 (d) 27 (d) 32 (c) 37 (a) 42 (c) 47 (a )
3 (a) 8 (d) 13 (a) 18 (b) 23 (c) 28 (c) 33 (b) 38 (c) 43 (d ) 48 (b )
4 (a) 9 (a) 14 (a) 19 (d) 24 (b) 29 (d) 34 (c) 39 (c) 44 (c) 49 (c )
5 (b) 10 (c) 15 (b ) 20 (d) 25 (a) 30 (b) 35 (d) 40 (b ) 45 (a) 50 (a )
Chapter T est-2
1 (a) 4 (b) 7 (d ) 10 (b) 13 (a) 16 (d) 19 (b) 22 (17) 25 (2)
2 (a) 5 (a) 8 (b ) 11 (c) 14 (a) 17 (a) 20 (b) 23 (0)
3 (c) 6 (a) 9 (a) 12 (d) 15 (b) 18 (a) 21 (0) 24 (4)
Past Years JE E M ain Questio ns
1 (d) 4 (a) 7 (b ) 10 (c) 13 (d) 16 (17) 19 (c) 22 (c) 25 (b )
2 (a) 5 (a) 8 (a) 11 (a) 14 (13) 17 (b) 20 (6) 23 (28)
3 (b) 6 (c) 9 (b ) 12 (d) 15 (d) 18 (b) 21 (b) 24 (b )
Pa st Years JE E Adva nced Questio ns
1 (d) 4 (b, c) 7 (a, d ) 1 0 (a, c, d) 13 (a, b , c ) 16 (b , c) 19 (5) 22 (a) 25 (1.50)
2 (c, d) 5 (b , c, d ) 8 (a,b, d ) 1 1 (b,c,d) 14 (a, b , d ) 17 (1) 20 (16) 23 (c)
3 (a, b) 6 (b, d) 9 (a, d ) 1 2 (a, b , d ) 15 (a, c) 18 (4) 21 (b) 24 (1.00)
J EE Advanced L evel Questio ns
1 (b ) 15 (b) 29 (d ) 43 (c) 57 (a, c, d ) 71 (A ) ® (s ); (B) ® (p , q); (C) ® (r); (D) ® (p, q , s )
2 (d) 16 (d) 30 (c) 44 (b, d) 58 (a, b , c ) 72 (A ) ® (p, s ); (B) ® (p , r); (C) ® (p , q ); (D) ® (q)
3 (c) 17 (a) 31 (b ) 45 (b, c) 59 (b, c, d ) 73 (A ) ® (s ); (B) ® (p); (C) ® (s ); (D) ® (s )
4 (b) 18 (c) 32 (c) 46 (a, c) 60 (b, d) 74 (b) 80 (a) 86 (2) 92 (7)
5 (d) 19 (d) 33 (a) 47 (a, b) 61 (a, c, d ) 75 (d) 81 (b) 87 (0) 93 (0)
6 (a) 20 (d) 34 (b ) 48 (a, b) 62 (a, b , c ) 76 (c) 82 (c) 88 (4) 94 (4)
7 (d) 21 (a) 35 (a) 49 (b, c) 63 (a, b, c, d) 77 (a) 83 (3) 89 (2) 95 (0)
8 (d ) 22 (c) 36 (d ) 50 (a, b) 64 (a, c) 78 (b) 84 (4) 90 (2) 96 (8)
9 (b ) 23 (d) 37 (c) 51 (a, c, d) 65 (a, b , c ) 79 (a) 85 (4) 91 (6) 97 (8)
10 (a) 24 (b) 38 (a) 52 (a, c) 66 (A ) ® (q); (B) ® (s ); (C) ® (p); (D) ® (r) 98 (0)
11 (b ) 25 (d) 39 (d ) 53 (c, d) 67 (A ) ® (q); (B) ® (s ); (C) ® (r); (D) ® (q ) 99 (1)
12 (a) 26 (c) 40 (b ) 54 (a, b , c, d ) 68 (A ) ® (p); (B) ® (q ); (C) ® (r); (D) ® (s ) 10 0 (8)
13 (c) 27 (a) 41 (c) 55 (a, b , c) 69 (A ) ® (s ); (B) ® (p); (C) ® (q); (D) ® (s )
14 (a) 28 (a) 42 (c) 56 (a, b) 70 (A ) ® (p ); (B) ® (r); (C) ® (s , q ); (D) ® (p )